Home

8720ES Service Guide

Contents

1. SOURCE R1 LOOP wes R1 LOOP OPT 085 089 STANDARD i 26 5 i r3 CHANNEL REFERENCE JM OPTION 105 Q er eee RECEIVER a i A13 FRACTIONAL N ANALOG est PORT POWER 5 dBm Q We 10MHz 4 TEST PORT 10 MHz ADJ PEE RP 10 MHz SINEWAVE 0 1V p p pepe 2 l eea 1 A14 FRACTIONAL N DIGITAL i aa EXTTRIG ee IR CHANNEL veo 7
2. SOURCE Cobos A26 HIGH STABILITY FREQUENCY REFERENCE RECEIVER OPTION 1D5 A13FRACTIONAL N ANALOG N 10 MHz i OPEN TEST PORT 2 i 10 MHz SINEWAVE 0 1V W74 io ce SMB TEE A4 A5 OR AG A14 FRACTIONAL N DIGITAL D ext ie EN VCOTUNE VCO er ac e A9 SOURCE CONTROL BOARD M 1 SOURCE SAMPLER l A65 A SAMPLER 1 v21 A10 DIGITAL IF 1 4 M A59 SOURCE INTERF
3. _ _ _ SOURCE 1A26 HIGH STABILITY FREQUENCY REFERENCE C 5 Q w72 OPTION 1D5 RECEIVER w9 I 13 FRACTIONAL N ANALOG 1 CW 1 GHz N MHz TEST PORT 5 dBm OPEN ON TEST PORT i uad rn rl C 10 MHz SINEWAVE 0 1V p p A14 FRACTIONAL N DIGITAL ie EXTTRIG 2 m Q J ET ee ee VCO I ee ee CONTROL E A9 SOURCE CONTROL BOARD ISAMPLER ge SOURCE INTERFACE 4 gt LN I 100 kHZ 10 DIGITAL IF 1 ap nme eee intan SWITCHES TO 4 4 BIAS A65 SAMPLER 1 I SOURCE CONTROL SWITCHES FROM A9 1 LSWP FROM A14 A59 F 30 MHz lt gt 10 ropa ies 4 511 i i 60 240 MHz CONTROL 4 MHZ FROM A12 AUX I 592 1 O CONTROL LOWBAND am
4. pro Y p EM z ee EN d 8722bES 8719 20ES OPTION 007 E 1 Cr iH mo 8722 OPTION 400 Service Guide 13 81 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Part Listings Hardware Front 8719ET 20ET 22ET 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Ref Agilent Models Option HP Agilent Description Desig Part Number 1 All All 0515 0382 3 Screw SMM 4 0 12 CWPNTX 2 All All 08753 00152 1 Disk Drive Bracket 2 All All 0505 1934 4 Screw SMM 2 5 6 CWPNTX 3 All All 08720 00077 1 Actuator Switch Arm 3 All All 08753 40015 1 AC Line Button 4 All All 0515 0430 2 Screw SMM 3 0 6 CWPNTX 5 All All 0515 2086 6 Screw SMM 4 0 7 PCFLTX 6 All All 0515 1400 1 Screw Smm 3 5 8 Pcfltx 7 08720 00093 1 Cable Mounting Bracket 8 All All 5022 1087 2 Nut Flange 9 8719ET All 5064 3949 1 Test Port Connector 8720ET Replacement Kit 9 8722ET All 5064 3950 Test Port Connector Replacement Kit 10 All All 0515 0430 Screw SMM 3 06
5. SOURCE 26 HIGH STABILITY OPTION 105 Ts RECEIVER i A13 FRACTIONAL N ANALOG amas 10 MHz ie P 5 TEST PORT M ss C 10 MHz SINEWAVE 0 1V EE 2 14 FRACTIONAL N DIGITAL i gt Text TRIG vic EL 0 6526 vco S 2 mm 9 SOURCE CONTROL BOARD 2 oe i A10 DIGITALIF 1 CONTROL 4 gt sawplen 65 59 SOURCE INTERFACE SOURCE CONTROL SWITCHES FROM A9 4 h p LSWP FROM A iA SWITCHES TO a F 30 MHz mm LSwP TOA10 TIMING A59 X I 60 TO 240 MH CONTROL AUX I A x 12 ND LOWBAND COUNT CH Ail 2 evo 5 2 i i BIAS OSCILLATORS n gt COUNTER CATE A52 PULSE W47 Dx MIAIDIS eS Se
6. SOURCE R1 LOOP R1 LOOP OPT 085 089 A26 HIGH STABILITY STANDARD FREQUENCY REFERENCE TO AS819 OPTION 1D5 reece ee i RECEIVER 3 13 FRACTIONAL N ANALOG 1 2 10MHz 4 TEST PORT 5 dBm 10 MHz ADJ OPEN ON TEST PORT u 1 cA 10 MHz SINEWAVE 0 1V 1 dE c A14 FRACTIONAL N DIGITAL 11721 46 ML 6 ee i id 1 as Mia cc ee EL OS es ae ae SOURCE CONTROL BOARD 4 I Z f f G a p AAnniCGITAI mm SAMPLER I A65A SAMPLER pe SOURCE NT RO SMI CHESRRONEAS FROM A12 API ADJ i ATOBIGIEAE IE ILSWP FROMA M4 de Pens F 30 MHz LSWP i PTOA Poo TIMING B S11 gt fe 2 CONTROL LOWBAND cll Eoo CONTROL AUX 1 512 J1 XS BIAS OSCILLATORS INPUTS P COUNTER SATE A52 PULSE s ss Ml Q er E M A D S e S
7. Ref Desig Options HP Agilent Qty Description Part Number 7 08720 60253 1 CPU Repair Kit A7 08720 69253 1 CPU Repair Kit Rebuilt Exchange A17 08720 60264 1 Motherboard A51 08720 60274 1 Bd Assy Test Set Interface A52 5086 7456 1 Assy Pulse Generator A52 5086 6456 1 Assy Pulse Generator Rebuilt Exchange A60 A61 5086 7484 2 Bias Tee A60 A61 5086 6484 2 Bias Tee Rebuilt Exchange A64 A65 A66 5086 7614 3 Assy Sampler A64 A65 A66 5086 6614 3 Assy Sampler Rebuilt E xchange A69 33326 60006 1 Attenuator 0 55 dB A741 08722 60098 1 Transfer Switch A98 08720 60121 1 Frequency Converter A98 08720 69121 1 Frequency Converter Rebuilt E xchange W22 08720 20033 1 A63 to A66 W25 08722 20056 1 A61 to 62 W26 08722 20057 1 A60 to A63 W27 08722 20078 1 A74to A60 W28 08722 20077 1 A74 to A61 W29 08722 20076 1 A69 to A74 W30 08720 20026 1 A62 to A65 W32 08722 20069 1 A58 to A69 W36 08720 20041 1 A72 to A64 W52 08722 20024 1 External Link 1 The A74 switch has 2 interconnect cables that are not shown Part number is 08722 20010 13 32 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Replaceable Parts 8719ES 20ES 22ES Replaceable Part Listings RF Network Analyzers 8722E S Option 007 A7 A64 W32 65 A69 W36 W29 A52
8. Ref Desig Options HP Agilent Qty Description Part Number 7 08720 60253 1 CPU Repair Kit A7 08720 69253 1 CPU Repair Kit Rebuilt Exchange A17 08720 60264 1 Motherboard A23 A24 5086 7589 2 R Channel Switch A23 A24 5086 6589 2 R channel Switches Rebuilt Exchange A51 08720 60274 1 Bd Assy Test Set Interface A52 5086 7456 1 Assy Pulse Generator A52 5086 6456 1 Assy Pulse Generator Rebuilt Exchange A60 A61 5086 7484 2 Bias Tee A60 A61 5086 6484 2 Bias Tee Rebuilt Exchange A64 A65 A66 5086 7614 3 Assy Sampler A64 A65 A66 5086 6614 3 Assy Sampler Rebuilt E xchange A69 33326 60006 1 Attenuator 0 55 dB A741 08722 60098 1 Transfer Switch A98 08720 60121 1 Frequency Converter A98 08720 69121 1 Frequency Converter Rebuilt E xchange W18 08722 20058 1 Front Panel R Channel IN to A24 W20 08720 20281 1 A24 to A64 W22 08720 20033 1 A63 to A66 W25 08722 20056 1 A61 to 62 W26 08722 20057 1 A60 to A63 W27 08722 20078 1 A74 to A60 W28 08722 20277 1 74 to A61 W29 08722 20076 1 A69 to A74 W30 08720 20026 1 A62 to A65 W32 08722 20069 1 A58 to A69 W50 08720 20278 1 A72 to A23 W51 08720 20279 1 A23 to A24 W52 08722 20024 1 External Link W54 08722 20132 1 A23 to Front Panel R Channel OUT 1 The A74 switch has 2 interconnect cables that are not shown Part number is 08722 20010 13 40 Service Guide 8719 20 22
9. ANALOG M T CAL 777757 INSTRUMENT I 55 poem m ma i LO MED HI I RECOVERY I SAMPLE Tei usa i SAMPLER a ahaa 1 OFFSET I RATE IS A OUT o 6 1 17 I KOC I LAM SLOPE 6 e 2 4 2 1 AO Q 33 55 s ZO 1 nee 1 a 1 W36 24 I 1 i iii 20 x W48 We peata 0 LL I TE NU DA see 2 7 SWITCH Jo OOH Ss u wi lt I IN r I 16 PHASE CODE EMNIGE Si IFRAKHZ 9 2 i k in FM YIG1 A68 lt 0 e PASE Y Ts 1 r LA20 I J3 l1 I PLL OUT TO i TO A64J2 40 MHz al aO SGH MAIN YIG2 W82 iA29 MN 2 vi PHASE LOCK BD A aw na ede 39a n ee ee em PRECISION CONTROL ise Sa id Ag 98 10 D o o S I gy G w1 1 51 I REFERENCE CONTR ve PRETUNE i A66 B SAMPLER E PL REF 1 MHz 4 SWPERR 1 1 1 30 MHz I Ay Ay PRETUNE Q W6 E E E hm e n E A53 gt EEA AS rid 1 MIXER SRC TUNE 6 12 REFERENCE 117 PL REF 2 SEEDS READ an Y 414
10. START 050 666 GHz STOP 40 050 666 000 GHz 6 Press Refl REV S22 B R 7 Connect a short to PORT 2 and repeat steps 2 4 and 5 Service Guide 4 25 Start Troubleshooting Here 8719ET 20ET 22ET Accessories Check 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Accessories Check If the analyzer has passed all of the above checks but is still making incorrect measurements suspect the system accessories Accessories such as RF or interconnect cables calibration or verification kit devices and adapters can all induce system problems Reconfigure the system as it is normally used and reconfirm the problem Continue with Chapter 9 Accessories Troubleshooting 4 26 Service Guide 8719ES 8720ES OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM FOR STANDARD OPT 007 012 085 089 105
11. E TESTA PR Eq REUS 10 21 Analg Bus NOJOS 59064 pd TERNS PES TX perma d OOS 10 22 iors PURE RAN CERE LER PAUPERI PARET REPRE 10 29 Firmware Revision 3 d 10 30 GPIB Service Mnemonic Definitions u u RCB dees RR 10 31 INVOKING Tests sva esq pr OP RE ERG Re RP ET 10 31 Analog Bus COIS REP Pu pee dor PERRO EROR paq 10 32 Service Related Error Messages in Alphabetical Order 10 33 11 Error Terms Inrormation on TB IS Chapter AERE 11 2 Error Terms Also Serve a Diagnostic Purpose 11 3 Measurement Calibration Procedure 11 4 Error T ir MSOC dapi dco P Oe ce ae e HE oe puspa ed ed Pb eds 11 5 If Error Terms Seem Worse than Typical Values 11 7 Uncorrected PerTOrmiBlicE yy ew edt equ quedes qup imis 11 8 Error PAPER ERE ee see ERROR RH oos d 11 10 EDF and 11 11 Source ESF and ESR PIRE ak EE 11 12 PBerlection TAKING ERE and E
12. EE 5 18 Fan Spens A 5 18 Check the Fai VOILBOES 2 254855548205 eg x oue PRED HN oe e OCA d dae Ice 5 18 short Bel PS COMING 53d 9 5 18 ritermttent PEODIBITIS aca dote qaa X equo P pode dn dep dE RR d PR Eg 5 19 Power Supply Block CAE ees ERROR AX OR ERR a ON 5 21 6 Digital Control Troubleshooting en TRUS Chater wr ac drap IRE KOI e PEDE Pac da Pe dee eS HOSES 6 2 Assembly Replacement Sequence 6 3 CPU Board As TrOUDLeSDOD Ig a bua XXE d ERO HER eR HE Ue dh Acra Th AC TEE d E XY qa qaa 6 4 A SWIG sd 6 4 Checking the CPU A7 Red LED Patterns 6 5 Display Troubleshooting ALBAIS iu REREd E RAT 6 7 Evaluating rour 5529 yuya a 9544 6 7 Red Green or Blue Pixels Specifications 6 7 Dark 42455555248 5 554 ded tedsdedbktessete DER RIE 6 8 New Ons RINGS vos Spa d heb e TE LIRE PIRE RC REI E Tee 6 8 Troubleshooting the GSP A1
13. The measurement uncertainty is based on equipment specified in Service Test Equipment page 1 3 Service Guide 2 47 System Verification and Performance Tests 8719ET 20ET 22ET Performance Test Record 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Source Linearity Power Level and Model Type Minimum Results Mamana Specification Specification Uncertainty Min Max Py 8719ET ES 8720ET ES 8719ES Opt 007 8720ES Opt 007 0 35 dB 0 35 dB 0 03 dB 8722ET ES 8722ES Opt 007 Freq range 0 05 20 GHz 0 35 dB 0 35 dB 0 03 dB 8722ET ES 8722ES Opt 007 Freq range 20 40 GHz 0 60 dB 0 60 dB 0 03 dB P2 8719ET ES 8720E T ES 8719ES Opt 007 8720E S Opt 007 0 60 dB 0 60 dB 0 04 dB 8722ET ES 8722 5 Opt 007 Freq range 0 05 40 GHz 0 60 dB 0 60 dB 0 04 dB Pa 8719ET ES 8720ET ES 8719ES Opt 007 8720ES Opt 007 0 35 dB 0 35 dB 0 03 dB 8722ET ES 8722ES Opt 007 Freq range 0 05 20 GHz 0 35 dB 0 35 dB 0 03 dB 8719ET ES 8720ET ES 8719ES Opt 007 8720ES Opt 007 1 0 dB 1 0 dB 0 04 dB 2 48 Service Guide 8719 20 22 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers System Verification and Performance Tests Performance Test Record Power Settings 8719ES 8719ET 8720ET 8722ES 8722ET 8720ES 8719ES Option 007 8722ES Option 007 8720ES Option 007
14. START 050 GHz STOP 46 456 000 GHz 12 Reference 13 Ext Ref Rear panel external reference input This node is used to detect an external reference voltage If an external reference ti mebase is used the voltage level should be about 0 6 V If an external reference is not used the voltage level should be about 0 87 V 14 100 kHz 100 kHz reference frequency Counter ON analog bus Reading 0 100 MHz This node counts the A12 100 kHz reference signal that is used on A13 the fractional N analog assembly as a reference frequency for the phase detector 15 VCO Tune A12 VCO tuning voltage This node displays the tuning voltage for the A12 VCO It is used in the reference assembly VCO tune adjustment 10 26 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Service Key Menus and Error Messages 8719ES 20ES 22ES Analog Bus on OFF RF Network Analyzers 16 2nd LO 2nd converter reference Counter ON analog bus Reading 9 996 MHz This node counts the 2nd L O used by the 2nd converter assemblies to produce the 2nd IF of 4 kHz 17 PL Ref Phase lock reference Counter ON analog bus Reading 1 MHz This node counts the reference signal used by the phase comparator circuit on the A11 phase lock assembly 18 VCXO Tune 40 MHz VCXO tuning voltage This node displays the voltage used to fine tune the A12 reference VCXO to 40 MHz You should see a flat line at some voltage level the actual volta
15. 7 20 Band Related Probes ARA 7 22 Broadband Power Proa b aw OIX Xa 7 26 ALCS onal Separation Check acca ace a 7 26 Step Attenuator AGH CHEK sag 7 27 8 Receiver Troubleshooting formation on This Chapter ss iL Hee v RR 8 2 Assembly Replacement Sequence hh 8 2 All Paths Look OR AIRE CR RE wee 8 3 MALLOC IEE air SRG HIRE 8 3 Meee Sete hee UE RETE 8 3 AL Least One Signal LOOKS Normal ced 55 eod aad 8 4 Directional Coupler Chage u care elon tee hemi 8 7 A and B Sampler Check by 0000 bx e a Re bERU 8 8 Sampler Cher A HE EE 8 9 CHE ep Rd der d 8 9 9 Accessories Troubleshooting information on This Chapter bad wee 9 2 inspect and Gauge Connie is e v Rhee 9 3
16. 3 44 2555558 kasqa 3 46 Raw Offset Correction CONSA 3 48 Raw Offset for the R Channel 5 5 3 49 Raw Offset for the and B Channels ES Models 3 51 Raw Offsets for the A and B Channels ET Models 3 54 Sampler Calibration Correction Constants Test 51 3 58 4 Start Troubleshooting Here Information on This Chapter ai a pad a bed edd e Reo RR eor Gr s REOR 4 2 Assembly Replacement Sequence 4 3 Contents vi Contents Having Your Analyzer Serviced qaqas 4 4 Sre T JI SLOPSSYSDDDS 4 406008 ene ees odes d POE REG RR EXON Y EREXIT DORE 4 5 lratiatetheAnalyzer SelT TOSl serene sera ee 4 5 Sle Operabor SNS ous dev beeen eR eda ahead e bed p dx 4 7 DESCEIDUUT 2555 CIE REIP EE TRIPS E 4 7 Procedure to Perform Operators Check seas ag gc i a xar RR 665 quwaq E 4 8 ln DUN CR RR RR ENG RR EA ERR ERE ER tea 4 9 Ste 3 GPIB Systems auae beware AC ERG qa be do Ded e EC an b a 4 10 ITO SngsPloterorPEDDF
17. Ref Desig Options HP Agilent Qty Description Part Number 7 08720 60253 1 CPU Repair Kit A7 08720 69253 1 CPU Repair Kit Rebuilt Exchange A17 08720 60264 1 Motherboard A28 11742A 1 Blocking Capacitor A51 08720 60274 1 Bd Assy Test Set Interface A52 5086 7456 1 Assy Pulse Generator A52 5086 6456 1 Assy Pulse Generator Rebuilt E xchange A64 A65 A66 5086 7614 3 Assy Sampler A64 A65 A66 5086 6614 3 Assy Sampler Rebuilt Exchange A69 33321 60050 1 Attenuator 0 55 dB A98 08720 60121 1 Frequency Converter A98 08720 69121 1 Frequency Converter Rebuilt E xchange W30 08720 20026 1 A62 to 65 W32 08720 20021 1 A58 to A69 W74 08720 20266 1 W72 to A64 W78 08720 20255 1 A21 to A66 W90 08720 20256 1 A28to A62 13 58 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Replaceable Parts 8719ES 20ES 22ES Replaceable Part Listings RF Network Analyzers 8719ET and 8720ET Option 004 mm A69 A28 W930 W78 51 17 W74 66 W78 sb579e Service Guide 13 59 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Part Listings 8719ET 20ET 22ET 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Bottom Assemblies and Cables 8722E T Standard Ref Desig Options HP Agilent Qty Description Part Number 7 08720 60253 1 CPU Repair Kit A7 08720 69253 1
18. bud LLL LIT 596015 Service Guide 6 11 Digital Control Troubleshooting 8719ET 20ET 22ET Troubleshooting the GSP A19 and the Display A18 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Run Display Tests 59 61 1 Press the following PRESET FACTORY SERVICE MENU TESTS DISPLAY TESTS EXECUTE TEST CONTINUE 2 If the analyzer passes the test the Test number description and PASS is displayed 3 Press x and perform display tests 59 through 61 substitute the next test number where was used Watch for the analyzer display and front panel LEDs to flash Ifthe analyzer fails any of the tests 59 through 61 replace the A19 assembly If all of the following is true replace the A18 display assembly CPU passes the LED test GSP passes all of the internal display tests 59 through 61 Power supply checks out 6 12 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Digital Control Troubleshooting 8719ES 20ES 22ES Front Panel Troubleshooting A1 A2 RF Network Analyzers Front Panel Troubleshooting A1 A2 Check Front Panel LEDs After Preset 1 Press on the analyzer 2 Observe that all front panel LEDs turn on and within five seconds after releasing Preset all but the CHAN and TRANS FWD and REFL FWD LEDsturn off fall thefront panel LEDs either stay on or off there is a control problem between the CPU board 7 and
19. OUTSIDE O O 4 0 o o sb658d Service Guide 14 33 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures 8719ET 20ET 22ET Removing the B1 Fan Assembly 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Removing the B1 Fan Assembly Tools Required 2 5 mm hex key driver T 10 TORX screwdriver T 15 TORX screwdriver ESD electrostatic discharge grounding wrist strap Removal 1 Remove the rear panel refer to Removing the Rear Panel Assembly on page 14 14 2 Remove the 4 screws item 1 that securethe fan and fan cover to therear panel Replacement 1 Reverse the order of the removal procedure NOTE The fan should be installed so that the direction of the air flow is away from the instrument There is an arrow on the fan chassis indicating the air flow direction 4 PLACES sb687d 14 34 Service Guide 8719 20 22 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Post Repair Procedures Assembly Replacement and Post R epair Procedures Post Repair Procedures After the replacement of an assembly you must perform the service procedures listed in Table 14 1 NOTE Table 14 1 Related Service Procedures Perform the procedures in the order that they are listed in the table Replaced Assembly Adjustments Correction Verification Constants CC A1 Front Panel Keyboard Non
20. sb55e Service Guide 14 9 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures 8719ET 20ET 22ET Removing the Front Panel Interface and Keypad Assemblies 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Removing the Front Panel Interface and Keypad Assemblies Tools Required T 10 TORX screwdriver T 15 TORX screwdriver small slot screwdriver ESD electrostatic discharge grounding wrist strap 5 16 inch open end torque wrench set to 10 in Ib Removal 1 Remove the front panel assembly from the analyzer refer to Removing the Front Panel Assembly on page 14 8 2 Remove the 4 ribbon cables item 1 through 4 from the front panel interface board 3 Remove the 4 screws item 5 that attach the interface board NOTE If the front panel interface board is to be replaced install the new board at this point and reverse steps 1 through 3 to complete the process 4 Remove the 7 screws item 6 from the Al keypad board 5 Remove the 3 screws item 7 from the display cover 6 Lift the display assembly slightly and slide out the Al keypad board Replacement 1 Reverse the order of the removal procedure 14 10 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures 8719ES 20ES 22ES Removing the Front Panel Interface and Keypad Assemblies RF Network Analyzers 6 7 Places OO 288 5 7 4 Places 3 Places s
21. Error Number The battery protection of the non volatile CM OS memory has failed The CMOS 183 memory has been cleared Refer to Chapter 14 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures for battery replacement instructions See the Preset State and M emory Allocation chapter in the analyzer s reference guide for more information about the CM OS memory BATTERY LOW STORE SAVE REGS TO DISK Error Number The battery protection of the non volatile CM OS memory is in danger of failing 184 If this occurs all of the instrument state registers stored in CMOS memory will be lost Save these states to a disk and refer to Chapter 14 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures for battery replacement instructions See the Preset State and Memory Allocation chapter in the analyzer s reference guide for more information about the CM OS memory Service Guide 10 33 Service Key Menus and Error Messages 8719ET 20ET 22ET Service Related Error Messages in Alphabetical Order 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers BLOCK INPUT Error Number 34 ERROR The analyzer did not receive a complete data transmission This is usually caused by an interruption of the bus transaction Clear by pressing the key or aborting the I O process at the controller BLOCK INPUT Error Number 35 LENGTH ERROR Thelength of the header received by the analyzer did not agree with the size of t
22. SOURCE r AQ SOURCE CONTROL BOARD e LE in AT0DIGITALIF 4 p SAMPLER Aso SOURCE INTERFACE eS CONTROL SWITCHES FROM A9 EN j mu e E le LSWP FROM SWITCHES ERAS I i Q w33 Lswp tomato PROMAT APIADJ TNNG 511 I TLAN ced CONTROL AUX 1 DO 512 Li 6 LOWBAND BOs 240 MHz SUME 4 4 MHz FROM A12 INPUT I TAA G J5 5z EEEE A jj 1 aan 91 oa uu 16 I EO 0 s 25256 wa LI INSTRUMENT 64 R1 SAMPLER 2 BUFFER 75 ATTN 123 ALC SAMPLE 511 I F 30 MHz I I SWITCH I LO MED HI I STEP IS P18 17 I 521 I AMP 1 eee O O N RECOVERY 16kHz_ o ea Fasz 1 E us 2 O J3 lt A li x LAM SLOPE 0 0 0 T i I Ix ES wm NT mE d DIODE p 1 9 ag sag l1 dis Ais i L A54 162 i A 58 1 i n a Per Tr 0 2 m wt L _BLANKINGADY Le 1 pude ma ERROREM RETIRER ERRORES RN i w gt rout TP16 E SWITCH i Pawaspa 1 gt TERMES A11 PHASE LOCK 2 was A25 I sea emt 2 FM YI
23. fag 3 21 Adjusting the High Band Power B722ET ES ica a AC RE a ac AC iE RR 3 21 Fine Tuning Che 3 22 Power Linearity AQUSUNENE srecni RNC EREFERERIAHRERCPEEAE RS EX d Shee RE 3 24 POS 5 D y QUEDA Lead PC UE Ee Fg cd T EC ded Eo d eee 3 24 Blanking Adjustment Test Sd GE Rd Re 3 30 Preparing the 07554524655 e eoi ee PE e EO E ee P c doe Q bia 3 30 nitielize EEPROPIS Test 53 Td RES 3 32 EEPROM Backup DISK PTOCSHUFE ax er Ad dvd EX RO Rd EGER GR X qum 3 33 Correction Constants Retrieval Procedure 3 35 Lond ng Pea X Pe bie Ceo Med wi bete xe iE 3 36 Loading FirmwarenitoamExisund CPU 3 36 UI CH dox ages ep 3 36 Loading Firmware intoa New CPU 3 37 Reference Assembly VCO Tune 5 3 39 Frequency Accuracy 23255455581 dd beer deed ERR dees 3 41 Iob DIU a cea Eee DELON 3 43 API Spur Avoidance and 100 kHz FM Sideband Adjustment 3 44 Sideband Adjustment 100 kHz 5 lt
24. 1 The A74 switch has 2 interconnect cables that are not shown Part number is 08722 20010 8722E S Option 089 007 012 A7 A17 w20 pamain W32 A51 A64 A69 A65 wig w29 54 74 w16 A61 52 w28 w27 A98 A60 w14 Service Guide w25 A24 51 A23 W15 W50 A66 W17 W52 3 Places sb572e 13 45 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Part Listings 8719ET 20ET 22ET 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Bottom Assemblies and Cables for 8722E S Option 085 085 089 Ref Desig Options HP Agilent Qty Description Part Number A7 08720 60253 1 CPU Repair Kit A7 08720 69253 1 CPU Repair Kit Rebuilt Exchange A17 08720 60264 1 Motherboard A23 A24 5086 7589 2 R channel Switches A23 A24 5086 6589 2 R channel Switches Rebuilt E xchange A51 08720 60274 1 Bd Assy Test Set Interface A52 5086 7456 1 Assy Pulse Generator A52 5086 6456 1 Assy Pulse Generator Rebuilt E xchange A64 A65 A66 5086 7614 3 Assy Sampler A64 A65 A66 5086 6614 3 Assy Sampler Rebuilt E xchange A69 A70 A71 33326 60006 3 Attenuator 0 55 dB A741 08722 60098 1 Transfer Switch A98 08720 60121 1 Frequency Converter A98 08720 69121 1 Frequency Converter Rebuilt E xchange W14 08722 20102 1 A63to Front Panel B Out W17 08722 20102 1 A62 to Front Panel A Out W18 08722 20058 1 Front Panel R Channel IN to A24
25. Ref Options HP AgilentPart Qty Description Desig Number 1 All All 8120 6407 1 W85 A17 toA16 2 All All 85047 60005 2 Assy fuse 3 ET All 08753 60255 1 Bd Assy rear Panel Interface A16 Models 3 ES All 08720 60138 1 Bd Assy rear Panel Interface 16 Models 4 All All 08753 60026 1 Assy external Reference Cable 5 All All 08415 60036 1 Assy fan 6 All All 1251 2942 4 Fastener Conn RP Lock 7 All All 2190 0034 2 Washer Lk 1941D10 7 All All 0380 0644 2 Nut Stdf 327L 6 32 8 All All 1251 2942 4 Fastener Conn RP Lock 9 All All 0515 2040 4 Screw SMM 3 5 16 PCFLTX 10 All All 0515 0372 10 Screw SMM 3 08 CWPNTX 11 All All 08720 00071 1 Rear Panel 12 All All 3160 0281 1 Fan Guard 15 All All 2190 0102 1 washer 47210 15 All All 2950 0035 8 Nut Hex 15 32 32 16 All All 0400 0271 8 Grommet SN 5 515l D 17 All All 2110 0047 2 Fuse 17 All All 1400 0112 2 Fuse Cap 13 74 Service Guide 8719 20 22 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Rear Panel Assembly Replaceable Parts Replaceable Part Listings 3 2 15 8 PLACES eee i __ J S S 72 O gt gt lt eh 4 Y VN 2 PLACES en 92800800908 O0 6 0 6 0 6 O 6 6 Service Guide PART OF FAN sb6102d 13 75 Replaceable Parts Replaceab
26. dicic Q Frer w76 Lb2 l A69 STEP ATTN 1 A28 DC BLOCK Q A8 POST REGULATOR W DIGITAL BUS w78 3 RESTART z m REAR PANEL 2 FRONT PANEL PROCESSOR _ li Ei 2 4 isadi i 2 PEND TESTSET 0 TEST SET I 0 1 PANEL 1 ae Loe s dede AW TRANSMISSION INTERFACE INTERFACE I I I v Voltage Node a I i Aat OPTION 004 mm gt SWITCHING gt EXT BIAS TOA17 1 21 i ae i gt POWER REGULATORS gt FXT REF 1 KEYBOARD 14 PANEL MICROCIRCUIT POWER y AUXINPUT Ne AND L TOA10 eren PROCESSOR REGULATOR INSTRUMENT POWER EXT TRIG i I gt gt y EXT AM TO A17 1 1 TEST SEQ 4 1 FROMA9 LIMIT TEST 4 i I A Ay o MEAS RESTART TOA17 I sss m I A 9 GREEN LEDS 1 Y GREEN LED RED LED NORMALE ON STEADY a i RN 772722222222222222222222222222222222222272222222277 i I C DINKYBD RS 232 PARALLEL GPIB az JINTERCONNECT INTERCONNECT INTERCONNECT INTERCONNECT wee NEUEN re INTERFACE 1 A19 GSP 18 DISPLAY 5 VD I i TFT I DIN
27. source switch A58 M A D S A55YIG1 A25 switch 3 Since the analyzer phase locked in lowband all of the phase lock circuitry is working Look for low power as a cause of phase lock errors 4 Check power at 25 3 fthe power at 25 3isless than 1 dBm check the insertion loss of A5 source switch A6 source switch A25 and the associated cables fthe power at 5 3 is greater than 1 dBm the problem is probably above 5 GHz Proceed with the next steps Service Guide 7 23 Source Troubleshooting 8719ET 20ET 22ET Band Related Problems 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers 5 Check all RF cabling and connections If any of the cables or connectors are bad have them repaired or replaced e Ifthe cables and connectors good replace the A55 YIG 1 If mid band problems still persist then replace the A58 M A D S High Band Problems 8719E T E S and 8720ET E S Only 1 Press the following SERVICE MENU SERVICE MODES SRC ADJUST MENU DAC NUM HIGH BAND SRC tune in the high band is capable of tuning the instrument from about 2 4 to 5 GH2 Loss of lock in high band only may likely be dueto a bad cable or connection 2 Thefollowing components may be at fault Refer tothe overall block diagram at the end of Chapter 4 for information A5 source switch source switch 58 M A D S A55 YIG 1 3 Sincethe analyzer phase locked in lowband all of the phase lock circuitry is working Look for low
28. 012 ma 1 ATTN are 5221 A LEGEND 2 mm I ws2 TR m MEASURE aes 511521 A15 PREREGULATOR A8 POST REGULATOR E REARPANEL RESTART _ FRONT Q oe v 5VD TEST SET I 0 I TEST SET I 0 FRONT PANEL i I This indicates Analog Bus node location CANES DE PORT 2 NON OPT 012 INTERFACE 7 INTERFACE I eee 2 1 P 25V Sh ge gt EXT BIAS 17 A21 dp Ed uM 18V REGULATORS FAN POWER gt gt TOA12 KEYBOARD I Q FRONT I POWER SUPPLY 8V q MICROCIRCUIT POWER y AUX INPUT vea UE PROCESSOR hi 8V INSTRUMENT POWER i REGULATOR gt gt m 4 17 i l TEST SEQ amp i LIMIT TEST 4 s i i R1 LOOP OPT 400 089 MEAS RESTART TOAN I I SAM XL S Mp E vitu aptis NORMAL ON STEADY m NON OPT 089 quee 1 i A72 BUFFER f Z TI 4 _our i AMP v me DINKYBD RS 232 PARALLEL oi Q Q Q INTERCONNECT INTERCONNECT INTERCONNECT INTERCONNECT W99 i W55 w52 1 W36 INTERFACE TA PS O LO RE 1 A19 GSP A18 DISPLAY M 1 1 i 0 I
29. MEAS RESTART 17 I I QU TN M 9 GREEN LEDS I i 2 1 EZ N ILA gd m l REEN LED RED LED NORMAL ON STEADY 1 Oe eee uin i E CLE rm a I Aaz t Xe t XZ A65J2 SWITCH COUPLER I __ _ 1 74 MECHANICAL ea Pa w17 w52 weo 1 09508 4 wes E 222222222227 2722227 ZZZ ZZZZZZZZZZ TRANSFER e e 1 X 43 sosa 69 STEP SWITCH e EA 2 DINKYBD RS 232 PARALLEL GPIB 2 i ATTN T N I 1 wa ws2l l wes I2 2 2 JINTERCONNECT INTERCONNECT INTERCONNECT INTERCONNECT w99 ERONI mc r bu r J2 A51 TEST SET 1 2 2 0 eS E I r WA J3 INTERFACE A7 CPU 1 A l mu Been A63 DIRECTIONAL zl 7 DIN PORT RS 232 PORT PARALLEL PORT GPIB PORT a A22 DISPLAY 1 i ES q1 DA SOURCES i J2 gu pas I i INTERFACE INTERFACE STEP 7 INTERFACE 1 56 LOWER eH Q eH gt sm 6642 ye eee Ga DIGITAL VIDEO LCD OU gt TO A51 ws l we2 Wi4 ws2 wes 0 55dB
30. DISPLAY DIGITAL VIDEO CONTROL TRANSFER SWITCH 1 I i I n LOWER FT PANEL EEPROM DISK ues i Se s DRIVE 1 INTERFACE BIAS BIAS TEE S 1 I LIGHT i MANGRO i m l DIGITAL SIGNAL m P PROCESSOR 4 FLASH RAM I Q w82 I CAUTION ae 1 5KV AC STARTUP r 4 680V AC STEADY STATE I VGA A20 MAIN 535 INTERCONNECT __ INVERTER ASSY a 2 gt GER RED LED CONTROL REFRESH NORMAL FLASHING I 7X M TO A10 sb512e TO A51 8722ET OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM FOR STANDARD OPT 004 TOA12 11 5 Power Supply Troubleshooting Power Supply Troubleshooting 8719ET 20ET 22ET Information on This Chapter 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Information on This Chapter Use this procedure only if you have read Chapter 4 Start Troubleshooting Here Follow the procedures in the order given unless An error message appears on the display refer to Error Messages on page 5 17 Thefan is not working refer to Fan Troubleshooting on page 5 18 The power supply group assemblies consist of the following Post regulator A8 Preregulator A15 5 2 Service Guide 8719 20 22
31. d PORT T 62 DIRECTIONAL LA PA LA 0 15 VCO TUNE me COUPLER I Se Sel w17 11 ws2 11 wie 16 2nd LO 9 996 MHz i l A74 SOLID STATE 1 1 m 69 TRANSFER SWITCH I 21 E X penne 39 984 MHz i ATTN i abo cw Deceme 4 gt I A61BIASTEE l won J o LLL OPT 012 0 55dB l risum elo T f E eus 1 1 X Ca EEA 56 LOWER ind i A15 PREREGULATOR E m RESTART BIGINALBUS FRONT gt TOA51 Tine U Q i VATS REAR PANED eec 2 PANEL PROCESSOR PANEL en i 1 Ls re STANDARD 8 TEST SET I0 A1 FRONT PANEL 512 822 1 wont MG een ee F rom INTERFACE a INTERFACE il v Voltage Node a ea ee i EXT BIAS I SWITCHING POWER EXT REF P p d I 21 k FRONT SUPPLY AUX INPUT KEYBOARD 1 wes AND gt MICROCIRCUIT POWER 52 12 TO A10 pi PROCESSOR REGULATOR INSTRUMENT POWER gt 4 gt toe pes J SIGNAL SEPARATION OPT 085 0 0 00 00 i TEST SEQ X aa A62 DIRECTIONAL A70 STEP LIMIT TEST i I COUPLER i i ATTN
32. Description 3 5 mm 7 mm Type N Calibration Kit 85052B C D 85050B C D 85054B D Verification Kit 85053B 85051B 85055A Cables 85131C D E F 85132C D E F 85131C D E F 3 5 mm85130C 3 5 mm to Type N adaptor set Table 2 2 8722ET E S Supported System Configurations Description 2 4 mm 3 5 mm Calibration Kit 85056A D 85052B C D Verification Kit 85057B 85053B Cables 85133C D E F 85131C D E F 2 18 Service Guide 8719 20 22 System Verification and Performance Tests 8719ES 20ES 22ES System Verification RF Network Analyzers Cable Substitution Thetest port cables specified for the network analyzer system have been characterized for connector repeatability magnitude and phase stability with flexing return loss insertion loss and aging rate Since test port cable performance is a significant contributor to the system performance cables of lower performance will increase the uncertainty of your measurement Refer to the plots in the cable tests earlier in this chapter that show the performance of good cables It is highly recommended that the test port cables to be regularly tested If the system verification is performed with non HP Agilent cables and fails but is then repeated with HP Agilent cables and passes the non H P Agilent cables are at fault It must be documented in the comments area of the performance verification printout that non H P Agilent cables were used in
33. TRANSMISSN LIN MAG IF BW Service Guide 2 43 System Verification and Performance Tests 8719ET 20ET 22ET Performance Tests 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Calibration 6 Connect a thru RF cable between PORT 1 and PORT 2 on ES models REFLECTION and TRANSMISSION ET models 7 To start the measurement calibration press the following CALIBRATE MENU RESPONSE amp ISOL N RESPONSE THRU 8 Remove the thru and connect 509 terminations to PORT 1 and PORT 2 on ES models REFLECTION port and TRANSMISSION port on ET models 9 continue the measurement calibration press the following AVERAGING FACTOR AVERAGING ON RESUME CAL SEQUENCE ISOL N STD NOTE This measurement takes several minutes 10 When the analyzer beeps or the message PRESS DONE appears on the display press the following Hj rr Z SHED WITH STD s DONE RESP ISOL N CAL Measurement and Data Collection 11 Press TRIGGER MENU SINGLE 12 When the single sweep has been taken press the following AUTOSCALE MARKER MODE MENU MARKERS DISCRETE MARKER 1 MARKER2 50 000101 MARKER MODE MENU MKR STATS ON MENU 1 13 Read the mean value and standard deviation from the analyzer display Calculate the dynamic using the following equation 20 x log 3 x Standard Deviation M ean Value Record the calculated value in the S21 Transmission column of the Dynamic Range
34. To measure the signal at the B channel on ET models press INPUT PORTS B on ES models press TESTPORT 1 or TESTPORT 2 depending on which side of the transfer switch is being tested Compare the responses to the examples in Figure 8 1 on page 8 6 and the nominal power levels in Table 8 2 on page 8 5 Expect the nominal power level to bea little higher due to the reduced loss created by the bypassed components e If thetraceis similar with the exception of the coupler roll off below 500 M Hz to Figure 8 1 on page 8 6 the sampler is good Therefore the coupler step attenuator or bias tee is lossy Test the path by substituting the components one at a time and comparing the response to Figure 8 1 on page 8 6 or measure the insertion loss directly Minor power variations are probably due to the flexible cable and are of no concern e If thetrace is abnormally low the coupler is good and the sampler is at fault Troubleshoot the associated sampler by referring to Sampler Voltage Check on page 8 9 Service Guide 8 7 Receiver Troubleshooting 8719ET 20ET 22ET At Least One Signal Path Looks Normal 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers A and B Sampler Check by Substitution 1 For the 8719ET ES and 8720ET ES set the output power to 10 dBm by pressing Gd 2 For the 8722ET ES set the output power to 15 dBm by pressing xi For ES Models set up the following 3 Connect an RF flexible cable from the output of thetransfe
35. 7 08720 60253 1 CPU Repair Kit A7 08720 69253 1 CPU Repair Kit Rebuilt Exchange A17 08720 60264 1 Motherboard A51 08720 60274 1 Bd Assy Test Set Interface A52 5086 7456 1 Assy Pulse Generator A52 5086 6456 1 Assy Pulse Generator Rebuilt E xchange A60 A61 5086 7484 2 Bias Tee A60 A61 5086 6484 2 Bias Tee Rebuilt E xchange A64 A65 A66 5086 7614 3 Assy Sampler A64 A65 A66 5086 6614 3 Assy Sampler Rebuilt E xchange A69 33326 60006 1 Attenuator 0 55 dB A74 85331 60033 1 Transfer Switch A98 08720 60121 1 Frequency Converter A98 08720 69121 1 Frequency Converter Rebuilt E xchange W22 08720 20033 1 A63 to A66 W25 08722 20056 1 A61 to A62 W26 08722 20057 1 A60 to A63 W27 08722 20074 1 A74 to A60 W28 08722 20073 1 A74 to A61 W29 08722 20072 1 A69 to A74 W30 08720 20026 1 A62 to A65 W32 08722 20069 1 A58to A69 W36 08720 20041 1 A72 to A64 W52 08722 20024 1 External Link 13 30 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Replaceable Parts 8719ES 20ES 22ES Replaceable Part Listings RF Network Analyzers 8722 5 Standard 7 W32 4 A69 W29 A65 W36 A74 A52 A61 W27 98 w52 A60 w25 W26 A51 A17 W22 A66 sb565e Service Guide 13 31 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Part Listings 8719ET 20ET 22ET 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Bottom Assemblies and Cables for 8722E S Option 007
36. 74 W30 W28 II 61 9 98 W27 W52 A60 W25 W26 51 17 W22 A66 sb566e Service Guide 13 33 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Part Listings 8719ET 20ET 22ET 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Bottom Assemblies and Cables for 8722E S Option 012 Ref Desig Options HP Agilent Qty Description Part Number A7 08720 60253 1 CPU Repair Kit A7 08720 69253 1 CPU Repair Kit Rebuilt E xchange E xchange 17 08720 60264 1 Motherboard A51 08720 60274 1 BdAssy Test Set Interface A52 5086 7456 1 Assy Pulse Generator A52 5086 6456 1 Assy Pulse Generator Rebuilt E xchange A60 A61 5086 7484 2 Bias Tee A60 A61 5086 6484 2 Bias Tee Rebuilt E xchange A64 A65 A66 5086 7614 3 Assy Sampler A64 A65 A66 5086 6614 3 Assy Sampler Rebuilt E xchange A69 33326 60006 1 Attenuator 0 55 dB 74 85331 60033 1 Transfer Switch 98 08720 60121 1 Frequency Converter A98 08720 69121 1 Frequency Converter Rebuilt E xchange W14 08722 20102 1 A63toFront Panel B Out W15 08722 20079 1 Front Panel B In to A66 W16 08722 20081 1 Front Panel A In to A65 W17 08722 20102 1 A62 to Front Panel A Out W25 08722 20056 1 A61to A62 W26 08722 20057 1 A60to A63 W27 08722 20074 1 A74toA60 W28 08722 20073 1 A74toA61 W29 08722 20072 1 A69toA74 W32 08722 20069 1 A58toA69 W36 08720 20041 1
37. ATTENUATOR sb591e A58 M A D S Modulator Amplifier Detector Splitter The M A D S microcircuit accomplishes four separate functions The modulator controls the output power proportionally to the signal produced by the ALC circuit on the source interface board The amplifier provides up to 30 dB of amplification For the maximum reflection output power levels refer to Table 12 1 on page 12 4 The detector outputs a voltage that is proportional tothe RF power out of the amplifier This voltage is used by the ALC circuit on the source interface board The source divides the source signal into two parts One signal is routed directly to the 64 R sampler and the other is sent through the A69 step attenuator ET Option 004 models only A23 dc block 8719ET Option 004 and 8720ET Option 004 only A62 directional coupler and out tothe REFLECTION port The TRANSMISSION port is routed through the A21 fixed attenuator pad and then to the A66 B sampler The M A D S microcircuit is controlled by the ALC circuitry on the source interface board The CPU provides fine control of the test port power for applications such as power sweep 12 22 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Theory of Operation 8719ES 20ES 22ES Signal Separation ET Models Only RF Network Analyzers A69 Step Attenuator All ET Option 004 Models The step attenuator provides coarse power control for the source signal It is electro mechanical attenuator contr
38. ftheanalyzer passes thetest it will display 55 DISP CPU COM PASS Press PRESET FACTORY and goto Run Display Tests 59 61 on page 6 12 ftheanalyzer fails thetest the display will appear blank and the front panel LEDs will stay on Continue with the next check Inspect Ribbon Cable Repeat Display Test 55 Inspect the ribbon cable W20 that connects the CPU board A7 to the GSP A19 for a loose connection Repeat Run Display Test 55 If theanalyzer fails thetest a walking one pattern will be continuously transferred from the CPU through the cable to the GSP Immediately goto the next check Perform Walking One Pattern Use an osdilloscope and a probe to verify that a walking one pattern is transferring from the CPU board A7 The walking one pattern similar tothe one shown in Figure 6 6 andis found on pins through 10 13 through 20 See Figure 6 5 fthesignal is present at the A7 connector of the ribbon cable verify that it is present at the other end of the cable fthesignal is not present replace the cable 6 10 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Digital Control Troubleshooting 8719ES 20ES 22ES Troubleshooting the GSP A19 and the Display A18 RF Network Analyzers Figure 6 5 Pin Locations on the GSP A19 WALKING 1 PATTERN sb6146d Figure 6 6 CPU A7 Walking One Pattern xl
39. A57 A55 A59 A53 A5 source switch A5 source switch A5 source switch A6 source switch A6 source switch source switch A59 A25 switch 8722 A59 A54 8722ET ES which generally cause power holes in an RF signal may cause symptoms that indicate a band related problem Start by measuring power at 5 3 source switch 25 3 switch 8722ET ES only If the power here is good then all of the band related components are verified To check other components continue troubleshooting with Broadband Power Problems on page 7 26 Keep the following points in mind Remove the instrument covers Cables having improper connections can be the problem in all cases Usethe flexible RF cable from the tool kit to measure power at otherwise inaccessible connections Before replacing suspect assemblies check bias voltages on A54 YIG oscillator A55 YIG oscillator and A57 cavity oscillator 54 and 55 22 V middle pin 15 V left pin on J 1 A57 420 V left pin 10 V right pin Low Band Problems 1 Calibrate and zero a power meter and connect it to 5 3 on ET models 25 3 for 8722ET ES 2 To measure power at J 3 press the following SERVICE MENU SERVICE MODES SRC ADJ UST MENU DAC NUM LOW BAND 7 22 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Source Troubleshooting 8719ES 20ES 22ES Band Related Problems RF Network Analyzers If greater than 5 dBm for DAC numbers from 50 MHz
40. A62 to Front Panel A Out W18 08720 20105 1 Front Panel R In to A246 W20 08720 20281 1 A24to A64 W25 08940124007 08720 20249 1 A61to A62 W25 0894012 08720 20259 1 A61toA62 W26 08720 20025 1 A60 to A63 W27 08720 20011 1 A74toA60 W28 08720 20248 1 A74toA61 W29 08720 20009 1 A69toA74 13 18 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Replaceable Parts 8719ES 20ES 22ES Replaceable Part Listings RF Network Analyzers Ref Desig Options HP Agilent Qty Description Part Number W32 08720 20021 1 A58 to A69 W50 08720 20314 1 72 to A23 W51 08720 20279 1 23 to 24 W52 08720 20098 3 External Link W54 08720 20282 1 A23 to Front Panel R Channel Out 8719E S and 8720E S Options 0894012 089 012 007 A17 51 A69 W18 W32 w29 7 amp w28 A61 w27 A60 Service Guide W14 W25 W26 A24 w51 A23 15 W50 W52 3 Places A7 20 A64 W54 A65 A52 W16 A98 W17 sb558e 13 19 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Part Listings 8719ET 20ET 22ET 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Bottom Assemblies and Cables for 8719E S and 8720E S Options 085 0854089 Ref Desig Options HP Agilent Qty Description Part Number A7 08720 60253 1 CPU Repair Kit A7 08720 69253 1 CPU Repair
41. A72toA64 W52 08722 20024 3 External Link 13 34 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Replaceable Parts 8719ES 20ES 22ES Replaceable Part Listings RF Network Analyzers 8722E S Option 012 7 W32 64 A69 A65 W29 W36 A74 W28 A52 A61 W16 27 A98 A60 W14 25 W26 51 A17 W36 WI A66 W17 W52 3 Places sb567e Service Guide 13 35 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Part Listings 8719ET 20ET 22ET 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Bottom Assemblies and Cables for 8722E S Options 0074012 Ref Desig Options HP Agilent Qty Description Part Number A7 08720 60253 1 CPU Repair Kit A7 08720 69253 1 CPU Repair Kit Rebuilt E xchange 17 08720 60264 1 Motherboard A51 08720 60274 1 Bd Assy Test Set Interface A52 5086 7456 1 Assy Pulse Generator A52 5086 6456 1 Assy Pulse Generator Rebuilt Exchange A60 A61 5086 7484 2 Bias Tee A60 A61 5086 6484 2 Bias Tee Rebuilt Exchange A64 A65 A66 5086 7614 3 Assy Sampler A64 A65 A66 5086 6614 3 Assy Sampler Rebuilt E xchange A69 33326 60006 1 Attenuator 0 55 dB A741 08722 60098 1 Transfer Switch A98 08720 60121 1 Frequency Converter A98 08720 69121 Frequency Converter Rebuilt E xchange W14 08722 20102 1 A63 to Front Panel B Out W15 08722 20079 1 Front Panel B In to A66 W16 08722 20081 1 Front Panel A In to
42. INI 10 MHz SINEWAVE 0 1V boue 4 A14 FRACTIONAL N DIGITAL i EXTTRIG ME AE MM LLL qa CM EC 2 ex ms 9 SOURCE CONTROL BOARD 2 00060 A10 DIGITAL IF lea ond CONVERT lt yswweiER 65 A SAMPLER 59 SOURCE INTERFACE SOURCE CONTROL SWITCHES FROM AQ 8 P TN E la LSWP FROM 14 I SWITCHES TO IBIAS F 30 MHz i 02 uswe TIMING MUN EA mm 60 240 MHz E 2227 2202 I4 4 MHz FROM 12 eure O J5 o gt Q DA I AND A INP TS COUNT 1 43 I L I IRA aa 5 1 304 1 BIAS OSCILLATORS i COUNTER ros 52 PULSE SS ANALOG 4 1 AUX IN il MADIS a E GENERATOR M sus i Q wes 12 M NODES 64 R1 SAMPLER i ALC SAMPLE 541 F 30 MHz LO MED HI i STEP RATEIS TP48 I S21 A17 I reru OFFSET 0 Cy RECOVERY 16 kHz a a FA4kHz 9 x 13 gt LAM a SLOPE 465 I 24 eL e ge EA 1 d wa DIODE 2 m F 20 W48 i 2 gt Sa Don BAND ADJ Bie ADJ I 58 lt BOUT o i i 6 R2 SAMPLER
43. Most likely 14 Digital IF 10 17 ADC Lin M Digital IF A10 Replace A10 18 ADC Ofs M Digital IF A10 Replace A10 19 ABUS Test M Digital IF A10 Replace A10 20 Count Fractional N digital 14 or Most likely 14 13 as previous Fractional analog 13 tests check A10 See Chapter 7 or Digital IF A10 Source Troubleshooting P part of Preset sequence Al part of ALL INTERNAL sequence M M anual decreasing order of probability 6 18 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Digital Control Troubleshooting 8719ES 20ES 22ES If the Fault Is Intermittent RF Network Analyzers If the Fault Is Intermittent Repeat Test Function If the failure is intermittent do the following To switch on the repeat function press the following SERVICE MENU TEST OPTIONS REPEAT ON 2 Then press the following RETURN TESTS 3 Select the test desired and press the following EXECUTE TEST 4 Press to stop the function The test repeat function is explained in Chapter 10 Service Key Menus and Error Messages GPIB Failures If you have performed Step 3 GPIB Systems Check on page 4 10 and you are certain that thereis a GPIB problem in the analyzer replace the CPU board A7 Service Guide 6 19 Digital Control Troubleshooting 8719ET 20ET 22ET GPIB Failures 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers This page intentionally left blank 6 20 Service Guide DIGITAL CONTR
44. Replaceable Parts for instructions for returning an analyzer 2 If the problem moves from one port to another you have found the offending assembly Service Guide 9 5 Accessories Troubleshooting 8719ET 20ET 22ET Inspect the Error Terms 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Verify the RF Cable The load match error term is a good indicator of cable problems You can further verify a faulty cable by measuring the reflection of the cable 1 2 Press Preset PRESET FACTORY Preset Perform a one port calibration on PORT 1 REFLECTION port on ET models For detailed calibration procedures refer to the Optimizing Measurement Results chapter in the analyzer user s guide Connect the test port cable to PORT 1 REFLECTION port on ET models Connect a broadband load to the other end of the cable Tighten to the specified torque for the connector type To measure return loss press the following ES models Refl FWD S11 A R ET models Meas REFLECTION Press Marker Search SEARCH MAX tofind the worst case return loss Refer tothe cable manual to see if it meets the return loss specification If not the cable should be either repaired or replaced For an example of a typical return loss measurement see Figure 9 1 Figure 9 1 Typical Return Loss Measurement of Test Port Cables CHI 511 LOG 16 dB REF 8 dB 1 21 473 dB 38 450 000 000 GHz START 050 666 000 GHz
45. Replaceable Parts 8719ES 20ES 22ES Replaceable Part Listings RF Network Analyzers 8722E S Option 089 007 A7 A17 w32 51 A69 A64 W18 Ws w29 A65 A74 W54 w30 W28 A61 A52 W27 A98 W52 A60 W25 W26 A24 W51 A23 W22 W50 A66 sb570e Service Guide 13 41 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Part Listings 8719ET 20ET 22ET 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Bottom Assemblies and Cables for 8722E S Option 089 012 Ref Desig Options HP Agilent Qty Description Part Number 7 08720 60253 1 CPU Repair Kit A7 08720 69253 1 CPU Repair Kit Rebuilt Exchange A17 08720 60264 1 Motherboard A23 A24 5086 7589 2 R Channel Switch A23 A24 5086 6589 2 R channel Switches Rebuilt Exchange A51 08720 60274 1 Bd Assy Test Set Interface A52 5086 7456 1 Assy Pulse Generator A52 5086 6456 1 Assy Pulse Generator Rebuilt Exchange A60 A61 5086 7484 2 Bias Tee A60 A61 5086 6484 2 Bias Tee Rebuilt Exchange A64 A65 A66 5086 7614 3 Assy Sampler A64 A65 A66 5086 6614 3 Assy Sampler Rebuilt E xchange A69 33326 60006 1 Attenuator 0 55 dB 74 85331 60033 1 Transfer Switch A98 08720 60121 1 Frequency Converter A98 08720 69121 1 Frequency Converter Rebuilt E xchange W14 08722 20102 1 A63to Front Panel B Out W15 08722 20079 1 Front Panel B In to A66 W16 08722
46. SOFTKEYS aredisplay defined keys in the menus GPIB COMMANDS when applicable follow the keystrokes in parentheses 10 2 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Service Key Menus and Error Messages 8719ES 20ES 22ES Error Messages RF Network Analyzers Error Messages The displayed error messages that pertain to service functions are defined in Service Related Error M essages in Alphabetical Order on page 10 33 to help you Understand the message Solvethe problem Service Menus Internal Diagnostics Theinternal diagnostics menus are shown in Figure 10 1 Internal Diagnostics Menu Map and described in the following sections The internal diagnostic menus are accessed by pressing SERVICE MENU then one of the following softkeys TESTS TEST OPTIONS SELF DIAGNOSE Service Guide 10 3 Service Key Menus and Error Messages 8719ET 20ET 22ET Service Menus Internal Diagnostics 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Figure 10 1 Internal Diagnostics Menu Map SET CLOCK CONFIGURE MENU LIMIT MENU TRANSFORM MENU INSTRUMENT MODE SERVICE MENU Service Menu TESTS TEST OPTIONS SELF DIAGNOSE SERVICE MODES ANALOG BUS on OFF PEEK POKE FIRMWARE REVISION RETURN sb582e 10 4 Service Guide EXECUTE TEST INTERNAL ADJUSTMENT TESTS DISPLAY TESTS RETURN Test Options Menu CONTINUE TEST REPEAT on OFF RECORD
47. These failures are checked using the following procedures Inspect and Gauge Connectors on page 9 3 Inspect the Error Terms on page 9 4 9 2 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Accessories Troubleshooting 8719ES 20ES 22ES Inspect and Gauge Connectors RF Network Analyzers Inspect and Gauge Connectors 1 Check for damage to the mating contacts of the test port center conductors and loose connector bulkheads If the center pin depth is incorrect replace the entire connector assembly See Chapter 14 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair P rocedures 2 Inspect the calibration kit devices for bent or broken center conductors and other physical damage Refer to the calibration kit operating and service manual for information on gauging and inspecting the device connectors If any calibration device is obviously damaged or out of mechanical tolerance replace the device Service Guide 9 3 Accessories Troubleshooting 8719ET 20ET 22ET Inspect the Error Terms 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Inspect the Error Terms Error terms are a measure of a system a network analyzer calibration kit and any cables used As required refer to Chapter 11 Error Terms for the following e The specific measurement calibration procedure used to generate the error terms Theroutines required to extract error terms from the instrument Typical error term data Use Table 9 1 to cross reference e
48. i DIN KYBD PORT RS 232 PORT PARALLEL PORT GPIB PORT PON 22 DISPLAY 1 i OPT 089 INTERFACE INTERFACE INTERFACE INTERFACE INTERFACE i I CRYSTAL i P TOA74J3 OUT IN ATTENUATORS 1 x x VA J DISPLAY no i DS TRANSFER SWITCH 1 gt INTERFACE PALETTE E E e Q TO A642 I 1 Weg i LOWER FT PANEL i DISK i Mom I i i we BIAS TO BIAS TEE S I DRIVE i LIGHT 21 LE A23 ran a aes MAIN CPU I I e MEMORY 1 2 BUFFER 1 SWITCH switch i DIGITAL SIGNAL A 1 1 PROCESSOR FLASH RAM I I CAUTION N 1 l Q w82 i 1 5KV AC STARTUP lt 2 i 1 ROM RAM ccc eee sa 680V AC STEADY STATE i pow 1 J W57 ws3 MAIN Cae L p INVERTER ASSY A i ADC RED LED CONTROLREFRESH K AEO T LL 1 REG NORMAL FLASHING RY I TO A9 L esie EE TO A10 TO A51 TO A12 TO A11 sb5107e 8719ES 8720ES OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM FOR OPT 400 012 089 1D5 8722ES OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM FOR STANDARD OPT 007 012 085 089 105
49. 1 Todisablethe ALC eliminate modulator control press SERVICE MENU SERVICE MODES SRC ADJUST MENU ALC OFF Usea power meter to measure the power at the faulty port 2 For 8719ET ES and 8720ET ES If you measure at least 5 dBm 10 dBm on ET models and ES Option 007 models at the port replace the A59 source interface board assembly For ES Models Only f you measure less than 45 dBm 10 dBm on Option 007 models at the port press REV 522 B R or FWD S11 A R and measure power at the other port f you measure less than 45 dBm 10 dBm on Option 007 models at the other port continue with Step Attenuator A69 Check next f you measure at least 45 dBm 10 dBm on Option 007models at the other port either the directional coupler or the bias tee or thetransfer switch A25 is faulty The power loss through each of these components should be negligible 7 26 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Source Troubleshooting 8719ES 20ES 22ES Broadband Power Problems RF Network Analyzers For 8722ET ES If you measure at least 8 dBm 3 dBm on ET models and ES Option 007 models at the port replace the A59 source interface board assembly For ES Models Only If you measure less than 8 dBm 3 dBm on Option 007 models at the port press and Refl REV S22 B R or Refl FWD S11 A R and measure power at the other port If you measure less than 8 dBm 3 dBm on Option 007 models at the other
50. 1 8 Option 1CP Rack Mount Flange Kit With Handles 1 8 Option 1CM Rack Mount Flange Kit Without Handles 1 8 Service and Support ODUOSRS 4 4 bb Rex dU em ded d debe ae ded ed ER ICE de Pob e a aid 1 9 WOL i433 a aba CHR E dE 1 9 OSs Rab ed Pda d E Gu e Cd deer quor grab SEH PSL IES ODORS 1 9 Option WS a Esau edo UC COR 1 9 DIST Ludo ad PER dn Pise deb died dae acp perde 1 9 Option disi d 1 9 Herde qu Fed CE EE QE ee Hed Ped edP POPE pee PUER Reds 1 9 po to qe PUTES 1 9 wd e ele C e debe FCR a dob up 1 10 2 System Verification and Performance Tests Sedins in Tha Chapter us d ee 2 2 How to Test the Performance of Your Analyzer 2 3 ANSI NCSL Z540 1 1994 Verification eee ew P RR 2 3 Non ANSI NCSL Z540 1 1994 2 3 istr mehnt Verimcatlon Cle a u s us s T RERBA idee adhe 2 4 Prona y TENS e EORR COR CI de ee DS dedos 2 6 Required Eguiprient and TODIS ET twee die TER RN REA 2 6
51. 56 7 Behind Panel Opt 400 Only 871920es_front_assy Front Assembly 8722ES Opt 400 Only 75 76 fooR A19 A22 Behind Bracket A62 56 A73 Behind Panel Opt 400 Only 8722es_front_assy Service Guide 13 65 Replaceable Parts 8719ET 20ET 22ET Replaceable Part Listings 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Top Cables Ref Agilent Models Options Type 1 HP Agilent Qty Description Desig Part Number W1 8719ET ES All SR 08720 20064 1 A68 To A20 8720ET ES W1 8722ET ES All SR 08720 20014 1 A29 To A20 W2 All All F 08720 60141 1 AY 7 A11J 1 W3 8719ET ES All SR 08720 20062 1 A20 To A58 8720ET ES W3 8722ET ES All SR 08722 20017 1 20 25 W5 8722ET ES All SR 08720 20266 1 A25 To A58 W6 All All SR 08720 20068 1 A29 To A53 W7 All All SR 08720 20063 1 A55 To A29 w8 All All F 08415 60040 1 A12 13 W9 All All F 08415 60041 1 14 13 W11 All All SR 08720 20065 1 A57 To A53 W31 All All F 08415 60035 1 A52 To A14 W42 All All SR 08720 20061 1 A53 To A20 W43 8722ET ES All SR 08722 20016 1 A54 To A25 W47 All All F 08720 60132 1 9 5 To A4 W48 All All F 08720 6
52. 6 Recheck the CW frequency and adjust if necessary Instruments with Option 1D5 Only 7 Reconnect the BNC to BNC jumper between the EXT REF and the 10 MHz Precision Reference as shown in Figure 3 10 Figure 3 10 High Stability Frequency Adjustment Location BNC TO BNC JUMPER HIGH STABILITY FREQUENCY ADJUST sb629d 8 Insert a narrow screwdriver and adjust the high stability frequency reference potenti ometer for a CW frequency measurement within specification In Case of Difficulty f you cannot adjust the CW frequency within specification replace the Reference A12 assembly or contact the nearest Agilent Technologies sales or service office Service Guide 3 43 Adjustments and Correction Constants 8719ET 20ET 22ET Spur Avoidance and 100 kHz FM Sideband Adjustment 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers API Spur Avoidance and 100 kHz FM Sideband Adjustment This adjustment minimizes the spurs caused by the API analog phase interpolator on the fractional N assembly circuits It also improves the sideband characteristics Required Equipment and Tools Equipment Description 8719 5 8720 5 8722 5 Spectrum Analyzer 8591E Opt 130 RF cable 50 ohm Type N 24 inch 11500C RF cable 50 ohm 24 inch BNC type part number 8120 2582 Non metallic Adjustment Tool part number
53. 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Power Supply Troubleshooting Power Supply Troubleshooting Flowchart Power Supply Troubleshooting Flowchart FAN PROBLEM BUT ALL LEDS OK FAN YES TROUBLESHOOTING NO REPLACE FAN ERROR MES MESSAGE S DISPLAYED NO A15W1 YES 2 VOLTAGES REPLACE 8 CHECK A15 OK PREREGULATOR AND LOADS NO REPLACE 15 GREEN LED ON A15W1 VOLTAGES DISCONNECT A15W1 CHECK A15 AND 5V LOADS REMOVE m SOME 5 LOADS TAKE ACTION AS DIRECTED REPLACE 15 CHECK AB POST REGULATOR AND LOADS NINE A8 LEDS ARE NOT ALL ON ARE ALL LEDS ON STEADILY CHECK AS ALONE NO YES REPLACE 15 sb619d Service Guide YES TROUBLESHOOT NO CHECK FAN i REPLACE AB Ma LED S ON STEADILY Y YES CHECK DISPLAY REMOVE AND CHECK A8 LOADS yY CHECK ASSEMBLIES Y LOADING DISABLE SHUTDOWN SUPPET AND FIND LOADS ON BAD SUPPLY Y CHECK OTHER LOADS 5 3 Power Supply Troubleshooting 8719ET 20ET 22ET Assembly Replacement Sequence 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Assembly Replacement Sequence The following steps show the sequence to replace an assembly in the network analyzer Step 1 Identify the faulty
54. 8720E S A63 8719ES All 5086 6968 1 RF Coupler 8720ES Rebuilt Exchange A63 8722ES All 5086 7518 1 RF Coupler A63 8722ES All 5086 6518 1 RF Coupler Rebuilt Exchange A72 All ES Models All 5087 7115 1 R Channel Buffer Amplifier 72 All ES Models All 5087 6115 1 R Channel Buffer Amp Rebuilt E xchange A73 All ES Models 400 5087 7115 1 R Channel Buffer Amplifier A73 All ES Models 400 5087 6115 1 R Channel Buffer Amp Rebuilt E xchange A75 8722ES Non Opt 400 8490D OPT 006 1 Attenuator 6 dB Non Opt 089 Non Opt 085 75 8722 5 089 84900 003 1 Attenuator dB 085 A75 8722 5 400 84900 OPT 010 1 Attenuator 10 dB A76 8722ES 400 8490D OPT 010 1 Attenuator 10 dB W99 All 8120 6890 1 Ribbon Cable 13 64 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Replaceable Parts 8719ES 20ES 22ES Replaceable Part Listings RF Network Analyzers Front Assembly ET Models A19 A22 NN A62 Behind Bracket Front Assembly 8719 5 and 8720ES 19 22 Behind Bracket A62 A63
55. 9 Remove the MEAS RESTART connector from the interface board approaching it from the outside of the rear panel assembly item 7 Replacement 1 Reverse the order of the removal procedure 14 16 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Assembly Replacement and Post R epair P rocedures 8719ES 20ES 22ES Removing the Rear Panel Interface Board Assembly RF Network Analyzers Opt 105 only 9 places Opt 1D5 only 9 3 places sb679d Service Guide 14 17 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures 8719 20 22 Removing the Source Assemblies 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Removing the Source Assemblies Tools Required T 15 TORX screwdriver 5 16 inch open end torque wrench set to 10 in Ib ESD electrostatic discharge grounding wrist strap Start Removal 1 Disconnec the power cord and remove the top cover refer to Removing the Covers on page 14 6 2 Remove the front panel refer to Removing the Rear Panel Assembly on page 14 14 3 Remove the source module cover A58 M A D S Removal 4 Disconnect the cables item 1 and item 2 for all but Option 400 from the M A D S 5 Remove the 4 screws item 3 from each corner of the assembly Oscillator Removal 6 Remove the 3 screws item 4 that attach the source module to the analyzer 7 Disconnect the cables item 1 and
56. B R ignore the trace 3 If the phase lock problem persists the R sampler assembly was not the problem Continue with Check Open Loop Power on page 7 11 or 8722ET ES Models on page 7 12 4 If the phase lock error message disappears either the control voltage bias voltage RF signal or the R sampler assembly itself is faulty 5 Swap back the IF OUTPUT cables and check for approximately 0 04V on the green sampler control wire of 64 R sampler assembly e Ifthe control voltage is good continue to step 6 e fthecontrol voltage is bad check for 0 04 V at J 18 R1 on the motherboard A17 which is the pin located farthest to the rear If the voltage at J 18 is good bad at the sampler assembly then either the cable between the motherboard and sampler assembly is bad or the connectors associated with the cable is defective f the voltage at J 18 is bad then the problem points to the source control board A9 Replace A9 6 Check the 15 V and 15 V bias voltages at the sampler assembly fthebias voltages are good continue to step 7 Ifthe bias voltages are bad check for the 15 V and 15 V supply voltages at J 18 on the motherboard A17 The 15 V pin is second from the rear and the 15 V pin is third from the rear If the voltage at J 18 is good and bad at the sampler assembly then either the cable between the motherboard and sampler assembly is bad or the connectors associa
57. FRONT zo i us 1 2 FRONT PANEL INTERFACE I l PANEL Y a gt lt Testsetvo TEST SET I 0 A1 FRONT PANEL 22 277770 A PORT 2 Port 2 STANDARD 1 Frequency Node 1 1 i 1 INTERFACE a INTERFACE I I v Voltage Node C r d a Pe o SWITCHING gt EXT BIAS _ TOAI7 I 1A21 ye POWER gt REGULATORS AN POWER EXT REF TOA12 i I KEYBOARD FRONT i SUPPLY MICROCIRCUIT POWER AUX INPUT NP 1 W83 I PANEL AND gt gt TO A10 I PROCESSOR REGULATOR INSTRUMENT POWER A i SIGNAL SEPARATION OPT 085 4 gt 17 i i TEST SEQ 4 en 1 E FROM A9 i A62 DIRECTIONAL 70 STEP a I COUPLER A ATTN Cn S GREENTEDS MEAS RESTART bh 17 1 I I OUT EM 1 1 NORMAL ON STEADY ae cus CENE edes sux ee 1 m Ms Kass 25 wi7 1 w69 0 55dB I wes 2222222227222222272222222222222222222222722222222222 nena A74 MECHANICAL lI i n X mm soni incl V ca G A69 STEP I TRANSFER SWITCH ib MA e usi Ie DIN KYBD PARALLEL INTERCONNECT INTERCONNECT INTERCONNECT INTERCONN
58. For each PEEK POKE location listed in Table 3 2 dothe following 1 Press the following PRESET FACTORY SERVICE MENU PEEK POKE 2 Press PEEK POKE ADDRESS enter the peek poke address from Table 3 2 and press x1 3 Press POKE enter the poke value from Table 3 2 and press x1 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the remaining peek poke addresses Table 3 2 Main Power DAC Peek Poke Location Table DAC Peek Poke Poke Value for the Poke Value for the Address 8719ET ES 8722ET ES 8720ET ES Low power 1619001442 1 1 Low power 1619001443 0 200 Mid power 1619001444 3 5 Mid power 1619001445 49 172 High Power 1619001446 10 10 High Power 1619001447 12 12 NOTE Your analyzer may display the message CAUTION TEST PORT OVERLOAD REDUCE POWER Ignore this message and continue with the procedure 3 18 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Adjustments and Correction Constants 8719ES 20ES 22ES Output Power Adjustments RF Network Analyzers Setting the Potentiometers to the Minimum Levels 1 Locate the Source Interface board 59 For locations of the potentiometers see Figure 3 3 2 Set the low band power potentiometer A59 R4 at the center of its range 3 Set the offset potentiometers A59 R70 R71 R80 to their full counter clockwise position The end stops on 10 turn potentiometers are indicated by a clicking sound 4 Set the slope potentiometers A59
59. Ifthe counter reads 9 996 MHz continue with 4 MHz Check fthe counter does not read 9 996 MHz perform the Reference Assembly VCO Tune Adjustment on page 3 39 f the adjustment is successful and the problem is cured for verification perform the F requency Accuracy Performance Test on page 2 34 f the adjustment is unsuccessful or the problem persists replace the A12 assembly A12 is indicated by red tabs 4 MHz Check 1 Switch off the analyzer 2 Removethe Digital IF A10 board indicated by black tabs and install it onto the extender board H P Agilent part number 08753 60155 part of the 08722 60018 tool kit 3 Use oscilloscope to observe the 4 MHz signal at A10P2 pin 6 which is labeled on the extender board e Ifthe4 MHz sine wave signal is present at A10P2 pin 6 replace A10 e Ifthe4 MHz sine wave signal is not present at A10P2 pin 6 check signal at A12P2 36 by connecting a SM B f to SMB f cable and a SM B m barrel adaptor to extend the FN REF cable front SMB connector The Ext Ref cable rear SMB connector does not have to be connected for this test A12 is indicated by red tabs f the 4 MHz signal is not present at A12P2 pin 36 replace A12 Ifthe 4 MHz signal is present at A12 but not A10 check the motherboard trace Service Guide 8 3 Receiver Troubleshooting 8719ET 20ET 22ET At Least One Signal Path Looks Normal 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzer
60. Illustration Hardware Front 13 82 3 PLACES 7 6 07 R Loo 4 G PLACES 5 6 PLACES QO 8 sb6113d Service Guide 8719 20 22 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Hardware Preregulator Replaceable Parts Replaceable Part Listings Ref Models Options HP Agilent Part Qty Description Desig Number 1 All All 2110 1059 1 FUSE 5A 125V UL LISTED CSA CERTIFIED TO 248 STANDARD for 115V operations 1 All All 2110 1036 1 FUSE T 4A H 250V BUILT TO IEC127 2 5 STANDARD for 230V operations 2 All All 08753 00065 1 Bracket Preregulator 3 All All 0515 1400 2 Screw Machine M3 5x8 CW FL TX A15 All All 08753 60098 1 Preregulator Assy A15 All All 08753 69098 1 Preregulator Assy Rebuilt E xchange Illustration of Hardware Preregulator Service Guide sg691d 13 83 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Part Listings Chassis Parts Outside 8719ET 20ET 22ET 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Ref Models Options HP Agilent Qty Description Desig Part Number 1 All All 5041 9176 2 Trim Strip 2 All All 08720 00078 1 Cover Top 3 All All 5041 9188 4 Rear Standoff 4 All
61. Initiate the Analyzer Self Test 1 Disconnect all devices and peripherals from the analyzer 2 Switch on the analyzer and press PRESET FACTORY Preset 3 Watch for the indications shown in Figure 4 1 to determine if the analyzer is operating correctly NOTE On ET models thereis no TRANSMISSION LED on the front panel Figure 4 1 Preset Sequence for ET and ES Models MESSAGES APPEAR IN SEQUENCE INITIALIZING INSTRUMENT PLEASE WAIT Turns On During and After Preset SELF TEST PASSED Turns On amp 4 Seconds During Preset Parameters Appears After Preset e CH1 S4 Log 10dB REF OdB ES Models e CH1 RFL Log 10dB REF OdB ET Models e START 0 05 GHz STOP 13 51 GHz 8719 5 START 0 05 GHz STOP 20 05 GHz 8720ET ES START 0 05 GHz STOP 40 05 GHz 8722ET ES sb534e Service Guide 4 5 Start Troubleshooting Here 8719ET 20ET 22ET Step 1 Initial Observations 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers If the Self Test Failed 1 Check the AC line power to the analyzer 2 Check the fuse rating listed on rear panel spare inside holder 3 Check the line voltage setting use small screwdriver to change 4 If the problem persists refer to Step 4 Faulty Group Isolation on page 4 13 4 6 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Start Troubleshooting Here 8719ES 20ES 22ES Step 2 Operator s Check RF Network Analyzers Step 2 Operator s Check Description The operator s
62. PRef 5 0 dBm 10 dBm 5 dBm 1 5 dB 10 dBm 5 dBm 15 dBm 10 dBm 10 dB 15 dBm 10 dBm 20 dBm 15 dBm P gt Pag 5 dB 0 dBm 5 dBm 5 dBm 0 dBm P Prep 10 dB 5 dBm 10 dBm NA NA Service Guide 2 49 System Verification and Performance Tests 8719ET 20ET 22ET Performance Test Record 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Dynamic Range Model Type and Frequency Range Specification Results Measurement Uncertainty Not Option 007 Option 007 521 Transmission 8719ET and 8720ET 50 MHz to 840 MHz 102 dB N A 0 29 dB 840 MHz to 20 05 GHz 104 dB N A 0 29 dB 8719ES and 8720ES 50 MHz to 840 MHz 77 dB 82 0 29 dB 840 MHz to 20 05 GHz 100 dB 105 0 29 dB 8722ET 50 MHz to 840 MHz 98 dB N A 0 29 dB 840 MHz to8 GHz 102 dB N A 0 29 dB 8 GHz to 20 GHz 100 dB N A 0 29 dB 20 GHz to 40 05 GHz 89 dB N A 0 29 dB 8722ES 50 MHz to 840 MHz 67 dB 72 dB 0 29 dB 840 MHz to 8 GHz 93 dB 98 dB 0 29 dB 8 GHz to 20 GHz 91 dB 96 dB 0 29 dB 20 GHz to 40 05 GHz 80 dB 85 dB mm 0 29 dB a For Option 085 or Option 012 subtract 3 dB 2 50 Service Guide 3 Adjustments and Correction Constants Adjustments and Correction Constants 8719ET 20ET 22ET Information on This Chapter 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Information on This Chapter The accuracy of the analyzer is achieved and maintained through mechanical adjustments electrical a
63. Part of the 85052B P N 00901 60004 Part of the 85056A 1 Connec a 500 load to PORT 1 REFLECTION port on ET models 2 Press PRESET FACTORY Preset 3 To measure R channel press the following INPUT PORTS MARKER MODE MENU 4 Toset thelF bandwidth to 10 Hz press the following IF BW POWER Table 2 10 Power Value Settings for Testing Linearity R MARKERS DISCRETE PWR RANGE MAN POWER RANGES RANGE 0 power settings 871985 SED 8720ES Option 007 Pref 5 dBm 0 dBm 10 dBm 5 dBm P4 PRer 5 dB 10dBm 5 dBm 15 dBm 10 dBm P 10 dB 15 dBm 10 dBm 20 dBm 15 dBm Pref 5 dB 0 dBm 5 dBm 5 dBm 0 dBm P 10 dB 5 dBm 10 dBm NA NA 2 38 Service Guide 8719 20 22 System Verification and Performance Tests 8719ES 20ES 22ES Performance Tests RF Network Analyzers 8719ET ES and 8720ET E S Models Refer to Table 2 10 and set the analyzer to the power value that is listed in the P Ref row for the particular analyzer under test After you enter the value press x7 2 Wait for the analyzer to complete a full sweep 3 Press DATA gt MEMORY DATA MEM 4 Press AMODE MENU FIXED MKR POSITION FIXED MKR VALUE QD Recording P Data 5 Press POWER 6 Enter the power value that is listed in the P4 row of Table 2 10 for the particular analyzer under test After you enter the
64. RED LED Q W42 NK 2 J waa S22 I ve pies a UNLOCK PULL DOWN mi aa S a A53 5 De cr ain auaiaa asa 1 MIXER 005255 GHz SET DAC HIGH amp MIDBAND A12 REFERENCE 10 PL REF AMP LOWBAND 3200 4095 READ 0 dBm 46 eee 75 SET DAC LOWBAND a EXT 10 MHz SET DAC LOWBAND wit REF IN vaa VCXO 1MHz 4000 READ gt 8 dBm EXT REF vas 40 MHz i imb gt oe di kHz TO A13 i A57 i w40 TUNE 49 Miz FIXED E i ger CJ SIGNAL SEPARATION 400 012 012 I I 38007 I 2057 ee OUT A JN 1 VCXO ADJ PORT 1 62 DIRECTIONAL 1 O LL O 0 405 VCO TUNE COUPLER Sez DM ES r a WIS 16 2nd LO 9 996 MHz Ara Bainis AR A70 STEP E i i i ATTN W30 veo X g O X PORT 1 39 984 MHz Se E 012 0 55dB W38 I W25 ee ESL ud I A61BIASTEE I J4 eee s w A71 STEP DEOR NES 5 ATIN pen 1 A63 DIRECTIONALI EX da LEGEND C yT
65. RF Network Analyzers Assembly Replacement and Post R epair Procedures Removing the A7 CPU Board Assembly 1 ITT 2 9 5 pL Tel Tel o 3T 3 E 9 oo N O i h 8 E i o o o d 9 H B i 9 9 9 Emo o o o o o o o o o o o Service Guide sb6108d 14 21 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures 8719ET 20ET 22ET Removing the A7BT1 Battery 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Removing the A7BT1 Battery Tools Required T 10 TORX screwdriver ESD electrostatic discharge grounding wrist strap soldering iron with associated soldering tools Removal 1 Remove the A7 CPU board refer to Removing the A7 CPU Board Assembly on page 14 20 2 Unsolder and remove A7BT 1 from the A7 CPU board WARNING Battery 7 1 contains lithium The battery may explode if it is incorrectly replaced Do not incinerate or puncture this battery Either dispose of the discharged battery according to manufacturer s instructions or collect as small chemical waste DO NOT THROW BATTERIES AWAY BUT COLLECT AS SMALL CHEMICAL WASTE sk780a Replacement 1 Make sure the new battery is inserted into t
66. SOURCE TUNE OFF DAC NUM LOW BAND DAC NUM MID BAND DAC NUM HIGH BAND PWR DAC on OFF ALC ON off RETURN More Menu SAMPLR COR ON off IF GAIN AUTO STORE EEPR on OFF RETURN 8719ET 20ET 22ET 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers 8719ET ES 8720 5 Source Adjust Menu SOURCE TUNE OFF DAC NUM LOW BAND DAC NUM HIGH BAND PWR DAC on OFF ALC ON off RETURN sb583e Service Guide 8719 20 22 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Service Modes Menu Service Key Menus and Error Messages Service Menu Service Features To access this menu press SERVICE MENU SERVICE MODES SERVICE MODES FRACN TUNE OFF 5 1 SRC ADJ UST MENU NOTE Service Guide allows you to control and monitor various circuits for troubleshooting tests the A13 and A14 fractional N circuits It allows you to directly control and monitor the output frequency of the fractional N synthesizer 60 MHz to 240 MHz Set the instrument to CW sweep mode and then set FRACN TUNE ON Change frequencies with the front panel keys or knob The output of the A14 assembly can be checked at A14J OUT in high band or A14 2 LO OUT in low band with an oscilloscope a frequency counter or a spectrum analyzer Signal jumps and changes in shape at 20 MHz and 30 MHz when tuning up in frequency and at 29 2 MHz and 15 MHz when tuning down are due to switching of the digital divider
67. STORE SAVE REGS DISK 10 33 battery removal of A7 14 22 bias voltages sampler assembly 7 9 blanking adjustment 3 30 block diagram network analyzer system 12 3 signal separation option 400 simplified power supply 5 5 12 6 simplified source flow 12 17 simplified source group 12 13 BLOCK INPUT ERROR 10 34 BLOCK INPUT LENGTH ERROR 10 34 BNC cables recommended part numbers 1 4 broadband phase lock problems 7 8 broadband power problems 7 26 cable connector repeatability how to perform 2 13 typical response 2 14 cables check for performance 2 9 recommended part numbers 1 4 calibration how to do 2 22 measurement test setup 2 22 port 1 2 22 port 2 2 23 thru 2 24 CALIBRATION ABORTED 10 34 calibration kits recommended models 1 3 CALIBRATION REQUIRED 10 34 CANNOT READAWRITE 1FILE SYSTEM 10 34 CAUTION POWER OUT MAY BE UNLEVELED 10 34 CC procedures ADC offset test 48 3 10 Index 2 analog bus test 44 3 8 IF amplifier test 47 3 9 initialize EEPROMs test 53 3 32 option numbers test 50 3 13 serial number test 49 3 11 source pretune test 43 3 6 CC terms and tests ES models 11 5 ET models 11 6 check 2nd converter 8 9 2nd LO 8 3 A channel output 4 23 A14to 13 digital control signals 7 17 ALC signal separation 7 26 B channel output 4 24 control voltage on sampler assembly 7 9 CPU red LED patterns 6 5 digital control 4 15 directional coupler 8 7 divide by N A14 circuit 7 17 fan voltages 5
68. The power should vary from 20 dB to 4 dB from the maximum specified power in most cases At some of the frequencies you may not be able to tune above maximum power f your analyzer is not operating correctly as indicated from the results of the previous step refer to Chapter 7 Source Troubleshooting or contact the nearest Agilent Technologies sales or service office Service Guide 3 23 Adjustments and Correction Constants 8719ET 20ET 22ET Power Linearity Adjustment 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Power Linearity Adjustment IMPORTANT Power Linearity Adjustment is a continuation of Output Power Adjustments on page 3 17 Output Power Adjustments must be performed first Thereceiver calibration from Output Power Adjustments must be kept on before starting this test Preparatory Steps 1 If you haven t already done so perform the procedure Output Power Adjustments on page 3 17 2 Connect a cable between PORT 1 and PORT 2 REFLECTION port and TRANSMISSION port on the E T models 3 Press and enter the power value listed as in Table 3 4 Press 1 Table 3 4 Power Linearity Adjustment Values Power 8719ES SOART 972E 8722ET Settings 8720ES dar 8722ES Option 007 8720ES Option 007 p1 5 10 dBm 5 dBm 0 dBm P2 5 dBm 0dBm 10dBm 5 dBm P3 15 dBm 10 dBm 20 dBm 15 dBm 1 P1 only applies to
69. conditions are fully understood and met CAUTION Caution denotes a hazard It calls attention to a procedure that if not correctly performed or adhered to would result in damage to or destruction of the instrument Do not proceed beyond a caution sign until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met How to Use This Guide This guide uses the following conventions This represents a key physically located on the instrument SOFTKEY This represents a softkey a key whose label is determined by the instrument s firmware Screen Text This represents text displayed on the instrument s screen Documentation The Installation and Quick Start Guide provides procedures for installing configuring and verifying the operation of the analyzer It also will help you familiarize yourself with the basic operation of the analyzer The User s Guide shows how to make measurements explains commonly used features and tells you how to get the most performance from your analyzer The Reference Guide provides reference information such as specifications menu maps and key definitions The Programmer s Guide provides general GPIB programming information a command reference and example programs The Programmer s Guide contains a CD ROM with example programs The CD ROM provides the Installation and Quick Start Guide the User s Guide the Reference Guide and the Programmer s Guidein PDF format for viewin
70. item 2 for all but Option 400 from the M A D S 8 Remove the 4 screws item 5 and item 6 from the source module bracket Remove the bracket 9 Lift the source module out of the analyzer 10 Remove a screw item 7 from the back of the oscillator 11 Disconnect attaching RF cables A59 Source Interface Board Removal 12 Remove the 3 screws item 4 that attach the source module to the analyzer 13 Disconnect the cables item 2 and item for all but Option 400 from the A D S 14 Remove the 4 screws item 4 and item 5 from the source module bracket Remove the bracket 15 Lift the source module out of the analyzer 16 Remove 3 screws to detach the bottom source module cover 17 Remove 4 screws that attach the source control board to the source module frame 18 Place hand on the top of the A59 board with your thumb near the A58 M A D S to push the board Place your other hand on the bottom side of the A59 with your thumb and index finger put through the drilled holes to pull the board 14 18 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Assembly Replacement and Post R epair Procedures 8719ES 20ES 22ES Removing the Source Assemblies RF Network Analyzers Replacement 1 Reverse the order of the removal procedure NOTE When replacing the A59 source interface board push the board evenly on all the microcircuit pins Check all the pin sockets from the back of the A59 board to ensure that all of the pins are ins
71. may be shutting down the supply Make sure the temperature of the open air operating environment does not exceed 55 C 131 F and that the analyzer fan is operating fthefan does not seem to be operating correctly go to Fan Troubleshooting on page 5 18 fthere does not appear to be a temperature problem it is likely that A15 is faulty Inspect the Motherboard If thered LED is still on after replacement or repair of the preregulator A15 switch off the analyzer and inspect the motherboard for solder bridges and other noticeable defects Use an ohmmeter to check for shorts The 45VD 45VCPU or 45VDSENSE lines may be bad Refer tothe block diagram at the end of this chapter and troubleshoot these suspected power supply lines on the motherboard A17 5 12 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Power Supply Troubleshooting 8719ES 20ES 22ES If the Green LEDs of the Post Regulator A8 Are Not All ON RF Network Analyzers If the Green LEDs of the Post Regulator A8 Are Not All ON The green LEDs along the top edge of the post regulator A8 are normally on Flashing LEDs on indicate that the shutdown circuitry on it is protecting power supplies from overcurrent conditions by repeatedly shutting them down This may be caused by supply loading on 8 or on any other assembly in the analyzer Maintain A15W1 Cable Connection 1 Switch off the analyzer 2 Remove A8 from its motherboard connector but keep the A15W
72. the trace should appear very similar to the known good open Figure 9 2 Typical Smith Chart Trace of a Good Short 511 1 U FS PRm Del START 050 000 GAA GHz STOP 40 050 666 000 GHz Service Guide 9 7 Accessories Troubleshooting 8719ET 20ET 22ET Inspect the Error Terms 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Figure 9 3 Typical Smith Chart Traces of a Good Open Hi 511 4 U FS PRm Del START 050 000 000 GHz STOP 40 050 666 OAA GHz 9 8 Service Guide 10 Service Key Menus and Error Messages Service Key Menus and Error Messages 8719ET 20ET 22ET Information on This Chapter 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Information on This Chapter The service menus aid you in performing the following service functions test verify adjust control troubleshoot The menus are divided into two groups that are described in the following sections e Service Menus Internal Diagnostics on page 10 3 This consists of the first three keys on the menu Tests Test Options and SELF DIAG Service Menu Service Features on page 10 15 This consists of the next four keys on the menu Service M odes Analog Bus on off PEEK POKE and Firmware Revision When applicable the GPIB mnemonic is written in parentheses following the key See GPIB Service Mnemonic Definitions on page 10 31 NOTE Throughout this service guide these conventions are used are labeled front panel keys
73. 000 000 20 155 d 082 dB 19 992 dB 20 237 dB 2 000 000 000 20 197 d 048 19 999 dB 20 246 dB 3 000 000 000 20 19 d 125 dB 19 957 dB 20 315 dB 000 000 20 192 d 149 dB 19 976 dB 20 342 dB 152 dB 19 993 dB 20 365 dB 181 dB 20 016 dB 20 388 dB 180 dB 20 025 dB 20 262 dB 19 961 dB 20 261 dB 19 986 d 254 g 017 20 55 dB 13 500 000 000 20 307 d 265 dB 20 041 dB 20 574 15 000 000 000 20 317 d 280 dB 20 036 dB 20 622 dB 16 500 000 000 20 412 dB 238 dB 20 061 dB 20 65 dB 18 000 000 000 20 46 dB 205 dB 20 076 dB 20 666 dB 19 500 000 000 20 345 dB 257 dB 20 087 dB 20 675 dB 20 000 000 000 20 346 dB 259 20 087 dB 20 675 dB W 7 500 000 000220 206 d 8 000 000 000 20 22 d 9 000 000 000 20 235 d 10 000 000 000 20 257 d 12 000 000 000 20 295 d U UU UUUU vvu v sb531e The callouts in Figure 2 16 are defined as 1 Frequency of the data points in GHz Results of the measurement Upper limit line as defined by the total system uncertainty specification Lower limit line as defined by the total system uncertainty specification amp WN pass asterisk indicates fail 2 32 8719ET 20ET 22ET 8719ES 20ES 22ES Network Analyzers Difference between the measured results and the limit line A positive number indicates Service Guide 8719 20 22 System Verification and Performance Tests 8719ES 20ES 22ES Performa
74. 007 012 400 W36 8722ES Standard SR 08720 20041 1 A72 To A64 007 012 400 W38 8719ES 085 089 SR 08720 20313 1 A58 toA72 8720ES W38 8722ES 085 089 SR 08722 20130 1 A58 toA75 W41 8719ES 400 SR 08720 20316 1 A74 to A73 8720 5 W41 8722ES 400 SR 08722 20936 1 A74to A76 W50 8719ES 085 089 SR 08720 20314 1 A72 to A23 8720ES 8722 5 W53 8719 5 4004089 SR 08720 20281 1 24 to 64 8720ES 13 70 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Replaceable Parts 8719ES 20ES 22ES Replaceable Part Listings RF Network Analyzers Ref Agilent Models Options Type Part Qty Description Desig Number W54 8719ES 085 089 SR 08720 20282 1 A23 to Front Panel 8720ES R Channel Out W54 8722ES 085 089 SR 08722 20132 1 A23 to Front Panel R Channel Out W55 8719ES 400 SR 08720 20172 1 A74 to Front Panel 8720ES R Channel Out W55 8722ES 400 SR 08722 20065 1 74 to Front Panel R Channel Out W56 8719ES 400 089 SR 08720 20317 1 A74 to A72 8720ES W56 8722ES 400 089 SR 08722 20135 1 A74 to A72 W72 8719ET All SR 08720 20253 1 A58 to W74 8720E T W72 8722E T All SR 08722 20123 1 A58to W74 W74 8719E T All SR 08720 20266 1 W72 to A64 8720E T 8722E T W76 8719E T Std SR 08720 20254 1 A58 to A62 8720ET W76 8722 Standard SR 08722 20122 1 A58 to 62 W77 8719ES 400 SR 08720 20315 1 73 to A67 8720 5 W78 8719ET All SR 08720 20255 1 A21 to A66 8720ET W78 8722ET All SR 08722 20124 1 A21 to A66
75. 08720 20315 1 A73 to A67 8719E S and 8720E S Option 400 089 A71 A70 W37 w18 W41 W39 W38 A61 W52 A60 Service Guide W22 W26 W25 W32 51 A24 A7 17 w53 A64 W54 A65 W77 99 w57 A23 w50 w22 13 27 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Part Listings 8719ET 20ET 22ET 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Bottom Assemblies and Cables for 8719E S and 8720E S Option 400 012 089 Ref Desig Options HP Agilent Qty Description Part Number A7 08720 60253 1 CPU Repair Kit A7 08720 69253 1 CPU Repair Kit Rebuilt E xchange 17 08720 60264 1 Motherboard A23 A24 5086 7589 2 R channel Switches A23 A24 5086 6589 2 R channel Switches Rebuilt E xchange 51 400 08720 60275 1 Assy Test Set Interface 52 5086 7456 1 Assy Pulse Generator A52 5086 6456 1 Assy Pulse Generator Rebuilt E xchange A60 A61 5086 7458 2 Bias Tee A60 A61 5086 6458 2 Bias Tee Rebuilt E xchange A64 A65 5086 7614 4 Assy Sampler A66 A67 A64 A65 5086 6614 4 Assy Sampler Rebuilt E xchange A66 A67 A70 A71 33326 60006 2 Attenuator 0 55 dB 74 5086 7975 1 Switch Splitter A74 5086 6975 1 Switch Splitter Rebuilt Exchange A99 08720 60124 1 Frequency Converter A99 08720 69124 1 Frequency Converter Rebuilt E xchange W14 08720 20154 1 A63 to
76. 1 Bd Assy Post Regulator A8 08722 69099 1 Assy Post Regulator Rebuilt E xchange AY All All 08720 60129 1 Bd Assy Source Control 10 08753 60958 1 Assy Digital IF A11 08720 60181 1 Assy Phase Lock 12 08720 60252 1 Assy Reference 12 08720 69252 1 Assy Reference Rebuilt E xchange 1 08720 60258 1 Bd Assy Frac N Analog A13 All All 08720 69258 1 Bd Assy Frac N Analog Rebuilt Exchange A14 All All 08720 60179 1 Assy Frac Digital 14 08720 69179 1 Assy Frac Digital Rebuilt E xchange 15 08753 60098 1 Assy PreRegulator A15 All All 08753 69098 1 Assy PreRegulator Rebuilt Exchange A53 All All 5086 7583 1 Assy Low Band A53 All All 5086 6583 1 Assy Low Band Rebuilt Exchange A54 8722ET ES All 08722 60032 1 Assy YIG Oscillator 20 GHz To 40 GHz A55 8722ET ES All 08720 60082 1 Assy Y IG Oscillator 8720ET ES 2 4 GHz 20 GHz 55 8719 5 08719 60009 1 Assy YIG Oscillator 2 4 GHz To 13 5 GHz A56 All ES Models All 08720 60182 1 LED Board A57 All All 08720 60073 1 Assy Fixed Oscillator 13 8 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Replaceable Parts 8719ES 20ES 22ES Replaceable Part Listings RF Network Analyzers Reference Models Options HP Agilent Qty Description Designator Part Number A58 8719ET ES Standard 5086 7519 1 Assy M A D S 872
77. 18 fractional N analog A13 fractional N digital A14 with spectrum analyzer 7 15 fractional N digital A14 7 14 linevoltage selector switch fuse 5 8 open loop power 19 and 20 models 7 11 open loop power 22 models 7 12 operating temperature 5 12 operator s 4 7 PORT 1 4 8 PORT 2 4 8 post regulator A8 fuses and voltages 5 13 post regulator LED s 4 14 post regulator A8 5 9 post regulator A8 green LED 5 6 power supply 4 14 preregulator A15 LED green and red 5 6 pulse generator A52 with oscilloscope 7 19 R channel output 4 22 R sampler assembl y A64 7 9 R2 sampler assembly Option 400 7 9 rear panel LED s 4 14 receiver 4 21 reference board A12 7 13 REFLECTION port 4 8 sampler voltage 8 9 source 4 17 source output power 4 18 step attenuator A69 7 27 switch repeatability 4 25 TRANSMISSION port 4 9 VCO A14 with oscilloscope 7 16 connector care 1 6 connector repeatability cable 2 13 control voltage sampler assembly 7 9 controllers troubleshooting with 4 12 correction constants ADC offset test 48 3 1 analog bus test 44 3 8 IF amplifier test 47 3 9 initialize EEPROMs test 53 3 32 option numbers test 50 3 13 serial number test 49 3 11 source pretune test 43 3 6 CORRECTION CONSTANTS NOT STORED 10 34 CORRECTION TURNED OFF 10 34 covers removal of 14 6 CPU A7 board rear panel LED window 6 5 removal 14 20 troubleshooting 6 4 walking one pattern 6 11 CPU main description of 12 10 CPU A1
78. 20081 1 Front Panel A In to A65 W17 08722 20102 1 62 to Front Panel A Out W18 08722 20058 1 Front Panel R Channel to A24 W20 08720 20281 1 A24to A64 W25 08722 20056 1 A61to A62 W26 08722 20057 1 A60to A63 W27 08722 20074 1 A74 to A60 W28 08722 20073 1 74 to A61 W29 08722 20072 1 A69 to A74 W32 08722 20069 1 A58 to A69 W38 08722 20130 1 58 to A75 W50 08720 20278 1 A72 to A23 W51 08720 20279 1 A23 to A24 W52 08722 20024 3 External Link 13 42 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Replaceable Parts 8719ES 20ES 22ES Replaceable Part Listings RF Network Analyzers Ref Desig Options HP Agilent Qty Description Part Number W54 08722 20132 1 23 to Front Panel R Channel OUT 8722E S Option 089 012 W32 51 A69 W18 W29 W28 A74 W27 A61 A60 W52 Places Service Guide W22 W25 W26 A24 W51 A7 A17 W20 A64 A65 W54 W16 A52 A98 A23 15 50 66 W17 sb571e 13 43 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Part Listings 8719ET 20ET 22ET 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Bottom Assemblies and Cables for 8722E S Option 089 007 012 Ref Desig Options HP Agilent Qty Description Part Number A7 08720 60253 1 CPU Repair Kit A7 08720 69253 1 CPU Rep
79. 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Information on This Chapter Use this procedure only if you have read Chapter 4 Start Troubleshooting Here This chapter is divided into two sections to address the following types of problems Incorrect power levels Phase lock error Begin with the flowchart Source Troubleshooting Flowchart on page 7 3 7 2 Service Guide 8719 20 22 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Source Troubleshooting Flowchart START HERE RETURN ISOLATE FAULTY GROUP SECTION PHASE LOCK POWER NOT BAND RELATED 7 YES BROADBAND BAND ERROR IN SPEC PHASE LOCK RELATED PROBLEMS 2 CHECK RF PATH PERFORM OUTPUT POWER POWER LINEARITY RAWOFFSET CORCONST SAMPLER CALIBRATION PERFORM REFERENCE ASSEMBLY VCO TUNE ADJUSTMENT YES SAMPLER CONTROL SAMPLER CONTROL AND BIAS VOLTAGES AND BIAS VOLTAGES SWAP R SAMPLER 17 SAMPLER ASSEMBLY YES REPLACE R SAMPLER REPLACE CABLE OR CONNECTOR FROM 17 A64 TRACE BACKTO FIND LOSSAND REPLACE DEFECTIVE COMPONENT NO YES Service Guide Source Troubleshooting Source Troubleshooting Flowchart BROADBAND POWER PROBLEM YES CHECK RF ASSEMBLIES REPLACE A9 FOR NO BAD CONTROLVOLTAGE CHECK AND OR PLACE A8 FOR BAD BIAS VOLTAGES sb585e Source Troubleshooting 8719ET 20ET 22ET Assembly R
80. 22ES RF Network Analyzers General Information Maintenance Clean the cabinet using a dry or damp cloth only WARNING To prevent electrical shock disconnect the analyzer from mains before cleaning Use a dry cloth or one slightly dampened with water to clean the external case parts Do not attempt to clean internally 15 2 Service Guide 8719 20 22 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Safety and Regulatory Information General Information Assistance Product maintenance agreements and other customer assistance agreements are available for Agilent Technologies products For any assistance contact your nearest Agilent Technologies Sales and Service Office Shipment for Service If you are sending the instrument to Agilent Technologies for service ship the analyzer to the nearest Agilent service center for repair including a description of any failed test and any error message Ship the analyzer using the original or comparable antistatic packaging materials Table 15 1 Agilent Technologies Sales and Service Offices Online assistance www agilent com find assist United States tel 1 800 452 4844 Latin America tel 305 269 7500 fax 305 269 7599 Canada td 1877 894 4414 fax 905 282 6495 Europe tel 31 20 547 2323 fax 431 20 547 2390 Australia tel 1 800 629 485 fax 461 3 9210 5947 New Zealand td 0 800 738 378 fax 464 4 495 8950 J apan
81. 25V a gt 5 gt 5VDSENSE 17 8 i I i vevepu 5 0 _ 5VCPU a x 1 1 5105 GNDA 48 49 1 1 1 410V BIAS 282 580 H ii a 18V 3 4 VER FILTER REG 15V gt 1 gt GNDD 2223 RET CPU e zA L LINE POWER A gt 3 gt 52 537 1 Use x 1 SWITCH C0 e nee TP11 RECTIFIER ee d T 6V LINE At15W1P1 1 A8J2 ee 25V NEUTRAL 94 gt 11 8 78 lt T 7 5V i NC gt 12 S TP8 1 1 1 d T 5VU GROUND 4 I i FILTER REG lt 15VA 1 TP2 i M AGND I 1 9 OVER 18V m 1 I CURRENT C925 39 8V 9 10 lt FILTER o REG lt 5 2V b av al i fo 4 Lg SHUTDOWN CD gt 5 L i i 1 CIRCUITRY 97 gt gt 6 a g TP5 I 1 ESHON 18V 56 lt e FILTER ono REG 15V oa Y I TP 5 X NORMALLY ON 1 A17 1 P T TP6 NC i MOTHER DRIVE HEE lt 12 6V pp 8V C36 gt 8 5 I POARD 4 470 STATUS SHUTDOWN SIGNALS C98 gt 10 zd i lt 3 lt 51819 e lt 5VDSP EXCESSIVE CURRENT C955 gt 9 an 1 1o Xj i OVER VOLTAGE LINE 352 So d 4 I 5VD UNDER VOLTAGE LINE RECTIFIER 1 2 22 23 FILTER AMBIENT TEMP
82. 37V 2 5V A10 GND 1 W46 FWD 0 25 GH AN 21222 de ina 7 ee amp j A 10MHz PLL FROM OC vasi o 49 l J1 E PRECISION SOURCE 3 ul n 10 D 1 I lt C z REFERENCE CONTROL ist IF 10 MHz 2 PRETUNE MAIN YIG1 i 1A66BSAMPLER BOARD SWPERR 71 CAL F 30 MHz E PL REF 1 MHz 1 25520 GHz a 1 W81 _ C Ay 2 PRETUNE B we y 521 XZ z RED LED AMBER LED DAC Q a 72 S22 w23 pie a UNLOCK PULL DOWN Ll L 2 2 S 22 32 l Lll 2 gt o GO D SRC TUNE gt 0 05 2 55 GHz SET DAC HIGH amp MIDBAND A12 REFERENCE 1 17 PL REF I LOWBAND 3200 4095 READ gt 0 dBm M l SET DAC LOWBAND B SRC TUNE 3750 4095 READ gt 5 dBm EXT I 10 MHz SET DAC LOWBAND 5 REF IN i o VCXO 1MHz 4000 READ gt 8 dBm PEN 7 G m emm zx VEXO L WB 400kHz TOA13 38 GHz SRC TUNE on 16 kHz 1 100kHz C3 FOR HIGH MID amp LOWBAND J2 READS gt 5 dBm i gb J3 READ gt 19 dBm I VCXO ADJ I _ SIGNAL SEPARATION 0 vas TUNE 1A62 DIRECTIONAL COUPLER 16 2nd LO 9996MHz a 1 vco e 54 w30 a 39 984 MHz STANDARD X
83. 4 11 Ir Using an External DISE usaba 4 11 Troubleshooting Systems with Multiple Peripherals 4 12 Troubleshooting Systems with Controllers 4 12 Steal Faulby Group LG 4 13 Powe Supp CHEE cag dob PE p P da 4 14 Check the Rear Panel LEDS 345523486655 Re SE LEM BER ISIE ee EROS 4 14 Check the Post Regulator AB LEDS HC rer RE dee RR Edu PER 4 14 Digital Control Chek Evae sau EEG HE RE E ERR 4 15 Observe the Power Up Sequence u ur C MC AC ah 4 15 Verity Internal Teste a 4 16 SOUS quqku puka Job dedos 4 17 Phase Lock Error Messages 255425566853 CURR Geb TERRE 4 17 Check Source DUNC POA uyu u AH X ke EROR RE 4 18 No Oscilloscope or Power Meter Try the ABUS 4 20 Focal uer C PIBOE ee bdo a ee ee re eee ere ee 4 21 Checking the R Channel Output and ES 5 4 22 Checking the Channel Output ES 4 23 Checking th
84. 54 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Replaceable Parts 8719ES 20ES 22ES Replaceable Part Listings RF Network Analyzers Ref Desig Options HP Agilent Qty Description Part Number W53 08720 20281 1 A24 to A61 W54 08722 20132 1 A23to Front Panel R Channel Out W56 08722 20135 1 A74to A75 W77 08720 20103 1 A73 to A67 8722E S Option 400 012 089 A51 A71 W18 A70 W41 39 74 W56 W40 W32 w38 A61 W37 A60 Service Guide W14 W26 W25 24 51 7 17 w53 W53 A65 W54 W16 A52 A99 A23 W15 W50 W77 W17 W52 3 Places sb577e 13 55 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Part Listings 8719ET 20ET 22ET 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Bottom Assemblies and Cables 8719E T and 8720ET Standard Ref Desig Options HP Agilent Qty Description Part Number 7 08720 60253 1 CPU Repair Kit A7 08720 69253 1 CPU Repair Kit Rebuilt Exchange A17 08720 60264 1 Motherboard A28 11742A 1 Blocking Capacitor A52 5086 7456 1 Assy Pulse Generator A52 5086 6456 1 Assy Pulse Generator Rebuilt E xchange A64 A65 A66 5086 7614 3 Assy Sampler A64 A65 A66 5086 6614 3 Assy Sampler Rebuilt Exchange A98 08720 60121 1 Frequency Converter A98 08720 69121 1 Frequency Converter Rebuilt E xchange W30 08720 20026 1 A62 to 65 W74 08720 20266 1 W72 to A64
85. 83 1 Order the model number 8719ESU 8720E SU 8722ESU plus the upgrade option designation 2 Order the model number 8719ETU 8720ETU 8722ETU plus the upgrade option designation 13 88 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Replaceable Parts 8719ES 20ES 22ES Replaceable Part Listings RF Network Analyzers Description HP Agilent Part Number GPIB Cables GPIB Cable 1M 3 3 FT 10833A GPIB Cable 2M 6 6 FT 10833B GPIB Cable 4M 13 2 FT 10833C GPIB Cable 0 5M 1 6 FT 10833D Touch up Paint Dove Gray for use on frame around front pane and painted portion of 6010 1146 handles French Gray for use on side top and bottom covers 6010 1147 Parchment White for use on rack mount flanges rack support flanges and 6010 1148 front panes ESD Supplies Adjustable Antistatic Wrist Strap 9300 1367 5 Ft Grounding Cord for wrist strap 9300 0980 2x 4 Ft Antistatic Table Mat With 15 Ft Ground Wire 9300 0797 Antistatic Heel Strap for useon conductivefloors 9300 1126 Keyboard Overlay and Rack Mount Parts Keyboard Overlay for external keyboard 08753 80131 System Rack Kit Also Order The Following 85043D Filler Panel 7 Inch 40104A Rack Mount Flange Kit for instruments with handles 5063 9223 Rack Mount Flange Kit includes instrument handles 5063 9236 Rack Mount Flange Kit instrument handles not included 5063 9216 Front Handle 5063 9229 Serv
86. 8719ET 20ET 22ET Power Supply Theory 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Voltage Indications the Green LEDs Thenine green LEDs along the top edge of the A8 assembly are on in normal operation to indicate the correct voltage is present in each supply If they are off or flashing a problem is indicated For troubleshooting information refer to Chapter 5 Power Supply Troubleshooting Shutdown Circuit The shutdown circuit is triggered by overcurrent overvoltage undervoltage or overtemperature It protects the instrument by causing the regulated voltage supplies to be shut down It also sends status messages to the A7 CPU totrigger warning messages on the analyzer display The voltages that are not shut down are the 5VD and 5VCPU digital supplies from the preregulator the fan supplies and the display supplies The shutdown circuit can be disabled momentarily for troubleshooting purposes by using a jumper to connect the SDIS line 4 to ground Variable Fan Circuit and Air Flow Detector The fan power is derived directly from the 18 V and 18 V supplies from the A15 preregulator The fan is not fused sothat it will continueto provide airflow and cooling when the instrument is otherwise disabled If overheating occurs the main instrument supplies are shut down and thefan runs at full speed An overtemperature status message is sent tothe A7 CPU to initiate a warning message on the analyzer display The fan also runs
87. 8722ET ES 1619001533 085 1619001534 007 1619001535 089 1619001536 400 1619001537 012 1619001538 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 for all of the unprotected options that you want to enable or disable 6 After you have entered all of the instrument s hardware options press the following PRESET FACTORY SERVICE MENU FIRMWARE REVISION 7 View the analyzer display for the listed options 8 If more correction constant routines are going to be performed return the A7 Switch tothe NRM position and perform the EEPROM Backup Disk Procedure on page 3 33 Service Guide 3 15 Adjustments and Correction Constants 8719ET 20ET 22ET Unprotected Hardware Option Correction Constants 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers In Case of Difficulty f any of theinstalled options are missing from the list return to step 2 and reenter the missing option s e Iftheanalyzer continues to fail contact the nearest Agilent Technologies sales or service office 3 16 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Adjustments and Correction Constants 8719ES 20ES 22ES Output Power Adjustments RF Network Analyzers Output Power Adjustments This procedure instructs you how to set the output power of your network analyzer across the frequency bands by adjusting potentiometers on the source interface board A59 Required Equipment and Tools 2 8719ET ES Equipment Description 8720ET ES 8722ET ES H
88. 8830 0024 Adapter 2 4 mm f to f N A 11903B Adapter 3 5 mm f to Type N f part number 1250 1745 N A Antistatic Wrist Strap part number 9300 1367 Antistatic Wrist Strap Cord part number 9300 0980 Static control Table Mat and Earth part number 9300 0797 Ground Wire Network Analyzer warmup ti me 30 minutes Spectrum Analyzer warmup time 30 minutes FM Sideband Adjustment 100 kHz Spurs 1 The object of this test is to make the spur levels for all 3 frequencies equal Connect the equipment as in Figure 3 11 3 44 Service Guide 8719 20 22 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Figure 3 11 Test Setup for Sideband Adjustment 50Q Coax BNC Adjustments and Correction Constants API Spur Avoidance and 100 kHz FM Sideband Adjustment NETWORK ANALYZER Ext REF Input 10 MHz REF In Out SPECTRUM ANALYZER 50Q Type N Cable Assembly Direct Connection sb527e 2 Set the spectrum analyzer measurement parameters to the values in Table 3 6 Table 3 6 Spectrum Analyzer Setup Values Parameter Value Reference Level 0 dBm Scale 10 dB division Attenuator ATTN 10 dB Video Bandwidth VBW 1kHz Resolution Bandwidth RBW 300 Hz Span 100 Hz 3 On the spectrum analyzer press FREQ Center FREQ and enter the spectrum analyzer frequency from 1 from Table 3 7 press MHZ Table 3 7 Frequency Inputs Frequency Network Analyzer Fr
89. A12 REFERENCE A 2nd LO 9 996 MHz Samplers and Second Converters i gt w sb624d Each input signal goes to a sampler and then to the second converter assembly R A and B that down converts the signal to a fixed 4 kHz 2nd IF The 1st LO signal is a comb of harmonics of the synthesizer signal produced by a step recovery diode in the A52 pulse generator Refer to Source Group Theory on page 12 13 for details A64 A65 A66 A67 Option 400 Samplers The signal from the source is mixed with the 1st LO harmonics in the samplers One of the harmonic signals is 10 MHz above the desired frequency The mixing products are filtered leaving only the difference between that harmonic and the source frequency This fixed 10 MHz signal 1st IF is calculated as follows Fip N XFyco Fs where N is the harmonic number 12 24 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Theory of Operation 8719ES 20ES 22ES Receiver Theory RF Network Analyzers Part of the 1st IF signal from the R sampler is fed back to the A11 phase lock assembly to complete the source phase locked loop The 1st IF from all three samplers goes to the corresponding second converters The A67 sampler is only used in option 400 instruments and is only functional during measurements with a TRL calibration 2nd LO Signal The stable 2nd LO signal is produced in the 12 reference assembly by phase lo
90. AS W60 m w59 A98 wor 52 W69 A66 A70 w17 W14 w65 A24 w51 A23 W66 w50 52 6 Places sb560e Service Guide 13 21 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Part Listings 8719ET 20ET 22ET 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Bottom Assemblies and Cables for 8719E S and 8720E S Option 400 Ref Options HP Agilent Qty Description Desig Part Number A7 08720 60253 1 CPU Repair Kit A7 08720 69253 1 CPU Repair Kit Rebuilt E xchange A17 08720 60264 1 Motherboard A51 400 08720 60275 1 Bd Assy Test Set Interface A52 5086 7456 1 Assy Pulse Generator A52 5086 6456 1 Assy Pulse Generator Rebuilt E xchange A60 A61 5086 7458 2 Bias Tee A60 A61 5086 6458 2 Bias Tee Rebuilt E xchange A64 A65 5086 7614 4 Assy Sampler A66 A67 A64 A65 5086 6614 4 Assy Sampler Rebuilt E xchange A66 A67 A70 A71 33326 60006 2 Attenuator 0 55 dB 74 5086 7975 1 Switch Splitter A74 5086 6975 1 Switch Splitter Rebuilt Exchange A99 08720 60124 1 Frequency Converter A99 08720 69124 1 Frequency Converter Rebuilt E xchange W22 08720 20033 1 A63 to 66 W25 08720 20259 1 A61 to 62 W26 08720 20025 1 A60 to A63 W30 08720 20026 1 A62 to A65 W32 08720 20173 1 A58 to A69 W36 08720 20312 1 A72 to A64 W37 08720 20136 1 A71 to A60 W38 08720 20145 1 A70 to A61 W39 08720 20169 1 A74 to A70 W40 08720 20168 1 A74 to A71 W41 08
91. Assembly Converter Ror 1 internal NA A64 A6 R2 Option 400 internal NA A67 A6 A 1 A62 A65 A4 B 2 A63 A66 A5 Assembly Replacement Sequence The following steps show the sequence to replace an assembly in the network analyzer Step 1 Identify the faulty group Begin with Chapter 4 Start Troubleshooting H ere Follow up with the appropriate troubleshooting chapter that identifies the faulty assembly Step 2 Order a replacement assembly Refer to Chapter 13 Replaceable Parts Step 3 Replace the faulty assembly and determine what adjustments are necessary Refer to Chapter 14 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures Step 4 Perform the necessary adjustments Refer to Chapter 3 Adjustments and Correction Constants Step 5 Perform the necessary performance tests Refer to Chapter 2 System Verification and Performance Tests 8 2 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Receiver Troubleshooting 8719ES 20ES 22ES All Signal Paths Look Abnormal RF Network Analyzers All Signal Paths Look Abnormal For the receiver to operate properly the digital IF A10 and 2nd converter assemblies must receive signals from the reference assembly A12 Those signals are the 2nd LO and the 4 MHz signal 2nd LO Check To check the 2nd LO signal with the analog bus counter press the following PRESET FACTORY SERVICE MENU ANALOG BUS ON ANALOG IN Aux Input COUNTER ANALOG BUS
92. Assy Pulse Generator A52 5086 6456 1 Assy Pulse Generator Rebuilt E xchange A60 A61 5086 7484 2 Bias Tee A60 A61 5086 6484 2 Bias Tee Rebuilt E xchange A64 A65 A66 5086 7614 3 Assy Sampler A64 A65 A66 5086 6614 3 Assy Sampler Rebuilt E xchange A69 33326 60006 1 Attenuator 0 55 dB 74 85331 60033 1 Transfer Switch A98 08720 60121 1 Frequency Converter A98 08720 69121 Frequency Converter Rebuilt E xchange W18 08722 20058 1 Front Panel R Channel IN to A24 W20 08720 20281 1 A24 to A64 W22 08720 20033 1 A63 to A66 W25 08722 20056 1 A61 to 62 W26 08722 20057 1 A60 to A63 W27 08722 20078 1 74 to A60 W28 08722 20077 1 A74 to A61 W29 08722 20076 1 A69 to A74 W30 08720 20026 1 A62 to A65 W32 08722 20069 1 A58 to A69 W50 08720 20278 1 72 toA23 W51 08720 20279 1 A23 to A24 W52 08722 20024 1 External Link W54 08722 20132 1 A23 to Front Panel R Channel OUT 13 38 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Replaceable Parts 8719ES 20ES 22ES Replaceable Part Listings RF Network Analyzers 8722E S Option 089 A7 A17 W32 w20 A51 A64 A69 w29 A65 W18 W54 A74 W30 W28 A61 A52 W27 A98 W52 A60 W22 W25 W26 A24 w51 A23 W22 W50 A66 sb569e Service Guide 13 39 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Part Listings 8719ET 20ET 22ET 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Bottom Assemblies and Cables for 8722E S Option 089 007
93. CPU Repair Kit Rebuilt Exchange A17 08720 60264 1 Motherboard A52 5086 7456 1 Assy Pulse Generator A52 5086 6456 1 Assy Pulse Generator Rebuilt Exchange A64 A65 A66 5086 7614 3 Assy Sampler A64 A65 A66 5086 6614 3 Assy Sampler Rebuilt E xchange A98 08720 60121 1 Frequency Converter A98 08720 69121 1 Frequency Converter Rebuilt E xchange W30 08720 20026 1 A62 to A65 W74 08720 20266 1 W72 to A64 W78 08722 20125 1 A21 to A66 13 60 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Replaceable Parts 8719ES 20ES 22ES Replaceable Part Listings RF Network Analyzers 8722ET Standard A7 A64 A65 W74 S W30 A98 O 0 LJ W78 A17 W78 A66 sb580e Service Guide 13 61 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Part Listings 8719ET 20ET 22ET 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Bottom Assemblies and Cables 8722E T Option 004 Ref Desig Options HP Agilent Qty Description Part Number 7 08720 60253 1 CPU Repair Kit A7 08720 69253 1 CPU Repair Kit Rebuilt Exchange A17 08720 60264 1 Motherboard A51 08720 60274 1 Bd Assy Test Set Interface A52 5086 7456 1 Assy Pulse Generator A52 5086 6456 1 Assy Pulse Generator Rebuilt E xchange A64 A65 A66 5086 7614 3 Assy Sampler A64 A65 A66 5086 6614 3 Assy Sampler Rebuilt E xchange A69 33326 60006 2 Attenuator 0 55 dB A98 08720 60121 1 Frequency Converter A98 08720 69
94. Check the Temperature and 2 6 Clean and Gauge ConnectorS ca u s u sss ERE WR 2 7 perform the tera TEE 5 2 7 Procedure to Perform Operators 2 8 Check the Test Port Cables seed Ede 2 9 Systemi Velim Gallon voa ERE REGE E RE IIR idR 2 15 General DECORE LOU au peace qe Pa ama 2 16 E guirprient Lnibalizalloni a xeu 5555 2 20 Measurement CSD ad Fed INK de RON EOI dede Eb C e IRS b e e ae ido Cae a CC 2 22 Verification Device Measurements 2 25 Performing the Tests AC CCEA i eed EXT ee Ebene ead 2 26 If the System Fails the Verification Test 2 30 Interpreting the Verification Results 2 31 PSI TOCHHOEICO TES RETE uya arc ith oi CETERI EP d Rd PEERS 2 33 Frequency Accuracy Performance gt 44 gt ERA 2 34 Level Accuracy Performance Test a sur REACH PARA d 2 36 Contents v Contents Source Linearity Performance Test 2 38 Dynamic R
95. Control Source Receiver Accessories Descriptions of these groups are provided in Chapter 12 Theory of Operation IMPORTANT Thechecks in the following pages must be performed in the order presented If one of the procedures fails it is an indication that the problem is in the functional group checked Go to the troubleshooting information for the indicated group to isolate the problem to the defective assembly Figure4 2 Troubleshooting Organization ISOLATE FAULTY GROUP EST PORT FREQUENCY AND POWER DISPLAY FRONT PANE SELF TEST MEASURED DATA MEASUREMENT ERRORS RECE I VER ACCESSORIES POWER DIGITAL CONTROI SUPPLIES Mq W ASSEMBLY LEVEL TROUBLESHOOTING 546454 Service Guide 4 13 Start Troubleshooting Here 8719ET 20ET 22ET Power Supply Check 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Power Supply Check Check the Rear Panel LEDs Switch on the analyzer and look directly at the rear panel Notice the condition of the two LEDs on the preregulator A15 See Figure 4 3 Theupper red LED should be off Thelower green LED should be on Figure 4 3 A15Preregulator LEDs RED LED GREEN LED NE VOLTAGE NORMALLY OFF NORMALLY ON SELECTOR SWITCH sb618d Check the Post Regulator A8 LEDs Remove the analyzer s top cover Switch on the power nspect the
96. DAC 3650 to about 1 1 GHz DAC 4095 troubleshoot the cabling and components from 5 3 25 3 for 8722ET ES tothe R sampler assembly 64 2 refer to the overall block diagram at the end of Chapter 4 If less than 5 dBm at 5 25 for Agilent 8722ET ES the problem isin the A53 mixer amp A57 fixed oscillator A5 source switch or A6 Source switch or A25 on 8722ET ES models 3 Measure power at the A53 end of cable W6 f power is greater than 8 dBm A6 source switch and A55 low band YIG are good f power is less than 8 dBm continue with step 4 4 Measure power at the A6 end of cable W7 f power is greater than 48 5 dBm A6 source switch is good Replace A55 YIG 5 Measure power on the A5 source switch end of W42 fthe power is greater than 5 dBm replace A5 source switch Ifthe power is less than 5 dBm the problem is the A53 mixer amp or the A57 fixed oscillator Replace the A53 first and if the problem persists replace the A57 Mid Band Problems 8722ET E S Only 1 Press the following SERVICE MENU SERVICE MODES SRC ADJUST MENU DAC NUM MID BAND SRC tune in the mid band is capable of tuning the instrument from about 2 4 to 5 GHz Loss of lock in mid band only may likely to a bad cable or connection 2 Thefollowing components may be at fault Refer tothe overall block diagram at the end of Chapter 4 for information A5 source switch
97. DAC Q W42 w m m w W49 S22 W23 a UNLOCK PULL DOWN Se HERES ee gt L ate 5 am SS mm mus sus s SS SRC TUNE S gt ee ee SET DAC HIGH amp MIDBAND 5 205 255 GHz 3200 4095 READ gt 0 dBm 2 A12 REFERENCE 1017 PL REF LOWBAND STSD 098 READS M din v I aide m mus a e 10 MHz SET DAC 4 LOWBAND Q wit 5 REF IN v 2 4000 READ gt 8 dBm 5 1 9403 vcxo 1 Mus 40 MHz ow 4MHzTOA10 WZ NJ Ce i I we wo kHz TO A13 SRC TUNE I 40 MH KETTEN f 14 100kHz SET DAC TO 4000 2 FOR HIGH MID amp LOWBAND I J2 READS gt 5 dBm 2 Q i J3 READ gt 19 dBm n I VCXO ADJ L m ee 2 _ me SIGNAL SEPARATION STANDARD AND 004 l A62 DIRECTIONAL I COUPLER 16 2nd LO 9 996 MHz f J e 4 mr W30 STANDARD SCT M 39 984 MHz bee e eee L J ce REFLECTION I W76 LEGEND A69 STEP ATTN Cy IE m MEASURE W78 ABPOST REGULATOR gen SEAR PANEL RESTART S eS NOTAS b 1 2 FRONT P
98. Enter the power level from Table 2 12 and press DONE Table 2 12 Power Levels for the Frequency Segment Values Model ES Models 8719ES and 8720E S 5 8719ES and 8720 5 Option 007 10 8722ES 50MHzto 20 GHz 5 20 0 GHz to 40 05 GHz 10 8722b S Option 007 50M Hz to 20 GHz 0 20 0 GHz to 40 05 GHz 5 ET Models 8719ET and 8720ET 5 8722 50M Hz to 20 GHz 0 20 0 GHz to 40 05 GHz 5 2 42 Service Guide 8719 20 22 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers System Verification and Performance Tests Performance Tests 3 Repeat step 2 beginning with ADD to enter the values for the remaining frequency segments and power levels of your analyzer Refer to Table 2 13 for the frequency segment values Table 2 13 Frequency Segment Values Segment Start Stop Number Frequency Frequency of Points All Models 1 50 MHz 50 000101 MHz 11 All Models 2 839 999899 MHz 840 MHz 11 All Models 3 0 84 GHz 8 GHz 201 8719ET ES 4 8 GHz 13 51 GHz 101 8720ET ES 4 8 GHz 20 05 GHz 151 8722ET ES 4 8 GHz 20 GHz 151 8722ET ES 5 20 GHz 40 05 GHz 201 4 When all of the frequency segments have been entered press the following LIST FREQ ALL SEGS SWEEP DONE Test Setup 5 Toset up the PORT 1 measurement REFLECTION measurement on ET Models press the following For ES Models Trans FWD 521 BR LIN MAG IF BW Scale Ref For ET Models
99. Error Term Descriptions 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Transmission Tracking ETF and ETR Transmission tracking is the difference between the frequency response of the reference path including R input and the frequency response of the transmission test path including or B input while measuring transmission The response of the test port cables is included These terms are characterized by measuring the transmission 521 512 of the thru configuration during the measurement calibration Note that coupler response is included in this error term Typically this appears as a roll off below 500 MHz which is typically 18 dB at 100 MHz and 25 dB at 50 MHz Significant System Components arge variations in this error term probably indicate a problem in the reference signal path if both ETF and ETR are bad or in the A or B input path The thru cable also has an effect on transmission tracking Affected Measurements All transmission measurements are affected by transmission tracking errors Figure 11 6 Typical ETF ETR CHI MEM 106 5 dB REF 8 dB ETF ETR PRm START 050 000 GHz STOP 40 050 666 000 GHz 11 16 Service Guide 12 Theory of Operation Theory of Operation 8719ET 20ET 22ET Information on This Chapter 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Information on This Chapter This chapter provides a general description of the sy
100. FIGWIISEE 7 3 Assembly Replacement 5 7 4 Start Troublesnogting Here ass ig EEG UO R 7 5 Power Not within case er heehee sales DEERE RES Dd 7 6 Phase Lock Error Message 7 6 Broadband Phase Lock Problems OS uk 7 8 Swap IF Output Cables to Check R Sampler Assembly 64 7 9 Cheek Open LOOP Power 5 3 5 6 tera 7 11 Check Reference Board 12 asa s teu eaters OWE 7 13 Check Fractional N Digital A14 with ABUS 7 14 Check the Fractional N Analog A13 and Fractional N Digital A14 with a Spectrum BOLE dad dod THER ERS Pd E be das 7 15 Check the VCO A14 Range with Oscilloscope 7 16 Substituting Tuning Voltages to 7 16 Divideby N AIP Circuit Check iiie u eels ibd bees 7 17 Ald4to AI3 Digital Control Signals Check sisa na ALA C AC AR RR REP ERR 7 17 Pulse Generator 52 Check with Oscilloscope 7 19 Pulse Generator A52 Check with Spectrum
101. Figure 3 2 and then press the following PRESET FACTORY SERVICE MENU TESTS ADJUSTMENT TESTS EXECUTE TEST YES Figure 3 2 Source Pretune Correction Constants Setup NETWORK ANALYZER FREQUENCY COUNTER sb519e 3 When the prompt Set source to 2 345 GHz then continue appears usethe front panel knob to adjust the frequency of the analyzer sourceto within 5 MHz of 2 345 GHz Press CONTINUE when the frequency is set 4 For the 8722ET ES when the prompt Set source to 19 550 GHz appears on the display the continue prompt appears next Use the front panel knob to adjust the frequency of the analyzer source to within 5 MHz of 19 550 GHz Press CONTINUE when the frequency is set 3 6 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Adjustments and Correction Constants 8719ES 20ES 22ES Source Pretune Correction Constants Test 43 RF Network Analyzers 5 When Pretune Adj DONE is displayed press Preset 6 If no more correction constant routines are going to be performed return the A7 Switch tothe NRM position and perform the EEPROM Backup Disk Procedure on page 3 33 In Case of Difficulty If any error messages appear refer to Chapter 7 Source Troubleshooting or contact the nearest Agilent Technologies sales or service office Service Guide 3 7 Adjustments and Correction Constants 8719ET 20ET 22ET Analog Bus Correction Constants Test 44 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Analog Bus Correction Constants
102. Flowchart Preliminary Checks Troubleshooting Post Repair Matrix Adjustment Procedures Troubleshooting Post Repair Matrix Adjustment Procedures Troubleshooting Post Repair Matrix Adjustment Procedures System Verification Performance Tests sb532e Service Guide 2 5 System Verification and Performance Tests 8719ET 20ET 22ET Preliminary Tests 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Preliminary Tests CAUTION Use an antistatic work surface and wrist strap to lessen the chance of electrostatic discharge Required Equipment and Tools Equipment Description 8719 20 8722 Calibration K it 85052B 85056A RF Cable Set 85131F 85133F Verification Kit 85053B 85057B Check the Temperature and Humidity 1 Measure thetemperature and humidity of the environment and record the values in Table 2 14 Performance Test Record for All Models on page 2 46 The performance is specified at an ambient temperature of 23 3 C Therefore the environmental temperature must remain in the range of 20 C to 26 C Once the measurement calibration has been done the ambient temperature must be held to range of 1 C 2 Open the calibration and verification kits and place all the devices on top of the foam so they will reach room temperature The temperature of the devices is important because device dimensions and therefore the electrical characteristics change with temperatur
103. Fr Pan Diag Similar to 23 above but your rotate the front panel knob or presses the keys in any order This test displays the command the instrument received 25 ADC Hist Factory use only System Verification Tests Thesetests apply mainly to system level error corrected verification and troubleshooting Tests 26 to 30 are associated with the system verification procedure documented in Chapter 2 System Verification and Performance Tests Tests 31 to 42 facilitate examining the calibration coefficient arrays error terms resulting from a measurement calibration refer to Chapter 11 Error Terms 26 Sys Ver Init Recalls the initialization state for system verification from an analyzer verification disk in preparation for a measurement calibration It must be done before service internal tests 27 28 29 or 30 are performed 27 Ver Dev 1 Recalls verification limits from disk for verification device 1 in all applicable S parameter measurements It performs pass fail limit testing of the current measurement 28 Ver Dev 2 Same as 28 above for device 2 29 Ver Dev Same as 28 above for device 38 30 Ver Dev 4 Same as 28 above for device 4 31 42 Cal Coef 1 12 Copies error term data from a measurement calibration array to display memory A measurement calibration must be complete and active The definition of calibration arrays depends on the current calibration type After execution the memory is automatically di
104. Front Panel B Out W15 08720 20058 1 Front Panel B In to A66 W16 08720 20104 1 Front Panel A In to A65 W17 08720 20164 1 A62 to Front Panel A Out W18 08720 20105 1 Front Panel R In to A246 W25 08720 20259 1 A61to A62 W26 08720 20025 1 A60 to A63 W32 08720 20173 1 A58 to A69 W38 08720 20145 1 A70 to A61 W39 08720 20169 1 A74 to A70 W40 08720 20168 1 A74 to A71 W41 08720 20316 1 A74 to A73 W50 08720 20314 1 A72 to A23 W52 08720 20098 3 External Link W53 08720 20281 1 A24 to A64 w54 08720 20282 1 A23 to Front Panel R Channel Out W56 08720 20317 1 A74 to A72 13 28 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Replaceable Parts 8719ES 20ES 22ES Replaceable Part Listings RF Network Analyzers Ref Desig Options HP Agilent Qty Description Part Number W57 08720 20279 1 A23to A24 W77 08720 20315 1 A73to A67 8719E S and 8720E S Option 40040124089 w18 A71 A70 w37 W41 w39 A4 A61 W32 A60 Service Guide W14 W25 W26 W53 A24 A7 A17 A65 W16 0 A52 W77 A66 A99 w57 A23 W5 w50 w52 W17 3 Places sb5109e 13 29 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Part Listings 8719ET 20ET 22ET 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Bottom Assemblies and Cables for 8722E S Standard Ref Desig Options HP Agilent Qty Description Part Number
105. Guide 8719 20 22 Replaceable Parts 8719ES 20ES 22ES Replaceable Part Listings RF Network Analyzers 8719E S and 8720E S Standard and Option 007 A7 A64 A69 A65 W32 W29 W36 A74 W30 W28 A52 W27 W22 A61 W52 A60 W25 W26 A51 A17 A66 A98 sb553e Service Guide 13 13 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Part Listings 8719ET 20ET 22ET 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Bottom Assemblies and Cables for 8719E S and 8720E S Options 012 012 007 Ref Desig Options HP Agilent Qty Description Part Number A7 08720 60253 1 CPU Repair Kit A7 08720 69253 1 CPU Repair Kit Rebuilt E xchange A17 08720 60264 1 Motherboard A51 08720 60274 1 Bd Assy Test Set Interface A52 5086 7456 1 Assy Pulse Generator A52 5086 6456 1 Assy Pulse Generator Rebuilt E xchange A60 A61 5086 7458 2 Bias Tee A60 A61 5086 6458 2 Bias Tee Rebuilt E xchange A64 A65 A66 5086 7614 3 Assy Sampler A64 A65 A66 5086 6614 3 Assy Sampler Rebuilt E xchange A69 33321 60050 1 Attenuator 0 55 dB 74 012 007 08720 60006 1 Transfer Switch A74 012 5086 7642 1 Transfer Switch A74 012 5086 6642 1 Transfer Switch Rebuilt Exchange A98 08720 60121 1 Frequency Converter A98 08720 69121 1 Frequency Converter Rebuilt E xchange W14 08720 20154 1 A63 to Front
106. I I W36 INTERFACE A7CPU 1 2 19 GSP 1 18 DISPLAY O 1 10727 j Z 44 ee I w55 1 DIN KYBD PORT RS 232 PORT PARALLEL PORT GPIB PORT 7 22 DISPLAY 1 i 1 iau 75 ATTN Um INTERFACE INTERFACE INTERFACE INTERFACE INTERFACE CRYSTAL LD I ATTENUATORS X A gt DISPLAY 1 3 BON Vez e TOA64J2 CONTROL 1 gt DIGITAL VIDEO 1 LCD 2224 NTR TRANSFER SWITCH pj l i INTERFACE PALETTE I EET W52 Q Wik EEPROM ee gt POWERED DISK INTERFACE A72 BUFFER 1 A23 124 BIAS TO BIAS TEE S DRIVE I MAIN CPU SWITCH WITCH i i En ius ee MEMORY i S DIGITAL SIGNAL seit i cd j Q L lt 2 1 PROCESSOR r qi Wee r 1 5KV AC STARTUP 4 W50 W51 W53 ROM RAM 680V AC STEADY STATE MAIN RAM y 20 089 INTERCONNECT INVERTER ASSY gt ADC RED LED CONTROUREFRESH REG NORMAL FLASHING L L L TO A10 TO 51 TO A12 TO A11 sp510e 8722ES OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM FOR OPT 400 012 089 1D5 8719ET 8720ET OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM FOR STANDARD OPT 004
107. If it does not phase lock check the cable connections uU Zero and calibrate the power meter and connect the power sensor to PORT 1 REFLECTION port on the ET models 8 Press Preset FACTORY PRESET CWFREQ Ma 9 Press System SERVICE MENU TESTS EXECUTE TEST 10 For the location of the blanking adjustment refer to Figure 3 6 Adjust it to obtain the value indicated on the analyzer display 3 30 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Adjustments and Correction Constants 8719ES 20ES 22ES Blanking Adjustment Test 54 RF Network Analyzers 11 When the adjustment is complete press CONTINUE Figure 3 6 Location of Blanking Adjustment R80 R87 R88 R86 R70 R71 A59 R4 Blanking Source Interface sb525e In Case of Difficulty If you areunableto perform this adjustment refer to Chapter 7 Source Troubleshooting or contact the nearest Agilent Technologies sales or service office Service Guide 3 31 Adjustments and Correction Constants 8719ET 20ET 22ET Initialize 5 Test 53 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Initialize EEPROMs Test 53 This internal service test performs the following functions destroys all correction constants and all unprotected options initializes certain EEPROM address locations to zeroes replaces the display intensity correction constants with default values NOTE This routine will not alter the serial number or protected
108. MHz and below You should seethe signal drop approximately 2 5 dB above 120 MHz 6 Look for sidebands on the signal The signal should appear very clean without any sidebands present however you will observe source harmonics e f any sidebands do appear on the signal there could be a faulty A13 fractional N analog assembly f you see pieces of the signal dropping out possibly in steps when you aretuning the signal across the frequency range there could be a faulty A14 fractional N digital assembly Ifa dean signal appears across the entire frequency range you can assume that the A13 fractional N analog and the A14 fractional N digital assemblies are working correctly Service Guide 7 15 Source Troubleshooting 8719ET 20ET 22ET Broadband Phase Lock Problems 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Check the VCO A14 Range with Oscilloscope Connect an oscilloscope to A14TP 1 labeled VCO 2 yellow tabs rear multi pin connector 2 Press the following PRESET FACTORY SERVICE MENU SERVICE MODES FRACN ON 3 Vary the fractional N VCO frequency with the front panel knob 4 If the waveforms do not resemble Figure 7 3 at the frequencies indicated replace A14 The amplitude of the waveforms will vary from 3V to 10V p p Figure 7 3 VCO 2 Waveforms at A14TP1 120 MHz J s gt 00 nsec TII 180 MHz 260 240 MV 200 nsec sb634d
109. Network Analyzers Uncorrected Performance The following tables show typical performance without error correction RF cables are not used except as noted Related error terms should be within these values Table 11 3 8719ET E S and 8720 5 Uncorrected Port Performance Parameter and Option Frequency Range 0 05 to 0 5 GHz 0 5 to2 GHz 2108 GHz 8 to 20 GHz Directivity ES and ET models 24 dB 27 dB 21 dB 16 dB Source Match ES Standard 1 12 dB 12 dB 10 dB 8 dB Source Match ET Standard 16 dB 20 dB 14 dB 11dB Source Match ES Option 400 20 dB 20 dB 11 dB 10 dB Source Match ES Option 007 1 16 dB 20 dB 14 dB 11 dB Source Match ES Option 085 16 dB 18 dB 14 dB 8 dB Load Match ES Standard 1 22 dB 20 dB 12 dB 10 dB Load Match ET Standard 22 dB 22 dB 22 dB 17 dB Load Match ES Option 400 20 dB 17 dB 12 dB 10 dB Load Match ES Option 007 26 dB 24 dB 15 dB 12 dB Load Match ES Option 085 1 26 dB 24 dB 15 dB 10 dB Reflection Tracking 3 dB 3 dB 3 dB 3 dB ES and ET models 2 Transmission Tracking 3 dB 3 dB 3 dB 3 dB ES and ET models Crosstalk ES models 3 75 dB4 95 dB 91 dB 86 dB Crosstalk ET models 101 dB 101 dB 101 dB 93 1 Does not include the effect of the cable set on the test ports 2 Excludes roll off below 500 MHz which is typically 18 dB at 100 MHz and 25 dB at 50 MHz 3 Measurement Conditions normalized
110. Number ThefirstIF signal was detected at pretune but phase lock could not be acquired 7 Refer to Chapter 7 Source Troubleshooting Service Guide 10 37 Service Key Menus and Error Messages 8719ET 20ET 22ET Service Related Error Messages in Alphabetical Order 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers PHASE LOCK LOST Error Number Phase lock was acquired but then lost Refer to Chapter 7 Source 8 Troubleshooting POSSIBLE FALSE LOCK Error Number Phase lock has been achieved but the source may be phase locked to the wrong 6 harmonic of the synthesizer Perform the Source Pretune Correction Constants Test 43 on page 3 6 POWER METER INVALID Error Number The power meter indicates an out of range condition Check the test setup 116 POWER METER NOT SETTLED Error Number Sequential power meter readings not consistent Verify that the equipment 118 is set up correctly If so preset the instrument and restart the operation POWER SUPPLY HOT Error Number The temperature sensors on the 8 post regulator assembly have detected 21 over temperature condition The power supplies regulated on the post regulator have been shut down Refer to Chapter 5 Power Supply Troubleshooting POWER SUPPLY SHUT DOWN Error Number Oneor more supplies on the 8 post regulator assembly have been shut down 22 due to an over current over
111. P4 Min columns of the Source Linearity performance test record 2 40 Service Guide 8719 20 22 System Verification and Performance Tests 8719ES 20ES 22ES Performance Tests RF Network Analyzers Recording P Data 17 To record data for P data in the 50 MHz to 40 GHz band press MA 18 Repeat steps 2 through 7 of this section of the procedure 19 Enter the power value that is listed in the P gt row of Table 2 10 for the particular analyzer under test After you enter the value press 1 20 Wait for the analyzer to complete one full sweep 21 Press Marker Search SEARCH MAX 22 Read the marker value from the analyzer display and add 10 dB Record the calculated value in the 8722ET ES 0 05 40 GHz P Max column of the Source Linearity performance test record 23 Press SEARCH MIN 24 Read the marker value from the analyzer display and add 10 dB Record the calculated value in the 8722ET ES 0 05 40 GHz Pz Min column of the Source Linearity performance test record Recording Data 25 To record data for P data in the 50 MHz to 20 GHz band press MA 26 Press 27 Repeat steps 2 through 7 of this section of the procedure 28 Enter the power value that is listed in the P3 row of Table 2 10 for the particular analyzer under test After you enter the value press 1 29 Wait for analyzer to complete one full sweep 30 Press Marker Search SEARCH MAX 31 Rea
112. Passed 1 Press the following PRESET FACTORY SERVICE MENU TESTS INTERNAL TESTS EXECUTE TEST The display should indicate T 0 EST ALL INT PASS If your display shows the above message to step 2 Otherwise continue with this step If phase lock error messages are present this test may stop without passing or failing In this case continue with Source Check on page 4 17 If you have unexpected results or if the analyzer indicates a specific test failure refer to Chapter 5 Power Supply Troubleshooting The analyzer reports the first failure detected If the analyzer indicates failure but does not identify the test press to search for the failed test Then refer to Chapter 6 Digital Control Troubleshooting Likewise if the response to front panel or GPIB commands is unexpected troubleshoot the digital control group 2 Press EXECUTE TEST to perform the Analog Bus test 4 16 If this test fails refer to Chapter 6 Digital Control Troubleshooting If this test passes continue with Source Check on page 4 17 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Start Troubleshooting Here 8719ES 20ES 22ES Source Check RF Network Analyzers Source Check Phase Lock Error Messages The following list contains all phase lock error messages and their descriptions NO IF FOUND CHECK R INPUT LEVEL The first IF was not detected during the pretune stage of phase lock
113. R86 R87 R88 to their full clockwise position Figure 3 3 Location of Output Power Adjustment Potentiometers R80 R87 R88 R86 R7O R71 A59 R4 Blanking Source Interface sb525e Service Guide 3 19 Adjustments and Correction Constants Output Power Adjustments Adjusting the Mid Band Power 1 Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 3 4 Figure 3 4 Setup for Output Power Adjustments NETWORK ANALYZER Table 3 3 Output Power Adjustment Values a Power Sensor Direct Connection POWER METER Model Option Power A Power B dBm dBm 8719ES and 8720ES 3 0 8719 and 8720 2 8719ES Option 007 8720ES Option 007 8722 5 13 10 8722 8 5 8722 5 Option 007 2 Press the following POWER PWR RANGE MAN POWER RANGES RANGE 0 Enter the value from the Power column in Table 3 3 Press 1 3 20 8719ET 20ET 22ET 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Service Guide 8719 20 22 Adjustments and Correction Constants 8719ES 20ES 22ES Output Power Adjustments RF Network Analyzers 3 Press Sweep Setup CWFREQ Gn 4 switch the power DAC press the following SERVICE MENU SERVICE MODES SRC ADJ UST MENU POWER DAC ON 5 Adjust the mid band power offset resistor A59 R71 for a power meter reading that is equal to the value 0 1 dB listed under Power A in Table 3 3 6 Pr
114. Refer to Chapter 14 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures Step 4 Perform the necessary adjustments Refer to Chapter 3 Adjustments and Correction Constants Step 5 Perform the necessary performance tests Refer to Chapter 2 System Verification and Performance Tests Service Guide 4 3 Start Troubleshooting Here 8719ET 20ET 22ET Having Your Analyzer Serviced 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Having Your Analyzer Serviced The analyzer has a three year return to Agilent Technologies warranty If the analyzer should fail any of the following tests do the following 1 4 4 the local Agilent Technologies sales service office See Chapter 15 Safety Regulatory Information to identify your nearest office When you call the sales and service office have the following information prepared the model number of your analyzer theserial number of your analyzer e the firmware revision of your analyzer adescription of the problem including any failed tests or error messages Agilent Technologies will issue a Return Material Authorization RM A number and the address where the analyzer should be shipped Ship the analyzer using the original or comparable anti static packaging materials Service Guide 8719 20 22 Start Troubleshooting Here 8719ES 20ES 22ES Step 1 Initial Observations RF Network Analyzers Step 1 Initial Observations
115. SROTUNE DAC LOWBAND 5 EXT 1 SET DAC LOWBAND wit 9150 4095 READ 2 5 dBm 5 REF IN I vas VCXO 4000 READ gt 8 dBm OPT 007 CHANGES A74 REF vao 40 MHz MHz 4 MHz TO A10 A MECHANICAL TRANSFER N 2 1 1 5 Nos l 1 A57 SRC TUNE SWITCH p m TUNE 40MHz TERME Q ws ie CJ I FOR HIGH MID amp LOWBAND V 1 Pm SIGNAL SEPARATION STANDARD OPT 007 012 OPT 012 1 VCXO ADJ 100KHz L l 3 OUT a PORT 1 1 A62 DIRECTIONAL Ca lt C x T 1 cwm 0 X OS e SS eS 2 16 2nd LO 9 996 MHz A74 SOLID STATE Sa r l A69 STEP i TRANSFER SWITCH MN gt lt sm pee E UR ATTN wa 21 A I STANDARD 1 J1 B W28 V5 a Lol 7 28 A61 BIAS TEE i e L 012 W32 0 55dB 1 W29 4 I M 4 1 L 60 1 A PN LEGEND N a N 1 A63 DIRECTIONAL C telo e G 2 COUPLER 1 mis ag w52 MEROE 56 LOWER 511 821 waz L e 2 _ MEASURE A 2 A8 POST REGULATOR AIE IBAN RESTART DIGITAL BUS I
116. STOP 40 050 666 OGG GHz 9 6 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Accessories Troubleshooting 8719ES 20ES 22ES Inspect the Error Terms RF Network Analyzers Verify Shorts and Opens by Substitution Substitute a known good short and open of the same connector type and sex as the short and open in question If the devices are not from one of the standard calibration kits refer to your analyzer user s guide for information on how to usethe MODIFY CAL KIT function Set aside the short and open that are causing the problem 1 Perform an S11 one port calibration on ES models REFLECTION one port calibration on E T models using the known good short and open Then press SMITH CHART to view the devices in Smith chart format 2 Connect the known good short to PORT 1 REFLECTION port on E T models Press ELECTRICAL DELAY andturn the front panel knob to enter enough electrical delay so that the trace appears as a dot at the left side of the circle as in Figure 9 2 Replace the good short with the questionable short If the questionable short is good thetrace should appear very similar to the known good short 3 Connect the known good open to PORT 1 REFLECTION port on E T models Press ELECTRICAL DELAY andturn the front panel knob to enter enough electrical delay so that the trace appears as a dot at the right side of the circle as in Figure 9 3 on page 9 8 Replace the good open with the questionable open If the questionable open is good
117. Stores the serial number input in the Display Title menu in EEPROM This routine will not overwrite an existing serial number Option Cor Stores the option keyword required for Option 007 010 or any combination Sampler Cor Generates sampler correction constants to correct the frequency response Power Adj Measures power linearity at the test port It also generates correction constants to improve power linearity Init EEPROM Initializes certain EEPROM addresses to zeros and resets the display intensity correction constants tothe default values Also the test will not alter the serial number and correction constants for Option 007 or 010 Blanking Adj Allows adjustment of the output power level during retrace Service Guide 8719 20 22 Service Key Menus and Error Messages 8719ES 20ES 22ES Service Menus Internal Diagnostics RF Network Analyzers Display Tests Thesetests do not return a PASS FAIL condition All six amber front panel LE Ds will turn off if the analyzer passes The display will be blank press to exit the test If any of the six LEDs remain on the analyzer has failed 55 Disp cpu Checks to confirm that the CPU can communicate with the 19 GSP board The CPU writes all zeros all ones and then a walking one pattern to the GSP and reads them back If the test fails the CPU repeats the walking 1 pattern until is pressed 56 DRAM cell Tests the DRAM on GSP A19 by writing
118. VCO to 180 MHz press the following PRESET FACTORY SERVICE MENU SERVICE MODES FRACN TUNE ON SRC ADJ UST MENU DAC NUM LOW BAND Slowly turn the network analyzer front panel knob until the spectrum analyzer measures an output frequency of about 10 MHz e Ifthe 10 MHz signal appeared disregard the rest of this step and continue with the next step e fthe10MHz signal didn t appear connect the R sampler assembly IF OUTPUT J 3 tothe spectrum analyzer input Ifthe 10 MHz signal appears the R sampler assembly but not on the A sampler assembly the A sampler assembly is faulty f the 10 MHz signal didn t appear at either the A sampler assembly or the R sampler assembly connect the network analyzer s PORT 1 to the spectrum analyzer input Set the parameters on the spectrum analyzer center frequency 0 7 GHz span 200 MHz You should see a signal near the center frequency Ifa signalis present the A52 pulse generator is the most probable fault Reconnect the spectrum analyzer to the A sampler assembly 3 6 On the spectrum analyzer set these parameters center frequency 10 MHz Span 10 MHz e marker 10 MHz 7 20 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Source Troubleshooting 8719ES 20ES 22ES Broadband Phase Lock Problems RF Network Analyzers 7 Press DAC NUM HIGH BAND on the network analyzer and slowly turn the front panel Knob to get a signal of about 10 MHz displayed on the spect
119. W20 08720 20281 1 A24to A64 W32 08722 20086 1 A58to A69 W50 08720 20278 1 A72to A23 W51 08720 20279 1 A23to A24 W52 08722 20024 6 External Link W54 08722 20132 1 A23 to Front Panel R Channel Out W58 08722 20085 1 A69 to Rear Panel Source Out W59 08722 20084 1 Rear Panel Source to A74 W60 08722 20098 1 A74 to Front Panel A Switch W61 08722 20097 1 A74to Front Panel B Switch W65 08720 20158 1 A70to A65 W66 08720 20157 1 A71toA76 W68 08722 20099 1 Front Panel B In to A71 W69 08722 20101 1 Front Panel A In to A70 1 The A74 switch has 2 interconnect cables that not shown Part number is 08722 20010 13 46 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Replaceable Parts 8719ES 20ES 22ES Replaceable Part Listings RF Network Analyzers 8722E S Option 085 085 089 A7 w58 W66 17 A69 w20 71 A64 w32 w68 A51 w54 A65 w60 w59 A52 A74 W61 W65 w69 A98 W17 A70 wid W65 A24 W51 23 W66 WSO A66 w52 Places sb573e Service Guide 13 47 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Part Listings 8719ET 20ET 22ET 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Bottom Assemblies and Cables for 8722E S Option 400 Ref Desig Options HP Agilent Qty Description Part Number A7 08720 60253 1 CPU Repair Kit A7 08720 69253 1 CPU Repai
120. W78 08720 20254 1 A21 to A66 13 56 Service Guide 8719 20 22 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers 8719ET and 8720ET Standard Replaceable Parts Replaceable Part Listings LL E NI A64 d o o o U i A65 i i 9 o o oo k Md o8 os e o e 9 z 77 w30 Ele E A98 e fo lel el Jo 7 W78 sb578e Service Guide 13 57 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Part Listings 8719ET 20ET 22ET 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Bottom Assemblies and Cables 8719E T and 8720E T Option 004
121. W90 8719E T 004 SR 08720 20256 1 A23 to 62 8720ET W91 8722E T 004 SR 08722 20125 1 A69 to A62 Service Guide 13 71 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Part Listings Front Panel Assembly Inside 8719ET 20ET 22ET 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Ref Models Options HP Agilent Part Qty Description Desig Number 1 All All 08753 00150 1 Display Hold Down 2 All All 2090 0386 1 Display Lamp 3 All All 08720 0094 4 Display Glass Clips 4 All All 1000 0995 1 Display Glass 5 All All 08720 00096 2 Gasket 6 All All 2190 0067 1 Washer Lk 256 2950 0006 1 Nut Hex 1 4 32 1510 0038 1 Ground Post 7 All ES STD 089 08720 60305 1 Front Panel Frame without nameplate 7 All ES 012 08720 60306 1 Front Panel Frame without nameplate 7 All ES 085 08720 60307 1 Front Panel Frame without nameplate 7 All ES 012 085 08720 60308 1 without nameplate 8 All All E 4400 40003 1 RPG Knob Front Round Knob 9 All All 1990 1864 1 RPG Includes Cable And H ardware 10 All All 08720 40016 1 Flubber K eypad 11 All All 0515 0430 9 Screw Sm 3 0 6 Cwpntx 12 All All 0515 0665 4 Screw Smm 3 0 14 Cwpntx 13 All All 0515 0372 3 Screw Smm 3 0 8 Cwpntx 14 All All 1400 1439 2 Cable Clips Inverter Cable 15 All All 08753 20948 1 Cover for Inverter 16 All All 8120 8842 1 Ribbon Cable BR A2 to A20 17
122. amplitude of the A or B IF signal Turning this ON switches out both the A and B attenuation circuits they cannot be switched independently Be aware that input signal levels above 30 dBm at the sampler input will saturate the ADC and cause measurement errors switches in both of the A10 IF attenuators for checking the A10 IF gain amplifier circuits Small input signals will appear noisy and raise the apparent noise floor of the instrument allows you to store the correction constants that reside in non volatile memory EEPROM onto a disk Correction constants improve instrument performance by compensating for specific operating variations due to hardware limitations refer to Chapter 3 Adjustments and Correction Constants Having this information on disk is useful as a backup in case the constants are lost dueto a CPU board failure Without a disk backup the correction constants can be regenerated manually although the procedures will take longer 10 19 Service Key Menus and Error Messages 8719ET 20ET 22ET Analog Bus on OFF 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Analog Bus oon OFF To access the analog bus press SERVICE MENU Description of the Analog Bus The analog bus is single multiplexed line that networks 23 nodes within the instrument It can be controlled from the front panel or through GPIB to make voltage and frequency measurements just like a voltmeter oscilloscope or frequency coun
123. and 25 dB at 50 MHz Significant System Components The open and short calibration devices have an effect on reflection tracking But large variations in this error term may indicate a problem in one of the signal paths Suspect the R signal path if the problem appears in both ERF and ERR Troubleshoot the A or B input paths first if only one reflection tracking term is affected Affected Measurements All reflection measurements high or low return loss are affected by the reflection tracking errors Figure 11 3 Typical ERF ERR CHI MEM LOG 5 dB REF dB ERF ERR PRm START 050 GHz STOP 40 050 666 000 GHz Service Guide 11 13 Error Terms 8719ET 20ET 22ET Error Term Descriptions 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Isolation Crosstalk EXF and EXR These are the uncorrected forward and reverse isolation error terms that represent leakage between the test ports and the signal paths The isolation error terms are characterized by measuring transmission S21 S12 with loads attached to both ports during the measurement calibration Since these terms are low in magnitude they are usually noisy not very repeatable Significant System Components L oose cable connections or leakage between components in the lower box are the most likely cause of isolation problems The transfer switch bias tees couplers and samplers are the most susceptible component
124. and Performance Tests 8719ET 20ET 22ET Performance Tests 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers 8722ET ES Models 1 Press 2 55 3 Refer to Table 2 10 and set the analyzer to the power value that is listed in the Pn e row for the particular analyzer under test After you enter the value press x7 4 Wait for analyzer to complete one full sweep 5 Press DATA MEMORY DATA MEM 6 Press A MODE MENU FIXED MKR POSITION FIXED MKR VALUE Recording P Data 7 Press POWER 8 Enter the power value that is listed in the P4 row of Table 2 10 for the particular analyzer under test After you enter the value press x1 9 Wait for analyzer to complete one full sweep 10 Press Marker Search SEARCH MAX 11 Read the marker value from the analyzer display and add 5 dB Record the calculated value the 8722ET ES 0 05 20 GHz Max column of the Source Linearity performance test record 12 Press SEARCH MIN 13 Read the marker value from the analyzer display and add 5 dB Record the calculated value the 8722ET ES 0 05 20 GHz Min column of the Source Linearity performance test record Recording P Data for the 20 GHz to 40 GHz Band 14 To record data for data in the 20 GHz to 40 GHz band press 15 Press 16 Repeat steps 2 through 13 of the section except record the values in the 8722 5 20 40 GHz Max and
125. and loss values to the current data table up to a maximum of 12 segments frequency points PTS deletes the entire current data table or list when YES is pressed Press NO to avoid deletion returns to the previous menu Service Guide 10 7 Service Key Menus and Error Messages 8719ET 20ET 22ET Service Menus Internal Diagnostics 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Self Diagnose Softkey You can access the self diagnosis function by pressing SERVICE MENU SELF DIAGNOSE This function examines in order the pass fail status of all internal tests and displays NO FAILURE FOUND if tests have failed If a failureis detected the routine displays the assembly or assemblies most probably faulty and assigns a failure probability factor to each assembl y Test Descriptions The analyzer has up to 80 routines that test verify and adjust the instrument This section describes those tests Internal Tests This group of tests runs without external connections or operator interaction All return a PASS Or FAIL condition All of these tests run on power up and preset except as noted 0 ALL INT Runs only when selected It consists of internal tests 3 11 13 16 and 20 Use the front panel knob to scroll through the tests and see which failed If all pass the test displays a PASS status E ach test in the subset retains its own test status 1 PRESET Runs the following subset of internal tests first the ROM R
126. board e Theamplifier provides up to 30 dB of amplification For maximum PORT 1 and PORT 2 output power levels refer to Table 12 1 on page 12 4 e The detector outputs a voltage that is proportional to the RF power out of the amplifier This voltage is used by the ALC circuit on the source interface board The power source divides the source signal into two parts One signal is routed directly tothe A64 R sampler and the other is sent through the A69 step attenuator A74 transfer switch A60 A61 bias tees A62 A63 directional couplers and to the test ports PORT 1 PORT 2 The M A D S microcircuit is controlled by the ALC circuitry on the source interface board The CPU provides fine control of the test port power for applications such as power sweep Service Guide 12 19 Theory of Operation 8719ET 20ET 22ET Signal Separation ES Models Only 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers 58 M A D 74 Switch Splitter Option 400 Only The M A D Modulator Amplifier Detector microcircuit accomplishes three functions The modulator controls the output power proportionally to the signal produced by the ALC circuit on the source interface board The amplifier can provide 30 dB of amplification For maximum PORT 1 and PORT 2 output power levels refer to Table 12 1 on page 12 4 The detector outputs a voltage that is proportional tothe RF power out of the amplifier The voltage is used by the ALC circuit on the source interface bo
127. check consists of two softkey initiated tests Ck Port 1 Test 21 and Op Ck Port 2 Test 22 On the ES models a short is connected to PORT 1 and PORT 2 to reflect all the source energy back into the analyzer for an S11 and S22 measurement To achieve full reflection for ET models a short is connected to the REFLECTION port An RF cableis connected between the REFLECTION and TRANSMISSION ports for op Ck Port 2 On ES models the first part of Op Ck Port 1 checks the repeatability of the transfer switch An S11 measurement is stored in memory and the switch is toggled to PORT 2 and then back to PORT 1 where another S11 measurement is made The difference between the memory trace and the second trace is switch repeatability Theremaining parts of both tests exercise the internal attenuator in 5 dB steps over a 55 dB range For ET models without Option 004 a single measurement is made resulting measurements must fall within a limit testing window to pass the test The window size is based on both source and receiver specifications The operator s check determines that 1 The source is phase locked across the entire frequency range All three samplers are functioning properly Thetransfer switch is operational ES models only The attenuator steps 5 dB at a time ES and ET Option 004 models only A rough check of the receiver s linearity W N Table 4 1 Required Accessories Type of Device HP Agilent Pa
128. data from the A10 digital IF It computes discrete Fourier transforms to extract the complex phase and magnitude data from the 4 kHz IF signal The resulting raw data is written into the main RAM A18 Display A18 display is an 8 4 inch LCD with associated drive circuitry It receives 43 3 V power supply from the A19 GSP along with the voltage generated from the A20 backlight inverter It receives the following signals from the A19 GSP digital TTL horizontal sync digital TTL vertical sync blanking data dock digital TTL red video digital TTL green video digital TTL blue video 12 10 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Theory of Operation 8719ES 20ES 22ES Digital Control Theory RF Network Analyzers A19 Graphics System Processor GSP The A19 graphics system processor provides an interface between the A7 CPU andthe A18 display The CPU A7 converts the formatted data to GSP commands and writes it to the GSP The GSP processes the data to obtain the necessary video signals and sends the signals to the A18 display It also produces VGA compatible RGB output signals which are sent to the A22 GSP interface and then routed to the A16 rear panel The assembly receives one power supply voltage from the A22 GSP interface 45VCPU which is used for processing and supplying power to the A20 backlight inverter and the 18 display A20 Inverter The 20 backlight inverter assembly supplies the ac voltage for the b
129. ee GENERATOR 9 1 Bus ee ee ce er 64 RTSAMPLER Q w88 i ALC ma STER i SAMPLE M 17 F 30 MHz RATE IS EXT OFFSET 4 amp Q I gero du 18 RHE MS 2 y 4 9 J2 Q gt SLOPE A 5 Te I a x i 512 i 20 c W48 S22 oa te b 2 A54 YIG2 A58 i ADC lt BOUT 0 5 1 amp LOW BAND ADJ BLANKINGADJ 2 i ed FB 4 kHz i r Ab CNRC SEA Se I gt B A ss m ms l A67 R2 SAMPLER 1 1 A76ATTN U U I I 2 A11 PHASE LOCK i ieee i ae 1 i FMYIG2 I XY W43 i o e as m 9 FM YIG1 aon I zr I I I 0 A29 i u eva 42 4 PLL OUT QO o L 221 i h E e 55 YIG1 PU ATO GND PHASE LOCK BD AG 10 MHz PLL FROM N v 12 IF DET v 9 _ MAIN YIG2 ma CONTROL 2 MHZ us PRETUNE F wan A i A66 B SAMPLER cm BOARD v 8 F 30 MHz E PL REF 1 MHz 4 SWPERR i AA 25520 GHz ae J8 X o J3 PRETUNE we 2 C
130. enter the frequency from step 2 SERVICE MENU SERVICE MODES MORE SAMPLER COR OFF MARKER SEARCH SEARCH MAX The maximum marker reading is MMR 11 Recalculate A by taking the test port power TPP adding 4 and then subtracting the maximum marker reading MMR A TPP 4 MMR If the magnitude of A isless than 0 15 dB then the offset for the A channel is correctly set Goto Raw Offset for the B Channel ET Models on page 3 56 If the magnitudeis greater than 0 15 dB repeat steps 1 through 11 until the A channel raw offset correction constant is achieved Service Guide 3 55 Adjustments and Correction Constants 8719ET 20ET 22ET Raw Offset Correction Constants 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Raw Offset for the B Channel ET Models 12 Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 3 15 Figure 3 15 Setup for Calculating the Raw Offset for the B Channel ET Models NETWORK ANALYZER sb543e 13 Press the following INPUT PORTS B SERVICE MENU SERVICE MODES MORE SAMPLER COR OFF Marker Search SEARCH MAX Note the frequency and write it down 14 Press CW FREQ and enter the maximum frequency point from step 13 Press Marker Search SEARCH MAX Note the maximum marker reading MMR and write it down Press Power Note the displayed test port power TPP 15 The objective is to set the maximum marker reading MMR to 4 dB higher than the power meter reading Perform the following mathematical operation
131. following PEEK POKE ADDRESS POKE Enter the remainder and then press x1 23 Press Preset 24 Press RECALL STATE and verify the mean value is equal to P 1 Service Guide 3 27 Adjustments and Correction Constants Power Linearity Adjustment Low Band Adjustment 1 Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 3 5 Figure 3 5 Setup for Power Adjustments NETWORK ANALYZER Power Sensor Table 3 5 Low Band Adjustment Values 8719ET 20ET 22ET 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers POWER METER sb545e 8722ES Option 007 Model Power Power B Power C 8719ES and 8720E S 10 dBm 7 dBm 8719ET and 8720ET 2 dBm 15 dBm 12 dBm 8719ES Option 007 8720ES Option 007 8722ES 13dBm 5dBm 8 dBm 8722ET 8 dBm 0 dBm 3 dBm 2 Press the following PRESET FACTORY SERVICE MENU SERVICE MODES SRCADJUST MENU ALC OFF INPUT PORTS R Power enter the power level from Power A in Table 3 5 then press PWR CAL ONE SWEEP TAKE CAL SWEEP 3 28 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Adjustments and Correction Constants 8719ES 20ES 22ES Power Linearity Adjustment RF Network Analyzers 3 Connect the cable to PORT 2 TRANSMISSION Port on ET models and press the following CALIBRATE MENU RECEIVER CAL INPUT PORTS B 4 Press Power and enter the power level from Power B in Table 3 5 then press x1 5 Adjust A59
132. for the 5 V digital supply It provides LEDs visible from the rear of the instrument to indicate either normal or shutdown status 12 6 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Theory of Operation 8719ES 20ES 22ES Power Supply Theory RF Network Analyzers Line Power Module Theline power module includes the line power switch voltage selector switch and main fuse The line power switch is activated from the front panel The voltage selector switch accessible at the rear panel adapts the analyzer to local line voltages of approximately 115 V or 230 V with 350 VA maximum T he main fuse which prevents the input side of the preregulator from drawing too much line current is also accessible at the rear panel Refer to the analyzer installation and quick start guide for line voltage tolerances and other power considerations Preregulated Voltages The switching preregulator converts the line voltage to several dc voltages T he regulated 5 V digital supply goes directly to the motherboard The following partially regulated voltages are routed through A15W1 to the A8 post regulator for final regulation 25V H8V 18V 8V 8V Regulated 5 V Digital Supply The 45 VD supply is regulated by the control circuitry in the A15 preregulator It goes directly to the motherboard and from there to all assemblies requiring a low noise digital supply A 45 V sense line returns from the motherboard tothe A15 preregulator The 45 V CPU is derived from
133. green or blue morethan one occurrence of 2 consecutive stuck pixels stuck pixels less than 6 5 mm apart Newtons Rings To check for the patterns known as Newtons Rings change the display to white by pressing the following keys SERVICE MENU TESTS EXECUTE TEST CONTINUE Figure 6 3 illustrates acceptable and non acceptable examples of Newtons Rings Figure 6 3 Newtons Rings 3 Rings Acceptable 4 Rings Unacceptable sb6123d 6 8 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Digital Control Troubleshooting 8719ES 20ES 22ES Troubleshooting the GSP A19 and the Display A18 RF Network Analyzers Troubleshooting the GSP A19 and the Display A18 Measure the Supply Voltages Applied to the GSP A19 Measure the power supply voltages at the GSP A19 assembly that come from the motherboard A17 assembly Unplug the wire harness J 3 from the back of the GSP interface Check pins 2 and 3 for 5 16 0 1 V see Figure 6 4 If the voltages are incorrect refer to Chapter 5 Power Supply Troubleshooting Figure 6 4 GSP A19 Voltages GRND 5V GRND GSP INTERFACE GSP INTERFACE sb593e Service Guide 6 9 Digital Control Troubleshooting 8719ET 20ET 22ET Troubleshooting the GSP A19 and the Display A18 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Run Display Test 55 1 Press the following PRESET FACTORY SERVICE MENU TESTS DISPLAY TESTS EXECUTE TEST CONTINUE
134. green LEDs along the top edge of the post regulator A8 assembly All 9 green LEDs should be on Thefan should be audible In case of difficulty refer to Chapter 5 Power Supply Troubleshooting 4 14 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Start Troubleshooting Here 8719ES 20ES 22ES Digital Control Check RF Network Analyzers Digital Control Check Observe the Power Up Sequence Switch the analyzer power off then on The following should take place within a few seconds e On the front panel observe the following 1 All ten ES model and eight ET model amber LEDs illuminate 2 On the ES models the TRANS REV REFL REV LEDS near PORT 2 illuminate 3 The amber LEDs go off after a few seconds except the Chan 1 LED At the same moment the TRANS REV and REFL REV LEDS near PORT 2 goes off NOTE On ET models thereis no TRANSMISSION LED on the front panel Thedisplay should come up bright and focused Fivered LEDs on the A9 CPU board should illuminate and then turn off They can be observed through a small opening in the rear panel Figure 4 4 Front Panel Power Up Sequence for ET and ES Models Tums On During and After Power Up r3 l oO EJ oO L1 oO Turns 4 Seconds ES Model LED Turns On After Power Up During Power Up sb541e Service Guide 4 15 Start Troubleshooting Here 8719ET 20ET 22ET Digital Control Check 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Verify Internal Tests
135. group Begin with Chapter 4 Start Troubleshooting H ere Follow up with the appropriate troubleshooting chapter that identifies the faulty assembly Step 2 Order a replacement assembly Refer to Chapter 13 Replaceable Parts Step 3 Replace the faulty assembly and determine what adjustments are necessary Refer to Chapter 14 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures Step 4 Perform the necessary adjustments Refer to Chapter 3 Adjustments and Correction Constants Step 5 Perform the necessary performance tests Refer to Chapter 2 System Verification and Performance Tests 5 4 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Power Supply Troubleshooting 8719ES 20ES 22ES Simplified Block Diagram of Power Supply Group RF Network Analyzers Simplified Block Diagram of Power Supply Group Figure 5 1 shows the power supply group in simplified block diagram form Refer to the detailed block diagram of the power supply located at the end of this chapter to see voltage lines and specific connector pin numbers Figure 5 1 Power Supply Group Simplified Block Diagram A8 POST REGULATOR SWITCHING POWER FAN POWER SUPPLY MICROCIRCUIT POWER LINE gt POWER AND REGULATOR NORMAL ON NORMAL OFF NORMAL ON STEADY I L A GREEN LED RED LED GREEN LED I sb533e Service Guide 5 5 Power Supply Troubleshooting 8719ET 20ET 22ET Start Here 8719
136. instrument state press SELECT DISK INTERNAL DISK 31 After the calibration is complete go to Verification Device Measurements on page 2 25 2 24 Service Guide 8719 20 22 System Verification and Performance Tests 8719ES 20ES 22ES System Verification RF Network Analyzers Verification Device Measurements NOTE Measurement calibration must be complete before the verification tests are performed Thefollowing verification procedure is automated by the analyzer firmware For each verification device the analyzer reads a file from the verification disk and sequentially measures the magnitude and phase for all four S parameters on the ES models and two S parameters S11 and S21 on the ET models Table 2 3 lists the verification device number the corresponding test number and the verification device type Table 2 3 Verification Kit Device and Test Numbers Verification Device Test Number Device Description 1 27 20 dB attenuator 2 28 40 dB attenuator 3 29 500 airline 4 30 250 mismatch airline 1 Press System SERVICE MENU TESTS 2 In the active entry area the display the following will displayed TEST 27 Ver Dev 1 3 If the record function was already switched as in step 5 on page 2 20 or if a printout is not desired go to step 4 Otherwise press the following SERVICE MENU TEST OPTIONS RECORD If graphics plots of the display and a list are desired on t
137. is correctly set Goto Sampler Calibration Correction Constants Test 51 on page 3 58 If the magnitude is greater than 0 15 dB repeat steps 12 through 22 until the B channel raw offset correction constant is achieved In Case of Difficulty Ensurethat the power meter and power sensor are operating to specification f you are unable to perform this adjustment refer to Chapter 8 Receiver Troubleshooting or contact the nearest Agilent Technologies sales or service office Service Guide 3 57 Adjustments and Correction Constants Sampler Calibration Correction Constants Test 51 8719ET 20ET 22ET 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Sampler Calibration Correction Constants Test 51 Required Equipment and Tools Equipment Description 8719ET ES 8720ET ES 8722ET ES Power Meter 436A 437B 438A E4418A EPM 441A or E4419A EPM 442A Power Sensor 8485A 8487A part number Adapter 3 5 mm f to 3 5 mm f 85052 60012 N A Part of 85052B part number Adapter 2 4 mm f to 2 4 mm f N A 85056 60006 Part of 85056A HP Agilent RF Cable Set 85131F 85133F part number part number RF Open 85052 60009 85056 60023 Part of 85052B Part of 85056A 1 The EPM 441A and EPM 442A with versions prior to A 2 02 00 firmware cannot be controlled by the analyzer These versions do not have the 438A command set firmware These models may be upgraded at an Agilent Technologie
138. is installed in the instrument NOTE If the instrument does not have a label then contact the nearest Agilent Technologies sales or service office Be sure to include the full serial number of the instrument 2 Makesurethe A7 Switch is in the alter position ALT NOTE Theserial number may also be entered using the optional external keyboard Plug the keyboard intothe DIN KYBD connector on the rear panel and press Preset 3 Toerase the HP Agilent logo press the following PRESET FACTORY MORE TITLE ERASE TITLE CAUTION Do not confuse 1 with 1 one or with zero 4 Enter the keyword by rotating the front panel knob to position the arrow below each character of the keyword and then pressing SELECT LETTER toenter each letter Press if you made a mistake 5 Press DONE when you have finished entering the keyword Service Guide 3 13 Adjustments and Correction Constants 8719ET 20ET 22ET Protected Option Numbers Correction Constants Test 50 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers 6 Press the following SERVICE MENU TESTS EXECUTE TEST YES 7 Observe the analyzer for the results of the adjustment routine e Ifthe analyzer displays Option Cor DONE you have completed this procedure 8 If no more correction constant routines are going to be performed return the A7 Switch tothe NRM position and perform the EEPROM Backup Disk Procedure on page 3 33 In Case of Difficulty Ifthe analy
139. m TO A51 8719ES 8720ES OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM FOR STANDARD OPT 007 012 085 089 1D5 8719 5 8720 5 OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM FOR 400 012 089 1D5 SOURCE A26 HIGH STABILITY E FREQUENCY REFERENCE OPTION 105 t ESRI PEE CENE E RECEIVER i P i A13 FRACTIONAL N ANALOG ua EORR POWER E 10 MHz NASADI 2 s
140. menu to allow modification of the external power loss data table accesses the power loss sensor lists menu USE SENSOR selects the A or B power sensor calibration factor list for use in power meter calibration measurements CAL FACTOR SENSOR A CALFSENA accesses the Edit List menu to allow modification of the calibration data table for power sensor A CAL FACTOR SENSOR B CALFSENB accesses the Edit List menu to allow modification of the calibration data table for power sensor B POWER LOSS POWLLIST accesses the Edit List menu to allow modification of the external power loss data table that corrects coupled arm power loss when a directional coupler samples the RF output DUMP GRAPH Edit List Menu generates printed graphs of verification results when activated during a system verification To access this menu press SERVICE MENU TEST OPTIONS LOSS SENSR LISTS and then press one of the following CAL FACTOR SENSOR A or CAL FACTOR SENSOR B or POWER 1055 SEGMENT EDIT SEDI D DELETE SDEL ADD SADD CLEAR LIST CLEL DONE EDITDONE selects a segment frequency point to be edited deleted from or added tothe current data table Works with the entry controls allows modification of frequency cal factor and loss values previously entered in the current data table deletes frequency cal factor and loss values previously entered in the current data table adds new frequency cal factor
141. meped he TNS parate da dove eee OE RIE A eee 9 4 solate the Fall T0 the eene evar erica ete heehee AS Bige eae 9 5 Vor the RF CADIE sa caeso t dx abe Lime Ex pu Eade d anh 9 6 Verify Shorts and Opens by Substitution ACA Geek e x EORR e 9 7 10 Service Key Menus and Error Messages pri T hrs CSI ec 10 2 10 3 Contents ix Contents Service Menus Internal Diagnostics 10 3 i 1 a eee ee eee ee ee ee 10 5 Test DpUODS MAN 5 amp BBC ACAL 10 6 De Diagnose SOI a 5 PA Ed DRE eds e 10 8 Test DESC IDUUS a ape cibo RC Pade Ee ede ee Layer iat andes 10 8 Service Menu Service Features 10 15 Service Modes MENU xcs ad dd 10 17 Service Modes More 10 19 Bnalog BUSON OFF 5 10 20 Description of the Analog Bus 10 20 TEMAM 10 20 The Frequent COUN 10 20 Analog To
142. more correction constant routines are going to be performed return the A7 switch back to its normal position NRM In Case of Difficulty e Insert another disk to the analyzer disk drive and press Save Recall Theanalyzer should display a catalog of the disk contents If the catalog does not appear refer to Chapter 6 Digital Control Troubleshooting or contact the nearest Agilent Technologies sales or service office Service Guide 3 35 Adjustments and Correction Constants 8719ET 20ET 22ET Loading Firmware 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Loading Firmware The following procedures will load firmware for new or existing CPU boards Required Equipment and Tools Firmware disk for your network analyzer Analyzer warmup time None required Loading Firmware into an Existing CPU Use this procedure for upgrading firmware an operational instrument whose CPU board has not been changed 1 Turn off the network analyzer 2 Insert the firmware disk into the instrument s disk drive 3 Turn theinstrument on The firmware will be loaded automatically during power on The front panel LEDs should step through a sequence as firmware is loaded The display will be blank during this time At the end of a successful loading the LEDs for Channel 1 and PORT 1 REFLECTION port on ET models will remain on and the display will indicate the version of firmware that was loaded In Case of Difficulty If the firm
143. on the analyzer display the analyzer has passed the PORT 2 operation check Transmission Port Check ET Models 5 Connect an RF cable from the REFLECTION port tothe TRANSMISSION port 6 Press the following PRESET FACTORY SERVICE MENU TESTS EXECUTE TEST CONTINUE 2 8 Service Guide 8719 20 22 System Verification and Performance Tests 8719ES 20ES 22ES Preliminary Tests RF Network Analyzers Ifthe message PRESS CONTINUE appears on the display during the test that particular attenuator setting check has failed Press CONTINUE to check the other attenuator settinos Ifthe message FAIL appears on the analyzer display the analyzer has failed the TRANSMISSION port operation check Refer to the flow charts on page 2 4 and page 2 5 Ifthe message DONE appears on the analyzer display the analyzer has passed the TRANSMISSION port operation check Check the Test Port Cables A bad cable can causea failurein the verification test The following tests are not required but are recommended to verify the performance of the test port cable e Cable Return Loss on page 2 9 e CableInsertion Loss on page 2 11 Cable Magnitude and Phase Stability on page 2 12 NOTE The illustrations depicting the analyzer display were made using an Agilent 8722b S model Other analyzer displays may appear different depending on model and options Cable Return Loss 1 Press Preset PRESET FACTORY Prese
144. power as a cause of phase lock errors 4 Check power at 5 3 fthe power at A5J 3 15 less than 0 dBm check the insertion loss of A5 source switch A6 source switch and the associated cabling Ifthe power at 5 3 is greater than 0 dBm the problem is probably above 5 GHz Proceed with the next steps 5 Check all RF cabling and connections f any of the cables or connectors are bad have them repaired or replaced Ifthe cables and connectors are good replace the A55 YIG 1 If high band problems still persist then replace the A58 M A D S High Band Problems 8722E T E S Only 1 Press the following SERVICE MENU SERVICE MODES SRC ADJUST Menu DAC NUM HIGH BAND 4000 SRC tune in the high band is capable of tuning the instrument from about 19 5 to 24 GHz Loss of lock in high band only may likely be due to a bad cable or connection 7 24 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Source Troubleshooting 8719ES 20ES 22ES Band Related Problems RF Network Analyzers 2 The following components may be at fault Refer tothe overall block diagram at the end of Chapter 4 for information A25 switch source switch A58 M A D S A54 YIG 2 3 Sincethe analyzer phase locked in low and or mid band all of the phase lock circuitry is working so look for low power as a cause of phase lock errors 4 Check power at the output of A25 switch at J 3 Ifthe power is less than 5 dBm check the insertion loss of
145. pressing AVERAGING RESTART Tochange the scale of the displayed traces press the following Scale Ref SCALE DIV X Scale Ref SCALE DIV 2 the end of the cable s specified range place a marker on the highest specified frequency of the cable Press Marker enter the specified frequency and press G n Place a marker on the largest deflection that goes above and below the reference line and is within the specified frequency range For a typical response of cable magnitude and phase stability see Figure 2 5 In this S11 measurement the displayed trace results from energy being propagated down the cable and reflected back from the short Therefore the measured deflection value must be divided in half to reach the correct value If the cable does not meet the specifications in the cable manual it should be either repaired or replaced 2 12 Service Guide 8719 20 22 System Verification and Performance Tests 8719ES 20ES 22ES Preliminary Tests RF Network Analyzers Figure 2 5 Typical Cable Magnitude and Phase Stability Response CH1 S11 M 106 02 dB REF 8 dB CH2 514 PHA 500 m REF i START 050 008 GHz STOP 40 050 000 OGA GHz Cable Connector Repeatability 1 2 Keep the test port cable connected to PORT 1 REFLECTION port E T models To measure the cable connect
146. read greater than 35 dBm Service Guide 4 17 Start Troubleshooting Here 8719ET 20ET 22ET Source Check 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Check Source Output Power 1 Zero and calibrate the power meter Set the calibration factor to the 1 GHz value See the power meter manual for instructions on setting the calibration factor 2 Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 4 5 Figure 4 5 Equipment Setup for Source Power Check NETWORK ANALYZER POWER METER Power Sensor Direct Connection sb520e 3 Press PRESET FACTORY on the analyzer to initialize the instrument Checking the Source Output Power for the 8719ET ES and 8720ET ES 1 To check power at 1 GHz for the 8719ET ES and 8720ET ES press the following Power 0 C5 on ET models and the ES Option 007 models CW FREQ The power should be within 2 dBm of the set value 8719ET ES Frequency Point Checks 2 To check power at 2 5 10 and 13 5 GHz press lt gt and set the power meter to the corresponding calibration factor for that frequency Repeat until the 13 5 GHz frequency is completed The power should be within 2 dBm of the set value for each frequency point 8720ET ES Frequency Point Checks 3 To check power at 2 5 10 and 20 GHz press lt and set the power meter to the corresponding calibration factor for that frequency Repeat until the 20 0 GHz frequency is completed 4 18 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Star
147. subtle failure or mild performance problem is suspected the magnitude of the error terms should be compared against values generated previously with the same instrument and calibration kit This comparison will produce the most precise view of the problem H owever if previously generated values are not available compare the current values tothe typical values listed in Table 11 3 and Table 11 4 and shown graphically on the plots in Error Term Descriptions on page 11 10 If the magnitude exceeds its limit inspect the corresponding system component f the condition causes system verification to fail replace the component Consider the following while troubleshooting V parts of the system including cables and calibration devices can contribute to systematic errors and impact the error terms Y Connectors must be clean gaged and within specification for error term analysis to be meaningful V Avoid unnecessary bending and flexing of the cables following measurement calibration minimizing cable instability errors Use good connection technique during measurement and calibration The connector interface must be repeatable For information on connection technique and on deaning and gauging connectors refer to Principles of Microwave Connector Care on page 1 6 4 Useerror term analysis to troubleshoot minor subtle performance problems Refer to Chapter 4 Start Troubleshooting Here if a blatant failure or gross mea
148. that you are adjusting 4 Press the following SWEEP TYPE MENU STEP SWEEP ON NUMBER of POINTS IF BW INPUTPORTS R 5 Press Local SYSTEM CONTROLLER PWRMTR CAL 6 Press NUMBER of READINGS 7 Press ONE SWEEP CAL SWEEP Wait for the analyzer to finish the power meter calibration 8 Connect an RF cable between PORT 1 and PORT 2 REFLECTION and TRANSMISSION ports on the ET models 9 Press Save Recall SAVE STATE FILE UTILITIES RENAME FILE ERASE TITLE rename file PWRCAL by rotating the front panel knob to position the arrow under the desired letter and press SELECT LETTER When thefileis renamed press DONE 10 Press Cal CALIBRATE MENU RECEIVER CAL INPUT PORTS B 11 Enter the power value in Power B column of Table 3 3 and then press TAKE RCVR CAL SWEEP 12 Switch off the power meter calibration by pressing the following PWRMTR CAL ONE SWEEP PWRMTR CAL OFF Theanalyzer s trace now represents power flatness 13 Adjust the slope and offset of all the bands for a flatness of 1 5 dB in the 0 05 GHz to 20 GHz range 2 5 dB in the 20 GHz to 40 GHz range 3 22 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Adjustments and Correction Constants 8719ES 20ES 22ES Output Power Adjustments RF Network Analyzers In Case of Difficulty With the power meter connected to PORT 1 REFLECTION port on the ET models check for available power and modulator functionality by adjusting the power DAC from 0 to 4095
149. the 5 VD in the A8 post regulator and goes directly to the A19 graphics system processor In order for the preregulator to function the 45 V digital supply must be loaded by one or more assemblies and the 5 V sense line must be working If not the other preregulated voltages will not be correct Shutdown Indications the Green LED and Red LED The green LED is on during normal operation The green LED is off when line power is not connected not switched on or set too low or if the linefuse has blown Thered LED which is off during normal operation lights to indicate a fault in the 5 V supply This may be an over under line voltage over line current or overtemperature condition For troubleshooting information refer to Chapter 5 Power Supply Troubleshooting A8 Post Regulator The A8 post regulator filters and regulates the dc voltages received from the A 15 preregulator It provides fusing and shutdown circuitry for individual voltage supplies It distributes regulated constant voltages to individual assemblies throughout the instrument It includes the overtemperature shutdown circuit the variable fan speed circuit and the air flow detector Nine green LEDs provide status indications for the individual voltage supplies Refer to the Power Supply Block Diagram located at the end of Chapter 5 Power Supply Troubleshooting to see the voltages provided by the A8 post regulator Service Guide 12 7 Theory of Operation
150. the 100 kHz signal from A12 press the following PRESET FACTORY SERVICE MENU ANALOG BUS ON ANALOG IN Aux Input ANALOG BUS COUNTER Theanalyzer should display ANALOG BUS INPUT 14 100kHz cnt 100 MHz Press to check the 1 MHz signal The analyzer should display 17 PL Ref cnt 1 000 MHz If either counter reading is incorrect the A 12 reference assembly is probably faulty and should be replaced However it is also possible that there is a faulty counter A14 fractional N digital or A10 digital IF assembly Replace A12 if problem persists Service Guide 7 13 Source Troubleshooting 8719ET 20ET 22ET Broadband Phase Lock Problems 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Check Fractional N Digital A14 with ABUS 1 To setup the fractional N tuning voltage press the following PRESET FACTORY SWEEP TYPE MENU LOG FREQ SERVICE MENU ANALOG BUS ON ANALOG IN Aux Input COUNTER ANALOG BUS LOG MAG AUTO SCALE Compare the fractional N tuning voltage to Figure 7 2 Figure 7 2 Fractional N Tuning Voltage Waveform at Abus Node 21 CHI aux 106 5 dB REF 10 dB START 050 666 GHz STOP 40 050 900 OGA GHz 2 Press COUNTER FRAC N CW FREQ and set the instrument to the frequendies of column one in Table 7 1 Table 7 1 VCO Range Check Frequencies Front Panel Displayed Counter Value 50MH
151. the following NOTE Before moving the A 7 switch perform EEPROM Backup Disk Procedure on page 3 33 to save your correction constants 1 Remove the power line cord from the analyzer N Set the analyzer on its side 3 Remove the two corner bumpers from the bottom of the instrument with a T 15 TORX screwdriver 4 Loosen the captive screw on the bottom cover s back edge 5 Slide the cover toward the rear of the instrument CAUTION Be sure to observe proper ESD procedures and precautions when performing the following step 6 Move the switch to the Normal position NRM as shown in Figure 6 1 7 Replace the bottom cover corner bumpers and power cord Figure 6 1 umper Positions on the CPU A7 A7 CPU Assembly mA A A A sb6165d 6 4 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Digital Control Troubleshooting 8719ES 20ES 22ES CPU Board A7 Troubleshooting RF Network Analyzers Checking the CPU A7 Red LED Patterns The CPU board A7 has five of eight red LEDs that can be viewed through a small opening in the rear panel of the analyzer see Figure 6 2 NOTE Four of the eight LEDs are easily viewed The fifth LED can be viewed by looking into the opening at a left angle 1 Cycle the power while observing the five red LEDs Cycle the power on the analyzer and observe the five red LEDs After an initial pattern the five LEDs on the CPU board A7 should remain off ftheLEDs remained off
152. the green LED is not on steadily the line voltage is not enough to power the analyzer Check the Line Voltage Selector Switch and Fuse Check the main power line cord line fuse line selector switch setting and actual line voltage to see that they are all correct Figure 5 4 shows how to remove the line fuse using a small flat blade screwdriver to pry out the fuse holder Figure 5 2 shows the location of the line voltage selector switch Use a small flat blade screwdriver to select the correct switch position NOTE Refer to Hardware Preregulator on page 13 83 for the correct line fuse description and part number If the A15 green LED is still not on steadily replace A15 Figure 5 4 Removing the Line Fuse NSERT SCREWDRIVER PRY OPEN qg652d 5 8 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Power Supply Troubleshooting 8719ES 20ES 22ES If the Red LED of the Preregulator 15 Is RF Network Analyzers If the Red LED of the Preregulator A15 Is On If the red LED is on or flashing the power supply is shutting down Use the following procedures to determine which assembly is causing the problem Check the Post Regulator A8 1 Switch off the analyzer 2 Disconnect the cable A15W1 from 8 See Figure 5 5 3 Switch on the analyzer and observe the red LED on A15 fthered LED goes out the problem is probably 8 To first verify that the inputs to A8 are correct continue to Verify the Preregulat
153. the system The effects of the non specified cables cannot be taken into account in the system verification procedure See supported system configurations in Table 2 1 and Table 2 2 on page 2 18 Calibration Kit Substitution The accuracy of the network analyzer system is dependent on how well the standards are defined in your calibration kit The measurement uncertainties for the system assume a calibration with an HP Agilent calibration kit Calibrations made with user defined or modified calibration kits are not subject to the system specifications although a procedure similar to the standard verification procedure may be used See supported system configurations in Table 2 1 and Table 2 2 on page 2 18 Service Guide 2 19 System Verification and Performance Tests 8719ET 20ET 22ET System Verification 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Equipment Initialization 1 Connect a printer to the analyzer and cables to PORT 1 and PORT 2 REFLECTION port and TRANSMISSION port on ET models as shown in Figure 2 8 Let the analyzer warm up for at least 30 minutes One cable should have a male connector and the other a female connector Figure 2 8 System Verification Test Setup NETWORK ANALYZER PRINTER GPIB or Serial or Parallel Male Connector Female EU Connector sb515e 2 Whilethe equipment is warming up review the Principles of Microwave Connector Care on page 1 6 Good connection technique with dean und
154. then proceed to the assembly that you suspect has a probl em ftheLEDs did not remain off switch off the power and remove the bottom cover for further troubleshooting Figure 6 2 CPU LED Window on Rear Panel JA cso Go CPU LED WINDOW e LED IS ON LED 15 OFF sb61d 2 Cycle the power while observing all eight red LEDs With the analyzer positioned bottom up cycle the power and observe the eight red LEDs while looking from the front of the instrument NOTE If firmware did not load a red LED on the CPU board will be flashing Refer to Loading Firmware on page 3 36 Service Guide 6 5 Digital Control Troubleshooting 8719ET 20ET 22ET CPU Board 7 Troubleshooting 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers 3 Evaluate results If either of the following LED patterns remain to Display Troubleshooting A18 A19 on page 6 7 LED is O front of instrument 2 If any other LED patterns remain replace the CPU board A7 after verifying the power supply 6 6 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Digital Control Troubleshooting 8719ES 20ES 22ES Display Troubleshooting A18 A19 RF Network Analyzers Display Troubleshooting A18 A19 This section contains the following information Evaluating your display Trouble
155. 0 22 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Figure 7 1 0 25 V GHz Waveform at Abus Node 9 CHI Aux 1 W REF 3 U 8722 ET ES lt 8720 5 nm Q 14 819 ET ES START 85 866 686 GHz STOP 46 656 00G 646 GHz sb542e Source Troubleshooting Start Troubleshooting Here Ifthe waveform appears normal one but not all frequency bands to Band Related Problems on page 7 22 e If the waveform appears abnormal in all frequency bands refer to Broadband Phase Lock Problems on page 7 8 Service Guide Source Troubleshooting 8719ET 20ET 22ET Broadband Phase Lock Problems 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Broadband Phase Lock Problems Phase lock problems can be caused by incorrect pretune correction constants 1 To fix this potential problem perform Source Pretune Correction Constants Test 43 on page 3 6 from Chapter 3 Adjustments and Correction Constants 2 Then press PRESET FACTORY to see if the phase lock problem persists 3 If the phase lock problem persists perform the Reference Assembly VCO Tune Adjustment on page 3 39 If this fixes the problem perform the following adjustments from Chapter 3 a Output Power Adjustments on page 3 17 b C d Power Linearity Adjustment on page 3 24 Raw Offset Correction Constants on page 3 48 S
156. 0 22 Service Key Menus and Error Messages 8719ES 20ES 22ES Service Related Error Messages in Alphabetical Order RF Network Analyzers Service Related Error Messages in Alphabetical Order This section contains an alphabetical list of the error messages that pertain to servicing the analyzer The information in the list includes explanations of the displayed messages and suggestions to help solve the problem NOTE The error messages that pertain to measurement applications are included in the analyzer s reference guide ADDITIONAL STANDARDS NEEDED Error Number Error correction for the selected calibration class cannot be computed until you 68 have measured all the necessary standards ADDRESSED TO TALK WITH NOTHING TO SAY Error Number You have sent a read command to the analyzer such as ENTER 716 without 31 first requesting data with an appropriate output command such as OUTPDATA The analyzer has no data in the output queue to satisfy the request ANALOG BUS DISABLED IN 6KHZ IF BW Error Number when you press IF BW 60090 the analog bus is disabled and not 212 available for use in troubleshooting For a description of the analog bus see Analog Bus on OFF on page 10 20 ANALOG INPUT OVERLOAD Error Number The power level of the analog input is too high Reduce the power level of the 60 analog input source BATTERY FAILED STATE MEMORY CLEARED
157. 0 W37 W52 A60 W25 W26 W40 W32 W36 W22 A66 W77 sb574e Service Guide 13 49 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Part Listings 8719ET 20ET 22ET 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Bottom Assemblies and Cables for 8722E S Option 4004012 Ref Desig Options HP Agilent Qty Description Part Number A7 08720 60253 1 CPU Repair Kit A7 08720 69253 1 CPU Repair Kit Rebuilt Exchange A17 08720 60264 1 Motherboard A51 08720 60274 1 Bd Assy Test Set Interface A52 5086 7456 1 Assy Pulse Generator A52 5086 6456 1 Assy Pulse Generator Rebuilt E xchange A60 A61 5086 7484 2 Bias Tee A60 A61 5086 6484 2 Bias Tee Rebuilt Exchange A64 A65 5086 7614 4 Assy Sampler A66 A67 A64 A65 5086 6614 4 Assy Sampler Rebuilt E xchange A66 A67 A70 A71 33326 60006 2 Attenuator 0 55 dB 74 5087 7002 1 Switch Splitter A74 5087 6002 1 Switch Splitter Rebuilt Exchange A99 08720 60124 1 Frequency Converter A99 08720 69124 Frequency Converter Rebuilt E xchange W14 08722 20102 1 A63 to Front Panel B Out W15 08722 20079 1 Front Panel B In to A66 W16 08722 20081 1 Front Panel A In to A65 W17 08722 20102 1 A62 to Front Panel A Out W25 08722 20056 1 A61 to 62 W26 08722 20057 1 A60 to A63 W32 08722 20054 1 A58 to A74 W36 08720 20041 1 72 to A64 W37 08722 20059 1 A71 to A60 W38 08722 20061 1 A70 to A61 W39 08722
158. 0 digital IF description of 12 9 crimped RF cables 7 22 crosstalk description 11 14 crosstalk uncorr port performance 11 8 CURRENT PARAMETER NOT IN CAL SET 10 35 0 D dark pixels specifications 6 8 DC bias tees description of 12 21 DEADLOCK 10 35 detector description ES models 12 19 DEVICE not on not connect wrong addrs 10 35 digital control 12 5 check 4 15 Index signal locations 7 18 signals A14 to A13 7 17 theory 12 9 digital signal processor DSP description of 12 10 digital supply description of 12 7 directional coupler check 8 7 directional couplers description 12 21 directivity EDF and EDR description 11 11 directivity ES and ET models 11 8 DISK not on not connected wrong addrs 10 35 disk drive removal 14 28 DISK HARDWARE PROBLEM 10 35 DISK MESSAGE LENGTH ERROR 10 35 DISK READ WRITE ERROR 10 35 display black dots 6 7 7 7 7 14 four steps for evaluating 6 7 7 7 7 14 power supply voltages to GSP A19 6 9 troubleshooting 6 7 7 7 7 14 display A18 troubleshooting with GSP A19 6 9 display lamp and assembly removal 14 12 display test descriptions 10 13 display troubleshooting 18 19 6 7 7 7 7 14 divide by N 14 circuit check 7 17 documentation 13 87 dynamic range performance test 2 42 dynamic range test record 2 50 EDF and EDR description 11 11 EEPROM description of 12 10 ELF and ELR description 11 15 equipment EEPROM backup disk procedure 3 33 fracti
159. 0134 1 9 6 To A6 W49 All All F 08720 60133 1 9 8 A5 W79 8722ET ES All F 08514 60033 1 11 3 To 54 2 W80 8722ET ES All F 08720 60131 1 17 15 54 W81 All All F 08720 60144 1 17 15 A55 W82 All All F 08415 60031 1 A55 11 1 F is Flexible Coax Cable 13 66 SR is Semirigid Coax Cable Service Guide 8719 20 22 Replaceable Parts 8719ES 20ES 22ES Replaceable Part Listings RF Network Analyzers 8719E T E S and 8720ET ES Cables PART OF REAR PANEL W31 EXTERNAL REFERENCE W82 W7 W8 11 W1 9 w3 W2 W6 W49 W42 W48 W47 sb5101e Service Guide 13 67 Replaceable Parts 8719ET 20ET 22ET Replaceable Part Listings 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers 8722ET ES Cables Top PART OF REAR PANEL w81 w80 w31 w79 EXTERNAL REFERENCE W43 W82 W7 wa W11 W1 9 W3 W2 W W42 W49 W48 5 W47 sb5100e 13 68 Service Guide 8719 20 22 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Replaceable Parts Replaceable Part Listings Rear Cables All Models Ref Agilent Models Options Type HP Agilent Part Qty Description Desig Number W58 8719ES 085 SR 08720 20135 1 A69 To Rear Panel 8720ES Source Out W58 8722ES 085 SR 08722 20085 1 A69 Rear Panel Source Out W59 8719ES 085 SR 08720 20144 1 Rear Panel Sou
160. 08720 60074 1 Ribbon Cable 50 2 to 17 18 All All 1 Ribbon Cable 50 A2 to GSP 19 All All 8120 8409 1 Ribbon Cable 31R A2 to A18 20 All All 8120 8439 1 Ribbon Cable 31R A2 to A1 21 8719ES All 08719 80038 1 Nameplate 8719ES 21 8719ET All 08719 80035 1 Nameplate 8719 13 72 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Replaceable Parts 8719ES 20ES 22ES Replaceable Part Listings RF Network Analyzers Ref Models Options HP Agilent Part Qty Description Desig Number 21 8720ES All 08720 80099 1 Nameplate 8720ES 21 8720ET All 08720 80098 1 Nameplate 8720ET 21 8722ES All 08722 80027 1 Nameplate 8722ES 21 8722ET All 08722 80026 1 Nameplate 8722ET 22 All ET All 08720 80106 1 Front Panel Overlay 23 ET All 08720 80102 1 Test Set Overlay Al All All 08720 60267 1 Bd Assy keyboard 18 2090 0361 1 Assy color L CD A2 All All 08720 60260 1 Bd Assy F ront Panel Interface A20 All All 0950 3379 1 Assy Inverter Front Panel Assembly Inside 3 Parts 4 Places 2 Places 7 Places D 3 Places 872x_fp_assy_inside Service Guide 13 73 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Part Listings Rear Panel Assembly 8719ET 20ET 22ET 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Models
161. 0ET ES A58 8719 5 Standard 5086 6519 1 Assy M A D S 8720ET ES Rebuilt Exchange A58 8719 5 400 5086 7974 1 Assy M A D2 8720E S A58 8719 5 400 5086 6974 1 Assy M A D 2 8720ES Rebuilt Exchange A58 8722ET ES Standard 5086 7615 1 Assy Super M A D S A58 8722ET ES Standard 5086 6615 1 Assy Super M A D S Rebuilt Exchange A58 8722ES 400 5086 7980 1 Assy M A D 2 A58 8722ES 400 5086 6980 1 Assy M A D 2 Rebuilt Exchange A59 All All 08720 60322 1 Bd Assy Source Interface A68 8719 5 0955 0462 1 Attenuator 6 dB 8720ET ES P1 All All 1826 0423 1 IC Voltage Regulator A25 8722ET ES All 5086 7589 1 Assy Switch 40 Ghz A20 A29 All All 08415 60057 1 Assy Microwave Switch 1 For fuse part numbers on the A8 Post Regulator refer to Miscellaneous Part Numbers on page 13 87 Service Guide 13 9 Replaceable Parts 8719ET 20ET 22ET Replaceable Part Listings 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers 8719ET ES and 8720ET ES Major Assemblies Top 15 9 A10 AT A12 A13 A55 14 57 A68 A29 A20 lol s AS A53 u A6 U 4 59 1 58 sb548e 13 10 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Replaceable Parts 8719ES 20ES 22ES Replaceable Part Listings RF Network Analyzers 8722E T ES Major Assemblies Top A15 A55 A54 A9 A8 A10 11 12 A13 A14 A57 A29 A20 A53 A5 A6 A3 amp 59
162. 1 5086 6484 2 Bias Tee Rebuilt E xchange A64 A65 5086 7614 4 Assy Sampler A66 A67 A64 A65 5086 6614 4 Assy Sampler Rebuilt E xchange A66 A67 A70 A71 33326 60006 2 Attenuator 0 55 dB A74 5087 7002 1 Switch Splitter A74 5087 6002 1 Switch Splitter Rebuilt E xchange 75 08490D 003 1 Fixed Attenuator 3 dB A99 08720 60124 1 Frequency Converter A99 08720 69124 Frequency Converter Rebuilt E xchange W25 08722 20056 1 A61to A62 W26 08722 20057 1 A60to A63 W32 08722 20054 1 A58 to A74 W37 08722 20059 1 A71to A60 W38 08722 20061 1 70 to 1 W39 08722 20063 1 A74toA70 W40 08722 20062 1 74 71 W41 08722 20936 1 A74to A76 W51 08720 20279 1 A23to A24 W52 08722 20024 1 External Link W56 08722 20135 1 A74to A75 13 52 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Replaceable Parts 8719ES 20ES 22ES Replaceable Part Listings RF Network Analyzers Ref Options HP Agilent Qty Description Desig Part Number W77 08720 20103 1 A73 to A67 8722E S Option 4004089 A51 A71 A70 W41 w18 w39 7 amp w56 W40 w38 A61 W37 W52 Service Guide 0 o A60 W22 W25 W26 W32 A24 W51 23 W22 W50 7 17 w53 A64 A65 W30 A52 W54 W77 A99 sb576e 13 53 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Part Listings 8719ET 20ET 22ET 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Bottom Assemblies an
163. 1 cable connected to it 3 Short 2 AGND seeFigure 5 3 to chassis ground with a dip lead 4 Switch on the analyzer and observe the green LEDs on the A8 f any green LEDs other than 45VD are still off or flashing continue with the next section Check the Post Regulator A8 Fuses and Voltages Ifall LEDs are now steadily lit except for the 5VD LED the preregulator A15 and post regulator A8 are working properly and the troubleis excessive loading somewhere after the motherboard connections at A8 Goto Remove the Assemblies on page 5 14 Check the Post Regulator A8 Fuses and Voltages Check the fuses along the top edge of the Post Regulator A8 If any A8 fuse has burned out replace it If it burns out again when power is applied to the analyzer A8 or A15 is faulty Determine which assembly has failed as follows 1 Remove the A15W1 cable at See Figure 5 5 2 Measure the voltages at A15W1P1 see Figure 5 6 with a voltmeter having a small probe 3 Compare the measured voltages with those in Table 5 2 fthevoltages are within tolerance replace A8 fthevoltages are not within tolerance replace A15 If the green LEDs are now on the preregulator A15 and post regulator A8 are working properly and the trouble is excessive loading somewhere after the motherboard connections at A8 Continue with the next section Remove the Assemblies Service Guide 5 13 Power Supply Troubleshooting 8719
164. 1 l A73 BUFFER l H S ss I F 30 MHz i AMP 11 PHASE LOCK EE a FMyict ws Ze p 0 Q PLL OUT TO OQ af mee i Se Se a Fdo ME 0 25 GHz MAIN YIG2 w82 I 55 YIG1 PHASE LOCK BD ENS Sh m SA 10 MHz PLL FROM N qr v 12 IF DET mnc 9 I 8 PRECISION SOURCE X 10 z REFERENCE Sa Sa pos PRERUNE gr wav vis wi l CAL iMHz SWPERR i 55 1 Fa gt m 52 RED LED AMBER LED BAG d Q Wa NN 1 5 i Ma UNLOCK PULL DOWN SY ee Pu u A53 2 ELITR E US 5 MIXE SET DAC f HIGH amp MIDBAND 6 A12 REFERENCE AMP 3200 4095 READ gt 0 dBm B eel SRCTUNE N U CUCU ug 3750 4068 READ 5 dB REF IN i VCXO 0 qi 4 vao 4MHZzTOA10 pesce 1 hm 1 A57 I wo TUNE 40 iz FIXED A d osc 9 x ee SIGNAL SEPARATION OPT 400 012 OPT 012 14 100kH ae VCXO ADJ i z Rc i J2 IPORT 1j v 15 VCO TUNE 55 I 16 2nd LO 9 996 MHz AIE 70 STEP I SPLITTER 1 vco _ w30 012 39 984 MHz T A71 STEP our
165. 121 1 Frequency Converter Rebuilt E xchange W30 08720 20026 1 A62 to A65 W32 08722 20069 1 A58to A69 W74 08720 20266 1 W72 to A64 W78 08722 20124 1 A21 to A66 W91 08722 20125 1 A69 to A62 13 62 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Replaceable Parts 8719ES 20ES 22ES Replaceable Part Listings RF Network Analyzers 8722ET Option 004 A7 W32 A69 A64 A65 W74 W91 W30 A98 O jo w78 w78 A66 sb581e Service Guide 13 63 Replaceable Parts 8719ET 20ET 22ET Replaceable Part Listings 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Front RF Assemblies Ref Agilent Models Options HP Agilent Part Qty Description Desig Number 1 8719ET All 5064 3949 1 Test Port Connector 8720E T 1 8722ET All 5064 3950 1 Test Port Connector 19 All 08720 60261 1 GSP Board A22 All All 08720 60152 1 Display Interface Board A27 8719ET ES All 8493C Opt 010 1 Attenuator 8720 5 27 8722 5 All 8490C Opt 010 1 Attenuator A56 All ES Models All 08720 60182 1 LED Board A62 8719 5 All 5086 7968 1 RF Coupler 8720ET ES A62 8719ET ES All 5086 6968 1 RF Coupler 8720ET ES Rebuilt Exchange A62 8722ET ES All 5086 7518 1 RF Coupler A62 8722ET ES All 5086 6518 1 RF Coupler Rebuilt Exchange A63 8719ES All 5086 7968 1 RF Coupler
166. 19ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Miscellaneous Part Numbers Replaceable Parts Replaceable Part Listings Description HP Agilent Part Number Service Tools TOOL KIT for All Models includes the following Adapter 2 4 mm F APC 3 5 F Adapter 2 4 mm APC 3 5 M Extender Board Assembly for 2nd Converters Extender Board Assembly Source Control Extender Board Assembly Adapter SMB M TO SMB M Adapter SMB M TO BNC F Adapter SMA F TO SMA F Adapter SMA M TO SMA M SMB Tee Fuse 5A 125 V Fuse 1 125 V Fuse2A 125 V Fuse 4A 125 V Fuse 3 15A 250 V Cable Assembl y E xtender RF Cable Assembly SMA Flex Wrench Open Ended 5 5 Bag antistatic 12 0 X 15 0D Cable Second Converter l F 08722 60018 11901B 11901D 08415 60019 08753 60155 08720 60151 1250 0669 1250 1237 1250 1158 1250 1159 1250 1391 2110 0046 2110 0047 2110 0425 2110 0476 2110 0655 5061 1022 8120 4396 8710 1770 9222 1132 8120 5040 Documentation CD ROM indudes all manuals listed in the manual set Agilent Technologies 8719ET ES 8720ET ES 8722ET ES Manual Set on 08720 90418 manuals 8719ET ES 8720ET ES 8722ET ES Manual Set indudes thefollowing 08720 90390 Installation and Quick Start Guide User s Guide Reference Guide Programmer s Guide 08720 90391 08720 90392 08720 90393 08753 90475 8719ET ES 8720 5 8722ET ES Service Guide includes the following 08720 90397 871
167. 2 4 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Theory of Operation 8719ES 20ES 22ES Functional Groups of the Analyzer RF Network Analyzers Functional Groups of the Analyzer The operation of the analyzer is most logically described in five functional groups E ach group consists of several major assemblies and performs a distinct function in the instrument Some assemblies are related to more than one group and all the groups areto some extent interrelated and affect each other s performance Power Supply The power supply functional group provides power for the other assemblies in the instrument Digital Control The digital control group provides control to all assemblies in the network analyzer The graphics signal processor GSP provides an interface between the CPU and the display Source The source group supplies a phase locked and leveled microwave signal to the device under test Signal Separation The signal separation group performs the function of an S parameter test set dividing the source signal into a reference path and a test path and providing connections to the device under test Receiver The receiver group measures and processes the input signals for display The following pages describe the operation of the assemblies within each of the functional groups Service Guide 12 5 Theory of Operation 8719ET 20ET 22ET Power Supply Theory 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Power Supply Theory The power su
168. 20 GHz for the 8722ET ES 4 Press REFERENCE VALUE Enter the power value listed as in Table 3 4 then press x1 After the value is entered press MARKER MODE MENU MKR STATS ON The marker stats will appear on the display The displayed trace should be centered on the reference 0 5 dB e Ifthe trace is not centered on the reference continue with the next step e fthetraceis centered on the reference to Adjusting the Power Linearity on page 3 25 3 24 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Adjustments and Correction Constants 8719ES 20ES 22ES Power Linearity Adjustment RF Network Analyzers 5 To switch on the power DAC press SERVICE MENU SERVICE MODES SRC ADJUST MENU PWR DAC ON For the 8719ET ES or 8720ET ES press 1 For the 8722E T ES press 1 6 Adjust the front panel knob until the mean value is equal to 2 Record the MAIN POWER DAC number Example Power DAC 461 7 To switch off the power DAC press PWR DAC OFF 8 Press SAVE STATE 9 Divide the previously recorded DAC number by 256 Example 461 256 10 To store the quotient press the following SERVICE MENU PEEK POKE PEEK POKE ADDRESS POKE Enter the quotient and then press 1 Example quotient 1 11 To store the remainder by press the following PEEK POKE ADDRESS POKE Enter the remainder and then press x1 Example remainder 205 12 Press Preset 13 Press RECALL STATE Verif
169. 20063 1 A74 to A70 W40 08722 20062 1 A74to A71 W41 08722 20936 1 A74 to A76 W52 08722 20024 3 External Link 13 50 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Replaceable Parts 8719ES 20ES 22ES Replaceable Part Listings RF Network Analyzers Ref Desig Options HP Agilent Qty Description Part Number W55 08722 20065 1 74 to Front Panel R Channel OUT W77 08720 20103 1 A73 to A67 8722E S Option 400 012 m m 64 71 65 70 W37 W36 W41 w39 A52 A74 W16 W55 W77 W38 99 A61 A60 W14 W26 W25 W32 W40 51 A17 W36 15 17 W52 3 Places sb575e Service Guide 13 51 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Part Listings 8719ET 20ET 22ET 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Bottom Assemblies and Cables for 8722E S Option 4004089 Ref Options HP Agilent Qty Description Desig Part Number 7 08720 60253 1 CPU Repair A7 08720 69253 1 CPU Repair Kit Rebuilt E xchange 17 08720 60264 1 Motherboard A23 A24 5086 7589 2 R channel Switches A23 A24 5086 6589 2 R channel Switches Rebuilt E xchange A51 08720 60274 1 Bd Assy Test Set Interface A52 5086 7456 1 Assy Pulse Generator A52 5086 6456 1 Assy Pulse Generator Rebuilt E xchange A60 A61 5086 7484 2 Bias Tee A60 A6
170. 3 theory 12 3 system verification 2 1 2 15 equipment initialization 2 20 equipment needed 2 18 post repair 14 35 test setup 2 20 tests 10 11 what it verifies 2 17 T temperature and humidity check 2 6 terminations recommended part numbers 1 4 TEST ABORTED 10 39 test equipment required types 1 3 1 4 service 1 3 1 4 table of 1 3 test options menu 10 6 test pattern descriptions 10 13 test port coupler removal 14 30 TEST PORT OVERLOAD REDUCE POWER 10 39 test record performance test 2 46 test setup frequency accuracy 2 34 measurement calibration 2 22 power meter 2 36 system verification 2 20 test status terms 10 5 tests adjustment description of 10 12 display description of 10 13 external descriptions 10 11 internal description of 10 8 menu 10 5 options menu 10 6 performance 2 33 system verification 10 11 test pattern description 10 13 theory 12 6 digital control 12 9 power supply 12 6 source group 12 13 system operation 12 3 transfer switch description 12 21 transmission port check 4 9 transmission tracking description 11 16 uncorrected port performance 11 8 TROUBLE CHECK SET UP AND START OVER 10 40 troubleshooting accessories 9 2 band related problems 7 22 broadband phaselock problems 7 8 broadband power problems 7 26 CPU A7 board 6 4 display A18 A19 6 7 fan 5 18 front panel A1 A2 6 13 GSP A19 and the Display A 18 6 9 organization 4 13 phaselock by swappinglF cables 7 9 power supply flowc
171. 35 service equipment to use 1 3 phase lock broadband problems 7 8 comparing phase and frequency description of 12 15 error message displayed 7 6 error messages 4 17 measuring signal power on R channel 7 5 Index 5 Index PHASE LOCK CAL FAILED 10 37 PHASE LOCK FAILURE 10 37 PHASE LOCK LOST 10 38 phase lock problem common faulty assemblies 7 8 phase locked sweep description of 12 15 pin locations GSP A19 6 11 pixels specifications dark 6 8 red green or blue 6 7 plotter or printer GPI B check 4 11 PORT 1 check 4 8 PORT 2 Check 4 8 POSSIBLE FALSE LOCK 10 38 post regulator A8 checking fuses and voltages 5 13 checking operation of 5 9 description 12 7 green LED check 5 6 green LED s not all on 5 13 LED check 4 14 measuring the voltages 5 7 post repair procedures 14 2 14 35 table of 14 35 power adjustments 3 17 power holes 7 22 POWER METER INVALID 10 38 POWER METER NOT SETTLED 10 38 power splitter recommended part numbers 1 4 power supply 12 5 12 6 check 4 14 troubleshooting 5 2 troubleshooting flowchart 5 3 POWER SUPPLY HOT 10 38 POWER SUPPLY SHUT DOWN 10 38 preregulated voltages 12 7 preregulator A15 check green and LED 5 6 description 12 6 is green LED blinking 5 8 is red LED on 5 9 removal 14 24 verifying operation of 5 10 preset sequence for ET and ES models 4 5 PRINTER error 10 38 not handshaking 10 38 not on not connected wrong addrs 10 38 procedures Index 6 A7 CC jumper posit
172. 4 16 Runs at Troubleshooting H ere power on or preset 2 ROM CPU board 7 Repeats on fail refer to CPU Board A7 Troubleshooting on page 6 4 3 CMOS RAM 7 Replace 7 4Main DRAM CPU board 7 Repeats on fail replace A7 5 DSP Wr Rd CPU board 7 Replace A7 6 DSP RAM 7 Replace 7 7 DSP ALU CPU board 7 Replace A7 8 DSP Intrpt CPU board 7 Remove 10 test If fail Digital IF A10 replace CPU board A7 If pass replace A10 9 DIF Control CPU board 7 Most likely 7 assembly Digital IF A10 10 DIF Digital IF 10 Check analog bus node 17 for 1 Counter CPU board A7 or MHz If correct 12 is verified Reference A12 suspect A10 11 DSP Digital IF 10 Most likely 10 Control CPU board A7 12 Fr Pan M Front Panel interface 2 Run test 23 If fail replace A2 If Wr Rd Front Panel keyboard A1 pass problem is on bus between A7 or CPU board A7 and A2 or on A7 assembly 13 GPIB Al CPU board A7 Check A7 2 pin 48 for 4 MHz dock CPU Board signal If signal is bad replace A7 14 Post reg Preregulator 15 or See Chapter 5 Power Supply Post regulator A8 or Troubleshooting Destination assembly 15 FracN Cont Fractional N digital A14 Replace 14 16 Sweep Trig Fractional N digital 14
173. 4 5086 6589 2 R channel Switches Rebuilt Exchange A51 08720 60274 1 Bd Assy Test Set Interface A52 5086 7456 1 Assy Pulse Generator A52 5086 6456 1 Assy Pulse Generator Rebuilt E xchange A60 A61 5086 7458 2 Bias Tee A60 A61 5086 6458 2 Bias Tee Rebuilt E xchange A64 A65 A66 5086 7614 3 Assy Sampler A64 A65 A66 5086 6614 3 Assy Sampler Rebuilt E xchange A69 33321 60050 1 Attenuator 0 55 dB 74 089 5086 7642 1 Transfer Switch 74 089 5086 6642 1 Transfer Switch Rebuilt E xchange A74 0894007 08720 60006 1 Transfer Switch A98 08720 60121 1 Frequency Converter A98 08720 69121 1 Frequency Converter Rebuilt E xchange W18 08720 20105 1 Front Panel R In to 2 W20 08720 20281 1 A24toA64 W22 08720 20033 1 A63toA66 W25 0894007 08720 20249 1 A61toA62 W25 089 08720 20259 1 A61to A62 W26 08720 20025 1 A60toA63 W27 08720 20011 1 A74toA60 W28 08720 20248 1 A74to A61 W29 08720 20009 1 A69toA74 W30 08720 20026 1 A62 to A65 W32 08720 20021 1 A58toA69 W50 08720 20314 1 A72toA23 13 16 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Replaceable Parts 8719ES 20ES 22ES Replaceable Part Listings RF Network Analyzers Ref Desig Options HP Agilent Qty Description Part Number W51 08720 20279 1 A23toA24 W52 08720 20098 1 External Link W54 08720 20282 1 A23to Front Panel R Channel Out 8719E S and 8720E S Options 089 089 007 W32 W29 Service Gu
174. 5 10 CWPNTX 8 All All 0515 0431 2 Screw SMM 3 5 6 CWPNTX 9 All All 0515 0430 3 Screw SMM 3 06 CWPNTX 10 All All 08720 00023 1 Source Hold Down 11 All All 0515 0377 2 Screw SMM 3 5 10 CWPNTX 12 All All 08720 00038 1 Source Cover 13 All All 0515 1400 3 Screw SMM 3 5 8 PCFLTX 14 All All 08720 20185 1 Source Casting 13 78 Service Guide ES 8 2 PLAC ES Replaceable Parts Replaceable Part Listings 4 PLACES 6 8719ET 20ET 22ET 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers 3 PLAC ed il 5 2 PLAC 3 PLACES Service Guide 16 PLACES sb6116d 13 79 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Part Listings Hardware Bottom 8719ET 20ET 22ET 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Ref Models Options HP Agilent Part Qty Description Desig Number 1 All All 0515 0430 1 Screw Smm 3 0 6 Cwpntx 2 All All 0515 0458 4 Scr
175. 58 1 25 sb549e Service Guide 13 11 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Part Listings Bottom Assemblies and Cables 8719 5 and 8720E S Standard and Option 007 8719ET 20ET 22ET 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Ref Desig Options HP Agilent Qty Description Part Number A7 08720 60253 1 CPU Repair Kit A7 08720 69253 1 CPU Repair Kit Rebuilt E xchange 17 08720 60264 1 Motherboard A51 08720 60274 1 Bd Assy Test Set Interface A52 5086 7456 1 Assy Pulse Generator A52 5086 6456 1 Assy Pulse Generator Rebuilt E xchange A60 A61 5086 7458 2 Bias Tee A60 A61 5086 6458 2 Bias Tee Rebuilt E xchange A64 A65 A66 5086 7614 3 Assy Sampler A64 A65 A66 5086 6614 3 Assy Sampler Rebuilt E xchange A69 33321 60050 1 Attenuator 0 55 dB A74 STD 5086 7642 1 Transfer Switch A74 5086 6642 1 Transfer Switch Rebuilt E xchange 74 007 08720 60006 1 Transfer Switch A98 08720 60121 1 Frequency Converter A98 08720 69121 1 Frequency Converter Rebuilt E xchange W22 08720 20033 1 A63 to A66 W25 STD 08720 20249 1 A61 to A62 W25 007 08720 20259 1 A61 to 62 W26 08720 20025 1 A60 to A63 W27 08720 20011 1 74 to 60 W28 08720 20248 1 A74 to A61 W29 08720 20009 1 A69 to A74 w30 08720 20026 1 A62 to A65 W32 08720 20021 1 A58 to A69 W36 08720 20312 1 72 to A64 W52 08720 20098 1 External Link 13 12 Service
176. 7 7 14 NIST traceability path for calibration and verification standard 2 17 NO CALIBRATION CURRENTLY IN PROGRESS 10 36 NO FAIL FOUND 10 36 NO FILE S FOUND ON DISK 10 36 NOIF FOUND CHECK RINPUT LEVEL 10 36 NO SPACE FOR NEW CAL CLEAR REGISTERS 10 36 non ANSI NCSL 2540 1 1994 verification description 2 3 non ANSI NCSL Z540 1 1994 verification description 2 3 NORMAL and ALTER jumper position adjustment 3 4 NOT ALLOWED DURING POWER METER CAL 10 36 NOT ENOUGH SPACE ON DISK FOR STORE 10 37 NRM and ALT jumper position adjustment 3 4 N type cables recommended part numbers 1 4 number option adjustment 3 13 number serial adjustment 3 11 offset ADC adjustment 3 10 open loop power measuring on 19 and 20 models measuring on 22 models 7 12 opens verifying 9 5 operating temperature checking 5 12 operation verification post repair 14 35 operator s check 4 7 how to perform 2 8 option 004 step attenuator description 1 7 option 007 mechanical transfer switch description 1 7 option 010 time domain description 1 7 option 012 direct access receiver configuration description 1 7 option 085 high power system description 1 8 option 089 frequency offset mode description 1 8 option 1 rack mount flange kit without handles description 1 8 option 1CP rack mount flange kit with handles description 1 8 option 1D5 removing the A26 high stability frequency reference 14 32 option 400 signal separat
177. 719ET 20ET 22ET Service Related Error Messages in Alphabetical Order 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers TROUBLE CHECK SET UP AND START OVER Service Error Your equipment setup for the adjustment procedure in progress is not correct Number 115 Refer to Chapter 3 Adjustments and Correction Constants Start the procedure again WRONG DISK FORMAT INITIALIZE DISK Error Number You have attempted to store load or read file titles but your disk format does 77 not conform to the Logical Interchange Format LIF or DOS format You must initialize the disk before reading or writing to it 10 40 Service Guide 11 Error Terms 11 1 Error Terms 8719ET 20ET 22ET Information on This Chapter 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Information on This Chapter The analyzer generates and stores factors in internal arrays when a measurement error correction measurement calibration is performed T hese factors are known by the following names error terms E terms e measurement calibration coefficients The analyzer creates error terms by measuring well defined calibration devices over the frequency range of interest and comparing the measured data with the ideal model for the devices The differences represent systematic repeatable errors of the analyzer system Theresulting calibration coefficients are good representations of the uncorrected performances For details on the various l
178. 720 20316 1 A74 to A73 W52 08720 20098 1 External Link w55 08720 20172 1 A74 to Rear Panel Source Out W77 08720 20315 1 A73 to A67 13 22 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Replaceable Parts 8719ES 20ES 22ES Replaceable Part Listings RF Network Analyzers 8719E S and 8720E S Option 400 A7 71 64 70 W36 W41 A65 W39 A52 A74 W30 w55 W38 A67 W37 W77 A61 W52 A60 w26 W25 W32 W40 A51 A17 W22 66 sb561e Service Guide 13 23 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Part Listings 8719ET 20ET 22ET 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Bottom Assemblies and Cables for 8719E S and 8720E S Option 400 012 Ref Desig Options HP Agilent Qty Description Part Number A7 08720 60253 1 CPU Repair Kit A7 08720 69253 1 CPU Repair Kit Rebuilt Exchange A17 08720 60264 1 Motherboard A51 400 08720 60275 1 Bd Assy Test Set Interface A52 5086 7456 1 Assy Pulse Generator A52 5086 6456 1 Assy Pulse Generator Rebuilt E xchange A60 A61 5086 7458 2 Bias Tee A60 A61 5086 6458 2 Bias Tee Rebuilt E xchange A64 A65 A66 5086 7614 4 Assy Sampler A67 A64 A65 A66 5086 6614 4 Assy Sampler Rebuilt E xchange A67 A70 A71 33326 60006 2 Attenuator 0 55 dB A74 5086 7975 1 Switch Splitter A74 5086 6975 1 Switch Splitter Rebuilt Exchange A99 08720 60124 1 Frequency C
179. 9 and the Display A18 6 9 Measure the Supply Voltages Applied tothe GSP 19 6 9 Run Display ad 6 10 Inspect Ribbon Cable Repeat Display Test 55 6 10 Perio mi Walking One Pale ace AH kg sqe TE SPORES PP ERR 6 10 Run Display Tests DU DI OE AERE ER Ro don PORC 6 12 Front Panel Troubleshooting AVAZ u eis e xh ERR wade 6 13 Check Front Pane LEDs After Preset cassis Pa REINES VAS 6 13 Iden Ehe BU PRESETS OPI ie 6 14 ASHER Cables LORE LIP SCR PER Eq 6 16 Test LE sing e Ono op ARK ae PEER RINGS whee Ie d abd Rs 6 16 Run thelnbermal Diagnostic TERES a Lg eb ARRA HERE EET RREEGGRATAIEQG EYE Pd dens 6 17 Ts InterbWECenE edere E mre bres 6 19 Repeat Test FUNCION uae p ERE bdo da 6 19 IPIE Falle Louer xit FERRO dee Fb da 6 19 Digital Control Block Diag alit sd aoi ie 6 21 Contents viii Contents 7 Source Troubleshooting Information Gn This CMAP onda 7 2 Source Troubleshooting
180. 9ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Replaced Assembly Adjustments Correction Constants CC Verification A11 Phase L ock A7 Switch Positions Analog Bus CC Test 44 Source Pretune Tests 43 Frequency Accuracy Performance Test A12 Reference Reference Assembly VCO Tune Frequency Accuracy Performance Test A13 Fractional N Analog A7 Switch Positions Analog Bus CC Test 44 Fractional N Spur Avoidance and F M Sideband Adjustment Internal Test 20 Frequency Accuracy Performance Test A14 Fractional N A7 Switch Positions Internal Test 20 Digital Analog Bus CC Test 44 Frequency Accuracy Performance Test A15 Preregulator None Internal Test 0 A16 Rear Panel Interface None Notest available A17 Motherboard None Internal Test 0 A18 Display None Internal Tests 62 76 A19 Graphics System None Internal Tests 55 76 Processor A51 Test Set nterface None Op Ck Port1 Test 21 Op Ck Port2 Test 22 A53 Low Band Assembly Output Power Adjustments Power Linearity Adjustments Frequency Accuracy Performance Test L evel Accuracy Performance Test SourceLinearity Performance Test A54 YIG2 20 40 GHz 8722 5 Source Pretune CC Test 43 Output Power Adjustments Power Linearity Adjustments Frequency Accuracy Performance Test Level Accuracy Performance Test Source Linearity Performance Test A55 YIG1 2 4 20 GHz Source Pretune CC Test 43 Output Po
181. 9ET ES 8720ET ES 8722ET ES Service Guide on CD ROM 08720 90419 Service Guide 13 87 Replaceable Parts 8719ET 20ET 22ET Replaceable Part Listings 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Description HP Agilent Part Number ES Upgrade Kits Mechanical Transfer Switch U pgrade Kit Option 007 Time Domain Capability Upgrade Kit Option 010 Direct Sampler Access U pgrade K it Option 012 High Power S parameter Test Set Upgrade Kit Option 085 Frequency Offset Mode Upgrade Kit Option 089 Firmware Upgrade Kit Option 099 High Stability Frequency Reference U pgrade Kit Option 105 Fourth Sampler And TRL Calibration Firmware U pgrade Kit Option 400 ET Upgrade Kits Source Attenuator U pgrade Kit Option 004 Time Domain Capability Upgrade Kit Option 010 Firmware Upgrade Kit Option 099 High Stability Frequency Reference U pgrade Kit Option 1D5 Protective Caps for Connectors Female GPIB Connector 1252 5007 Female Parallel Port 1252 4690 RS 232 Connector 1252 4697 Female 3 5 mm Test Ports 1401 0245 Fuses used on the A8 Post Regulator Fuse 2A 125 V Non Time Delay 0 25x0 27 2110 0425 Fuse 0 75A 125 V Non Time Delay 0 25x0 27 2110 0424 Fuse 4A 125 V Non Time Delay 0 25x0 27 2110 0476 Fuse 1A 125 V Non Time Delay 0 25x0 27 2110 0047 Fuse 0 5A 125 V Non Time Delay 0 25x0 27 2110 0046 For Line Fuse part numbers refer to Hardware Preregulator on page 13
182. A E4418A EPM 441A or E4419A EPM 442A Power Sensor 8485A 8487A Adapter 3 5 mm f to 3 5 mm f part number N A 85052 60012 part of 85052B Adapter 2 4 mm f to 2 4 mm f N A part number 85056 60006 part of 85056A RF Cable Set 85131F 85133F RF Open part number part number 85052 60009 85056 60023 part of 85052B part of 85056A Analyzer and power meter warmup time 30 minutes 1 sure the A7 Switch is in the alter position ALT 2 Zero and calibrate the power meter 3 Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 3 13 3 48 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Adjustments and Correction Constants 8719ES 20ES 22ES Raw Offset Correction Constants RF Network Analyzers Figure 3 13 Setup for the R Channel ET ES Models NETWORK ANALYZER POWER METER Power Sensor Direct Connection sb520e Raw Offset for the R Channel ET ES Models 1 Press the following FACTORY PRESET SERVICE MENU SERVICE MODES MORE SAMPLER COR OFF INPUT PORTS R SEARCH MAX Note the maximum frequency and write it down 2 Press CW FREQ and enter the maximum frequency point from step 1 Press SEARCH MAX Note the maximum marker reading MMR and write it down 3 Enter the power sensor calibration factor for the maximum frequency point into the power meter NOTE Refer to the power sensor manual for instructions on how to enter a calibration factor into the power meter If the exact frequency is not
183. A RF Adapter 2 4 mm f to Type N f 11903B A RF Adapter 3 5 mm f to Type N f 1250 1745 2 total A Cables RF Cable BNC 50 ohm 24 inch 8120 2582 A RF Cable Type N m connectors 50W 11500C 2 total P A 24 inch RF Cable Set 3 5 mm connectors 85131F Cable Set 7 mm connectors to 3 5 mm 85132F P RF Cable Set 2 4 mm connectors 85133F Extension Cables SMB f to BNC m 4 ft length 8120 5048 T Extension Cables SMB m to SMB f 8120 5040 A T Coax Cable BNC m to BNC m 50W 10503A A GPIB Cables 1 meter length 10833A A P Performance Tests A Adjustments T Troubleshooting 1 4 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Service Equipment and Analyzer Options 8719ES 20ES 22ES Service Test Equipment RF Network Analyzers Required Equipment Critical Specifications Recommended Model or Use HP Agilent Part Number Tools and Static Safety Parts Non Metallic Adjust Tool 8830 0024 A Tool Kit No substitute 08722 60018 P A T Anti Static Wrist Strap 9300 1367 Anti Static Wrist Strap Cord 9300 0980 A T Static Control Table M at and 9300 0797 A T Earth Ground Wire Floppy Disk one 3 5 inch formatted 1 44 MB N A A P Performance Tests A Adjustments T Troubleshooting Service Guide 1 5 Service Equipment and Analyzer Options 8719ET 20ET 22ET Principles of Microwave Connector Care 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Principles of Microwave Connecto
184. A25 switch and the associated cabling fthe power out of the A25 switch is greater than 5 dBm the problem is probably above 24 GHz Proceed with the next steps 5 Check all RF cabling and connections e fany of the cables or connectors are bad have them repaired or replaced fthecables and connectors are good replace the A54 YIG 2 If high band problems still persist then replace the A58 M A D S Service Guide 7 25 Source Troubleshooting 8719ET 20ET 22ET Broadband Power Problems 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Broadband Power Problems This section assumes that a power problem exists across the full frequency range and that no error message is displayed On ES models the problem may affect PORT 1 PORT 2 or both On E T models the problem may affect the REFLECTION port Suspect assemblies include A69 step attenuator A59source interface board A5 source switch A74 transfer switch A58 M A D S A61 bias tee A62 directional coupler A60 bias tee A6 source switch A55 YIG1 A63 directional coupler A25 switch 8722ET ES Only A54 YIG2 8722ET ES Only A14 switch splitter Option 400 Only ALC Signal Separation Check 1 Press Sweep Setup CWFREQ 2 For ES Models Choose which port to begin troubleshooting by pressing the following FWD 511 A R for 1 FWD S22 B R for PORT 2 For ET Models Troubleshoot the REFLECTION port by pressing the following REFLECTION
185. A65 W17 08722 20102 1 A62 to Front Panel A Out W25 08722 20056 1 A61 to A62 W26 08722 20057 1 A60 to A63 W27 08722 20078 1 A74 to A60 W28 08722 20077 1 A74to A61 W29 08722 20076 1 A69 to A74 W32 08722 20069 1 A58 to A69 W36 08720 20041 1 A72 to A64 W52 08722 20024 3 External Link 1 The A74 switch has 2 interconnect cables that are not shown Part number is 08722 20010 13 36 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Replaceable Parts 8719ES 20ES 22ES Replaceable Part Listings RF Network Analyzers 8722E S Option 0074012 A7 A64 W32 29 W36 74 52 w28 W16 A61 W27 98 A60 W14 W25 W26 51 17 W15 A66 W17 W52 3 Places sb568e Service Guide 13 37 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Part Listings 8719ET 20ET 22ET 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Bottom Assemblies and Cables for 8722E S Option 089 Ref Desig Options HP Agilent Qty Description Part Number A7 08720 60253 1 CPU Repair Kit A7 08720 69253 1 CPU Repair Kit Rebuilt Exchange A17 08720 60264 1 Motherboard A23 A24 5086 7589 2 R channel Switches A23 A24 5086 6589 2 R channel Switches Rebuilt E xchange 51 08720 60274 1 Bd Assy Test Set Interface A52 5086 7456 1
186. ACE SOURCE CONTROL SWITCHES FROM A9 1 AT I 1 LSWP FROM A14 SWITCHES TO i F 30 MHz 4 p FRomat2 API ADJ wi 4 Sii 1 LR i m Husa s i CONTROL S 512 CY J3 MM s J2 NETS LOWBAND AE 4 4 MHz FROM 12 oe 2 ge i BIAS OSCILLATORS RH i i A52 PULSE UKN i TRL ma Loscho J1 M A D S cre S EE EEN EEN EN d GENERATOR 9 CAL man 1 I m a MEE NODES CC i 64 R1 SAMPLER 71 LO MED HI STEP I SAMPLE 1 pe l S11 A17 F 30 MHz 4 RECOVERY RATE IS A QUT 521 W88 ext OFFSET 4 16kHz 52 I lt 1 J3 AM SLOPE 2 14 1 heel ET O o Nez po i oo W31 l a S12 1 W34 DIODE r gol g w48 L 7 j 1 58 M A D S ADC l i LOW BAND ADJ BLANKING ADJ F 9 1 I x W m w I I 1 gt 1 i F gt i V a ROUT 16 si 5 1 A11 PHASE LOCK FM YIG2 9 RENE FM YIG1 AGB 6dB i i p i i REV I L gt PLL OUT TO 0 1 1 ATTN i 123 vi 40 v4 PHASE LOCK I F 40 MHz MAIN YIG2 w82 I 55 YIG1 1 2 l I 0 I i i 0
187. ALLEL PORT NOT AVAILABLE FOR COPY 10 37 PARALLEL PORT NOT AVAILABLE FOR GPIO 10 37 PHASE LOCK CAL FAILED 10 37 PHASE LOCK FAILURE 10 37 PHASE LOCK LOST 10 38 POSSIBLE FALSE LOCK 10 38 POWER METER INVALID 10 38 POWER METER NOT SETTLED 10 38 POWER SUPPLY HOT 10 38 POWER SUPPLY SHUT DOWN 10 38 PRINTER error 10 38 not handshaking 10 38 not on not connected wrong addrs 10 38 PWR MTR NOT ON CONNECTED OR WRONG ADDR 10 39 SAVE FAILED INSUFFICIENT MEMORY 10 39 SELF TEST FAILED 10 39 SOURCE POWER TURNED OFF RESET UNDER POWER MENU 10 39 SWEEP MODE CHANGED TO CW TIME SWEEP 10 39 SWEEP TIME TOO FAST 10 39 Index 3 Index TEST ABORTED 10 39 TEST PORT OVERLOAD REDUCE POWER 10 39 TROUBLE CHECK SET UP AND START OVER 10 40 WRONG DISK FORMAT INITIALIZE DISK 10 40 error messages description 10 33 error numbers definitions 10 33 error terms components related to 9 4 description 11 10 inspecting 9 4 inspection 11 5 types 11 2 verifying 11 4 ES models 7 9 signal separations 12 19 ESF and ESR description 11 12 E terms 11 2 ETF and ETR description 11 16 and E XR description 11 14 external test descriptions 10 11 F fan removal 14 34 fan troubleshooting 5 18 FILE NOT COMPATIBLE WITH INSTRUMENT 10 35 firmware revision softkey on display 10 30 FM sideband and spur avoidance adjustment 3 44 fractional N Digital A14 checks with ABUS 7 14 fractional N spur avoidance and FM sideband adjustment 3 44 fra
188. AM tests 2 3 and 4 then tests 5 through 11 14 15 and 16 If any of these tests fail this test returns a FAIL status Use the front panel knob to scroll through the tests and see which failed If all pass this test displays a PASS status Each test in the subset retains its own test status This same subset is available over GPIB as TST It is not performed upon remote preset 2 ROM Part of the ROM RAM tests and cannot be run separately For more information refer to Chapter 6 Digital Control Troubleshooting 3 SRAM RAM Verifies the A7 CPU SRAM long term memory with a non destructive write read pattern A destructive version that writes over stored data at power on can be enabled by changing the 4th switch position of the A7 CPU switch as shown in Figure 10 2 10 8 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Service Key Menus and Error Messages 8719ES 20ES 22ES Service Menus Internal Diagnostics RF Network Analyzers Figure 10 2 Switch Positions on the A7 CPU Board A7 CPU Assembly mam Normal Mode Destructive SRAM Rocker Slide Test Enabled sb6169d 4 Main DRAM Verifies the A7 CPU main memory DRAM witha non destructive write read test pattern A destructive version of this test is run during power on For additional information see I nternal Tests on page 10 8 and Chapter 6 Digital Control Troubleshooting 5 DSP Wr Rd Verifies the ability of the main processor and the DS
189. ANEL PROCESSOR DIGITALBUS 1 5 2 1 27 ATTN 1 x reme ass sassa I 3 4 1 W32 W91 I VE a TESTSET 0 TEST 0 1 FRONT PANEL T 1 lee ANY TRANSMISSION INTERFACE INTERFACE 3 I E ee Analog Bus node location i bi 0 oe 1 I v Voltage Node OPTION 004 EST EXT BIAS TOA17 21 x POWER REGULATORS AN POWER EXTREF TOA12 Q I FRONT SUPPLY MICROCIRCUIT POWER AUX INPUT I W83 PANEL AND gt gt TOA10 I PROCESSOR REGULATOR INSTRUMENT POWER y EXT TRIG i s 17 I I a EE 1 TEST SEQ 4 n FROM A9 LIMIT TEST 4 n I I i 2 MEAS RESTART 17 1 I A 9 GREEN LEDS i E I E REEN LED RED LED NORMAL ON STEADY n a ee ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZX7ZZZZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZZZZZ DINKYBD Rs232 PARALEL GPIB O s l INTERCONNECT INTERCONNECT INTERCONNECT INTERCONNECT W99 ss SS s u mus umumi ss I DISPLAY INTERFACE i A7 CPU GSP 1 A18 DISPLAY DIN KYBD PORT RS 232 PORT PARALLELPORT GPIB PORT on a A22 DISPLAY 1 i Tu INTERFACE INTERFACE INTERFACE INTERFACE INTERFACE CRYSTAL ATTENUATORS 4
190. ARE PROBLEM Error Number Thedisk drive is not responding correctly If using an external disk drive refer 39 tothe disk drive operating manual DISK MESSAGE LENGTH ERROR Error Number The analyzer and the external disk drive aren t communicating properly Check 190 the GPIB connection and then try substituting another disk drive to isolate the problem instrument DISK not on not connected wrong addrs Error Number Thedisk cannot be accessed by the analyzer Verify power to the disk drive and 38 check the GPIB connection between the analyzer and the disk drive Ensure that the disk drive address recognized by the analyzer matches the GPIB address set on the disk drive itself DISK READ WRITE ERROR Error Number There may be a problem with your disk Try a new floppy disk If a new floppy 189 disk does not eliminate the error suspect hardware problems FILE NOT COMPATIBLE WITH INSTRUMENT Information You cannot recall user graphics that had been saved on an earlier model of Message analyzer with a monochrome display ILLEGAL UNIT OR VOLUME NUMBER Error Number Thedisk unit or volume number set in the analyzer is not valid Refer to the 46 disk drive operating manual Service Guide 10 35 Service Key Menus and Error Messages 8719ET 20ET 22ET Service Related Error Messages in Alphabetical Order 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers INITIAL
191. All 0515 2318 4 Screw SMM 3 5 8 PCPNTX 5 All All 5041 9187 2 Rear Cap Side Strap 6 All All 0515 1384 4 Screw SMM 5 0 10 PCFLTX 7 All All 08720 00081 2 Side Strap 8 All All 08720 00080 2 Cover Side 9 All All 5041 9186 2 Front Cap Side Strap 10 All All 08720 00079 2 Cover Bottom 11 All All 1460 1345 2 Foot Elevator 12 All All 5041 9167 4 Foot 13 84 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Replaceable Parts 8719ES 20ES 22ES Replaceable Part Listings RF Network Analyzers Illustration of Chassis Parts Outside 2 Places 4 Places 2 Places 2 Places 2 Places 4 Places sb56e Service Guide 13 85 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Part Listings Chassis Parts Inside 8719ET 20ET 22ET 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Ref Models Options HP Agilent Part Qty Description Desig Number 1 All All 5022 1190 1 Front Panel Frame 2 All All 0515 0375 1 Screw SMM 3 0 16 CWPNTX 3 All All 08720 00076 1 Memory Deck 4 All All 0515 0458 4 Screw SMM 3 5 8 CWPNTX 5 All All 5021 5808 1 Rear Frame 6 All All 0515 2086 16 Screw SMM 4 0 7 PCFLTX 7 All All 08720 20131 4 Side Struts 8 All All 08720 60116 1 Assy Chassis 9 All All 0950 2782 1 Disk Drive 17 08720 60264 1 BD Assy Motherboard Illustration of Chassis Parts Inside 13 86 7 4 4 PLACES sb6103d Service Guide 8719 20 22 87
192. BD connector on the rear panel and press Preset 3 Toerase the HP Agilent logo press the following PRESET FACTORY MORE TITLE ERASE TITLE 4 Enter the serial number by rotating the front panel knob to position the arrow below each character of the instrument serial number and then pressing SELECT LETTER to enter each character Enter a total of ten characters two letters and eight digits Press if you make a mistake 5 Press DONE when you havefinished entering the title Double check that the correct serial number appears in the title area If you made a mistake at this point return to step 3 CAUTION You cannot correct mistakes after you perform step 6 unless you contact the nearest Agilent Technologies sales or service center for a dear serial number keyword Then you must perform P rotected Option Numbers Correction Constants Test 50 and repeat this procedure 6 Press SERVICE MENU TESTS EXECUTE TEST YES 7 Observethe analyzer for the results of the routine If the analyzer displays the message Serial Cor DONE you have completed this procedure 8 If no more correction constant routines are going to be performed return the A7 Switch tothe NRM position and perform the EEPROM Backup Disk Procedure on page 3 33 Service Guide 3 11 Adjustments and Correction Constants 8719ET 20ET 22ET Serial Number Correction Constants Test 49 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers In Case of Difficulty Ifthe an
193. C 131 F The fan should be operating and there should be at least 15 cm 6 in spacing behind and all around the analyzer to allow for proper ventilation Check the Fuses and Isolate 8 Check the fuses associated with each of these supplies near the 8 test points If these fuses keep burning out a short exists Try isolating A8 by removing it from the motherboard connector but keeping the cable A15W1 connected to A8J 2 Connect a jumper wire from A8TP 2 to chassis ground If either the 15 V or 12 6 V fuse blows or the associated green LEDs do not light replace A8 If the 15 V and 12 6 V green LEDs light troubleshoot for a short between the motherboard connector pins 2 pins 6 and 36 12 6 V and the front panel probe power connectors Also check between motherboard connector pins XA8P2 pins 4 and 34 15 V and the front panel probe power connectors Service Guide 5 17 Power Supply Troubleshooting 8719ET 20ET 22ET Fan Troubleshooting 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Fan Troubleshooting Fan Speeds The fan speed varies depending upon temperature It is normal for the fan to be at high speed when the analyzer is just switched on and then change to low speed when the analyzer is cooled Check the Fan Voltages If the fan is dead refer to the A8 post regulator block diagram at the end of this chapter The fan is driven by the 18 V and 18 V supplies coming from the A15 preregulator Neither of these s
194. C bp P rr pure i O O 1 Vez 1 2 1227 SU TE m cmm 0 w SHSM 7 I i J C L aa io _ MEASURE 511 821 0 55dB c E ABPOST REGULATOR restart PS nemaeus j A98 I Poa m I i I Boii EA 1 A2 FRONT PANEL PROCESSOR PANEL Y Bin ma 012 a TESTSET 0 TEST 0 I A1 FRONT PANEL I M 7 ENS Mi DM i os PORT 2 PORT 2 INTERFACE INTERFACE I v Voltage Node 2 j Juanes L EXT BIAS 17 IA21 TSV REGULATORS LEAN ROWER gt EXT REF 12 i IKEYBOARD FRONT 1 did 8V MICROCIRCUIT POWER AUX INPUT oun PROCESSOR REGULATOR 8V INSTRUMENT POWER _ EXT TRIG Er gt 17 i 2 TEST SEQ 4 l LIMIT TEST i I I a i E R1LOOP OPT 400 089 NORMAL ON STEADY l tt ne 1 7 089 lt 4 e z 4 5 2 BUFFER 1 DNKYBD RS 232 PARALLEL e i I 3 INTERCONNECT INTERCONNECT INTERCONNECT INTERCONNECT w99 Q Q we ee Ho 0000000 EE BR EE HR pms W55 Casas c w33
195. CTION port If the directivity is still bad troubleshoot the REFLECTION port If the directivity is good the load is bad Shorts and opens If the source match and reflection tracking terms look good the shorts and the opens are good If these terms look bad while the rest of the terms look good proceed to Verify Shorts and Opens by Substitution on page 9 7 Isolate the Fault in the RF Path Sincethe calibration devices have been verified the problem exists in the test port connector the coupler or elsewhere in the internal RF path Table 9 1 shows which assemblies affect each error term If more than one error term is bad note which assemblies are common to each of the bad terms T hese are the suspects The method of fault isolation that must be used is assembly substitution Assembly Substitution Fault Isolation IMPORTANT Beforetrying this be sure to inspect the front panel test port connector for obvious damage Tighten all semi rigid cable connectors inside the instrument with a calibrated torque wrench At this point the error term problem has been isolated to a specific port and you should have a list of suspected assemblies 1 On ES models swap identical assemblies between the PORT 1 and PORT 2 signal paths and then regenerate the error terms NOTE On ET models where a duplicate assembly is not present the analyzer will have to be sent in to your local Agilent Technologies service center Refer to Chapter 13
196. CUTE TEST A PASS message will appear on the display if the instrument passes this test Service Guide 2 7 System Verification and Performance Tests 8719ET 20ET 22ET Preliminary Tests 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Procedure to Perform Operator s Check PORT 1 or REFLECTION port Check 1 Connect a short to PORT 1 REFLECTION port on E T models 2 Press the following PRESET FACTORY SERVICEMENU TESTS EXTERNAL TESTS EXECUTE TEST CONTINUE Ifthe message PRESS CONTINUE appears on the display during the test that particular attenuator setting check has failed Press CONTINUE to check the other attenuator settings lf the message FAIL appears on the analyzer display the analyzer has failed the PORT 1 operation check Refer to the flow charts on page 2 4 and page 2 5 Ifthe message DONE appears on the analyzer display the analyzer has passed the PORT 1 operation check PORT 2 Check ES Models 3 Connect the short to PORT 2 4 Press the following PRESET FACTORY SERVICE MENU TESTS EXECUTE TEST CONTINUE fthe message PRESS CONTINUE appears on the display during the test that particular attenuator setting check has failed Press CONTINUE to check the other attenuator settings Ifthe message FAIL appears on the analyzer display the analyzer has failed the PORT 2 operation check Refer to the flow charts on page 2 4 and page 2 5 fthe message DONE appears
197. Check PORT 2 for ES Models 8 Perform a one port calibration on PORT 2 For detailed calibration procedures refer to Calibrating for Increased Measurement Accuracy in the analyzer user s guide 9 Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for PORT 2 Figure 2 6 Typical Cable Connector Repeatability Response CHI 511 Los 20 dB REF 50 dB PRm REFERENCE IVALUWE 9D dB Cor IM 128 START 050 000 HOG GHz STOP 40 050 666 000 GHz 2 14 Service Guide 8719 20 22 System Verification and Performance Tests 8719ES 20ES 22ES System Verification RF Network Analyzers System Verification System verification is used to verify system level error corrected uncertainty limits for network analyzer measurements The verification procedure is automated and is contained in the firmware of the analyzer The system verification section consists of five parts General Information on page 2 16 Equipment Initialization on page 2 20 Measurement Calibration on page 2 22 Verification Device Measurements on page 2 25 Interpreting the Verification Results page 2 31 The device data provided with the verification kit has a traceable path to a national standard The difference between the supplied traceable data and the measured data must fall within the total uncertainty limits at all frequencies for the system verification to pass Thetotal
198. E SAMPLER COR OFF MARKER SEARCH SEARCH MAX The maximum marker reading is MMR 3 50 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Adjustments and Correction Constants 8719ES 20ES 22ES Raw Offset Correction Constants RF Network Analyzers 11 Recalculate A by taking the power meter reading PMR adding 4 and then subtracting the maximum marker reading MMR A PMR 4 MMR If the magnitude of is less than 0 15 dB then the offset for the R channel is correctly set For ES models go to Raw Offset for the A and B Channels ES Models on page 3 51 For ET Models goto Raw Offsets for the A and B Channels ET Models page 3 54 If the magnitude is greater than 0 15 dB repeat steps 1 through 11 until the R channel raw offset correction constant is achieved Raw Offset for the A and B Channels ES Models 1 Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 3 14 Figure 3 14 Setup for the A and B Channels ES Models NETWORK ANALYZER sb543e 2 Press the following INPUT PORTS A TESTPORT 2 SERVICE MENU SERVICE MODES MORE SAMPLER COR OFF Marker Search SEARCH MAX Note the frequency and write it down 3 Press CW FREQ and enter the maximum frequency point from step 2 Press Marker Search SEARCH MAX Notethe maximum marker reading MMR and write it down Press Power Notethe displayed test port power TPP and write it down Service Guide 3 51 Adjustments and Correction Constants 8719ET 20ET 22ET Ra
199. ECT W99 FROM I ATTN a eee mer Geah a mm i roeo io oi so e INTERFACE A7 CPU 1 719 GSP DISPLAY W32 osa 1 wss w52 weg ro A D asa DIRECTIONAL 71 STEP 5 VD E 7277 am aa E COUPLER ATTN Rs asa PORT PARALLEL PORT GPIB PORT A22 DISPLAY 1 i 1 DA T m ba m INTERFACE INTERFACE ATTENUATORS x INTERFACE MERE E 56 LOWER uum 1 te Q QO S T T Q TO A66J2 24 5 1 p DIGITAL VIDEO I LCD 1 1 ANN OU gt TO A51 _ _1 w52 I 1 W62 1 wi4 1 1 w52 l wes 0 55dB W66 CAD s TRANSFER SWITCH INTERFACE PALETTE 1 PANEL Ay SWITCH COUPLER H gt lt j n LOWER FT PANEL f A3 DISK i VGA i XXX ee 2 3 S akc DRIVE INTERFACE S12 S22 BIAS TO BIAS TEE S I LIGHT bee ee ee ee I I I J2 ISE uo L 1 Q w82 1 1 5 AC STARTUP i ROM RA I qp SS c s 680V STEADY STATE vea A20 INTERCONNECT Lp INVERTER ASSY an a SA REG Ic TO A10
200. EEPROMs 3 32 insertion loss how to do 2 11 typical response 2 11 instrument markings 15 5 INSUFFICIENT MEMORY PWR MTR CAL OFF 10 36 internal diagnostic test running 6 17 table of tests 6 18 internal diagnostics menu map 10 4 internal test descriptions 10 8 internal test performing 2 7 isolation description 11 14 J jumper position adjustment 3 4 jumper positions on the CPU A7 K keypad assemblies removal 14 10 keys identifying stuck 6 14 L LED board removal 14 30 level accuracy performance test 2 36 test record 2 47 linefuse check 5 8 replacing of 14 5 line power module description 12 7 line voltage check 5 8 load match description 11 15 uncorrected port performance 11 8 loads recommended part numbers 1 4 loads verifying 9 4 low band problems 7 22 M M A D S description ES models 12 19 magnitude and phase stability how to for cables 2 12 maintenance 15 2 maximum leveled power table of all network analyzer 12 4 measurement calibration coefficients 11 2 Index test setup 2 22 measurement traceability description 2 16 measurement uncertainty description 2 16 measuring the signal 7 5 7 6 menu analog in description men 10 21 internal diagnostics 10 3 PEEK and POKE 10 29 service key 10 2 service modes more 10 19 test 10 5 test options 10 6 menus service modes 10 17 microwave connector care 1 6 mid band problems 7 23 N network analyzer block diagram newtons rings 6 7 7
201. ERATURE INSIDE NC gt 1 1 52 53 TP4 PREREGULATOR CASTING gt 85 C it I 6 I SDIS 1 i v sisi is Ivv v v i 4 SHUTDOWN A17 e MOTHERBOARD W37 AVP PP status i SHUTDOWN CAUSES re AnA SHUTDOWN EXCESSIVE CURRENT OVER TEME AIRFLOW RED LED i 22 OVER VOLTAGE i NORMALLY OFF A15W1P2 a A1733 A17XA8J1 A8P1 UNDER VOLTAGE i LSHDN i4 min LSSHDN l IDISPLAY OVER TEMP 18 82 gt 3 1 i INTERFACE SHUTDOWN DISABLE SDIS AGND BRE zo pod pag SSS SDS r Lr cc l L L L La P z POWER SUPPLY BLOCK DIAGRAM sb530e 8719 20 22 5 6 Digital Control Troubleshooting Digital Control Troubleshooting 8719ET 20ET 22ET Information on This Chapter 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Information on This Chapter Use this procedure only if you have read Chapter 4 Start Troubleshooting Here The digital control group assemblies consist of the following Front panel keyboard 1 Front panel processor A2 CPU board A7 Source control board A9 Digital IF board A10 Rear panel A16 Display A18 GSP Graphical System Processor A19 Test Set interface A51 Begin with CPU Board A7
202. ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Start Here Check the Green LED and Red LED on the Preregulator A15 Switch on the analyzer and look at the rear panel of the analyzer Check the two power supply diagnostic L E Ds on the preregulator A15 casting by looking through the holes located to the left of the line voltage selector switch see Figure 5 2 During normal operation the bottom green LED is on and thetop red LED is off If these LEDs are normal then A15 is 9596 verified Proceed to the next section Check the Green LEDs on the Post Regulator A8 fthegreen LED is not on steadily refer to If the Green LED of the Preregulator A15 Is Off or Blinking on page 5 8 e fthered LED is on or flashing refer to If the Red LED of the Preregulator A15 Is On on page 5 9 Figure 5 2 Location of the Pregulator A15 Diagnostic LEDs RED LED GREEN LED LINE VOLTAGE NORMALLY OFF NORMALLY ON SELECTOR SWITCH 9 6 6 i 2 P P 00 000000 99 rJ l sb618d Check the Green LEDs on the Post Regulator A8 Remove the top cover of the analyzer and locate the post regulator A8 use the location diagram under thetop cover if necessary Check to see if the green L E Ds on the top edge of A8areall on There are ninegreen LEDs one is not visible without removing the PC board stabilizer Ifall ofthe green LEDs on the top edge of A8 a
203. ET 20ET 22ET If the Green LEDs of the Post Regulator A8 Are Not All ON 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Remove the Assemblies 1 Switch off the analyzer 2 Install A8 Remove the jumper from A8TP2 AGND to chassis ground 3 Remove or disconnect all the assemblies listed below see Figure 5 5 on page 5 9 Always switch off the analyzer before removing or disconnecting an assembly Digital IF A10 Phase lock 11 Reference A12 Fractional N analog A13 Fractional N digital A14 GSP Interface A22 disconnect A17W2 4 Switch on the analyzer and observe the green LEDs on A8 If any of the green LEDs are off or flashing it is not likely that any of the assemblies listed above are causing the problem Goto Briefly Disable the Shutdown Circuitry on page 5 15 If all green LEDs are now on or more of the above assemblies may be faulty Continue with the next step 5 Switch off the analyzer 6 Reconnect cable A17W2 7 Switch on the analyzer and observe the LEDs e ftheLEDsare off or blinking replace the A19 GSP assembly e IftheLEDs arestill on continue with the next step 8 Switch off the analyzer 9 Reinstall each assembly one at a time Switch on the analyzer after each assembly is installed The assembly that causes the green LEDs to off or flash could be faulty NOTE It is possible however that this condition is caused by the A8 post regulator not supplying enough current To c
204. Entering the Power Levels 13 Enter the Power levels For 8719ET ES and 8720ET ES Models Press and enter the power level that is listed as P2 in Table 3 4 Press CALIBRATE MENU RECEIVER CAL TAKE RCVR CAL SWEEP 3 26 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Adjustments and Correction Constants 8719ES 20ES 22ES Power Linearity Adjustment RF Network Analyzers For 8722ET ES Models Press Gin 55 and enter the power level that is listed as P2 in Table 3 4 Press x1 CALIBRATE MENU RECEIVER CAL TAKE RCVR CAL SWEEP 14 Press and enter the power level that is listed as P2 in Table 3 4 then press x7 15 Press REFERENCE VALUE and enter the value listed as P2 in Table 3 4 and then press x1 The displayed trace should be centered on the reference 0 5 dB fthetraceis not centered on the reference continue with the next step e fthetraceis centered on the reference go to Low Band Adjustment on page 3 28 16 To switch on the power DAC press the following SERVICE MENU SERVICE MODES SRC ADJUST MENU PWR DAC ON 17 Adjust the front panel knob until the mean valueis P1 Record the MAIN POWER DAC number 18 To switch off the power DAC press PWR DAC OFF 19 Press SAVE STATE 20 Divide the previously recorded DAC number by 256 21 To store the quotient press the following SERVICE MENU PEEK POKE PEEK POKE ADDRESS POKE Enter the quotient and then press x1 22 To storethe remainder press the
205. G1 I P i PLL OUT TO q F 40 MH 82 55 YIG1 A29 1 i 0 v Mm z I 0 2 J w 0 25 GHz MAIN YIG2 put 7 CE 1 Sr l 10MHz PLL FROM QE vG02 FF DET evo I S C d z cumas OMS rob us Y MANYIGI ue F 1 5 2nd CONNVERTER 1A66B SAMPLER BOARD l 4 MHz SWPERR 2 55 20 GHz i l PL REF W81 L a x I M Dw ki E gt 4 J yA 2 Ay PRETUNE dg 2 RED LED AMBER LED DAC Q as F i I ER W42 w23 L UNLOCK PULL DOWN PF fee ee 2 eee ee E gt u o 1 gt AIL 72 22 7222 1 1 MIXER 4 gt _ SET DAC HIGH amp MIDBAND 2 A12 REFERENCE 1017 PL REF SET DAC LOWBAND ih da SRCTUE O NTT 777 3750 4095 READ gt 5 dBm SET DAC LOWBAND 5 REF IN 1 a3 VCXO 10 Mh 4000 READ gt 8 dBm OPT 007 CHANGES 74 lata I EXT REF 18 40 MHz 1 MHz 2 TO AMECHANICAL TRANSFER as gt i A57 SR SUNE SWITCH I wao UNE ETUR FIXED DAC TO 4000 i 40 MHz Q we i osc CJ I FOR HIGH MID amp LOWBAND J2 READS gt 5 dB 8 PME 2 READS gt d m SIGNAL SEPARATION STANDARD OPT 007 012 Q
206. H BAND SM2H 8722 5 allows you to enter DAC numbers in the range of 2020 through 4095 to generate test port output frequencies from 18 2 GHz to 23 2 GHz PWR DAC ON off This controls the amplitude of the reference oscillator This DAC 15 located the 59 source interface board ALC ON off toggles the automatic leveling control ALC on and off PLL AUTO ON off SM4 automatically attempts to determine new pretune values when the instrument encounters phase lock problems for example harmonic skip With PLL AUTO OFF the frequencies and voltages do not change as when they are attempting to determine new pretune values so troubleshooting the phase locked loop circuits is more convenient This function may also be turned off to avoid pretune calibration errors in applications where there is a limited frequency response in the R reference channel For example in a high power test application using band limited filters for R channel phaselocking PLL DIAG on OFF SM5 displays a phase lock sequence at the beginning of each band This sequence normally occurs very rapidly making it difficult to troubleshoot phase lock problems Switching this mode ON slows the process down allowing you to inspect the steps of the phase lock sequence pretune acquire and track by pausing at each step The steps are indicated on the display along with the channel C1 or C2 and band number B1 through B 13 This mode can be used
207. IZATION FAILED Error Number Thedisk initialization failed probably because the disk is damaged 47 INSUFFICIENT MEMORY PWR MTR CAL OFF Error Number There is not enough memory space for the power meter calibration array 154 Increase the available memory by clearing one or more save recall registers or by reducing the number of points NO CALIBRATION CURRENTLY IN PROGRESS Error Number The RESUME CAL SEQUENCE softkey is not valid unless a calibration is 69 already in progress Start a new calibration NO FAIL FOUND Service Error The self diagnose function of the instrument operates on an internal test failure Number 114 At this time no failure has been detected NO FILE S FOUND ON DISK Error Number Nofiles of the type created by an analyzer store operation were found on the 45 disk If you requested a specific file title that file was not found on the disk NO IF FOUND CHECK R INPUT LEVEL Error Number Thefirst IF signal was not detected during pretune Check the front panel R 5 channel jumper If there is no visible problem with the jumper refer to Chapter 7 Source Troubleshooting NO SPACE FOR NEW CAL CLEAR REGISTERS Error Number You cannot store a calibration set due to insufficient memory You can free more 70 memory by dearing a saved instrument state from an internal register which may also delete an associated calibration set
208. Insert a 3 5 inch disk into the analyzer disk drive 2 If the disk is not formatted follow these steps a Press the following FACTORY PRESET FILE UTILITIES FORMAT DISK b Select the format type Toformat LIF disk select FORMAT LIF Toformat a DOS disk select FORMAT DOS c Press FORMAT INT DISK and answer YES at the query 3 Press the following SERVICE MENU SERVICE MODES MORE STORE EEPR ON SELECT DISK INTERNAL DISK RETURN SAVE STATE NOTE Theanalyzer creates a default file FILEOO Thefilename appears in the upper left corner of the display Thefiletype ISTATE E indicates that the fileis an instrument state with EEPROM backup NOTE If you are using a external keyboard to enter data you must press after plugging it in the DIN keyboard connector on the rear panel Service Guide 3 33 Adjustments and Correction Constants 8719ET 20ET 22ET Backup Disk Procedure 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers 4 Press FILE UTILITIES RENAME FILE ERASE TITLE Usethe front panel knob andthe SELECT LETTER softkey or an external keyboard to rename the file FILE00 TO N 12345 where 12345 represents the last 5 digits of the instrument s serial number The first character in the filename must be a letter When you are finished renaming the file press DONE 5 Write the following information on the disk label analyzer serial number date backup was made EEPROM Backup Disk In Case o
209. KYBD PORT RS 232 PORT PARALLEL PORT GPIB PORT 17 A22 DISPLAY Moule INTERFACE INTERFACE INTERFACE INTERFACE MOTHERBOARD INTERFACE CRYSTAL 5 1 L 1 DISPLAY ee DIGITAL VIDEO LCD I CONTROL SHANSEER SUCH i i P INTERFACE PALETTE 1 POS LOWER PANEL EEPROM DISK 1 UGA 1 DE DRIVE INTERFACE I BIAS BIAS 5 I I LIGHT I I U MEMORY I i E tithe tm DIGITAL SIGNAL S PROCESSOR FLASH RAM I I 1 5 AC STARTUP i ROM RAM 225220 70 Po te s 680V AC STEADY STATE VGA Y INTERCONNECT ms p gnus s MAIN RAM gt RED LED 1 REG NORMAL FLASHING CONTROL REFRESH I lt we O 21 51 12 11 TOA14 sb5tte 8719ET 8720ET OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM FOR STANDARD OPT 004 8722 OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM FOR STANDARD OPT 004
210. Kit Rebuilt Exchange A17 08720 60264 1 Motherboard 23 24 5086 7589 1 R channel Switches A23 A24 5086 6589 2 R channel Switches Rebuilt E xchange 51 08720 60274 1 Assy Test Set Interface A52 5086 7456 1 Assy Pulse Generator A52 5086 6456 1 Assy Pulse Generator Rebuilt E xchange A64 A65 A66 5086 7614 3 Assy Sampler A64 A65 A66 5086 6614 3 Assy Sampler Rebuilt E xchange A69 A70 A71 33326 60006 3 Attenuator 0 55 dB A74 33311 1 Transfer Switch A98 08720 60121 1 Frequency Converter A98 08720 69121 1 Frequency Converter Rebuilt E xchange W14 08720 20154 1 A63 to Front Panel B Out W17 08720 20164 1 A62 to Front Panel A Out W20 08720 20281 1 A24 to A64 W32 08720 20146 1 A58 to A69 W50 08720 20314 1 A72 toA23 W51 08720 20279 1 23 to 24 W52 08720 20098 6 External Link W54 08720 20282 1 A23toFront Panel R Channel Out W58 08720 20135 1 A69 to Rear Panel Source Out W59 08720 20144 1 Rear Panel Sourceto A74 W60 08720 20161 1 A74toFront Panel A Switch W61 08720 20159 1 A74toFront Panel B Switch W65 08720 20158 1 A70 to A65 W66 08720 20157 1 A71 to A76 W68 08720 20165 1 Front Panel B In to A71 W69 08720 20166 1 Front Panel A In to A70 13 20 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Replaceable Parts 8719ES 20ES 22ES Replaceable Part Listings RF Network Analyzers 8719E S and 8720E S Options 085 085 089 A7 51 17 w58 A64 W66 A69 w20 71 w32 WS4 W68 74
211. M A D S A69 step attenuator A74 transfer switch A60 bias tee A63 directional coupler A66 B sampler and associated semirigid coax cables 11 10 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Error Terms 8719ES 20ES 22ES Error Term Descriptions RF Network Analyzers Directivity EDF and EDR These are the uncorrected forward and reverse directivity error terms of the system The directivity error of the test port is determined by measuring the S11 and S22 reflection of the calibration kit load The load has a much better return loss specification than does the uncorrected test port therefore any power detected from this measurement is assumed to be dueto directivity error Significant System Components Theload used in the calibration is the most important component T he test port connector the cable and the coupler also greatly affect the measured directivity error Affected Measurements The measurements most affected by directivity errors are measurements of low reflection devices Figure 11 1 Typical EDF EDR without Cables CHI MEM LOG 18 dB REF 20 dB EDF ED PRm START 050 666 606 GHz STOP 40 050 000 000 GHz Service Guide 11 11 Error Terms 8719ET 20ET 22ET Error Term Descriptions 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Source Match ESF and ESR Description These arethe forward and reverse uncorrected source match terms of the driven port They are obtained by m
212. N Model Verification Kit Serial Number Test Port Cables S N Measurement Calibration Calibration Kit Technique __ Ambient temperature Relative Humidity Ambient temperature at measurement Ambient temperature at performance calibration C verification C Test Equipment Used Model Number Trace Number Cal Due Date 1 Frequency Counter 2 Power Meter 3 Power Sensor 4 Spectrum Analyzer Special Notes This system verification applies to total measurement uncertainty and frequency accuracy specifications 2 46 Service Guide 8719 20 22 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers System Verification and Performance Tests Performance Test Record Frequency Accuracy Frequency Point 13 5 8719ET ES 20 0 8720ET ES 26 0 8722ET ES Minimum Specifications 13 499865 GHz 19 999800 GHz 25 999740 GHz Results Maximum Specifications 13 500135 GHz 20 000200 GHz 26 000260 GHz Measurement Uncertainty 2 35 kHz 3 00 kHz 3 60 kHz The measurement uncertainty is based on equipment specified in Service Test Equipment on page 1 3 Level Accuracy Model Type Minimum PORT 1 REFLECTION Maximum Measurement Uncertainty Min 8719ES 8720ES 2 0 dBm 2 0 dBm 0 30 dB 8719E T 0 30 dB 8720E T 8719ES Opt 007 8720ES Opt 007 3 0 dBm 7 0 dBm 8722ES 13 0 dBm 7 0 dBm 0 35 dB 8722E T 0 30 dB 8722ES Opt 007 8 0 dBm 2 0 dBm
213. NO PHASE LOCK CHECK R INPUT LEVEL The first IF was detected at the pretune stage but phase lock could not be acquired thereafter PHASE LOCK LOST Phase lock was acquired but then lost PHASE LOCK CAL FAILED An internal phaselock calibration routine is automatically executed at power on when pretune values drift or when phase lock problems are detected A problem aborted a calibration attempt POSSIBLE FALSE LOCK The analyzer is achieving phase lock but possibly on the wrong harmonic comb tooth SWEEP TIME TOO FAST The fractional N and the digital IF circuits have lost synchronization The error messages listed above usually indicate a source failure or improper instrument configuration For ES Models Check the R Channel As a preliminary step ensure that all option jumper cables are properly connected To ensure that the R channel input is receiving at least 35 dBm power perform the following steps 1 Perform steps 1 and 2 of Source Pretune Correction Constants Test 43 on page 3 6 Make note of the DAC number that is displayed and then abort the procedure 2 Press the following SERVICE MENU SERVICE MODES SRC ADJUST MENU DACNUM HIGH BAND Enter the DAC number determined from step 1 and press 1 Disconnect the front panel R CHANNEL jumper Zero and calibrate a power meter Connect the power sensor to R CHANNEL OUT W The power meter should
214. OL GROUP BLOCK DIAGRAM 8719 20 22 5 sb529e a I EXT TRIG A10 DIGITAL IF 1 i LSWP FROM 14 4 CONTROL AUX 1 la 4 MHz FROM A12 INPUTI as eo RES _ MEASURE a REAR PANEL RESTART RPG auxin Ge s 1 1 2 FRONT PANEL PROCESSOR a BUS 1 INSTRUMENT 1 E I NODES 0 TEST SET 1 0 I 1 1 FRONT PANEL I 1 SAMPLE 20 INTERFACE a INTERFACE I I RATE IS 17 IFA4KkHz 1 EXT BIAS 17 EP 1 EXT REF TOA12 i 2598 I FRONT il TP18 AUX INPUT 1 PANEL ADG O 1 TO A10 i PROCESSOR 5 DN 4 p EXT TRIG KEYBOARD 1 7 1 b 17 i i I I ROUT 16 5 TEST SEQ 4 IFR4kHz O I FROMA9 i I 7 LIMIT TEST 4 i i i MEAS RESTART 17 i E E evo vo 44 gt 0 37 V 251 MINI DIN 69 232 PARALLEL G
215. OR A58 M A D S A14 A13 FRACTI ONAL N SYNTHESIZER vco FN REF Pu 100 kHz VCO 60 TO 240 MHz The subsweep sequence takes place in the following steps The following list describes the details of this process and provides additional information on the assemblies in the source group sb594e 1 The source is pretuned low The source signal SOURCE OUT is fed tothe R sampler 2 A signal VCO OUT is generated by the VCO in the fractional N synthesizer 3 A comb of harmonics 1st LO is produced in the pulse generator 4 A synthesizer harmonic 1st LO and the source signal SOURCE OUT are mixed in the sampler A difference frequency 1st IF is generated 5 The 1st IF signal from the R sampler is fed back and compared to a reference A tune current is generated 6 The tune current is used to set the frequency of the source YIG Oscillator Service Guide 12 13 Theory of Operation 8719ET 20ET 22ET Source Group Theory 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers 7 Phase lock is acquired and a synthesized subsweep is generated T he source tracks the synthesizer Source Pretune The pretune DAC digital to analog converter in the A11 phase lock assembly sets the source YIG oscillator frequency to approximately 2 4 GHz This signal SOURCE OUT is input tothe R sampler assembly A14 A13 Fractional N Synthesizer The A14 A13fractional N assemblies comprise the synthesizer The source feedback
216. P digital signal processor both on the A7 CPU assembly to communicate with each other through DRAM This also verifies that programs can be loaded to the DSP and that most of the main RAM access circuits operate correctly 6 DSP RAM Verifies the A7 CPU RAM associated with the digital signal processor by using a write read pattern 7 DSP ALU Verifies the A7 CPU high speed math processing portions of the digital signal processor 8 DSP Intrpt Tests the ability of the A7 CPU digital signal processor to respond to interrupts from the A10 digital IF ADC 9 DIF Control Tests the ability of the A7 CPU main processor to write read to the control latches on the A10 digital IF 10 DIF Counter Tests the ability of the A7 CPU main processor to write read to thetriple divider on the A10 CPU It tests the A7 CPU data buffers and A10 digital IF the 4 MHz clock from the A12 reference Service Guide 10 9 Service Key Menus and Error Messages 8719ET 20ET 22ET Service Menus Internal Diagnostics 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers 11 DSP Control Tests the ability of the A7 CPU digital signal processor to 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 10 10 write to the control latches on the A10 digital IF Feedback is verified by the main processor It primarily tests the 10 digital IF but failures may be caused by the A7 CPU Fr Pan Wr Rd Tests the ability of the A7 CPU main processor to write read tothe front pane
217. P Agilent Power M eter 436A 437B 438A E4418A EPM 441A or E4419A EPM 442A HP Agilent Power Sensor 8485A 8487A Adapter 3 5 mm f to 3 5 mm f part number N A 85052 60012 part of 85052B Adapter 2 4 mm f to 2 4 mm f N A part number 85056 60006 part of 85056A RF Cable 85131F 85133F GPIB Cable 10833A Non M etallic Adjustment Tool 8830 0024 Antistatic Wrist Strap 9300 1367 Antistatic Wrist Strap Cord 9300 0980 Static control Table Mat and Earth 9300 0797 Ground Wire Analyzer warmup time 30 minutes Preparing the Instrument 1 Make surethe A7 Switch is in the alter position ALT 2 Zero and calibrate the power meter 3 With the analyzer turned off remove the top two corner standoffs and the top cover 4 Locate the metal source assembly cover that is on the top left front side of the instrument Service Guide 3 17 Adjustments and Correction Constants 8719ET 20ET 22ET Output Power Adjustments 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers 5 Unplug the flexible SMB cables coming out of the source assembly cover NOTE The 8719ET ES and the 8720ET ES havetwo SMB cables The 8722E T ES have four SMB cables All cables are clearly marked for easy re assembly 6 Remove the 3 screws on source assembly cover and lift it off the frame 7 Reattach the SMB cables to the proper connectors 8 Turn the analyzer on If it does not phase lock check the cable connections Setting the Main Power DAC to Preset Values
218. PIB INTERCONNECT INTERCONNECT INTERCONNECT s s sar ss SS A7 CPU 1 I A19 GSP A18 DISPLAY 5 VD I I TFT I MINI DIN KYBD PORT RS 232 PORT PARALLEL PORT GPIB PORT FROMA17 P A22 DISPLAY 1 I LIQUID INTERFACE INTERFACE INTERFACE INTERFACE MOTHERBOARD INTERFACE CRYSTAL DISPLAY DIGITAL VIDEO 1 LCD gt z INTERFACE PALETTE I H LI DISK VGA DRIVE I INTERFACE I I LIGHT MAIN CPU i 1 P ME MEMORY DIGITAL SIGNAL 4 i PROCESSOR 4 FLASH RAM 4 i VGA i AUTON 6 _ eae LINTERCONNECT E i 1 5 AC STARTUP I ROM RAM 22 2 7222 680V STEADY STATE a 20 gt INVERTER ASSY Ay MAIN RAM gt RED LED 2 I NORMAL FLASHING CONTROUREFRESH Q EM MM RM T UM A10 11 TO A12 14 TO A51 DIGITAL CONTROL GROUP BLOCK DIAGRAM 8719 20 22ET ES 7 Source Troubleshooting 7 1 Source Troubleshooting 8719ET 20ET 22ET Information on This Chapter 8719ES
219. Panel B Out W15 08720 20058 1 Front Panel B In to A66 W16 08720 20104 1 Front Panel A In to A65 W17 08720 20164 1 A62 to Front Panel A Out W25 0124007 08720 20249 1 A61 to A62 W25 012 08720 20259 1 A61 to A62 W26 08720 20025 1 A60 to A63 W27 08720 20011 1 74 to 60 W28 08720 20248 1 74 to A61 W29 08720 20009 1 A69 to A74 W32 08720 20021 1 A58 to 69 W36 08720 20312 1 A72 to A64 W52 08720 20098 3 External Link 13 14 Service Guide 8719 20 22 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers 8719E S and 8720E S Options 012 012 007 A17 A69 W32 w29 A74 w28 A61 w27 Service Guide A60 W14 W26 w25 A51 15 66 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Part Listings A7 A64 A65 W36 A52 16 98 W17 W52 3 Places sb554e 13 15 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Part Listings 8719ET 20ET 22ET 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Bottom Assemblies and Cables for 8719E S and 8720E S Options 089 089 007 Ref Desig Options HP Agilent Qty Description Part Number A7 08720 60253 1 CPU Repair Kit A7 08720 69253 1 CPU Repair Kit Rebuilt Exchange A17 08720 60264 1 Motherboard 23 24 5086 7589 2 R channel Switches A23 A2
220. Power Supply Troubleshooting 8719ET 20ET 22ET If the Red LED of the Preregulator A15 Is On 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers 3 Remove or disconnect the assemblies listed in Table 5 3 one at a time and in the order shown The assemblies are sorted from most to least accessible Table 5 3 also lists any associated assemblies that receive power from the assembly that is being removed After each assembly is removed or disconnected switch on the analyzer and observe the red LED on the preregulator A15 fthered LED goes out then the particular assembly removed or the one receiving power from it is faulty fthered LED is still on after you have checked all of the assemblies listed in Table 5 3 continue with the next section Check the Operating Temperature Table 5 3 Recommended Order for Removal Disconnection for Troubleshooting the Preregulator A15 Assembly Assembly to Remove Removal or Other Assemblies that Disconnection Receive Power from the Method Removed Assembly 1 Frac N Digital 14 Remove from None Card Cage 2 Test Set Interface A51 Disconnect W89 Transfer Switch S4 LED Front Panel A56 3 CPU A7 Disconnect W91 Disk Drive A3 from A7 4 Display I nterface A22 Disconnect W37 Display A18 5 Front Panel Interface A2 Disconnect W83 Front Panel Keyboard A1 from A2 Check the Operating Temperature Thetemperature sensing circuitry inside the preregulator A15
221. Q 11 Calculate the difference between the power meter reading and the marker reading the analyzer display This power difference is the frequency response of the A channel 12 Repeat steps 10 and 11 at the frequency points where a problem is suspected or check different frequency points across the band set the calibration factor on the power meter for each frequency measured For the characteristic values of the frequency response see Table 4 3 on page 4 21 Service Guide 4 23 Start Troubleshooting Here 8719ET 20ET 22ET Receiver Check 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Checking the B Channel Output ET and ES Models 13 Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 4 9 Figure 4 9 Setup for the Channel Receiver Check ES Models NETWORK ANALYZER POWER METER Power Sensor Direct Connection sb547e 14 Zero and calibrate the power meter 15 Press the following INPUTPORTS B TESTPORT 1 16 Press the following CW FREQ 17 Calculate the difference between the power meter reading and the marker reading on the analyzer display This power difference is the frequency response of the B channel 18 Repeat steps 16 and 17 at the frequency points where a problem is suspected or check different frequency points across the band set the calibration factor on the power meter for each frequency measured For the characteristic values of the frequency response see Table 4 3 on page 4 21 In Case of Difficulty Make s
222. QUENCY Gin Press CAL FACTOR 1 Toterminate the second calibration factor data point entry press DONE J Q r i Press SEGMENT and use the front panel knob to scroll through the sensor calibration factors table Check to be sure all values are entered correctly If you see an error use the front panel knob to point to the data point you want to modify and press EDIT 10 E nter the power sensor calibration factors and press DONE 11 Press the following SERVICE MENU SERVICE MODES MORE SAMPLER COR OFF 3 60 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Adjustments and Correction Constants 8719ES 20ES 22ES Sampler Calibration Correction Constants Test 51 RF Network Analyzers Performing the Sampler Calibration 12 Press the following SERVICE MENU TESTS EXECUTE TEST YES 13 Follow the instructions on the analyzer display 14 Observe the analyzer display for the results of the test ftheanalyzer displays SAMPLER COR DONE the test has passed goto step 5 ftheanalyzer displays SAMPLER COR FAIL repeat the test 15 Move the A7 switch back to its normal position if you are finished working on the instrument 16 Perform the EEPROM Backup Disk Procedure on page 3 33 In Case of Difficulty Ensurethat the power meter and power sensor are operating to specification f you are unable to perform this adjustment refer to Chapter 8 Receiver Troubleshooting or contact the near
223. R4 until the minimum value of the trace on the display equals Power C in Table 3 5 For the location of A59R4 see Figure 3 3 on page 3 19 6 If no more correction constant routines are going to be performed return the A7 switch tothe NRM position and perform the EEPROM Backup Disk Procedure on page 3 33 In Case of Difficulty e Ifthe analyzer fails the Power Linearity Performance Test do the following If the analyzer fails the performance test for the power levels listed as P2 repeat the Power Linearity Adjustment on page 3 24 f the analyzer fails the performance test for the power level listed as P2 repeat the Output Power Adjustments on page 3 17 and the Power Linearity Adjustment on page 3 24 Ifthe analyzer is still not passing the Power Linearity Performance Test check for available power and modulator functionality by adjusting the power DAC from 0 to 4095 refer to the Output Power Adjustments procedure The power should vary from 20 dB to 4 dB from the maximum specified power in most cases At some of the frequencies you may not be able to tune above maximum power If the analyzer is operating correctly as indicated from the results of the previous step repeat the Output Power Adjustments procedure If theanalyzer is not operating correctly as indicated from the results of the previous step refer to Chapter 7 Source Troubleshooting or contac
224. RF Network Analyzers NOTE For broadband measurements use either a broadband load or a combination of lowband or broadband and sliding loads U se the same loads used during normal calibrations 9 Press either BROADBAND or SLIDING depending on which device is used If you select SLIDING you must also measure a lowband load to complete the loads calibration 10 When the measurement is complete press DONE LOADS Leave the load connected to cable 1 ES Models 11 1f you are calibrating an ES analyzer goto Port 2 Calibration ES Models on page 2 23 ET Models 12 1f you are calibrating an ET analyzer press STANDARDS DONE 13 The analyzer briefly displays COMPUTING CAL COEFFICIENTS 14 Connect a load tothe TRANSMISSION port and press ISOLATION ISOL N After the isolation calibration completes go to Thru Calibration on page 2 24 Port 2 Calibration ES Models 15 When the analyzer finishes measuring the standard connect the open that is supplied in the calibration kit to cable 2 16 Press REVERSE OPEN 17 When the analyzer finishes measuring the standard connect the short that is supplied in the calibration kit to cable 2 18 Press REVERSE SHORT 19 When the analyzer finishes measuring the standard connect the 500 termination to cable 2 20 Press REVERSE LOADS 21 Press either BROADBAND or SLIDING depending on which device is used If you select SLIDING you must also me
225. RIAL IN THIS DOCUMENT THAT CONFLICT WITH THESE TERMS THE WARRANTY TERMSIN THE SEPARATE AGREEMENT WILL CONTROL Certification Agilent Technologies Company certifies that this product met its published specifications at the time of shipment from the factory Agilent Technologies further certifies that its calibration measurements are traceable to the United States National Institute of Standards and Technology to the extent allowed by the Institute s calibration facility and tothe calibration facilities of other International Standards Organization members Regulatory Information The regulatory information is located in Chapter 15 Safety and Regulatory Information Assistance Product maintenance agreements and other customer assistance agreements are available for Agilent Technologies products For any assistance contact your nearest Agilent Technologies sales or service office See Table 15 1 on page 15 3 for the nearest office Safety Notes The following safety notes are used throughout this manual Familiarize yourself with each of the notes and its meaning before operating this instrument All pertinent safety notes for using this product are located in Chapter 15 Safety and Regulatory Information WARNING Warning denotes a hazard It calls attention to a procedure which if not correctly performed or adhered to could result in injury loss of life Do not proceed beyond a warning note until the indicated
226. RR PRA Rd rag 11 13 Isolation Crosstalk EXF and EXR 11 14 Load aE LAY 45342 piyer d 11 15 Transmission Tracking ETF and 11 16 12 Theory of Operation one Capber us xcci koe kimi amas dd o 12 2 Syo OPI AION PCT 12 3 Functional Groupe of the AMAZE usce s s l sss hee ROC Gre re us 12 5 Powe Supri e ve ead 12 6 e Cm 12 6 PESE REIS ont cee e oboe IR RD eoi bond pe rack ob n edat od wy elem aid dha 12 7 Voltage Indications theGreen LEDS AH Sr BC cR x 12 8 Din Gal Cone polo Aere cr s werd eee 12 9 AL dci sy on Pate este eis ers Ree a ee sha te beth 12 9 2 Front Pang Processor ak ee eae URP Deke ORI dr C S so bee et 12 9 AT CEU IO Digital CC Em 12 9 Contents x Contents AISDISDIAM 12 10 A19 Graphics System Processor GSP rA Xd p PAR 12 11 Dni a ee eee re eres er ee eS eee ree eee 12 11 Rear ach Paws Shee De bee oH wh dee betes hee dared meas 12 11 Source GFOUD THERY Lesbo RA RR CA UA EBD RENE e A CHO HE HR CERES 12 13 p d E P
227. Roe ACH 14 6 Removing the side COVBIS Sed ubera 14 6 Removing Ehe EGVB ex d id suu Y AERA HE RE READER 14 6 Removing the Front Panel Assembly 14 8 Removing the Front Panel Interface and Keypad Assemblies 14 10 Removing the Display Lamp and Assembly 14 12 Removing the Rear Panel Assembly 14 14 Removing the Rear Panel Interface Board Assembly 14 16 Removing the Source Assemblies 4 544 465 14 18 Removing the A7 CPU Board Assembly 14 20 Removing ne sre RENE FERA d HERE 14 22 Removing the A15 Preregulator Assembly 14 24 Removing the A19 Graphics Processor 14 26 Removing the Disk Drive lt 14 28 Removing the A62 A63 Test Port Couplers and LED Board Assemblies 14 30 Removing the A26 High Stability Frequency Reference Option 1D5 Assembly 14 32 Removing the Bl Fan Assembly scan a a ACC AE AEA Ac AB BC8 AC EG AL ac 14 34 Repair Prodes Oo SKE 14 35 15 Safety a
228. Safety and Regulatory Information 8719ET 20ET 22ET Safety Considerations 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers General WARNING To prevent electrical shock disconnect the analyzer from mains WARNING CAUTION CAUTION WARNING 15 8 before cleaning Use a dry cloth or one slightly dampened with water to clean the external case parts Do not attempt to clean internally If this product is not used as specified the protection provided by the equipment could be impaired This product must be used in a normal condition in which all means for protection are intact only This product is designed for use in Installation Category and Pollution Degree 2 per IEC 1010 and 664 respectively VENTILATION REQUIREMENTS When installing the product in a cabinet the convection into and out of the product must not be restricted The ambient temperature outside the cabinet must be less than the maximum operating temperature of the product by 4 C for every 100 watts dissipated in the cabinet If the total power dissipated in the cabinet is greater that 800 watts then forced convection must be used Install the instrument according to the enclosure protection provided This instrument does not protect against the ingress of water This instrument protects against finger access to hazardous parts within the enclosure Service Guide 8719 20 22 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Compliance with German FTZ Emissions R
229. Service Guide Agilent Technologies 8719E T 20E 22 8719E S 20E S 22E S Network Analyzers GE Agilent Technologies Part Number 08720 90397 Printed in USA J une 2002 Supersedes February 2001 Copyright 1999 2002 Agilent Technologies Inc Notice The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice Agilent Technologies makes no warranty of any kind with regard to this material including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose Agilent Technologies shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing performance or use of this material Warranty Information THE MATERIAL CONTAINED IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROVIDED AS IS AND IS SUBJ ECT TO BEING CHANGED WITHOUT NOTICE IN FUTURE EDITIONS FURTHER TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW AGILENT DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EITHER EXPRESS IMPLIED WITH REGARD TO THIS MANUAL AND ANY INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AGILENT SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ERRORS OR FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH THE FURNISHING USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS DOCUMENT OR ANY INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN SHOULD AGILENT AND THE USER HAVE A SEPARATE WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH WARRANTY TERMS COVERING THE MATE
230. Substituting Tuning Voltages to Check the VCO The tuning voltage range of the VCO is approximately 1 to 14 volts This procedure substitutes power supplies for the normal voltages from A13 to check the frequency range of the A14 VCO 1 Turn off the analyzer 2 Remove the A13 assembly orange tabs 3 Put the A14 assembly on an extender board It is not necessary to connect the cables whilethe A14 is on the extender board 7 16 Service Guide 8719 20 22 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Source Troubleshooting Broadband Phase Lock Problems 4 Turn on the analyzer 5 To set the internal counter to the frac N node press the following SERVICE MENU ANALOG BUS ON ANALOG IN Aux Input COUNTER FRAC N 6 In turn jumper each of the three supply voltages to A14T P 14 and observe the frequency as shown in Table 7 2 A variation of 10 is expected The counter frequency needs to be extremely out of specification to constitute a failure Table 7 2 VCO Exercise Matrix Supply Test Voltage 14 Test Point Counter Point Mnemonic Frequency A8TP7 15V A14TP14 240 MHz A8TP8 5VU A14TP14 155 MHz A8TP2 AGND A14TP14 105 MHz 7 If the frequency changes are not correct replace A14 8 If the frequency changes are correct continue with Divide by N A14 Circuit Check next Divide by N A14 Circuit Check NOTE The A13 assembly should still be out of the instrument and the A14
231. TO ACH RD arene sad 12 14 14 13 Fractional N Synthesizer 12 14 A52 Pulse Generator the Harmonic Comb 12 14 A64 R Sampler Down ConvertingtheSignals 12 14 A11 Phase Lock Comparing Phase and Frequency 12 15 TURE the TG OSHA FERREA M 12 15 Pliaseboked SCS aa dad xe be DRE EN DORE CX PER RES D IRSES SOG 1X 12 15 A12 Reference The Crystal Reference Frequencies 12 16 Source Black The TIG SIghalS 12 16 ALC Automatic Leveling Control 12 18 Signal Separation ES Models Only 12 19 A58 M A D S Modulator Amplifier Detector Splitter 12 19 A58 M A D and A74 Switch Splitter Option 400 12 20 AG Step Aant POCO RERO EROR ERR ERE 12 20 BIST VS 453 vacua ORC KORRES ES dor Ped ee 3 GR urbia 12 21 A56 Lower Front Panel Assembly sasa ohh 12 21 AOI DC Bias shaken cs r NORNI XU 12 21 A62 and A63 Directional Couplers 12 21 Signal Separation ET Models Only uu u u
232. Test 44 This procedure calibrates the analog bus by using three reference voltages ground 40 37 volts and 42 5 volts then stores the calibration data as correction constants in EEPROMs Analyzer warmup time 30 minutes 1 Make sure the A7 Switch is in the alter position ALT 2 Press the following PRESET FACTORY SERVICE MENU TESTS EXECUTE TEST YES 3 Observe the analyzer for the results of the adjustment routine ftheanalyzer displays ABUS Cor DONE you have completed this procedure e Ifthe analyzer displays ABUS Cor FAIL repeat the test 4 If no more correction constant routines are going to be performed return the A7 Switch to the NRM position and perform the EEPROM Backup Disk Procedure page 3 33 In Case of Difficulty Refer to Chapter 6 Digital Control Troubleshooting or contact the nearest Agilent Technologies sales or service office 3 8 Service Guide 8719 20 22 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Adjustments and Correction Constants IF Step Correction Constants Test 47 IF Step Correction Constants Test 47 These correction constants compensate for IF amplifier linearity difference between gain stages Required Equipment and Tools Equipment Description 8719ET ES 8720ET ES 8722ET ES HP Agilent RF cable 85131F 85133F part number part number Aves eens 85052 60009 85052 60023 8493 84900 HP Agilent RF fixed attenuator Opt
233. This mode can be used with the SRC TUNE mode as described in Chapter 7 Source Troubleshooting accesses the functions that allow you to adjust the source If theinstrument displays the PHASE LOCK CAL FAILED message use the DAC NUM XXX BAND keys of the Source Adjustment Menu The relationship between DAC numbers and frequency varies between instruments The DAC numbers provided in the description and frequencies are guidelines only SOURCE TUNE OFF SM2D disables the source frequency tune DAC NUM XXX BAND tests the pretune functions of the phase lock and source assemblies These keys allow entry of digital data directly intothe DAC on the A11 phase lock assembly When in this mode nstrument does not attempt to phase lock Residual FM increases DAC NUM LOW BAND SM2L allows you to enter DAC numbers in the range of 3650 through 4095 to generate test port output frequencies from 50 MHz to 1 1 GHz DAC NUM MID BAND SM 2M 8722ET ES only allows you to enter DAC numbers in the range of 2900 through 4095 to generate test port output frequencies from 2 3 GHz to 4 9 GHz 10 17 Service Key Menus and Error Messages 8719ET 20ET 22ET Service Menu Service Features 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers DAC NUM HIGH BAND SM2H 8719ET ES and 8720 5 allows you to enter DAC numbers in the range of 2900 through 4095 to generate test port output frequencies from 2 3 GHz to 4 9 GHz DAC NUM HIG
234. Troubleshooting on page 6 4 then proceed to the assembly that you suspect has a problem If you suspect a GPIB problem refer to GPIB Failures on page 6 19 6 2 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Digital Control Troubleshooting 8719ES 20ES 22ES Assembly Replacement Sequence RF Network Analyzers Assembly Replacement Sequence The following steps show the sequence to replace an assembly in the network analyzer Step 1 Identify the faulty group Begin with Chapter 4 Start Troubleshooting H ere Follow up with the appropriate troubleshooting chapter that identifies the faulty assembly Step 2 Order a replacement assembly Refer to Chapter 13 Replaceable Parts Step 3 Replacethe faulty assembly and determine what adjustments are necessary Refer to Chapter 14 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures Step 4 Perform the necessary adjustments Refer to Chapter 3 Adjustments and Correction Constants Step 5 Perform the necessary performance tests Refer to Chapter 2 System Verification and Performance Tests Service Guide 6 3 Digital Control Troubleshooting 8719ET 20ET 22ET CPU Board 7 Troubleshooting 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers CPU Board A7 Troubleshooting A7 Switch Positions The A7 switch position must be in the Normal position N RM for these procedures This is the position for normal operating conditions To move the switch to the Normal position NRM position do
235. Y 10 33 adjustment A7 CC jumper positions 3 4 ADC offset correction constants test 48 3 10 analog bus correction constants test 44 3 8 fractional N spur avoidance and FM sideband 3 44 frequency accuracy 3 41 IF amplifier correction constants test 47 3 9 initialize EEPROMSs test 53 3 32 option numbers correction constants test 50 3 13 serial number correction constants test 49 3 11 source pretune correction constants test 43 3 6 test descriptions 10 12 adjustments service equipment 1 3 1 4 ALC automatic leveling control description of 12 18 ALC Signal Separation Check 7 26 ALT and NRM jumper position adjustment 3 4 ALTER and NORMAL jumper position adjustment 3 4 amplifier IF adjustment 3 9 description ES models 12 19 analog bus codes 10 32 correction constants adjustment 3 8 description of 10 20 frequency counter location A 14 10 20 main ADC location 10 20 ANALOG BUS DISABLEDIN 6KHZIF BW 10 33 analog bus nodes 10 digital IF 10 22 A11 phase lock 10 23 A12 reference 10 26 14 fractional N digital 10 28 description of 10 22 analog in menu 10 21 ANALOG INPUT OVERLOAD 10 33 analyzer options 1 2 descriptions 1 7 analyzer shipping for service 4 4 ANSI NCSL 7540 1 1994 test path verification flowchart 2 4 verification description 2 3 ANSI NCSL Z540 1 1994 non test path verification flowchart 2 5 assemblies bottom part numbers for 8719 20ES option 400 13 22 options 012 012 007 13 14 opt
236. a Calculate the difference A between the test port power meter reading TPP and the maximum marker reading M MR and then add 4 4 can positive negative value 16 1f the magnitude of A is less than 0 15 dB then the offset for the B channel is correctly set Go to Sampler Calibration Correction Constants Test 51 on page 3 58 If the magnitude is greater than 0 15 dB continue to the next step 3 56 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Adjustments and Correction Constants 8719ES 20ES 22ES Raw Offset Correction Constants RF Network Analyzers 17 Press the following SERVICE MENU PEEK POKE PEEK POKE ADDRESS PEEK Notethe PEEK value displayed under the PEEK label 18 Calculate the new value by adding the valueto A multiplied by 4 new value current value A X 4 NOTE Round the new value to the nearest integer 19 Press and enter the new value into the poke address press 1 20 To get the analyzer to use the new poke value press Preset 21 Press the following INPUT PORTS B CW FREQ and enter the frequency from step 13 SERVICE MENU SERVICE MODES MORE SAMPLER COR OFF MARKER SEARCH SEARCH MAX The maximum marker reading is MMR 22 Recalculate A by taking the test port power TPP adding 4 and then subtracting the maximum marker reading MMR A TPP 4 MMR If the magnitude of A is less than 0 15 then the offset for the A channel
237. a test pattern to the DRAM and then verifying that it can be read back 57 Main VRAM Teststhe VRAM by writing all zeros to onelocation in each bank and then writing all ones to one location in each bank Finally a walking one pattern is written to one location in each bank 58 VRAM bank Tests all thecells in each of the 4 VRAM banks 59 VRAM video Verifies that the GSP is able to successfully perform both write and read shift register transfers It also checks the video signals LHSYNC LVSYNC and LBLANK to verify that they are active and toggling 60 RGB outputs Confirms that the analog video signals are correct and it verifies their functionality 61 Inten DAC Verifies that the intensity DAC can be set both low and high Test Patterns Test patterns are used in the factory for adjustments diagnostics and troubleshooting but most are not used for field service Test patterns are executed by entering the test number 62 through 76 then pressing EXECUTE TEST CONTINUE Thetest pattern will be displayed and the softkey labels blanked Toincrement tothe next pattern press softkey 1 to go back to a previous pattern press softkey 2 To exit the test pattern and return the softkey labels press softkey 8 bottom softkey The following is a description of the test patterns 62 Test Pat 1 Displays an all white screen for verifying the light output of the A18 display and checks for color purity 63 65 Test Pat 2 4 Disp
238. ace Board Assembly on page 14 16 Removing the Source Assemblies on page 14 18 M A D S A58 YIG 1 A54 YIG 2 A55 Cavity Oscillator A57 Removing the A7 CPU Board Assembly on page 14 20 Removing the A7BT1 Battery on page 14 22 Removing the A15 Preregulator Assembly on page 14 24 Removing the A19 Graphics Processor Assembly on page 14 26 Removing the A3 Disk Drive Assembly on page 14 28 Removing the A62 A63 Test Port Couplers and LED Board Assemblies on page 14 30 Removing the A26 High Stability Frequency Reference Option 1D5 Assembly on page 14 32 Removing the B1 Fan Assembly on page 14 34 NOTE After replacing the assemblies perform the corresponding adjustment and verification tests located in Post Repair Procedures on page 14 35 14 4 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Assembly Replacement and Post R epair P rocedures 8719ES 20ES 22ES Replacing the Line Fuse RF Network Analyzers Replacing the Line Fuse Tools Required small slot screwdriver Removal WARNING For continued protection against fire hazard replace line fuse only with same type and rating 115 V operation T 5A 125V UL CSA 230V operation T 4A H 250V IEC The use of other fuses or materials is prohibited 1 Disconnect the power cord 2 Use small slot screwdriver to pry open the fuse holder 3 Replace the failed fuse with one of the correct rating for the line voltage See Hardware Preregulator o
239. acklight tube in the A18 display assembly This assembly takes the 45 16V dc from the A1 mother board and converts it to approximately 680 Vac There are two control lines Digital ON OFF Analog Brightness 100 intensity is 0 V 50 intensity is 4 5 V A16 Rear Panel TheA16 rear panel includes the following interfaces TEST SET I O INTERCONNECT This provides control signals and power to operate duplexer test adapters EXT REF This allows for a frequency reference signal input that can phase lock the analyzer to an external frequency standard for increased frequency accuracy The analyzer automatically enables the external frequency reference feature when a signal is connected tothis input When the signal is removed the analyzer automatically switches back to its internal frequency reference 10MHZ PRECISION REFERENCE Option 1D5 This output is connected to the EXT REF described above to improve the frequency accuracy of the analyzer AUXINPUT This allows for a dc or ac voltage input from an external signal source such as a detector or function generator which you can then measure using the S parameter menu You can also use this connector as an analog output in service routines EXT AM This allows for an external analog signal input that is applied to the ALC circuitry of the analyzer s source This input analog signal amplitude modulates the RF output signal EXT TRIG This allows connectio
240. ad to PORT 2 TRANSMISSION port on ET models b Press Avg AVERAGING AVERAGING FACTOR Press IF BW to change the IF bandwidth to 10 Hz d Press the following RESUME CAL SEQUENCE ISOLATION ES models DO BOTH FWD REV ET models FWD ISOL N e Return the averaging and bandwidth to the original state of the measurement and press the following RESUME CAL SEQUENCE ES models DONE 2 PORT CAL ET models DONE FWD ISOL ENH RESP 11 4 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Error Terms 8719ES 20ES 22ES Error Term Inspection RF Network Analyzers Error Term Inspection Table 11 1 ES models and Table 11 2 ET models list the calibration coefficients along with their corresponding test numbers Refer to the appropriate table when performing this procedure Table 11 1 Calibration Coefficient Terms and Tests for ES Models Calibration Calibration Type Test Number Coefficient Response Response and 1 port 2 port Isolation 1 or ET Ex Ep Ep 31 2 En Es Esr 32 3 33 4 ExF 34 5 35 6 36 7 37 8 Esp 38 9 ERR 39 10 40 11 ELR 41 12 ETR 42 NOTES Meaning of first subscript D directivity S source match R reflection tracking X crosstalk L doad match T transmission tracking Meaning of second subscript F forward R reverse Response and Isolation cal yields Ey or Ey if a transmiss
241. ailed Several internal test routines are executed at Number 112 instrument preset The analyzer reports the first failure detected Refer tothe internal tests and the self diagnose feature descriptions earlier in this chapter SOURCE POWER TURNED OFF RESET UNDER POWER MENU Information You have exceeded the maximum power level at one of the inputs and power has Message been automatically reduced The annotation PU indicates that power trip has been activated When this occurs reset the power and then press SOURCE PWR on OFF to switch on the power This message follows error numbers 57 58 and 59 SWEEP MODE CHANGED TO CW TIME SWEEP Error Number If you select external source auto or manual instrument mode and you do not 187 also select CW mode the analyzer is automatically switched to CW SWEEP TIME TOO FAST Error Number Thefractional N and digital IF circuits have lost synchronization Refer to the 12 Chapter 6 Digital Control Troubleshooting TEST ABORTED Error Number You have prematurely stopped a service test 113 TEST PORT OVERLOAD REDUCE POWER Error Number You have exceeded approximately 14 dBm at one of the test ports 0 dBm at 57 theA or B sampler Option 012 only When this occurs reduce the power to a lower level Service Guide 10 39 Service Key Menus and Error Messages 8
242. air Kit Rebuilt E xchange 17 08720 60264 1 Motherboard A23 A24 5086 7589 2 R channel Switches A23 A24 5086 6589 2 R channel Switches Rebuilt E xchange 51 08720 60274 1 Bd Assy Test Set Interface A52 5086 7456 1 Assy Pulse Generator A52 5086 6456 1 Assy Pulse Generator Rebuilt E xchange A60 A61 5086 7484 2 Bias Tee A60 A61 5086 6484 2 Bias Tee Rebuilt E xchange A64 A65 A66 5086 7614 3 Assy Sampler A64 A65 A66 5086 6614 3 Assy Sampler Rebuilt E xchange A69 33326 60006 1 Attenuator 0 55 dB A741 08722 60098 1 Transfer Switch A98 08720 60121 1 Frequency Converter A98 08720 69121 1 Frequency Converter Rebuilt E xchange W14 08722 20102 1 A63 to Front Panel B Out W15 08722 20079 1 Front Panel B In to A66 W16 08722 20081 1 Front Panel A In to A65 W17 08722 20102 1 A62 to Front Panel A Out W18 08722 20058 1 Front Panel R Channel IN to A24 W20 08720 20281 1 A24 to A64 W25 08722 20056 1 A61 to A62 W26 08722 20057 1 A60 to A63 W27 08722 20078 1 A74 to A60 W28 08722 20077 1 A74 to A61 W29 08722 20076 1 A69 to A74 W32 08722 20069 1 A58 to A69 W50 08720 20278 1 A72 to A23 W51 08720 20279 1 A23to 24 13 44 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Replaceable Parts 8719ES 20ES 22ES Replaceable Part Listings RF Network Analyzers Ref Desig Options HP Agilent Qty Description Part Number W52 08722 20024 3 External Link W54 08722 20132 1 A23 to Front Panel R Channel OUT
243. air Procedures 8719ES 20ES 22ES Removing the A15 Preregulator Assembly RF Network Analyzers sb652d Service Guide 14 25 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures 8719ET 20ET 22ET Removing the A19 Graphics Processor Assembly 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Removing the 19 Graphics Processor Assembly Tools Required T 10 TORX screwdriver T 15 TORX screwdriver ESD electrostatic discharge grounding wrist strap Removal 1 Disconnect the power cord and remove the front panel refer to Removing the Front Panel Assembly on page 14 8 2 Disconnect the 2 ribbon cables item 1 and item 2 3 Remove the 2 screws item 3 that attach the GSP to the front of the analyzer 4 Pull the GSP A19 board item 4 out of the analyzer Replacement 1 Reverse the order of the removal procedure 14 26 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Assembly Replacement and Post R epair Procedures 8719ES 20ES 22ES Removing the A19 Graphics Processor Assembly RF Network Analyzers 2 Places sb596e Service Guide 14 27 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair P rocedures 8719ET 20ET 22ET Removing the A3 Disk Drive Assembly 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network An
244. airline s center or outer conductor Irreparable damage will result if these devices are dropped During this procedure you will be touching the exposed center conductor of the test port with the center conductor of the airline Ground yourself to prevent electrostatic discharge ESD Figure 2 12 Aligning the Center Conductor Port 1 Guide to the male Port 2 cable for an in line connection Hold with with one hand two fingers sb52e Figure 2 13 Torquing the Connection Port 1 Port 2 Hold here Torque here Torque here sb528e 7 Enter Test 30 using step keys entry keys or front panel knob Repeat steps 1 through 4 of this section with the 250 mismatch airline Ver Dev 4 Refer to Figure 2 12 and Figure 2 13 8 When DUMP GRAPHICS is active the printout of the measurements shows both a plot of the measurement and a list of the measured frequencies with corresponding data The plot indudes the measured data trace factory supplied data trace and uncertainty limits The listing includes measured data and uncertainty limits If there is a failure at any frequency an asterisk will be displayed next to the measured data and the out of specification measured data on the plot will be blanked out 2 28 Service Guide 8719 20 22 System Verification and Performance Tests 8719ES 20ES 22ES System Verification RF Network Analyzers In Case of Difficulty NOTE Inspect all connections DO NOT disconnect the cabl
245. alyzer does not display DONE then the serial number that you entered in steps 3 and 4 did not match the required format or a serial number was already stored Check the serial number recognized by the analyzer 1 Press the following PRESET FACTORY SERVICE MENU FIRMWARE REVISION 2 Look for the serial number displayed on the analyzer screen 3 Rerun this adjustment test if the serial number is not displayed e ftheanalyzer continues to fail this adjustment routine contact the nearest Agilent Technologies sales or service office 3 12 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Adjustments and Correction Constants 8719ES 20ES 22ES Protected Option Numbers Correction Constants Test 50 RF Network Analyzers Protected Option Numbers Correction Constants Test 50 This procedure stores the instrument s protected option s information in A7 CPU assembly EEPROMs You can also usethis procedure to remove the serial number You will need a unique keyword from Agilent Technologies Refer to step 6 in Serial Number Correction Constants Test 49 on page 3 11 CAUTION Perform this procedure only if the A7 CPU assembly has been replaced and the Serial Number Correction Constants Test 49 procedure has been performed Analyzer warmup time None 1 Removethe instrument bottom cover and record the keyword label s that are located on the exposed sheet metal next tothe CPU assembly A7 Note that the individual keyword for each option
246. alyzers Removing the A3 Disk Drive Assembly Tools Required T 8 TORX screwdriver T 10 TORX screwdriver T 15 TORX screwdriver small slot screwdriver ESD electrostatic discharge grounding wrist strap Removal 1 Disconnect the power cord and remove the bottom left side covers refer to Removing the Covers on page 14 6 2 Remove the front panel refer to Removing the Front Panel Assembly on page 14 8 3 Turn the instrument upside down and disconnect the ribbon cable item 1 from the CPU board 4 Remove the 4 screws item 2 that secure the disk drive bracket to the side of the frame Slide the disk drive out of the instrument 6 Remove the 4 screws item 3 that secure the disk drive to the bracket Replacement 1 Reverse the order of the removal 14 28 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Assembly Replacement and Post R epair Procedures 8719ES 20ES 22ES Removing the A3 Disk Drive Assembly RF Network Analyzers ba sb659d Service Guide 14 29 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures 8719ET 20ET 22ET Removing the A62 A63 Test Port Couplers and LED Board Assemblies 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Removing the 62 A63 Test Port Couplers and LED Board Assemblies Tools Require
247. amaged connectors is critical for accurate measurement results 3 Insert the verification kit disk intothe analyzer disk drive 4 Press the following PRESET FACTORY Save Recall SELECT DISK INTERNAL DISK 5 f you want a printout of the verification data in tabular form as shown on page 2 32 press the following SERVICE MENU TEST OPTIONS RECORD ON If graphics plots of the display and a list are desired on the printout as shown on page 2 31 and page 2 32 press the following DUMP GRAPHICS ON NOTE If you switch on the record function at this point you cannot switch it off later during the verification procedure 6 Position the paper in the printer sothat printing starts at the top of the page 2 20 Service Guide 8719 20 22 System Verification and Performance Tests 8719ES 20ES 22ES System Verification RF Network Analyzers 7 f you have difficulty with the printer check the following ftheinterface on your printer is GPIB verify that the printer address is set to 701 or change the setting in the analyzer to match the printer e ftheinterface on your printer is serial or parallel be sure that you selected the printer port and the printer type correctly refer to the user s guide for more information on how to perform these tasks 8 Press CAL KIT SELECT CAL KIT and select thetype of calibration kit used 9 Press the following SERVICE MENU TESTS SYS VER TESTS EXECUTE TEST 10 The analyzer d
248. ampler Calibration Correction Constants Test 51 on page 3 58 If the phase lock problem persists continue with step 4 4 The phase lock problem could be caused by a fault in one of these source assemblies A12 reference A13 fractional N analog A14 fractional N digital A23 A24 R channel switches A67 R2 sampler assembly A72 R channel buffer amp Options 085 089 Option 400 only A25 source switch 8722ET ES A5 test set interface A52 pulse generator A5 A6 source switches A9 source control board A11 phase lock A54 YIG 2 8722ET ES only A55 YIG 1 A59 source interface board A58 M A D S A64 R sampler assembly 76 attenuator A68 6 dB Attenuator 55 R channel switches Options 085 089 A73 R2 channel butter amp 8719ET ES and 8720ET ES Option 400 only 73 R2 channel buffer amp A74 transfer switch Option 400 Option 400 only Continue to Swap IF Output Cables to Check R Sampler Assembly A64 on page 7 9 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Source Troubleshooting 8719ES 20ES 22ES Broadband Phase Lock Problems RF Network Analyzers Swap IF Output Cables to Check R Sampler Assembly A64 1 Replace the F OUTPUT cable of 66 3 B sampler assembly with thelF OUTPUT cable removed from 64 R sampler assembly NOTE For ES option 400 models with R2 phase lock problems replace the IF OUTPUT cable at A66J B sampler assembly with the OUTPUT cable from A67 R2 sampler assembly 2 Press Meas Refl REV S22
249. ampler Voltage Check 8 8 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Receiver Troubleshooting 8719ES 20ES 22ES At Least One Signal Path Looks Normal RF Network Analyzers Sampler Voltage Check NOTE The BIAS CONTROL lineis not used 1 Measure the SAMPLER CONTROL voltage green wire at the suspect sampler The voltage should be about 0 04 V when the sampler is on fthesampler control voltage is wrong replace A51 the interface assembly Do NOT replace the sampler the problem is in the control signals e If the sampler control voltage is correct proceed to the next step 2 Check the 15 V and 15 V supply voltages If the supply voltages are within 5 of nominal replace the sampler If the supply voltages are incorrect then check the 15V 7 and 15 V TP5 at the post regulator A8 If the post regulator voltages are good then replace the motherboard 17 If the voltages are incorrect change the post regulator 2nd Converter Check NOTE Repair signal path R before troubleshooting signal path A or B Faulty R Signal Path If R isthe bad signal path substitute R 2nd converter with a 2nd converter from a working signal path 2 Press INPUT PORTS R and compare the trace to the signal path R trace of Figure 8 1 e fthetrace appears normal replace the faulty 2nd converter e fthetrace appears abnormal replace A10 Faulty A or B Signal Path 1 If A is the bad signal path remove A6 the
250. and location of each discontinuity Displaying the transmission coefficient of a network versus time determines the characteristics of individual transmission paths Time domain operation retains all accuracy inherent with the active error correction Option 012 Direct Access Receiver Configuration ES Models This option provides front panel access to the A and B samplers This allows direct access tothe sampler inputs for improved sensitivity in applications such as antenna tests or for the insertion of attenuators between the couplers and samplers Direct access to the B A sampler provides increased dynamic range in the forward reverse direction Service Guide 1 7 Service Equipment and Analyzer Options 8719ET 20ET 22ET Analyzer Options 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Option 085 High Power System ES Models This option is designed to permit the measurement of high power devices With an external power amplifier this configuration will allow up to 20 Watts 43 dBm of output at the test ports The maximum test port input power is 1 Watt 30 dBm CW but jumpers on the front panel allow the insertion of high power attenuators or isolators This allows test device output levels up to the power limits of the inserted components Additionally there is an external reference input that allows the external amplifier s frequency response and drift to be ratioed out and there are internally controlled step attenuators between the c
251. ange Performance Test 2 42 Perrormance Test ES ROGO 2 46 3 Adjustments and Correction Constants on TMS CHORDIE 225545228699 GEIS HERD DHHS OD eRe NRE L OSES 3 2 BJ SWIC POSIIONS P a d dd d ded 3 4 Source Pretune Correction Constants Test 43 3 6 Analog Bus Correction Constants Test 44 3 8 F Step Correction Constants TEAT iude re ex Xe PRE SORE 3 9 ADC Offset Correction Constants Test 48 3 10 Serial Number Correction Constants Test 49 3 11 Protected Option Numbers Correction Constants Test 50 3 13 Unprotected Hardware Option Correction Constants 3 15 Output Power u u u GG ini andes 3 17 Propa mothe ROR PSRs 3 17 Setting the Main Power DAC to Preset Values 3 18 Setting the Potentiometers to the Minimum Levels 3 19 the Mid Band POWEF 3 20 AGIUSINGINE LOW Bard qaqaq
252. annel sampler Connect a 2 4 mm f barrel flexible cable and the power sensor to W74 CAUTION Be careful not to damage the center pins of the semirigid cable Some flexing of the cable will have to be done to attach the power sensor Do not over bend the cable b Remove the front panel and disconnect the junction between the cables W72 and W74 Connect the power sensor to W72 2 To measure the low band power press the following SERVICE MENU SERVICE MODES SRC ADJUST MENU DAC NUM LOW BAND The power should be at least 23 dBm 3 To measure high band power press DAC NUM HIGH BAND QD The power should be at least 18 dBm 4 You may have to change the DAC number slightly to achieve good power reading If power is correct proceed with Check Reference Board A12 on page 7 13 5 If the high band power level is lower than 18 dBm check A55 YIG 1 power at 5 6 Connect a power meter to A5J 3 and measure the power while varying the DAC NUM HIGH BAND values from about 3200 to 4095 fthe power at 5 3 is greater than 0 dBm replace the M A D S A58 Ifthe power is less than 0 dBm check YIG 1 output power at the A53 end of W6 Service Guide 7 11 Source Troubleshooting 8719ET 20ET 22ET Broadband Phase Lock Problems 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers 7 Power greater than 10 dBm indicates there is proper power coming out of the YI G at about 4 5 GHz If the analyzer is not phase locking at this frequen
253. ard The switch splitter A74 divides three inputs apath routed directly to A64 R1 sampler e path routed directly to the A67 R2 sampler a path switched to the appropriate output port through A 70 71 step attenuators A 60 61 bias tees and A62 63 directional couplers Figure 12 6 Option 400 Signal Separation Simplified Block Diagram OPTION 400 SIGNAL SEPARATION 58 M A D A52 DIRECTIONAL w72 NEN Lo BI AS TEE E A74 SWITCH ISPLITTER 1 I mies 75 ni ATTEN yy S 1 I I 1A63 DIRECTIONAL ICOUPLER A56 LOWER 511 521 1 PANEL TO A51 gt 512 522 R2 67 1 ma A69 Step Attenuator The step attenuator provides coarse power control for the source signal It is electro mechanical attenuator controlled by the A7 CPU that provides 0 to 55 dB of attenuation in 5 dB steps It adjusts the power level to the device under test DUT without changing the level of the incident power in the reference path 12 20 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Theory of Operation 8719ES 20ES 22ES Signal Separation ES Models Only RF Network Analyzers A74 Transfer Switch The output of the step attenuator is fed into the A74 transfer switch This is a solid state switch It switches between the PORT 1 and PORT 2 measurement paths automatically enabling alternate forward and reverse measurements additio
254. assemblies at all times or the other voltages will not be correct It connects to the motherboard connector 17 3 Pin 4 5 10 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Power Supply Troubleshooting 8719ES 20ES 22ES If the Red LED of the Preregulator A15 15 RF Network Analyzers Figure 5 6 A15W1 Plug Detail FROM A15 u N ES N A15W1P1 PLUG IN COMPONENT SIDE 1111 9117 53 1 AN A8 5 REGULATOR BOARD 12eeeeee 2 SOLDER SIDE 1542 110000060 NOTE VOLTAGES ALL CABLES AND ASSEMBLIES CONNECTED sb6130d Check for a Faulty Assembly This procedure checks for a faulty assembly that might be shutting down the preregulator A15 via one of the following lines refer to Figure 5 1 e A15W1 connecting to the post regulator A8 e the 45VCPU line through the motherboard the 45VDIG line through the motherboard Dothe following 1 Switch off the analyzer 2 Ensure that A15W1 is reconnected to A8 refer to Figure 5 5 NOTE Always switch off the analyzer before removing or disconnecting assemblies To identify specific cables and assemblies that are not shown in this chapter refer to Chapter 13 Replaceable Parts When extensive disassembly is required refer to Chapter 14 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures Service Guide 5 11
255. assembly on an extender board 1 Jumper A14TP 14 to the 5VU supply 2 Connect an oscilloscope to 14 3 labeled VCO N OUT 3 Press System SERVICE MENU SERVICE MODES FRACN TUNE ON 4 Vary the fractional N frequency from 120 MHz to 242 MHz Ifthe period of the signal does not vary from 7 5 usec to 15 5 usec replace A14 A variation of 10 is expected The counter frequency needs to be extremely out of specification to constitute a failure Ifthe period does vary as prescribed remove the jumper and reinsert A14 Always turn off the analyzer before removing or replacing any assembly A14 to A13 Digital Control Signals Check 1 Place A13 on the extender board and reconnect all of the flexible cables the one to 14 1 is optional 2 The 14 assembly generates TTL cycle start CST signal every 10 microseconds when the VCO is oscillating Service Guide 7 17 Source Troubleshooting 8719ET 20ET 22ET Broadband Phase Lock Problems 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers 3 Connect oscilloscope to CST Suggested vertical scale 2 0V div 4 Press TRIGGER MENU HOLD to stop the sweep This will make triggering on these waveforms easier 5 If there is no signal replace A14 6 Usethe CST signal as an external trigger for the oscilloscope and observe the signals listedin Figure 7 4 Sincethese TTL signals are generated by A14 to control A13 check them at A13 first signals should loo
256. asure a lowband load to complete the loads calibration 22 When the measurement is complete press DONE LOADS STANDARDS DONE Leavethe load connected to cable 2 23 The analyzer briefly displays COMPUTING CAL COEFFICIENTS 24 Press ISOLATION DO BOTH FWD REV 25 After the isolation calibration completes go to Thru Calibration on page 2 24 Service Guide 2 23 System Verification and Performance Tests 8719ET 20ET 22ET System Verification 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Thru Calibration 26 Connect the two test port return cables together to form a thru configuration as shown in Figure 2 10 Figure 2 10 Thru Connections NETWORK ANALYZER Cable 1 Cable 2 Test Port Cables Only No Adapters sb517e 27 Press the following ES models TRANSMISSION DO BOTH FWD REV ET models TRANSMISSION DO BOTH FWD THRUS 28 After the sweep press the following ES models STANDARDS DONE DONE 2 PORT CAL ET models STANDARDS DONE DONE FWD ENH RESP 29 To savethe calibration into the analyzer internal memory press the following Save Recall SELECT DISK INTERNAL MEMORY Rotate the knob to select Register 1 REG1 on the display Then press RETURN SAVE STATE IMPORTANT Step 29 is crucial to the correct recall of the calibration during subsequent measurements The calibration MUST be stored in Register 1 REG1 of INTERNAL MEMORY properly recalled 30 When the analyzer finishes saving the
257. at full speed if the air flow detector senses a low output of air from the fan Full speed is normal at initial power on Display Power 8 assembly supplies 5VCPU totheA22 GSP interface board The 5VCPU is routed to the A19 GSP where it is regulated to 43 3 V and sent to the display The A19 GSP also controls and supplies power to the A20 backlight inverter The voltages generated by the inverter are then routed to the display Display power is not connected tothe protective shutdown circuitry so that the A18 display assemblies can operate during troubleshooting when other supplies do not work NOTE If blanking pulses from the A19 GSP are not present then 43 3 V will not be sent to the display 12 8 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Theory of Operation 8719ES 20ES 22ES Digital Control Theory RF Network Analyzers Digital Control Theory Thedigital control functional group consists of the following assemblies A1Front Panel 2 Front Panel Processor A7 CPU A10Digital IF A16Rear Panel e A18 Display e A19 GSP e A20 Inverter These assemblies combine to provide digital control for the entire analyzer They provide math processing functions as well as communications between the analyzer and an external controller or peripherals A block diagram of the digital control functional groupis located at the end of Chapter 6 Digital Control Troubleshooting A1 Front Panel The A1 front panel assembl
258. b598e Service Guide 14 11 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures 8719ET 20ET 22ET Removing the Display Lamp and Assembly 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Removing the Display Lamp and Assembly Tools Required T 10 TORX screwdriver T 15 TORX screwdriver small slot screwdriver ESD electrostatic discharge grounding wrist strap 5 16 inch open end torque wrench set to 10 in Ib Removal 1 Remove the front panel assembly 1 refer to Removing the Front Panel Assembly on page 14 8 Remove the 2 ribbon cables between Item 1 theinverter assembly A20 and the front panel interface board A2 Item 2 theinverter assembly A20 and the display assembly A18 3 Remove the 3 screws item 3 that attach the display cover tothe front panel 4 Lift the display from the front panel and remove the 2 screws item 4 from the outside 5 of the display Pull the lamp item 5 out with a curving side motion as shown Replacement 1 Reverse the order of the removal procedure 14 12 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair P rocedures 8719ES 20ES 22ES Removing the Display Lamp and Assembly RF Network Analyzers 3 Places A 2 Places sb597e Service Guide 14 13 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures 8719ET 20ET 22ET Removing the Rear Panel Assemb
259. ber used to produce that bar 0 amp 100 oure red 332pure green 67 pure blue Test Pat 9 Displays colors Red Green and Blue at four different intensity levels You should see 16 color bands across the screen Starting at the left side of the display the pattern is Black four bands of Red each band increasing in intensity Black four bands of Green each band increasing in intensity Black four bands of Blue each band increasing in intensity and Black If any one of the four bits for each color is missing the display will not look as described Test Pat 10 Displays a character set for showing all the different types and sizes of characters available Three sets of characters are drawn in each of thethree character sizes 125 characters of each size are displayed Test Pat 11 Displays a bandwidth pattern for verifying the bandwidth of the EXTERNAL display It consists of multiple alternating white and black vertical stripes Each stripe should be clearly visible A limited bandwidth would smear these lines together This is used totest the quality of the external monitor Test Pat 12 Displays a repeating gray scale for troubleshooting using an oscilloscope It is similar tothe 16 step gray scale but is repeated 32 times across the screen Each of the 3 outputs of the video palette will then show 32 ramps instead of one staircase between each horizontal sync pulse This pattern is used to troubleshoot the pixel processing circui
260. bles Models 55859 e RR HERE dg uds 13 69 Front Cabes All Odes der edo PE SOE ped 13 70 Front Panel Assembly EX LES OR RARO ieee PORRO 13 72 Rear Pang ASSemby i qa Ss ede USA de ku UIE 13 74 Rear Panel Assembly Option IDS Lila RA di 55 ies deeded dei 13 76 Hardware re ree ee ee re Y Ed 13 78 hardware BOLCOTY 5556 13 80 Contents xi Contents Hardware Froni 45355585 REA tE 13 82 Hardware Prersgulal fr 13 83 Chassis Parte DUUSISIE so ine hacks oO 13 84 Chassis Parts BAS whe UA 13 86 Miscellaneous Part Numbers isi a a ss s ROO 13 87 14 Assembly Replacement and Post R epair Procedures en TIS CHa Mel aaa pg eae xa EX rac TC du p 14 2 Assembly Replacement Sequence 14 3 Pricosduresin This Chapbet 525250205055 Pob eb acd ede Ice 14 4 Repladngthe Line FUSE dele 14 5 DENIS aie pr 14 6 Removing the top COVE E ERE
261. bration Kit No substitute 85050B P T 7 mm Verification Kit2 No substitute 85051B P Type N Calibration Kit No substitute 85054B P T No substitute 85055A P P Performance Tests A Adjustments T Troubleshooting 1 Verification can only be done up to 26 5 GHz on the Agilent 8722 5 while using the 3 5 mm Verification Kit 2 Verification can only be done up to 18 GHz while using the 7mm Verification Kit 3 Verification can only be done up to 18 GHz while using the Type N Verification Kit Service Guide 1 3 Service Equipment and Analyzer Options 8719ET 20ET 22ET Service Test Equipment 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Required Equipment Critical Specifications Recommended Model or Use HP Agilent Part Number Adapters and Loads RF Load 3 5 mm f 50 ohm 00902 60004 P Part of 85052B RF Load 2 4 mm f 50 ohm 00901 60004 P Part of 85056A RF Short 3 5 mm f 85052 60007 P Part of 85052B RF Short 2 4mm f 85056 60021 P Part of 85056A RF Open 3 5 mm f 85052 60009 A Part of 85052B RF Open 2 4 mm f 85056 60023 A Part of 85056A RF Adapter 3 5 mm f to 3 5 mm f 85052 60012 P A Part of 85052B RF Adapter 2 4 mm f to 2 4 mm f 85056 60006 PA Part of 85056A RF Power Splitter 3 5mm 11667B T RF Power Splitter 2 4mm 11667C T RF Fixed Attenuator 3 5mm 8493C Opt 010 A RF Fixed Attenuator 2 4mm 8490D Opt 010
262. bus To view the bandswitch activity look at this node on an oscilloscope using AUX OUT ON refer to AUX OUT on OFF under the Analog Bus Menu heading 10 28 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Service Key Menus and Error Messages 8719ES 20ES 22ES Menu RF Network Analyzers PEEK POKE Menu To access this menu press SYSTEM SERVICE MENU PEEK POKE PEEK POKE Allows you to edit the content of one or more memory addresses The keys are described below CAUTION The capability is intended for service use only PEEK POKE ADDRESS PEEL D accesses any memory address and shows it in the active entry area of the display Usethe front panel knob entry keys or step keys to enter the memory address of interest PEEK PEEK Displays the data at the accessed memory address POKE 0 allows you to change the data at the memory address accessed by the PEEK POKE ADDRESS softkey Usethe front panel knob entry keys or step keys to change the data The A7CC jumper must be the ALT position in order to poke RESET MEMORY Resets or dears the memory where instrument states are stored To this press RESET MEMORY Preset Service Guide 10 29 Service Key Menus and Error Messages 8719ET 20ET 22ET Firmware Revision Softkey 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Firmware Revision Softkey Press SYSTEM SERVICE MENU FIRMWARE REVISION todisplay the current firmware revision informa
263. circuit phase locks the YIG oscillator to the synthesizer output signal as explained in 11 Phase Lock Comparing Phase and Frequency on page 12 15 The VCO in the 14 fractional N digital assembly generates a swept or CW signal in the range of 60 to 240 MHz such that a harmonic 15 10 MHz above the desired source frequency This is divided down and phase locked in the A13 assembly to 100 kHz signal FN REF from the A12 reference A programmable divider is set to some number N such that the integer part of the expression F VCO N is equal to 100 kHz To achieve frequencies between integer multiples of the reference the divider is programmed to divide by N part of the time and by N 1 part of the time The ratio of the divisions yields an average equal tothe desired fractional frequency API analog phaseinterpolator current sources in the A13 assembly correct for phase errors caused by the changing of the divide by number The resulting synthesized signal goes to the pulse generator A52 Pulse Generator the Harmonic Comb The signal from the synthesizer drives a step recovery diode SRD in the A52 pulse generator assembly The SRD generates a comb of harmonic multiples 1st LO of the VCO frequency which goes to the samplers One of the harmonics is 10 MHz above the desired start frequency A64 Sampler Down Converting the Signals The A64 assembly is part of the receiver functional group It is also included here because i
264. cking and mixing 39 984 MHz VCO with the 40 MHz VCXO to derive difference of 16 kHz This is compared to a 16 kHz reference produced by dividing 40 MHz by 2500 The phase locked output of the 39 984 M Hz oscillator is divided by 4 to provide the 9 996 MHz 2nd LO signal A4 A5 A6 Second Converters The 1st IF and the 2nd LO are mixed in the second converter Theresulting difference frequency is a constant 4 kHz 2nd IF signal that retains the amplitude and phase characteristics of the measured signal The 2nd IF signals from all three second converter assemblies are input to the A10 digital IF assembly A10 Digital IF In this assembly the 2nd IF signals from the A and B second converters go through a gain stage Signals less than 30 dB on these two signal paths are amplified by 24 dB to ensure that they can be detected by the ADC analog to digital converter For troubleshooting purposes the gain can be forced on or off by using the service menus refer to Chapter 8 Receiver Troubleshooting The R path signal is fixed at a level high enough to maintain phase lock and therefore requires no amplification three signals are sampled at a 16 kHz rate set by a divided down 4 M Hz clock pulse from the A12 reference assembly The signals are sequentially multiplexed into the ADC where they are converted to digital form The ADC conversions aretriggered by timing signals from the CPU or the synthesizer or an external signal at therear pa
265. ctional N synthesizer description of 12 14 fractional N tuning voltage waveform at Abus Node 21 7 14 frequency accuracy adjustment 3 41 performance tests 2 34 test record 2 47 frequency counter analog bus location A14 10 20 front panel description 12 9 LED pattern after Preset 6 13 front panel assembly removal 14 8 front panel interface removal 14 10 Index 4 front panel troubleshooting A1 A2 6 13 functional group fault isolation 4 13 functional group types 4 13 functional groups description 12 5 fuse check 5 8 G GPIB plotter and printer check 4 11 GPIB addresses factory set 4 10 GPIB service mnemonic definitions 10 31 GPIB systems check 4 10 graphics system processor GSP description of 12 11 green red or blue dots 6 7 7 7 7 14 GSP A19 applied voltages 6 9 pin locations 6 11 removal 14 26 troubleshooting 6 9 H high band problems 7 24 how to adjust ADC offset correction constants 3 10 analog bus correction constants 3 8 fractional N spur avoidance and FM sideband 3 44 frequency accuracy 3 41 IF amplifier correction constants 3 9 option numbers correction constants 3 13 serial number correction constants 3 11 source pretune correction constants 3 6 backup the EEPROM disk 3 33 initialize EEPROMs 3 32 position the A7 CC jumper 3 4 IF amplifier correction constants adjustment 3 9 ILLEGAL UNIT OR VOLUME NUMBER 10 35 improper connections 7 22 INITIALIZATION FAILED 10 36 initialize
266. ctor repeatability and test cable stability A complete description of system errors and how they affect measurements is provided in the analyzer reference guide Any measurement result is the vector sum of the actual test device response plus all error terms The precise effect of each error term depends on its magnitude and phase relationship to the actual test device response When the phase of an error response is not known phase is assumed to be worst case 180 to 180 Random errors such as noise and connector repeatability are generally combined in a root sum of the squares RSS manner Measurement Traceability To establish a measurement traceability path to a national standard for a network analyzer system the overall system performance is verified through the measurement of devices that have a traceable path This is accomplished by measuring the devices in an Agilent verification kit The measurement of the devices in the verification kit has a traceable path becausethe factory system that measured the devices is calibrated and verified by measuring standards that have a traceable path to the National Institute of Standards and Technology NIST see Figure 2 7 This chain of measurements defines how the verification process brings traceability to the network analyzer system 2 16 Service Guide 8719 20 22 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers System Verification and Performance Tests System Verification Fi
267. curacy Performance Test Dynamic Range Performance Test A65 A Sampler Raw Offset CC Sampler Cal CC Frequency Accuracy Performance Test Dynamic Range Performance Test A66 B Sampler Raw Offset CC Sampler Cal CC Frequency Accuracy Performance Test Dynamic Range Performance Test A69 55 dB Step Attenuator Raw Offset CC Sampler Cal CC Frequency Accuracy Performance Test A70 Step Attenuator Output Power Adjustments Power Linearity Adjustments Level Accuracy Performance Test Source Linearity Performance Test A71 Step Attenuator Output Power Adjustments Power Linearity Adjustments L evel Accuracy Performance Test SourceLinearity Performance Test S1 Switch Output Power Adjustments L evel Accuracy Performance Test 8722 5 Power Linearity Adjustments Source Linearity Performance Test S2 S3 Switches Output Power Adjustments Level Accuracy Performance Test Power Linearity Adjustments Source Linearity Performance Test S4 Transfer Switch Output Power Adjustments Power Linearity Adjustments Level Accuracy Performance Test Source Linearity Performance Test Service Guide 14 37 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair P rocedures 8719ET 20ET 22ET Post Repair Procedures 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers 14 38 Service Guide 15 Safety and Regulatory Information Safety and Regulatory Information 8719ET 20ET 22ET General Information 8719ES 20ES
268. cy in normal operation the problem is with the RF cabling A5 source switch or A6 source switch 8 If no power is present check the lowband YIG bias voltages on pin 3 15V and pin 2 22V of the J 1 connector Pin 3 is located on the left and pin 2 is located in the middle of the 1 connector If the voltages are correct replace the YIG 8722ET ES Models 1 Set up the ES and E T models as following For ES analyzers Disconnect the front panel R channel jumper Connect the power meter totheR CHANNEL OUT port NOTE For ES Option 089 analyzers press the following INSTR MODE EXT CHAN For ET analyzers On ET models there are two ways to measure the R channel sampler assembly power a Remove the bottom cover and disconnect the semirigid cable W74 tothe RF INPUT J 2 of the R channel sampler Connect a 2 4 mm f barrel flexible cable and the power sensor to W74 CAUTION Be careful not to damage the center pins of the semirigid cable Some flexing of the cable will have to be done to attach the power sensor Do not over bend the cable b Removethe front panel and disconnect the junction between the cables W72 and W74 Connect the power sensor to W72 2 To measure the low band power press the following SERVICE MENU SERVICE MODES SRC ADJUST MENU DAC NUM LOW BAND The power should be at least 32 dBm 3 To measure mid band power press DAC NUM MID BAND 1 The power should at least 32 dBm 4 To measure hi
269. d T 10 TORX screwdriver T 15 TORX screwdriver small slot screwdriver ESD electrostatic discharge grounding wrist strap 5 16 inch open end torque wrench set to 10 in Ib Removal 1 Remove the bottom cover refer to Removing the Covers on page 14 6 2 Remove the front panel refer to Removing the Front Panel Assembly on page 14 8 3 Reaching the connections from the bottom of the analyzer disconnect the 4 RF cables attached to the couplers 2 from the back of the couplers and 2 from between the couplers 4 Remove the 6 screws item 1 from the bottom edge of the front panel frame 5 Remove the screw item 2 from the right side of the coupler bracket 6 Remove the coupler nuts item 3 LED Board Removal 7 Remove the 3 screws item 4 that attach the LED board to the coupler bracket Replacement 1 Reverse the order of the procedure NOTE When reconnecting semirigid cables torque the connections to 10 in Ib 14 30 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Assembly Replacement and Post R epair Procedures 8719ES 20ES 22ES Removing the A62 A63 Test Port Couplers and LED Board Assemblies RF Network Analyzers sb6135d Service Guide 14 31 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures 8719 20 22 Removin
270. d Cables for 8722E S Option 400 012 089 Ref Desig Options HP Agilent Qty Description Part Number A7 08720 60253 1 CPU Repair Kit A7 08720 69253 1 CPU Repair Kit Rebuilt E xchange 17 08720 60264 1 Motherboard A51 08720 60274 1 Bd Assy Test Set Interface A52 5086 7456 1 Assy Pulse Generator A52 5086 6456 1 Assy Pulse Generator Rebuilt E xchange A60 A61 5086 7484 2 Bias Tee A60 A61 5086 6484 2 Bias Tee Rebuilt E xchange A64 A65 5086 7614 4 Assy Sampler A66 A67 A64 A65 5086 6614 4 Assy Sampler Rebuilt Exchange A66 A67 70 71 33321 60006 2 Attenuator 0 55 dB A74 5087 7002 1 Switch Splitter A74 5087 6002 1 Switch Splitter Rebuilt Exchange A99 08720 60124 1 Frequency Converter A99 08720 69124 1 Frequency Converter Rebuilt E xchange W14 08722 20102 1 A63 to Front Panel B Out W15 08722 20079 1 Front Panel B In to A66 W16 08722 20081 1 Front Panel A In to A65 W17 08722 20102 1 A62 to Front Panel A Out W18 08722 20058 1 Front Panel R Channel IN to A24 W25 08722 20056 1 A61to A62 W26 08722 20057 1 A60 to A63 W32 08722 20054 1 A58 to A74 W37 08722 20059 1 A71 to A60 W38 08722 20061 1 A70 toA61 W39 08722 20063 1 74 to A70 W40 08722 20062 1 74 to A71 41 08722 20936 1 A74 to A76 W50 08720 20278 1 72 to A23 W51 08720 20279 1 A23to A24 W52 08722 20024 3 External Link 13
271. d the marker value from the analyzer display and subtract 5 dB Record the calculated value the 8722ET ES 0 05 20 GHz Ps Max column of the Source Linearity performance test record 32 Press SEARCH MIN 33 Read the marker value from the analyzer display and subtract 5 dB Record the calculated value in the P 5 Min column of the Source Linearity performance test record If the Analyzer Fails This Test The source relies on the power linearity adjustment for correct performance Refer to Chapter 3 Adjustments and Correction Constants and perform the Power Linearity Adjustment procedure Then repeat this test Ifthe analyzer repeatedly fails this test refer to Chapter 7 Source Troubleshooting Service Guide 2 41 System Verification and Performance Tests 8719ET 20ET 22ET Performance Tests 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Dynamic Range Performance Test This test checks the dynamic of the analyzer Table 2 11 Required Equipment Equipment Description 8719 5 and 8720 5 8722ET ES HP Agilent Calibration Kit 85052B 85056A HP Agilent RF Cable Set 85131F 85133F Analyzer warmup time 30 minutes Entering Frequency Points 1 Press Preset PRESET FACTORY Preset 2 enter the values for the first frequency segment and power value press the following SWEEP TYPE MENU EDITLIST ADD NUMBER of POINTS DONE MORE LISTPOWERON SEGMENT POWER
272. dB then the offset for the A channel is correctly set Go to Raw Offset for the B Channel ES Models on page 3 53 If the magnitude is greater than 0 15 dB repeat steps 2 through 11 until the A channel raw offset correction constant is achieved 3 52 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Adjustments and Correction Constants 8719ES 20ES 22ES Raw Offset Correction Constants RF Network Analyzers Raw Offset for the B Channel ES Models 12 Press the following INPUT PORTS B TESTPORT 1 SERVICE MENU SERVICE MODES MORE SAMPLER COR OFF SEARCH MAX Note the frequency and write it down 13 Press CW FREQ and enter the maximum frequency point from step 12 Press Marker Search SEARCH MAX Notethe maximum marker reading MMR and write it down Press Power Note the displayed test port power TPP and write it down 14 The objective is to set the maximum marker reading MMR to 4 dB higher than the power meter reading Perform the following mathematical operation a Calculate the difference A between the test port power meter reading TPP and the maximum marker reading MMR and then add 4 TPP 4 MMR NOTE The A can bea positive or negative value 15 If the magnitude of A is less than 0 15 dB then the offset for the B channel is correctly set Goto Sampler Calibration Correction Constants Test 51 on page 3 58 If the magnitude is greater than 0 15 dB continue to the next step 16 Press the follo
273. display its definition and the equivalent GPIB code The GPIB command to output the test status of the most recently executed test is 55 For more information refer to GPIB Service Mnemonic Definitions on page 10 31 Table 10 1 Test Status Terms Test Status Terms Definition GPIB Code PASS PASS 0 FAIL FAIL 1 IP IN PROGRESS 2 NA NOT AVAILABLE 3 ND NOT DONE 4 DONE DONE 5 Service Guide 10 5 Service Key Menus and Error Messages 8719ET 20ET 22ET Service Menus Internal Diagnostics 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers EXECUTE TEST EXET runs the selected test and may display these softkeys CONTINUE 5 1 continues the selected test YES TESR2 alters correction constants during adjustment tests NEXT TESR4 displays the next choice SELECT TESR6 chooses the option indicated ABORT TESR8 terminates the test and returns to the tests menu INTERNAL TESTS evaluates the analyzer s internal operation These tests are completely internal and do not require external connections or user interaction EXTERNAL TESTS evaluate the analyzer s external operation These SYS VER TESTS additional tests require some user interaction such as keystrokes verifies the analyzer system operation by examining the contents of the measurement calibration arrays The procedure is in Chapter 2 System Verification and Performance Tests Information about the calibratio
274. djustments and correction constants CCs The correction constants are empirically derived data that are stored in memory and then recalled to refine the instrument s measurements and to determine its proper operation Anytime the CPU A7 assembly is replaced all of the correction constants must be regenerated and stored to the new CPU assembly board Agilent Technologies recommends that you store the correction constant data to 3 5 inch disk as a backup The procedure for storing correction constant data to 3 5 inch disk can be found in EEPROM Backup Disk Procedure on page 3 33 Additionally there are adjustments and correction constants that must be performed following the replacement of an assembly Refer to Table 14 1 on page 14 35 of Chapter 14 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures in order to determine which adjustments and correction constants procedures to perform 3 2 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Adjustments and Correction Constants 8719ES 20ES 22ES Information on This Chapter RF Network Analyzers This chapter contains the following adjustment procedures A7 Switch Positions on page 3 4 Source Pretune Correction Constants Test 43 on page 3 6 Analog Bus Correction Constants Test 44 on page 3 8 IF Step Correction Constants Test 47 on page 3 9 ADC Offset Correction Constants Test 48 on page 3 10 Serial Number Correction Constants Test 49 on page 3 11 Protected Option Nu
275. e 3 Switch on the power to the analyzer NOTE To achieve the maximum system stability allow the analyzer to warm up for at least 30 minutes 2 6 Service Guide 8719 20 22 System Verification and Performance Tests 8719ES 20ES 22ES Preliminary Tests RF Network Analyzers Clean and Gauge All Connectors CAUTION To prevent damage to the calibration kit and verification kit devices always replace or repair any damaged connectors before proceeding with these tests NOTE Always use adapters when verifying a system with SMA connectors 1 Visually inspect all the connectors for any burrs gold flakes or places where the gold is worn 2 Clean all the connectors with alcohol and foam tipped swabs Dry the connectors with a dry foam tipped swab 3 Visually inspect the calibration block and the end of the connector gauge before any measurements are made 4 Gauge all devices cables and test port connectors Refer to the calibration kit manuals for the correct use of gauges Perform the Internal Test This quick automated internal test may save time by indicating an instrument fault before doing the performance tests The tests performed are described in Chapter 10 Service Key Menus and Error Messages NOTE To achieve the maximum system stability allow the analyzer to warm up for at least 30 minutes Torun the analyzer internal test press the following PRESET FACTORY SERVICE MENU TESTS INTERNAL TESTS EXE
276. e A7 Switch 15 the alter position ALT 2 Press the following PRESET FACTORY SERVICE MENU TESTS EXECUTE TEST YES NOTE Test 48 takes about three minutes 3 Observe the analyzer for the results of the adjustment routine e Ifthe analyzer displays ADC Ofs Cor DONE you have completed this procedure e Ifthe analyzer displays ADC Ofs Cor FAIL repeat the test 4 If no more correction constant routines are going to be performed return the A7 Switch tothe NRM position and perform the EEPROM Backup Disk Procedure on page 3 33 In Case of Difficulty e ftheanalyzer displays ADC Ofs Cor FAIL after repeating the test refer to Chapter 6 Digital Control Troubleshooting or contact the nearest Agilent Technologies sales or service office 3 10 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Adjustments and Correction Constants 8719ES 20ES 22ES Serial Number Correction Constants Test 49 RF Network Analyzers Serial Number Correction Constants Test 49 This procedure stores the analyzer serial number in the A7 CPU assembly EEPROMs CAUTION Perform this procedure only if the A7 CPU assembly has been replaced Analyzer warmup time None 1 Make sure the A7 Switch is in the alter position ALT 2 Record theten character serial number that is on the analyzer rear panel identification label NOTE The serial number may also be entered using the optional external keyboard Plug the keyboard into the DIN KY
277. e B Channel Output ET and ES 5 4 24 Switch Repeatability Check ES 5 4 25 ACCESSES TREE RIED he eres 4 26 Overall nstr ment Block Diagrams isssdesses kae me 3a GR REX PERS 4 27 8719ES and 8720ES Standard Option 007 012 085 089 105 4 27 8719 5 and 3720ES Option 400 012 085 ID5 v aee kh Rh ERR 4 28 BI2 ES Standard Option O07 017 085 089 05 225 FREI RIERYRERDAPEPRRRA 4 29 Br22ES Option 40D OLZ 089 IDS o2d45 d EACEA RA AC Bh 4 30 BIISET 720 Standard Option 004 5555245 4 31 2 Standard OPU US sch xa PECL a bed Gade 4 32 5 Power Supply Troubleshooting Irirormmaben en This Chapel s das RESI oA 5 2 Power Supply Troubleshooting FIGNEhBIE teki Y rid pue 5 3 Assembly Replacement 5 4 Simplified Block Diagram of Power Supply Group 5 5 eee eee ee rey ee ee eee ee ee ee ee ee 5 6 Check the Green LED and Red LED on the Preregulator 15 5 6 Check the Green LEDs on the Post Regulator A8 5 6 Measure the Post R
278. e Internal Test 0 Internal Test 12 Internal Test 23 A2 Front Panel Processor None Internal Test 0 Internal Test 12 Internal Test 23 A4 A5 A6 Second Raw Offset CC Frequency Accuracy Performance Test Converter Sampler Calibration CC Test 51 Dynamic Range Performance Test A52 Pulse Generator Raw Offset CC Sampler Calibration CC Test 51 Frequency Accuracy Performance Test Dynamic Range Performance Test A8 Post Regulator None Internal Test 0 Check A8 test point voltages A7 CPU A7 Switch Positions Load Firmware CC Retrieval Serial Number CC Test 49 Option Number CC Test 50 Analog Bus CC Test 44 Source Pretune CC Test 43 IF Step CC Test 47 Raw Offset CC Sampler Calibration CC Test 51 EEPROM Backup Disk Frequency Accuracy Performance Test Level Accuracy Performance Test SourceLinearity Performance Test Dynamic Range Performance Test A9 Source Control Raw Offset CC Sampler Calibration CC Test 51 Frequency Accuracy Performance Test Dynamic Range Performance Test A10 Digital IF A7 Switch Positions Analog Bus CC Test 44 IF Amplifier CC Test 47 Dynamic Range Performance Test Internal Test 17 Internal Test 18 Internal Test 19 a If you have an EEPROM backup disk available you only need to perform the first three tests listed Service Guide 14 35 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair P rocedures 8719ET 20ET 22ET Post Repair Procedures 871
279. e results section on the F requency Accuracy performance test record at the end of this chapter 2 34 Service Guide 8719 20 22 System Verification and Performance Tests 8719ES 20ES 22ES Performance Tests RF Network Analyzers If the Analyzer Fails This Test Ifthe frequency measured is close to the specification limits either in or out of specification check the time base accuracy of the counter used e Ifthe analyzer fails by a significant margin the master time base probably needs adjustment In this case refer to the Frequency Accuracy Adjustment procedure in Chapter 3 Adjustments and Correction Constants See Chapter 7 Source Troubleshooting for related troubleshooting information Service Guide 2 35 System Verification and Performance Tests 8719ET 20ET 22ET Performance Tests 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Level Accuracy Performance Test This test checks the maximum variation in output power across the frequency range of the analyzer Table 2 7 Required Equipment 8719ET ES Equipment Description 8720ET ES 8722ET ES 436A 437B 438A E4418A EPM 441A or E4419A EPM 442A HP Agilent Power Meter HP Agilent Power Sensor 8485A 8487A P N 85052 60012 Adapter 3 5 mm f to 3 5 mm f part of 85052B N A Adapter 2 4 mm f to 2 4 mm f N A ar CEA GAME part of 85056A Analyzer warmup time 30 minutes 1 Zero and calibrate the p
280. e scope 2 Now the oscilloscope should display the IF signal as a sine wave of about 10 MHz The actual frequency can be expressed as this equation Oscilloscope frequency counter frequency 180 MHz x harmonic 3 Repeat steps 1b and 2 using the information in the second through fourth rows of Table 7 4 Substitute DAC NUM LOW BAND with the appropriate band Table 7 4 First IF Settings DAC Number Band Approximate Approximate Harmonic Oscilloscope DAC Number Source Frequency Displayed Frequency On Counter Low 4013 0 910 GHz 5 10 MHz Mid 8722ET ES Only 3541 3 610 GHz 26 10 MHz High 4004 4 690 GHz 26 10 MHz High 8722ET ES Only 2529 20 17 GHz 112 10 MHz e IfthelF signals are correct replace the 11 IfthelF signals are incorrect check the pulse generator bias voltages at the motherboard 17 19 pin 4 5 2 pin 3 15 V pin 2 15 V pin 12 GND If the voltages are correct replace the A52 pulse generator Service Guide 7 19 Source Troubleshooting 8719ET 20ET 22ET Broadband Phase Lock Problems 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Pulse Generator A52 Check with Spectrum Analyzer 1 Connect the spectrum analyzer to the network analyzer A65 A sampler assembly J 3 IF output Set the parameters on the spectrum analyzer center frequency 10 MHz span 10 MHz e marker 10 MHz On the network analyzer to set the fractional N
281. easuring the reflection S11 S22 of an open and then a short connected directly to the ports Source match is a measure of the match between the coupler and test set connector as well as the match between all components from the source to the output port Significant System Components T he open and short calibration devices are important as are the coupler and test port connectors The power splitter bias tees step attenuator and transfer switch may also contribute to source match errors Affected Measurements The measurements most affected by source match errors are reflection and transmission measurements of highly reflective DUTs Figure 11 2 Typical ESF ESR without Cables CHI MEM LOG 18 dB REF 10 dB START 050 GHz STOP 40 050 000 GHz 11 12 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Error Terms 8719ES 20ES 22ES Error Term Descriptions RF Network Analyzers Reflection Tracking ERF and ERR Reflection tracking is the difference between the frequency response of the reference path R path and the frequency response of the reflection test path A or B input path T hese error terms are characterized by measuring the reflection S11 S22 of the open and the short during the measurement calibration N ote that coupler response is included in this error term Typically this appears as a roll off below 500 M Hz which is typically 18 dB at 100 MHz
282. egulator A8 Voltages 5 7 If the Green LED of the Preregulator A15 Is Off or Blinking 5 8 Check the Line Voltage Selector Switch and 5 8 If the Red LED of thePreregulator 15 IsOn 5 9 Contents vii Contents Check the Post Regulator ABI RIA 5 9 Merity the Prereculator ANS E Kw PA 5 10 Check Tor a Faulty Assembly ciwe P RR E C ES 5 11 Check the Operating 5 12 the Mahe DOS ek eee ee die i RR kuski 5 12 If the Green LEDs of the Post Regulator 8 Are Not AIL ON 5 13 Maintain A15W1 Cable Connection BC dr a 5 13 Check the Post Regulator A8 Fuses and lt 5 13 Remove the Assemblies J u u u RE REESE AL HERSE ERN C EIE aden 5 14 Briefly Disable the Shutdown Circuitry 5 15 nspect the Maher DOSE see PGE SR dh AEA A OR OR EER 5 16 MO eee eer ee es ee ee 5 17 Check the Fuses ang Isolate AS 523225259818 E diet es YO ER EROR 5 17 Fan
283. ent This adjustment centers the reference assembly voltage controlled oscillator VCO in its tuning range Required Equipment and Tools Equipment Description Models Extender board large part number 08720 60151 Part of tool kit part number 08722 60018 SMB m to SMB f Extension Cables part number 8120 5040 Non M etallic Adjustment Tool part number 8830 0024 Analyzer warmup time 30 minutes 1 Switch off the analyzer 2 Remove the upper corner standoffs and the instrument top cover order to access the VCO TUNE adjustment screw on the Reference A12 assembly install the Reference assembly onto the extender board Use SMB extension cables as required the EXT REF cable need not be reconnected now The Reference A12 assembly is the PC board with the red tabs 3 Press the following FACTORY PRESET CWFREQ SWEEP AUTO SERVICE MENU ANALOG BUS ON ANALOG IN Aux Input ANALOG BUS 15 x1 todisplay Tune 4 Press MARKER and Scale Ref SCALE DIV 5 1 Service Guide 3 39 Adjustments and Correction Constants 8719ET 20ET 22ET Reference Assembly VCO Tune Adjustment 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Figure 3 7 VCO Tune Adjustment Location VCO VCO Red Tune Tune sb539e 5 Adjust VCO TUNE with a non metallic adjustment tool to 0 0 V 500 mV within one division of the reference line The adjustment is sensitive and if out of adjustment may display an irre
284. eplaceable Part Listings RF Network Analyzers 8719 and 8720ET Standard page 13 57 8719ET and 8720ET Option 004 on page 13 59 8722ET Standard on page 13 61 8722ET Option 004 on page 13 63 Front RF Assemblies on page 13 64 Top Cables on page 13 66 Rear Cables All Models on page 13 69 Front Cables All Models on page 13 70 Front Panel Assembly Inside on page 13 72 Rear Panel Assembly on page 13 74 Rear Panel Assembly Option 1D5 on page 13 76 Hardware on page 13 78 Hardware Bottom on page 13 80 Hardware Front on page 13 82 Hardware Preregulator on page 13 83 Chassis Parts Outside on page 13 84 Chassis Parts Inside on page 13 86 Miscellaneous Part Numbers on page 13 87 Service Tools Documentation ES Upgrade Kits ET Upgrade Kits Protective Caps for Connectors Fuses used on the A8 Post Regulator GPIB Cables Touch up Paint ESD Supplies Keyboard Overlay and Rack Mount Parts Service Guide 13 7 Replaceable Parts 8719ET 20ET 22ET Replaceable Part Listings 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Top Assemblies Reference Models Options HP Agilent Qty Description Designator Part Number A3 08720 60190 1 Disk Drive Replacement Kit A4 A5 A6 08720 60156 1 Assy Second Converter 81 08722 60099
285. eplacement Sequence 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Assembly Replacement Sequence The following steps show the sequence to replace an assembly in the network analyzer Step 1 Identify the faulty group Begin with Chapter 4 Start Troubleshooting Here Follow up with the appropriate troubleshooting chapter that identifies the faulty assembly Step 2 Order a replacement assembly Refer to Chapter 13 Replaceable Parts Step 3 Replace the faulty assembly and determine what adjustments are necessary Refer to Chapter 14 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures Step 4 Perform the necessary adjustments Refer to Chapter 3 Adjustments and Correction Constants Step 5 Perform the necessary performance tests Refer to Chapter 2 System Verification and Performance Tests 7 4 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Source Troubleshooting 8719ES 20ES 22ES Start Troubleshooting Here RF Network Analyzers Start Troubleshooting Here 1 Makesureall of the assemblies are firmly seated 2 Verify that the analog bus is working by pressing the following SERVICE MENU TESTS EXECUTE TEST Iftheanalyzer fails the test return to Step 4 Faulty Group Isolation on page 4 13 fthetest passes continue with this section 3 Makesure that input R has a signal of at least 35 dBm about 0 01 Vp p into 50 ohms at all times to maintain phase lock To make this measurement perform the follo
286. equency Spectrum Analyzer Frequency 1 386 MHZ 385 899997 MHZ 2 530 MHZ 529 899997 MHZ 3 698 MHZ 697 899997 MHZ Service Guide 3 45 Adjustments and Correction Constants 8719ET 20ET 22ET API Spur Avoidance and 100 kHz FM Sideband Adjustment 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers 4 On the network analyzer press FACTORY PRESET CWFREQ and enter the network analyzer frequency 1 from Table 3 7 then press 5 Refer to Figure 3 12 and adjust the 100 kHz A13R77 for null minimum amplitude on the spectrum analyzer The minimum signal may drop down into the noise floor Figure 3 12 Location of API and 100 kHz Adjustments 100kHz APIT API2 APIS APIA ORANGE R77 R35 R43 R45 R47 CE ur Lr b f A13 Fractional N Analog Assembly sg69d 6 Repeat steps 4 through 6 for frequencies 2 and 3 from Table 3 7 using the same adjustment A13R77 API Adjust 1 On the spectrum analyzer set the Video Resolution Bandwidth VBW to 10 Hz and the Resolution Bandwidth to 30 Hz On the spectrum analyzer set the center frequency for 910 063 MHz On the network analyzer press CW FREQ MA Adjust the API1 A13R35 for a null minimum amplitude on the spectrum analyzer On the spectrum analyzer set the center frequency for 910 009 M Hz On the network analyzer press CW FREQ MA Adjust t
287. equirements This network analyzer complies with German F TZ 526 527 Radiated Emissions and Conducted Emission requirements Compliance with German Noise Requirements Safety and Regulatory Information Safety Considerations This is to declare that this instrument is in conformance with the German Regulation on Noise Declaration for Machines Laermangabe nach der Maschinenlaermrerordung 3 GSGV Deutschland Acoustic Noise Emission Geraeuschemission LpA lt 70 dB Lpa lt 70 dB Operator Position am Arbeitsplatz Normal Operation normaler Betrieb 150 7779 nach DIN 45635 t 19 Service Guide 15 9 Safety and Regulatory Information 8719ET 20ET 22ET Safety Considerations 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers 15 10 Service Guide Index Numerics 1MHzsignal 7 13 10 dB pads recommended part numbers 1 4 100kHz signal 7 13 2 4 mm recommended part numbers cables 1 4 RF adapters 1 4 RF loads 1 4 RF open 1 4 2nd Converter Check 8 9 2nd LO check 8 3 3 5 mm recommended part numbers cables 1 4 RF adapters 1 4 RF loads 1 4 RF opens 1 4 4 MHz check 8 3 A A channel output check 4 23 A7 switch positions 6 4 accessories troubleshooting 9 2 accuracy of frequency adjustment 3 41 adapters recommended part numbers 1 4 ADC analog bus location 10 20 ADC offset correction constants adjustment 3 10 ADDITIONAL STANDARDS NEEDED 10 33 ADDRESSED TO TALK WITH NOTHING TO SA
288. er Check 1 For the 8719ET ES and 8720 S set the output power to 10 dBm by pressing 2 For the 8722ET ES set the output power to 15 dBm by pressing CD For ES Models set up the following 3 Connect an RF flexible cable from the output of the transfer switch A74 directly tothe 2 4 mm RF INPUT J 2 of the suspect sampler U se 3 5 mm to 2 4 mm adapters where necessary T his connection bypasses the step attenuator bias tee and the coupler IMPORTANT To disconnect the semirigid cable of the A74 transfer switch it may be necessary to disconnect additional semirigid cables and loosen the transfer switch Be careful not to damage the center pin when disconnecting the cable For ET Models set up the following 4 For standard E T models connect an RF flexible cable from the cable W76 that connects the M A D S A58 to the directional coupler A62 tothe 2 4 mm RF INPUT J 2 of the suspect sampler Make the connection at the coupler end of the cable For ET Option 004 models connect an RF flexible cable from the cable W32 that connects the M A D S 58 to the step attenuator A69 to the 2 4 mm RF INPUT J 2 of the suspect sampler Make the connection at the attenuator end of the cable Checking the Operation of the Sampler 5 Tomeasure the signal at the A sampler on ET models press INPUT PORTS A on ES models press TESTPORT 1 or TESTPORT 2 depending on which side of the transfer switch is being tested
289. er a restored exchange replacement module from Agilent Technologies Refer to the replaceable parts section of this manual for appropriate part numbers of the restored exchange module When the replacement module is received place it in your spares stock Return the defective module to Agilent Technologies Replaceable Parts Ordering Information Restored exchange modules are shipped individually in boxes as shown above In addition to the module the box contains an exchange asse mbly failure report and a return shipping label Open the box carefully so that it can be used to return the defective module to Agilent Technologies Complete the exchange assembly failure report Remove the return shipping label from inside the box Place the defective module and the failure report in the box Seal the box with tape For shipping within the USA affix the return shipping label over the existing label Mail the box to Agilent Technologies Postage is paid by Agilent Technologies on boxes mailed within the USA Outside the USA address and mail the box to the nearest Agilent Technologies office Do not use the return shipping label 13 5 Replaceable Parts 8719ET 20ET 22ET Replaceable Part Listings 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Replaceable Part Listings The following section lists the replacement part numbers and descriptions for the 8719ET ES 8720 5 and 8722ET ES network analyzer Illust
290. erating a new set of data Non ANSI NCSL Z540 1 1994 Verification This type of verification consists of conducting the preliminary checks system verification and performance tests but stopping at any point if the analyzer fails a test You will troubleshoot and repair the first problem encountered without continuing to other tests After troubleshooting consult Table 14 1 on page 14 35 to find the necessary adjustment procedures Then repeat the system verification and performance tests As the analyzer passes the system verification and all the tests you will print out the system verification results and fill in the performance test record Service Guide 2 3 System Verification and Performance Tests How to Test the Performance of Your Analyzer Instrument Verification Cycle 8719ET 20ET 22ET 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers The performance of the network analyzer should be verified at least once per year The following flowcharts illustrate the test path for both types of verifications Figure 2 1 ANSI NCSL Z540 1 1994 Test Path Verification Flowchart 2 4 Preliminary Checks System Verification Performance Tests Troubleshooting Post Repair Matrix Adjustment Procedures sb51e Service Guide 8719 20 22 System Verification and Performance Tests 8719ES 20ES 22ES How to Test the Performance of Your Analyzer RF Network Analyzers Figure 2 2 Non ANSI NCSL Z540 1 1994 Test Path Verification
291. erted For the 8722ET ES models you may need an eye glass to inspect the shallow pins of the S1 high band switch When replacing the source module into the analyzer push the cables aside before seating the module 2 PLACES 9 3 4 PLACES 5061340 Service Guide 14 19 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures 8719 20 22 Removing the CPU Board Assembly 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Removing the A7 CPU Board Assembly Tools Required e T 10 TORX screwdriver e ESD electrostatic discharge grounding wrist strap Removal 1 Disconnec the power cord 2 Remove the 4 bottom feet and bottom cover refer to Removing the Covers on page 14 6 3 Remove the 4 screws item 1 on the rear panel 4 Turn theanalyzer over and remove the screw item 2 that secures the CPU board to the deck 5 Disconnect the ribbon cable item 3 6 Disconnect the ribbon cable item 4 from the CPU board 7 Slidethe board towards the front of theinstrument so that it disconnects from the 3 standoffs item 5 8 Disconnect the ribbon attached at the rear of the CPU board 9 Lift the board off of the standoffs Replacement 1 Reverse the order of the removal procedure 14 20 Service Guide 8719 20 22 8719ES 20ES 22ES
292. ervice Guide 8719 20 22 Error Terms 8719ES 20ES 22ES Error Term Inspection RF Network Analyzers 4 Compare the displayed measurement trace to the trace shown in Error Term Descriptions on page 11 10 and to previously measured data If data is not available from previous measurements refer to the typical uncorrected performance specifications listed in Table 11 3 and Table 11 4 5 Print or plot the measurement results a Connect a printer or plotter to the analyzer b Press SYSTEM CONTROLLER SET ADDRESSES and select the appropriate peripheral to verify that the GPIB address is set correctly on the analyzer Press Save Recall and then choose either PRINT or PLOT d Press MORE TITLE each data trace so that you can identify it later NOTE For detailed information on creating hardcopies refer tothe Printing Plotting and Saving Measurement Results chapter in the analyzer user s guide 6 Repeat steps 1 through 5 for each test number that corresponds to a calibration coefficient see Table 11 1 and Table 11 2 If Error Terms Seem Worse than Typical Values 1 To verify that the system still conforms to specifications perform a system verification refer to Chapter 2 System Verification and Performance Tests 2 If system verification fails refer to Chapter 4 Start Troubleshooting Here Service Guide 11 7 Error Terms 8719ET 20ET 22ET Error Term Inspection 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF
293. es the phase frequency detector output voltage When the voltage is reduced to zero and the divided down 1st IF frequency is equal to the 1 MHz reference frequency PL REF phase lock is achieved Phase Locked Sweep When the source is phase locked to the synthesizer at the start frequency the synthesizer starts to sweep The phase locked loop forces the source to track the synthesizer maintaining a constant 10 MHz 1st IF signal The full sweep is generated in a series of subsweeps by phase locking the source signal to the harmonic multiples of the synthesizer At the transitions between subsweeps phase lock is broken the source is held at this frequency Table 12 2 lists the subsweep frequencies from the synthesizer and the source Service Guide 12 15 8719 20 22 Theory of Operation Source Group Theory 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Table 12 2 Subsweep Frequencies Band Synthesizer Harmonic Source MHz MHz Number N Frequency Low 60 to 120 1 50 110 120 to 240 1 110 230 120 to 240 2 230 470 160 to 236 3 470 698 141 6 to 236 5 698 1170 147 5 to 236 8 1170 1878 157 3 to 213 3 12 1878 2550 High Mid 8722 5 128 to 236 20 2550 4710 131 1 to 220 6 36 4710 8256 142 5 to 234 58 8256 13562 159 7 to 235 4 85 13562 20000 High 8722ET ES 178 7 to 223 3 112 20000 25000 148 9 to 238 2 168 25000 40000 12 Reference The Crysta
294. es from the analyzer test ports This will invalidate the calibration that you have done earlier Repeat Verification Device Measurements on page 2 25 Be sure to make good connections for each verification device measurement e Ifthe analyzer still fails the test check the measurement calibration as follows 1 Press Preset PRESET FACTORY Preset 2 Recall the calibration by pressing Save Recall SELECT DISK INTERNAL MEMORY RETURN 3 Usethe front panel knob to highlight the calibration you want to recall and press RECALL STATE 4 Connect the short to cable 1 5 Press Meas Refl FWD S11 A R TRIGGER MENU CONTINUOUS 6 Press SCALE REF SCALE DIV 505 1 ES Models Check PORT 2 7 Check that the trace response is 0 00 0 05 dB 8 Disconnect the short and connect it cable 2 9 Press Refl REV S22 B R 10 Check that the trace response is 0 00 0 05 dB 11 1f any of the trace responses are out of the specified limits repeat Measurement Calibration on page 2 22 and Verification Device Measurements on page 2 25 12 Refer to Chapter 4 Start Troubleshooting Here for more troubleshooting information Service Guide 2 29 System Verification and Performance Tests 8719ET 20ET 22ET System Verification 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers If the System Fails the Verification Test Disconnect and reconnect the device that failed the verification Then measure the device aga
295. ess Sweep Setup CWFREQ 20 7 Adjust the mid band power slope resistor A59 R88 for a power meter reading that is equal to the value 40 1 dB listed under Power A Table 3 3 8 The adjustments in step 5 and step 7 interact with each other so repeat both adjustments until both are in specification Adjusting the Low Band Power 1 Press MA 2 Adjust the low band power offset resistor 59 R70 for power meter reading that is equal to the value 0 1 dB from the Power A column in Table 3 3 3 Press Gm 4 Adjust the low band power slope resistor A59 R86 for a power meter reading that is equal to the value 0 1 dB from the Power A column in Table 3 3 Adjusting the High Band Power 8722 5 1 Press Gin 2 Adjust the high band power offset resistor A59 R80 for a power meter reading that is equal to the value 0 1 dB from the Power A column in Table 3 3 3 Press Gm 4 Adjust the high band power slope resistor A59 R87 for a power meter reading that is equal to the value 0 1 dB from the Power A column in Table 3 3 Service Guide 3 21 Adjustments and Correction Constants 8719ET 20ET 22ET Output Power Adjustments 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Fine Tuning the Flatness 1 Press Preset 2 Press POWER PWR RANGE MAN POWER RANGES RANGE 3 Enter the value from the Power B column in Table 3 3 for the particular analyzer
296. est Agilent Technologies sales or service office Service Guide 3 61 Adjustments and Correction Constants 8719ET 20ET 22ET Sampler Calibration Correction Constants Test 51 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers 3 62 Service Guide 4 Start Troubleshooting Here Start Troubleshooting Here 8719ET 20ET 22ET Information on This Chapter 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Information on This Chapter The information in this chapter helps you dentify the portion of the analyzer that is at fault Locate the specific troubleshooting procedures to identify the assembly or peripheral at fault Toidentify the portion of the analyzer at fault follow these procedures in this order Step 1 Initial Observations on page 4 5 Step 2 Operator s Check on page 4 7 Step 3 GPIB Systems Check on page 4 10 Step 4 Faulty Group Isolation on page 4 13 4 2 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Start Troubleshooting Here 8719ES 20ES 22ES Assembly Replacement Sequence RF Network Analyzers Assembly Replacement Sequence The following steps show the sequence to replace an assembly in the network analyzer Step 1 Identify the faulty group Begin with this chapter and follow up with the appropriate troubleshooting chapter that identifies the faulty assembly Step 2 Order a replacement assembly Refer to Chapter 13 Replaceable Parts Step 3 Replace the faulty assembly and determine what adjustments are necessary
297. evels of error correction refer to the Optimizing Measurement Results chapter of the analyzer user s guide For details on the theory of error correction refer to the Operating Concepts chapter of the analyzer user s guide 11 2 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Error Terms 8719ES 20ES 22ES Error Terms Can Also Serve a Diagnostic Purpose RF Network Analyzers Error Terms Can Also Serve a Diagnostic Purpose Specific parts of the analyzer and its accessories directly contribute to the magnitude and shape of the error terms Since we know this correlation and we know what typical error terms look like we can examine error terms to monitor system performance preventive maintenance or to identify faulty components in the system troubleshooting Preventive Maintenance A stable repeatable system should generate repeatable error terms over long time intervals for example six months If you print or plot the error terms you can periodically compare current error terms with the record sudden shift in error terms reflects a sudden shift in systematic errors and may indicate the need for troubleshooting A long term trend often reflects drift connector and cable wear or gradual degradation indicating the need for further investigation and preventive maintenance Yet the system may still conform to specifications The is often as simple as cleaning and gaging connectors or inspecting cables Troubleshooting f a
298. ew Smm 3 5 8 Cwpntx 3 All All 0515 0430 2 Screw Smm 3 0 6 Pcfltx 4 All All 0515 2086 6 Screw Smm 4 0 7 Pcfltx 5 All All 0515 1400 4 Screw Smm 3 5 8 Pcfltx 6 All All 0515 0433 4 Screw Smm 4 0 8 Cwpntx 6 All All 3050 0001 4 Washer FI 172id 8 7 All All 0515 0375 4 Screw Smm 3 0 6 Cwpntx 8 All All 0515 0430 4 Screw Smm 3 0 6 Cwpntx 9 All All 0515 1400 1 Screw Smm 3 5 8 Pcfltx 10 All All 2200 0105 2 Screw Sm 440 312 Pcfltx 11 All All 0515 0375 4 Screw Smm 3 0 16 Cwpntx 12 All All 0515 0375 2 Screw Smm 3 0 16 Cwpntx 13 All All 0515 0666 2 Screw Smm 3 0 18 Cwpntx 14 All All 0515 0665 3 Screw Smm 3 0 14 Cwpntx 15 All All 0515 0430 2 Screw Smm 3 0 6 Cwpntx 16 All All 08722 00016 2 Switch Bracket 17 All All 0515 2194 1 Screw Smm 3 0 50 Cwpntx 18 All All 0535 0031 1 Nut Hex Smm 3 0 19 All All 08720 00113 1 Bracket Attenuator 13 80 Service Guide 8719 20 22 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Replaceable Parts Replaceable Part Listings Illustration of Hardware Bottom LSE TTT Pe o lo ere
299. f Difficulty Insert another disk in tothe analyzer disk drive and press Save Recall Theanalyzer should display a catalog of the disk contents If the catalog does not appear refer to Chapter 6 Digital Control Troubleshooting or contact the nearest Agilent Technologies sales or service office 3 34 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Adjustments and Correction Constants 8719ES 20ES 22ES Correction Constants Retrieval Procedure RF Network Analyzers Correction Constants Retrieval Procedure By using the current EEPROM backup disk you can download the correction constants into your network analyzer Required Equipment and Tools You will need your analyzer s current EEPROM backup disk Analyzer warmup time None required 1 Makesurethe A7 Switch isin the alter position ALT 2 Insert the your current analyzer s EEPROM backup disk into the analyzers disk drive 3 Press SELECT DISK INTERNAL DISK Usethefront panel knob to highlight the file N 12345 where N12345 represents the file name of the EEPROM backup disk for the analyzer On the factory shipped EEPROM backup disk the filename is FILE1 4 Press RETURN RECALL STATE todownload the correction constants data into the analyzer s EEPROMs 5 Perform the procedure Unprotected Hardware Option Correction Constants on page 3 15 6 Press FACTORY PRESET and verify that good data was transferred by performing a simple measurement 7 If no
300. g or printing from a PC The Service Guide provides information on calibrating troubleshooting and servicing your analyzer TheServiceGuideis not part of a standard shipment and is available only as Option OBW or by ordering part number 08720 90397 A CD ROM with the Service Guidein PDF format 15 included for viewing or printing from a PC Contents 1 Service Equipment and Analyzer Options Lr or rabo Ii T RES CHAPE X Y ks eq 1 2 Service Test EGUIDITIBUL HERER REA REGE CORRIERE 1 3 Principles of Microwave Connector 1 6 Anales DIpUOIS lt i yes l PRO E Her TE E RP dE d ba a ERR PORE ER ee 1 7 Option 1D5 High Stability Frequency Reference 1 7 Option 004 Step Attenuator ET 1 7 Option 007 Mechanical Transfer Switch ES Models 1 7 Option 010 T Mh aus dob RE sia 1 7 Option 012 Direct Access Receiver Configuration ES Models 1 7 Option 085 High Power System ES 1 8 Option 089 Frequency Offset Mode ES 5 1 8 Option 400 Four Sampler Test Set ES Models
301. g the 26 High Stability Frequency Reference Option 105 Assembly 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Removing the A26 High Stability Frequency Reference Option 1D5 Assembly Tools Required T 10 TORX screwdriver T 15 TORX screwdriver 9 16 inch hex nut driver ESD electrostatic discharge grounding wrist strap Removal 1 Remove the rear panel refer to Removing the Rear Panel Assembly on page 14 14 2 Disconnect W30 from the high stability frequency reference board A26 3 Remove the BNC connector nut and washer from the 10 MHz PRECISION REFERENCE connector item 1 on the rear panel 4 Remove the screw item 4 that attaches the 105 assembly to the rear panel 5 Remove the screw item 2 that secures the high stability frequency reference board A26 to the bracket 6 Slidethe board out of the bracket Be careful not tolosethe plastic spacer washer item 3 that is on the BNC connector as the board is being removed Replacement 1 Reverse the order of the removal procedure NOTE Before reinserting the high stability frequency reference board A26 intothe bracket be surethe plastic spacer washer item 3 is on the BNC connector 14 32 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Assembly Replacement and Post R epair P rocedures 8719ES 20ES 22ES Removing the A26 High Stability Frequency Reference Option 1D5 Assembly RF Network Analyzers 9
302. ge with the T 15 TORX screwdriver 5 Slide the cover toward the rear of the instrument CAUTION Use proper ESD procedures when performing the following steps 6 Move the A7 switch as shown in Figure 3 1 e MovetheA7 Switch tothe ALT position before you run any of the correction constant adjustment routines This is the position for altering the analyzer s correction constants e MovetheA7 Switch to the position after you have run correction constant adjustment routines This is the position for normal operation 7 Reconnect the power cord and switch on the instrument 3 4 Service Guide 8719 20 22 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Adjustments and Correction Constants Figure 3 1 Switch Positions for A7 CPU Assembly Service Guide A7 CPU Assembly umm um sb6165d A7 Switch Positions Adjustments and Correction Constants 8719ET 20ET 22ET Source Pretune Correction Constants Test 43 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Source Pretune Correction Constants Test 43 This procedure generates pretune values for correct phase locked loop operation Required Equipment Equipment Description 8719ET ES 8722ET ES 8720ET ES HP Agilent Frequency counter 53150A 53151A 5350B 5351B HP Agilent RF cable 85131F 85133F Analyzer warmup time 30 minutes 1 Make sure the A7 Switch is in the alter position ALT 2 Connect the equipment as shown in
303. ge 4 12 or go to Step 4 Faulty Group Isolation on page 4 13 e Ifthe resultant trace does not start at 1 GHz suspect the GPIB function of the analyzer Refer to Chapter 6 Digital Control Troubleshooting Service Guide 4 11 Start Troubleshooting Here 8719ET 20ET 22ET Step 3 GPIB Systems Check 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Troubleshooting Systems with Multiple Peripherals Connect any other system peripherals but not a controller to the analyzer one at a time and check their functionality Any problems observed are in the peripherals cables or are address problems see previous section Troubleshooting Systems with Controllers Passing the preceding checks indicates that the analyzer s peripheral functions are normal Therefore if the analyzer has not been operating properly with an external controller check the following TheGPIB interface hardware is incorrectly installed or not operational See the Operating Concepts chapter in the user s guide The programming syntax is incorrect Refer to your programmer s guide If the analyzer appears to be operating unexpectedly but has not completely failed go to Step 4 Faulty Group Isolation on page 4 13 4 12 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Start Troubleshooting Here 8719ES 20ES 22ES Step 4 Faulty Group Isolation RF Network Analyzers Step 4 Faulty Group Isolation The five functional groups are Power Supplies Digital
304. ge level varies between instruments Anything other than a flat line indicates that the VCXO is tuning to different frequencies Refer to the Frequency Accuracy Adjustment on page 3 41 19 A12 Gnd Ground reference 20 A12 Gnd Ground reference Service Guide 10 27 Service Key Menus and Error Messages 8719ET 20ET 22ET Analog Bus on OFF 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers A14Fractional N Digital 21 FN VCO Tun A14 FN VCO tuning voltage This node displays the A14 FN VCO tuning voltage This voltage comes from the A13 fractional N analog assembly and is the return path for the fractional N phase locked loop If the A13 and A14 assemblies are functioning properly and the VCO is phase locked the trace should look like the trace shown in Figure 10 8 when in Log Freq sweep mode Any other waveform indicates that the FN VCO is not phase locked The vertical lines in the trace indicate the band crossings The counter can also be enabled to count the VCO frequency Use CW mode Figure 10 8 Node 21 FN VCO Tun FN VCO Tuning Voltage CHI AUX RE 2 U REF 6 U START 050 666 GHz STOP 40 050 000 000 GHz 22 A14 Gnd Ground reference 23 Count Gate Analog bus counter gate This node checks the analog bus counter gate signal You should see a flat line at 45V The counter gate activity occurs during bandswitches and therefore is not visible on the analog
305. gh band power press DAC NUM HIGH BAND 1 The power should be at least 27 dBm 5 You may have to change the DAC number slightly to achieve a good power reading If power is correct proceed with Check Reference Board A 12 on page 7 13 7 12 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Source Troubleshooting 8719ES 20ES 22ES Broadband Phase Lock Problems RF Network Analyzers 6 If the power level is not correct connect a power meter to the source switch A25J 3 and check the power of the YIG oscillator High band power should be greater than 3 dBm for DAC numbers from 2400 to 4095 Mid band power should be greater than 5 dBm for DAC numbers from 3300 to 4095 Low band power should be greater than 2 dBm for DAC numbers from 3700 to 4095 Low power in high or mid band indicates a problem with the associated Y IG or switches Trace back along the signal path to find where the power is lost Low power in thelow band only is a problem with thelow band assemblies A53 or A57 the A5 source switch or A6 source switches or the RF cables Activatethe signal path under test by selecting the proper DAC NUM XXX BAND If no power is present check both Y IG bias voltages on 3 15V and pin 2 22V of the J 1 connector Pin is located on the left and pin 2 is located in the middle of the J 1 connector If the voltages are correct replace the appropriate YIG Check Reference Board A12 1 To check
306. grounded side of the mains supply 15 6 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Safety and Regulatory Information 8719ES 20ES 22ES Safety Considerations RF Network Analyzers Servicing WARNING No operator serviceable parts inside Refer servicing to qualified personnel To prevent electrical shock do not remove covers WARNING These servicing instructions are for use by qualified personnel only To avoid electrical shock do not perform any servicing unless you are qualified to do so WARNING The opening of covers or removal of parts is likely to expose dangerous voltages Disconnect the instrument from all voltage sources while it is being opened WARNING Adjustments described in this document may be performed with power supplied to the product while protective covers are removed Energy available at many points may if contacted result in personal injury WARNING Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended Discard used batteries according to manufacturer s instructions WARNING The power cord is connected to internal capacitors that may remain live for 5 seconds after disconnecting the plug from its power supply WARNING For continued protection against fire hazard replace line fuse only with same type and rating 115 V operation T 5A 125V UL CSA 230V operation T 4 H 250V IEC The use of other fuses or materials is prohibited Service Guide 15 7
307. gular waveform If so slowly tune through the entire adjustment range to obtain flat trace then carefully tune for 0 0 V Once the adjustment is done it should be rechecked with the reference board reinstalled in the instrument and at operating temperature In Case of Difficulty If VCO TUNE cannot be adjusted as specified and the instrument passes the Analog Bus Correction Constants Test 44 adjustment the Reference A12 assembly must be replaced or contact the nearest Agilent Technologies sales or service office 3 40 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Adjustments and Correction Constants 8719ES 20ES 22ES Frequency Accuracy Adjustment RF Network Analyzers Frequency Accuracy Adjustment This adjustment sets the voltage controlled crystal oscillator VCXO frequency to maintain the instrument s frequency accuracy Required Equipment and Tools Equipment Description 8719ET ES 8722ET ES 8720ET ES Frequency Counter 53150A or 5350B 53151A or 5351B RF cable 85131F 85133F Non metallic Adjustment Tool part number 8830 0024 Antistatic Wrist Strap part number 9300 1367 Antistatic Wrist Strap Cord part number 9300 0980 Static control Table Mat and Earth part number 9300 0797 Ground Wire Network Analyzer warmup time 30 minutes 1 Remove the upper corner standoffs and analyzer top cover 2 Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 3 8 IMPORTANT Make sure that the frequency cou
308. gure 2 7 NIST Traceability Path for Calibration and Verification Standard THEORY STANDARDS TECHNOLOGY 1 MECHANICAL STANDARD a RESISTOR PACES DC RESISTANCE gt AGILENT ECHNOLOGIES MICROWAVE NATIONAL INSTITUTE OF STANDARDS LAB i SELECTED VERIFICATION DEVICES i SELECTED PRODUCT ON PROCESS CONTROL CALIBRATION SERVICE CENTER 4 VERIFICATION KIT DEVICES TEST SYSTEM 1 VERIFICATION KITS CALIBRATION KITS sb66d What the System Verification Verifies The system verification procedure verifies the minimum network analyzer system A minimum analyzer system includes the following Network Analyzer Calibration Kit Test Port Cables NOTE Additional equipment or accessories used with the above system are not verified by system verification Service Guide System Verification and Performance Tests 8719ET 20ET 22ET System Verification 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Required Equipment and Accessories The following equipment and accessories are required to verify the network analyzer system For information on compatible printers refer to the user s guide HP Printer Centronics GPIB Interface Cable Verification Kit Calibration Kit RF Cable Set Analyzer warmup ti me 30 minutes Table 2 1 8719E T E 5 and 8720ET E S Supported System Configurations
309. h band of the 8722ET ES uses the output of YI G2 In the A58 M A D S microcircuit the YIG oscillator signal is modulated by the ALC OUT signal explained in ALC Automatic Leveling Control to provide power control and leveling ALC Automatic Leveling Control A portion of the source output is detected in the M A D S and sent back to the source interface board ALC circuit This circuit generates a control signal which is sent to the modulator in the M A D S to control the power The tune voltage from the main coil driveis used to change the source amplitude as a function of frequency thus compensating the source for losses in the transfer switch bias tees and couplers 12 18 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Theory of Operation 8719ES 20ES 22ES Signal Separation ES Models Only RF Network Analyzers Signal Separation ES Models Only Figure 12 5 Signal Separation Simplified Block Diagram PRE A62 DIRECTIONAL COUPLER A61 BIAS A74 TRANSFER TEE A58 M A D S A69 STEP SWITCH ATTEN 50 al o dp 4 50 0 55 dB 63 L I DIRECTIONAL I COUPLER A23 LED A60 BIAS FRONT PANEL TEE x PORT 2 i BIAS INPUT i sb589e A58 M A D S Modulator Amplifier Detector Splitter The M A D S microcircuit accomplishes four separate functions The modulator controls the output power proportionally to the signal produced by the ALC circuit on the source interface
310. hart 5 3 receiver signal paths 8 3 Index 7 Index service equipment to use 1 3 source 7 6 source flowchart 7 3 using controllers to system troubleshoot 4 12 U uncorrected performance 11 8 v VCO tuning range 7 16 VCO A14 substituting tuning voltages VCO range check frequencies 7 14 VCO tune adjustment 3 39 VCO 2 Waveforms at 14 1 7 16 verification ANSI NCSL 2540 1 1994 description 2 3 device measurements 2 25 non ANSI NCSL Z540 1 1994 description 2 3 post repair procedures 14 35 results interpreting 2 31 system 2 15 tests performing 2 26 verification kit contents 2 16 device and test numbers 2 25 recommended models 1 3 verifying shorts and opens by substitution 9 7 w walking one pattern how to perform 6 10 WRONG DISK FORMAT INITIALIZE DISK 10 40 Y YIG oscillator bias voltages 7 13 depiction of 0 25 V GHz Waveform at Abus Node 9 7 7 7 14 signal flow 12 16 tuning description 12 15 viewing the 0 25V GHz signal 7 6 Index 8
311. he A7 board with the correct polarity 2 Solder the battery into place 3 Replacethe A7 CPU board refer to Removing the A7 CPU Board Assembly on page 14 20 14 22 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Assembly Replacement and Post R epair Procedures 8719ES 20ES 22ES Removing the A7BT1 Battery RF Network Analyzers 7 7 4 sb595e Service Guide 14 23 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures 8719ET 20ET 22ET Removing the A15 Preregulator Assembly 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Removing the A15 Preregulator Assembly Tools Required T 10 TORX screwdriver T 15 TORX screwdriver ESD electrostatic discharge grounding wrist strap Removal 1 Remove the rear panel refer to Removing the Rear Panel Assembly on page 14 14 2 Disconnect the wire bundles item 1 item 2 from the analyzer 3 Remove the preregulator A15 from the frame Replacement 1 Reverse the order of the removal procedure NOTE Whenreinstalling the preregulator A15 make surethe 3 grommets on the wiring bundles are seated in the slots on the back side of the preregulator and also in the slot in the cage wall After reinstalling the preregulator A15 be sure to set the line voltage selector to the appropriate setting 115 V or 230 V 14 24 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Assembly Replacement and Post R ep
312. he API2 A13R43 for a null minimum amplitude on the spectrum analyzer On the spectrum analyzer set the center frequency for 910 0036 M Hz On the network analyzer press CW FREQ 910 0006 Mx O Ui N 3 46 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Adjustments and Correction Constants 8719ES 20ES 22ES API Spur Avoidance and 100 kHz FM Sideband Adjustment RF Network Analyzers 10 Adjust the API 3 A13R45 for a null minimum amplitude on the spectrum analyzer 11 the spectrum analyzer set the center frequency for 910 00306 M Hz 12 0n the network analyzer press CW FREQ MA 13 Adjust the API 4 R47 for null minimum amplitude on the spectrum analyzer In Case of Difficulty e If this adjustment cannot be performed satisfactorily repeat the entire procedure e Ifthe analyzer repeatedly fails this adjustment replace the A13 board assembly or contact the nearest Agilent Technologies sales or service office Service Guide 3 47 Adjustments and Correction Constants 8719ET 20ET 22ET Raw Offset Correction Constants 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Raw Offset Correction Constants This procedure sets the raw offsets for the and R channels in preparation for performing the Sampler Calibration Correction Constants Test 51 page 3 58 Required Equipment and Tools Equipment Description 8719ET ES 8722ET ES 8720ET ES Power Meter 436A 437B 438
313. he internal array block Refer to the analyzer s programmers guide for instructions on using analyzer input commands CALIBRATION Error Number 74 ABORTI ED E E You have changed the active channel during a calibration sothe calibration in progress was terminated Make surethe appropriate channel is active and restart the calibration CALIBRATION Error Number 63 R EQUIRE D A calibration set could not be found that matched the current stimulus state or measurement parameter You will haveto perform a new calibration CANNOT READ Error Number 203 WRITE 1 FILE SYST EM The disk is being accessed by the analyzer and is found to contain an 1 hierarchical file system or files nested within subdirectories The analyzer does not support 1 Replace the disk medium with a LIF or DOS formatted disk that does not contain files nested within subdirectories CAUTION Error Number 179 POW ER OUT MAY BE L UNL EVE ED Thereis either a hardware failure in the source or you have attempted to set the power level too high The analyzer allows the output power to be set higher or lower than the specified available power range However these output powers may be un leveled or unavailable Check to see if the power level you set is within specifications If it is refer to Chapter 7 Source Troubleshooting CORRI ECTION C Erro
314. he printout press the following DUMP GRAPHICS ON RETURN TESTS 4 Press EXECUTE TEST Service Guide 2 25 System Verification and Performance Tests 8719ET 20ET 22ET System Verification 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Performing the Verification Tests 1 When prompted insert the 20 dB attenuator Ver Dev 1 as shown in Figure 2 11 Figure 2 11 Verification Device Connections NETWORK ANALYZER sb518e 2 To start the tests press CONTINUE 3 Iftherecord function is off printout is not required the program will pause after each S parameter measurement and you will need to press CONTINUE after each measurement NOTE For ES models there are eight measurements magnitude and phase for each of the four S parameters for each verification device For ET models there are four measurements magnitude and phase for each forward S parameter for each verification device 2 26 Service Guide 8719 20 22 System Verification and Performance Tests 8719ES 20ES 22ES System Verification RF Network Analyzers NOTE Although the performance for all four S parameters on ES models are measured only the uncertainties associated with the items indicated in Table 2 4 will be used for the system verification The other characteristics are less important for verifying system performance and they will not appear on the printout If a measurement fails note which device and S parameter failed and continue on with the rema
315. heck this reinstall the assemblies in a different order to change the loading If the same assembly appears to be faulty replace that assembly If a different assembly appears faulty A8 is most likely faulty unless both of the other assemblies are faulty 5 14 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Power Supply Troubleshooting 8719ES 20ES 22ES If the Green LEDs of the Post Regulator A8 Are Not All ON RF Network Analyzers Briefly Disable the Shutdown Circuitry In this step you shutdown and disable the protective circuitry for a short time forcing on the supplies including shorted supplies with a 100 duty cycle CAUTION Damage to components or to circuit traces may occur if A8TP4 SDIS is shorted to chassis ground for more than a few seconds while supplies are shorted 1 Connect A8TP4 5015 to chassis ground with a jumper wire 2 Switch on the analyzer and note the test points of any LEDs that are off Immediatdy removethe jumper wire 3 Refer to the block diagram at the end of this chapter and the following Note the mnemonics of any additional signals that may connect to any A8 test point that showed a fault in the previous step Crossreference all assemblies that use the power supplies whose A8 LEDs went out when A8TP4 SDIS was connected to chassis ground Makea list of these assemblies Deletethe following assemblies from your list as they have already been verified earlier in this section Dig
316. her attenuator settings Ifthe message FAIL appears on the analyzer display the analyzer has failed the PORT 2 operation check Refer to the flow charts on page 2 4 and page 2 5 fthe message DONE appears on the analyzer display the analyzer has passed the PORT 2 operation check 4 8 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Start Troubleshooting Here 8719ES 20ES 22ES Step 2 Operator s Check RF Network Analyzers Transmission Port Check ET Models 5 Connect an RF cable from the REFLECTION port to the TRANSMISSION port 6 Press the following PRESET FACTORY SERVICE MENU TESTS EXECUTE TEST CONTINUE f the message PRESS CONTINUE appears on the display during the test that particular attenuator setting check has failed Press CONTINUE to check the other attenuator settings fthemessage FAIL appears on the analyzer display the analyzer has failed the TRANSMISSION port operation check Refer to the flow charts on page 2 4 and page 2 5 f the message DONE appears on the analyzer display the analyzer has passed the TRANSMISSION port operation check In Case of Difficulty 1 Make surethat the connection is tight Repeat the test 2 Visually inspect the connector interfaces and dean if necessary see Principles of Microwave Connector Care on page 1 6 3 Verify that the short meets published specifications 4 Substitute another short and repeat the test 5 F
317. hing else refer to Chapter 7 Source Troubleshooting Figure 10 5 Node 9 0 25V GHz Source Tuning Voltage CHI AUX RE 1 UZ REF 3 U ILOG BUS INPUT g 25V GH4 START 050 000 GHz STOP 40 050 666 GAA GHz 10 A11 Gnd Ground reference 10 24 Service Guide 8719 20 22 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Service Key Menus and Error Messages Analog Bus on OFF 11 IF IF used for phase lock Counter ON analog bus Reading 10 MHz This node displays the IF frequency see Figure 10 6 as it enters the 11 phase lock assembly via the A7 ALC assembly This signal comes from the R sampler output and is used to phase lock the source Figure 10 6 Location of Internal Counter Reading on Display 2 U REF 1 234 U BUG INPUT IF cnt 18 8080 MHz START 050 000 666 GHz STOP 40 050 888 880 GHz Service Guide 10 25 Service Key Menus and Error Messages 8719ET 20ET 22ET Analog Bus on OFF 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers 12 IF Det IF on A11 phase lock after 40 MHz filter This node detects the IF as a voltage at the output of the 40 MHz filter on the A11 phase lock assembly The trace should be a flat line at about 1 7 V as shown in Figure 10 7 Figure 10 7 Node 12 Typical IF Detector Voltage Trace CHI AUX RE 500 uU REF 1 683 U
318. ice Guide 13 89 Replaceable Parts 8719ET 20ET 22ET Replaceable Part Listings 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers 13 90 Service Guide 14 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures 8719ET 20ET 22ET Information on This Chapter 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Information on This Chapter This chapter contains procedures for removing and replacing the major assemblies of the Agilent 8719ET ES Agilent 8720ET ES and Agilent 8722 S network analyzers table showing the corresponding post repair procedures for each replaced assembly is located in Post Repair Procedures on page 14 35 14 2 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures 8719ES 20ES 22ES Assembly Replacement Sequence RF Network Analyzers Assembly Replacement Sequence The following steps show the sequence to replace an assembly in the network analyzer Step 1 Identify the faulty group Begin with Chapter 4 Start Troubleshooting Here Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 WARNING WARNING WARNING CAUTION Follow up with the appropriate troubleshooting chapter that identifies the faulty assembly Order a replacement assembly Refer to Chapter 13 Replaceable Parts Replace the faulty assembly and determine what adjustments are necessary Refer to this chapter Perform the necessary adjustments Refer to Chapter 3 Ad
319. ide W26 ms A64 W54 A65 sb557e 13 17 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Part Listings 8719ET 20ET 22ET 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Bottom Assemblies and Cables for 8719E S and 8720E S Options 0894012 08940124007 Ref Desig Options HP Agilent Qty Description Part Number A7 08720 60253 1 CPU Repair Kit A7 08720 69253 1 CPU Repair Kit Rebuilt E xchange 17 08720 60264 1 Motherboard A23 A24 5086 7589 2 R channel Switches A23 A24 5086 6589 2 R channel Switches Rebuilt E xchange 51 08720 60274 1 Assy Test Set Interface A52 5086 7456 1 Assy Pulse Generator A52 5086 6456 1 Assy Pulse Generator Rebuilt E xchange A60 A61 5086 7458 2 Bias Tee A60 A61 5086 6458 2 Bias Tee Rebuilt E xchange A64 A65 A66 5086 7614 3 Assy Sampler A64 A65 A66 5086 6614 3 Assy Sampler Rebuilt E xchange A69 33321 60050 1 Attenuator 0 55 dB 74 089 012 5086 7642 1 Transfer Switch 74 0894012 5086 6642 1 Transfer Switch Rebuilt E xchange 74 08940124007 08720 60006 1 Transfer Switch 98 08720 60121 1 Frequency Converter A98 08720 69121 1 Frequency Converter Rebuilt E xchange W14 08720 20154 1 A63toFront Panel B Out W15 08720 20058 1 Front Panel B In to A66 W16 08720 20104 1 Front Panel A In to A65 W17 08720 20164 1
320. ident pricing Contact the nearest Agilent Technologies sales or service office for details Refer to Chapter 15 Safety and Regulatory I nformation 1 10 Service Guide 2 System Verification and Performance Tests System Verification and Performance Tests 8719ET 20ET 22ET Sections in This Chapter 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Sections in This Chapter This chapter consists of five sections How to Test the Performance of Your Analyzer e ANSI NCSL Z540 1 1994 Verification on page 2 3 Non ANSI NCSL Z540 1 1994 Verification on page 2 3 Instrument Verification Cycle on page 2 4 e ANSI NCSL Z540 1 1994 Test Path Verification Flowchart on page 2 4 e Non ANSI NCSL Z540 1 1994 Test Path Verification Flowchart on page 2 5 Preliminary Tests e Check the Temperature and Humidity on page 2 6 e Clean and Gauge All Connectors on page 2 7 Perform the Internal Test on page 2 7 Procedure to Perform Operator s Check on page 2 8 Check theTest Port Cables on page 2 9 System Verification Equipment Initialization on page 2 20 e Measurement Calibration on page 2 22 e Verification Device Measurements on page 2 25 Interpreting the Verification Results on page 2 31 Performance Tests Frequency Accuracy Performance Test on page 2 34 Level Accuracy Performance Test on page 2 36 e Source Linearity Performance Test on page 2 38 Dynamic Range Performance Test on page 2 42 Performa
321. if all the instrument states using the calibration kit have been deleted You can store the saved instrument state and calibration set to a disk before dearing them After deleting the instrument states press to run the memory packer NOT ALLOWED DURING POWER METER CAL Error Number When the analyzer is performing a power meter calibration the GPIB bus is 198 unavailable for other functions such as printing or plotting 10 36 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Service Key Menus and Error Messages 8719ES 20ES 22ES Service Related Error Messages in Alphabetical Order RF Network Analyzers NOT ENOUGH SPACE ON DISK FOR STORE Error Number The store operation will overflow the available disk space Insert a new disk or 44 purge files to create free disk space OVERLOAD ON INPUT A POWER REDUCED Error Number You have exceeded approximately 14 dBm at one of the test ports The RF 58 output power is automatically reduced to 85 dBm The annotation PU appears in theleft margin of the display toindicatethat the power trip function has been activated When this occurs reset the power to a lower level then toggle the SOURCE PWR on OFF softkey to switch on the power again OVERLOAD ON INPUT B POWER REDUCED Error Number You have exceeded approximately 14 dBm at one of the test ports The RF 59 output power is automatically reduced to 85 dBm The annotation PU a
322. in If the performance verification still fails Continue to measure the rest of the verification devices and printout the results of all four measurement parameters Print the error terms and examine them for anomalies near the failure frequencies Refer to Chapter 11 Error Terms Makeanother measurement calibration and follow the flow chart in Figure 2 14 Figure 2 14 Verification Fails Flowchart VERIFICATION FAILS J VERIFICATION PRINT OUT RESULTS LE 2 REMEASERED VERIFICATION DEVICES FAIL I i FAILS AT THE SAME YES FREQUENCY WITH MORE THAN ONE DEVICE R Y SUBSTITUTE CAL KIT A SUBST I TUTE VERIFICATION VERIFICATION KIT KIT SUBSTITUTED CABLES n SUBSTITUTE SUBSTITUTEDZ CABLES YES Y GO TO THE TROUBLESHOOT NG CHAPTER ADAPTERS NO sugst SUBSTITUTED ADAPTERS GO TO THE TROUBLESHOOT I NG CHAPTER sb69d 2 30 Service Guide 8719 20 22 System Verification and Performance Tests 8719ES 20ES 22ES System Verification RF Network Analyzers Interpreting the Verification Results Figure 2 15 and Figure 2 16 show examples of typical verification results with dump graphics activated DUMP GRAPHICS ON These printouts include a comparison of the data from your measurement results with the traceable data and corresponding uncertainty specificat
323. in CW mode It can be used in conjunction with SERVICE MODES for troubleshooting phase lock and source problems To read the counter over GPIB use the command OUTPCNTR 10 20 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Service Key Menus and Error Messages 8719ES 20ES 22ES Analog Bus on OFF RF Network Analyzers Notes Thedisplay and marker units U correspond to volts About 0 750 MHz is a typical counter reading with no ac signal present Anything occurring during bandswitches is not visible Fast moving waveforms may be sensitive to sweep time e The analog bus input impedance is about 50K ohms Waveforms up to approximately 200 Hz can be reproduced Analog In Menu Select this menu to monitor voltage and frequency nodes using the analog bus and internal counter To switch on the analog bus and access the Analog In menu press SERVICE MENU ANALOG BUS ON off ANALOG IN Aux Input The RESOLUTION LOW key toggles between low and high resolution Table 10 2 Descriptions of J umper Positions Resolution Maximum Signal Minimum Signal LOW 430 5 V 0 5V HIGH 10 V 10V AUX OUT on OFF allows you to monitor the analog bus nodes except nodes 1 2 3 4 9 10 12 with external equipment oscilloscope voltmeter etc To do this connect the equipment to the AUX INPUT BNC connector on the rear panel and press AUX OUT on OFF until ON selected CAUTION To prevent damage to the analyzer first con
324. inally refer to the detailed tests located in this section or fault isolation procedures located in the troubleshooting sections Service Guide 4 9 Start Troubleshooting Here 8719ET 20ET 22ET Step 3 GPIB Systems Check 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Step 3 GPIB Systems Check Check the analyzer s GPIB functions with a known working passive peripheral Such as a plotter printer or disk drive 1 Connect the peripheral to the analyzer using a known good GPIB cable 2 Press SYSTEM CONTROLLER to enable the analyzer to control the peripheral 3 Then press SET ADDRESSES and the appropriate softkeys to verify that the device addresses will be recognized by the analyzer The factory default addresses are Table 4 2 Factory Set GPIB Addresses Device GPIB Address All Analyzers 16 Plotter port 5 Printer port 1 Disk external 0 Controller 21 Power meter 13 NOTE You may use other addresses with two provisions e Each device must have its own address The address set on each device must match the one recognized by the analyzer and displayed Peripheral addresses are often set with a rear panel switch Refer tothe manual of the peripheral to read or change its address 4 10 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Start Troubleshooting Here 8719ES 20ES 22ES Step 3 GPIB Systems Check RF Network Analyzers If Using a Plotter or Printer 1 Ensure that the plotter or printer
325. ining tests Table 2 4 Supported System Configurations for all ES Models Verification Device S11 S22 S11 S22 S21 S12 S21 S12 Magnitude Phase Magnitude Phase 20 dB attenuator x x x 40 dB attenuator x x x Airline x x x x Stepped impedance x x x airline On the E T models two S parameters are measured S11 and S21 See Table 2 5 for the uncertainties that are used for system verification Table 2 5 Supported System Configurations for all ET Models Verification Device S11 S11 Phase S21 S21 Phase Magnitude Magnitude 20 dB attenuator x x x 40 dB attenuator x x x Airline x x x x Stepped impedance x x x airline NOTE Measured data is displayed as DATA Factory data is displayed as MEMORY 4 When all measurements are complete the TESTS softkey menu will appear Disconnect the verification device 5 Enter Test 28 using step keys entry keys or front panel knob R epeat steps 1 through 4 in this section with the 40 dB attenuator Ver Dev 2 6 Enter Test 29 using step keys entry keys or front panel knob Repeat steps 1 through 4 in this section with the 500 airline Ver Dev 3 For an example of how to perform proper airline connections refer to Figure 2 12 and Figure 2 13 Service Guide 2 27 System Verification and Performance Tests 8719ET 20ET 22ET System Verification 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers CAUTION Be very careful not to drop the
326. ion block diagram simplified 12 20 option 400 four sampler test set description 1 8 option numbers correction constants adjustment 3 13 output power source check 4 18 OVERLOAD ON INPUT A POWER REDUCED 10 37 OVERLOAD ON INPUT B POWER REDUCED 10 37 pads 10 dB recommended part numbers 1 4 PARALLEL PORT NOT AVAILABLE FOR COPY 10 37 PARALLEL PORT NOT AVAILABLE FOR GPIO 10 37 part numbers 8719 20E S bottom 13 12 option 400 13 22 options 012 0124007 13 14 options 085 085 089 13 20 options 0894012 089 012 007 13 18 options 089 0894007 13 16 options 4004012 13 24 options 40040124089 13 28 options 400 089 13 26 8719 20ET bottom option 004 13 58 standard 13 56 8722ES bottom option 007 13 32 option 012 13 34 option 089 13 38 option 400 13 48 options 0074012 13 36 options 085 085 089 13 46 options 0894007 13 40 options 08940074012 13 44 options 0894012 13 42 options 4004012 13 50 options 40040124089 13 54 options 400 089 13 52 standard 13 30 8722 bottom option 004 13 62 standard 13 60 cables top 13 66 front cables 13 70 front panel assembly 13 72 hardware bottom 13 80 hardware preregulator 13 83 hardware top 13 78 rear cables 13 69 rear panel 13 74 RF assemblies in front 13 64 service tools 13 87 top assemblies 13 8 PEEK POKE Menu 10 29 performance test dynamic range 2 42 frequency accuracy 2 34 level accuracy 2 36 record 2 46 source linearity 2 38 performance tests 2 1 2 33 post repair 14
327. ion 910 006 020 Option 010 006 020 Analyzer warmup time 30 minutes 1 Makesurethe A7 Switch is in the alter position ALT 2 Press the following PRESET FACTORY SERVICE MENU TESTS EXECUTE TEST YES CONTINUE Follow the instructions on the display 3 Observethe analyzer for the results of the adjustment routine If the message IF Step Cor DONI E is displayed you have completed this procedure 4 f more correction constant routines are going to be performed return the A7 Switch tothe NRM position and perform the EEPROM Backup Disk Procedure on page 3 33 In Case of Difficulty f the message CAUTION TROUBLE CHECK SETUP AND START OVER is displayed check that the RF cable is connected from PORT 1 to PORT 2 REFLECTION port and TRANSMISSION port on the ET models Then repeat this adjustment routine e Ifthe analyzer continues to fail the adjustment routine refer to Chapter 6 Digital Control Troubleshooting or contact the nearest Agilent Technologies sales or service office Service Guide Adjustments and Correction Constants 8719ET 20ET 22ET ADC Offset Correction Constants Test 48 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers ADC Offset Correction Constants Test 48 These correction constants improve the dynamic accuracy by shifting small signals to the most linear part of the ADC quantizing curve Analyzer warmup time 30 minutes 1 Make sureth
328. ion of firmware that was loaded Service Guide 3 37 Adjustments and Correction Constants 8719ET 20ET 22ET Loading Firmware 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers In Case of Difficulty If the firmware did not load successfully LED patterns on the front panel can help you isolate the problem Ifthefollowing LED pattern is present an acceptable firmware filename was not found on the disk The required format for a firmware file name is 8720ET 07 60 or 8720 5 07 60 Check that the firmware disk matches your network analyzer model LED Pattern Chan 1 Chan 2 Chan 3 Chan 4 R L T 5 If any of the following LED patterns are present the firmware disk may be defective LED Pattern 1 Chan2 Chan 3 Chan 4 R L T 5 If any other LED pattern is present the CPU board is defective NOTE If firmware did not load a red LED on the CPU board will be flashing If thefollowing LED pattern is present on the CPU board suspect the disk drive associated cabling front of instrument 2 3 38 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Adjustments and Correction Constants 8719ES 20ES 22ES Reference Assembly VCO Tune Adjustment RF Network Analyzers Reference Assembly VCO Tune Adjustm
329. ion parameter 521 512 or Ep or if a reflection parameter 511 522 Service Guide 11 5 Error Terms Error Term Inspection 8719ET 20ET 22ET 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Table 11 2 Calibration Coefficient Terms and Tests for ET Models Calibration Calibration Type Test Number Coefficient Response Response and 1 port Enhanced Isolation Response 1 or E Ex Ep Ep 31 2 En Es Esr 32 3 En Enr 33 4 34 5 35 6 36 7 Not Used 37 8 Not Used 38 9 Not Used 39 10 Not Used 40 11 Not Used 41 12 Not Used 42 NOTES Meaning of first subscript D directivity S source match R reflection tracking X crosstalk LSoad match T transmission tracking Meaning of second subscript F forward Response Isolation cal yields or E if a transmission parameter 521 512 or Ep or if a reflection parameter 511 522 NOTE If the correction is not active press CORRECTION 1 Press System SERVICE MENU TESTS EXECUTE TEST The analyzer copies the first calibration measurement trace for the selected error term into memory and then displays it Table 11 1 ES models and Table 11 2 ET models list the test numbers 2 Press Scale Ref and adjust the scale and reference to study the error term trace 3 Press and use the front panel knob to determine the error term magnitude 11 6 S
330. ions U se these printouts to determine whether your measured data falls within the total uncertainty limits at all frequencies NOTE If you only want a tabular list as in Figure 2 16 activate RECORD ON Figure2 15 Printout of Graphical Verification Results 30 Apr 1996 16 24 38 CH1 S amp 8MN MAG 20 mU REF 0 U SYS VER 1 S11 M SER 01610 PRm START 050 000 000 GHz STOP 13 510 000 000 GHz sb6156d The callouts in Figure 2 15 are defined as Upper limit points as defined by the total system uncertainty specifications Lower limit points as defined by the total system uncertainty specifications Data measured at the factory Results of measurement Correction is turned on Measurement parameter 511 and memory displayed in linear magnitude Serial number of device 01610 Device being measured SYS VER 1 ON AU N Service Guide 2 31 System Verification and Performance Tests System Verification RF Figure 2 16 Printout of Tabular Verification Results STIMULUS CH1S12 Margin Upper Lim Lower Lim GHz 050 000 000 20 04 dB 063 dB 19 976 dB 20 197 dB 250 000 000 20 105 dB 103 dB 19 983 dB 20 208 dB 500 000 000 20 113 dB 101 dB 19 987 dB 20 750 000 000 20 12 dB dB 19 983 d 20 224 dB 1 000 000 000 20 126 dB 1044 dB 19 984 dB 20 23 1 250 000 000 20 136 d 098 19 989 dB 20 234 dB 1 500
331. ions 085 085 089 13 20 options 0894012 08940124007 13 18 options 089 0894007 13 16 options 4004012 13 24 options 40040124089 13 28 options 4004089 13 26 standard and option 007 13 12 bottom part numbers for 8719 20ET option 004 13 58 standard 13 56 bottom part numbers for 8722 5 option 007 13 32 option 012 13 34 option 089 13 38 option 400 13 48 options 007 012 13 36 options 085 085 089 13 46 options 0894007 13 40 options 08940074012 13 44 options 0894012 13 42 options 4004012 13 50 options 40040124089 13 54 options 4004 089 13 52 standard 13 30 bottom part numbers for 8722bET option 004 13 62 standard 13 60 cables top 13 66 front panel inside 13 72 front part numbers 13 64 part numbers for top 13 8 rear cables 13 69 rear panel 13 74 assembly removal CPU board 14 20 disk drive 14 28 display lamp 14 12 fan 14 34 front panel 14 8 front panel interface 14 10 GSP A19 14 26 high stability frequency reference option 1D5 14 32 keypad 14 10 LED board 14 30 preregulator board A15 14 rear panel 14 14 rear panel interface 14 16 source board 14 18 test port coupler 14 30 replacement 14 2 replacement sequence 7 4 attenuator A69 check 7 27 recommended part numbers 1 4 B B channel output check 4 24 Index 1 Index background lamp intensity 6 7 7 7 7 14 backup EEPROM disk 3 33 band problems high 7 24 mid 7 22 band related problems 7 22 BATTERY FAILED STATE MEMORY CLEARED 10 33 BATTERY LOW
332. ions 3 4 ADC offset correction constants test 48 3 10 analog bus correction constant test 44 3 8 EEPROM backup disk 3 33 fractional N spur avoidance and FM sideband adjustment 3 44 Frequency Accuracy Adjustment 3 41 IF amplifier correction constants test 47 3 9 initialize EEPROMs test 53 3 32 option numbers correction constant test 50 3 13 serial number correction constant test 49 3 11 Source Pretune Correction Constants Test 43 3 6 pulse generator A52 check oscilloscope 7 19 check spectrum analyzer 7 20 harmonic comb description 12 14 PWR MTR NOT ON CONNECTED OR WRONG ADDR 10 39 R R channel output check 4 22 R Sampler Assembly A64 swapping IF cables to troubleshoot phaselock problems 7 9 R R2 A and B sampler assembly traces 8 6 R2 Sampler Assembly Option 400 swapping IF cables to troubleshoot phaselock problems 7 9 RAM main description of 12 10 R channel sampler ES models 7 6 ET models 7 5 rear panel assembly removal 14 14 CPU LED pattern 6 5 description of 12 11 interface board removal 14 16 LED check 4 14 receiver 12 5 2nd LO check 8 3 4 MHz check 8 3 assemblies and associated paths check 4 21 directional coupler check 8 7 troubleshooting 8 2 reference assembly VCO tune adjustment 3 39 reference board A12 checking 7 13 reference crystal reference frequencies description 12 16 REFLECTION port check 4 8 reflection tracking ERF and ERR description 11 13 unc
333. is set up correctly Power is on Pens and paper loaded e Pinch wheels are down Some plotters need to have P 1 and P2 positions set 2 Press Copy then PLOT or PRINT MONOCHROME e ftheresult is a copy of the analyzer display the printing plotting features functional in the analyzer Continue with Troubleshooting Systems with Multiple Peripherals and Troubleshooting Systems with Controllers on page 4 12 go to Step 4 Faulty Group Isolation on page 4 13 e ftheresult is not a copy of the analyzer display refer to Chapter 6 Digital Control Troubleshooting If Using an External Disk Drive 1 Select the external disk drive Press Save Recall SELECT DISK EXTERNAL DISK 2 Verify that the address is set correctly Press SET ADDRESSES ADDRESS DISK 3 Ensure that the disk drive is set up correctly Power is on e An initialized disk in the correct drive Correct disk unit number and volume number Press to access the softkeys that display the numbers default is for both With hard disk Winchester drives make sure the configuration switch is properly set see drive manual 4 Press Save Recal SAVE STATE Then press PRESET FACTORY SAVE RECALL RECALL STATE e ftheresultant trace starts at 1 GHz the GPIB system is functional in the analyzer Continue with Troubleshooting Systems with Multiple Peripherals and Troubleshooting Systems with Controllers on pa
334. isplays Sys Ver Init DONE when the initialization procedure is complete CAUTION At this point do not preset the analyzer or recall another instrument state You must use the instrument state from this procedure for the next procedure Service Guide 2 21 System Verification and Performance Tests 8719ET 20ET 22ET System Verification 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Measurement Calibration 1 Continue with cables connectedto PORT 1 and PORT 2 REFLECTION port and TRANSMISSION port on E T models see Figure 2 9 Figure 2 9 Connections for Measurement Calibration Standards NETWORK ANALYZER Cable 1 Cable 2 All Models ES Models Only Y Eas OOO Open Short Load Open Short Load sb516e 2 Press the following ES models Cal CALIBRATE MENU FULL 2 PORT REFLECTION ET models CALIBRATE MENU ENHANCED RESPONSE TRAN REFL ENH RESP REFLECTION Port 1 Calibration 3 Connect the open that is supplied in the calibration kit to cable 1 4 Press FORWARD OPEN 5 When the analyzer finishes measuring the standard connect the short that is supplied in the calibration kit to cable 1 6 Press FORWARD SHORT 7 When the analyzer finishes measuring the standard connect the 50Q termination that is supplied in the calibration kit to cable 1 8 Press FORWARD LOADS 2 22 Service Guide 8719 20 22 System Verification and Performance Tests 8719ES 20ES 22ES System Verification
335. it 1 of the Event Status Register B is set bit 1 service routine waiting any time a service routine prompts the user for an expected response you can send an appropriate response using one of the following techniques Read event status register B to reset the bit Enablebit 1tointerrupt ESNB D See Error Reporting of the analyzer programmer s guide Respond tothe prompt with a TESRn command see Tests M enu on page 10 5 Symbol Conventions An optional operand D A numerical operand lt gt A necessary appendage An either or choice in appendages Service Guide 10 31 Service Key Menus and Error Messages GPIB Service Mnemonic Definitions Analog Bus Codes ANAI D OUTPCNTR OUTPERRO OUTPTESS TST 10 32 8719ET 20ET 22ET 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Measures and displays the analog input The preset state input to the analog bus is the rear panel AUX IN The other 22 nodes may be selected with D only if the ABUS is enabled Outputs the counter s frequency data Reads any prompt message sent to the error queue by a service routine Outputs the integer status of the test most recently executed Status codes are those listed under TST Executes the power on self test internal test 1 and outputs an integer test status Status codes are as follows 0 pass 1 fail 2 in progress 3 not available 4 not done 5 done Service Guide 8719 2
336. ital IF A10 Phase lock A11 Reference A12 Fractional N analog A13 Fractional N digital A14 Display A18 Display Interface A22 4 Switch off the analyzer NOTE Always switch off the analyzer before removing or disconnecting assemblies To identify specific cables and assemblies that are not shown in this chapter refer to Chapter 13 Replaceable Parts When extensive disassembly is required refer to Chapter 14 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures Service Guide 5 15 Power Supply Troubleshooting If the Green LEDs of the Post Regulator A8 Are Not All ON 8719ET 20ET 22ET 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers 5 Of those assemblies that are left on the list remove or disconnect them from the analyzer one at a time Table 5 4 on page 5 16 shows the best order in which to remove them sorting them from most to least accessible Table 5 4 also lists any associated assemblies that are supplied by the assembly that is being removed After each assembly is removed or disconnected switch on the analyzer and observe the LE Ds If all the LEDs light the assembly removed or one receiving power from it is faulty IftheLEDs are still not on steadily continue with the next section Inspect the Motherboard Table 5 4 Recommended Order for Removal Disconnection for Troubleshooting the 8 Board Assembly to Remove Removal or Disconnection Other Assemblies That Method Rece
337. ive Power from the Removed Assembly 1 CPU Board A7 Disconnect W87 None 2 Sampler 4 Unplug from 17 and None Remove Sampler A5 Unplug from A17 and None Remove 4 B Sampler A6 Unplug from A17 and None Remove 5 Source Control A9 Disconnect W91 None 6 Front Panel Interface A2 Disconnect W84 Front Panel Keyboard 1 7 Test Set Interface A51 Disconnect W89 Transfer Switch S4 LED Front Panel A56 Inspect the Motherboard Inspect the motherboard A17 for solder bridges and shorted traces particular inspect the traces that carry the supplies whose LEDs faulted when A8TP4 SDIS was grounded earlier 5 16 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Power Supply Troubleshooting 8719ES 20ES 22ES Error Messages RF Network Analyzers Error Messages Three error messages are associated with the power supplies functional group They are shown here POWER SUPPLY SHUT DOWN or more supplies on the A8 post regulator assembly is shut down one of the following conditions overcurrent overvoltage or undervoltage Refer to If the Green LEDs of the Post Regulator A8 Are Not ON on page 5 13 POWER SUPPLY HOT The temperature sensors on the post regulator A8 assembly detect an overtemperature condition The regulated power supplies on A8 have been shut down Check the temperature of the operating environment it should not be greater than 55
338. justments and Correction Constants Perform the necessary performance tests Refer to Chapter 2 System Verification and Performance Tests These servicing instructions are for use by qualified personnel only To avoid electrical shock do not perform any servicing unless you are qualified to do so The opening of covers or removal of parts is likely to expose dangerous voltages Disconnect the instrument from all voltage sources while it is being opened The power cord is connected to internal capacitors that may remain live for 10 seconds after disconnecting the plug from its power supply Many of the assemblies in this instrument are very susceptible to damage from ESD electrostatic discharge Perform the following procedures only at a static safe workstation and wear a grounding strap Service Guide 14 3 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair P rocedures 8719ET 20ET 22ET Assembly Replacement Sequence 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Procedures in This Chapter The following sections describe the assembly replacement procedures for the 8719ET ES 8720ET ES and 8722ET ES assemblies Replacing the Line F use on page 14 5 Removing the Covers on page 14 6 Removing the Front Panel Assembly on page 14 8 Removing the Front Panel Interface and Keypad Assemblies on page 14 10 Removing the Display Lamp and Assembly on page 14 12 Removing the Rear Panel Assembly on page 14 14 Removing the Rear Panel Interf
339. k similar to the waveforms Figure 7 4 Table 7 3 A14 to A13 Digital Control Signal Locations Mnemonic A13 Location A14 Location CST none TP3 L FNHOLD P2 2 P2 2 FNBIAS P2 5 P2 5 API1 P2 32 2 32 2 2 3 2 3 2 34 2 34 APIA 2 4 2 4 API5 P2 35 P2 35 FNLATCH P1 28 P1 58 Figure 7 4 A14 TTL Signals at A14TP3 L os L FNHOLD FN BIAS M 1 1 5 HE 10uS gt sb631d Ifthese signals are bad replace A14 If the signals are bad replace A13 7 18 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Source Troubleshooting 8719ES 20ES 22ES Broadband Phase Lock Problems RF Network Analyzers Pulse Generator A52 Check with Oscilloscope 1 Monitor the 1st IF signal at the output of A65 A sampler assembly disconnect the SMB cable from A65 and connect an oscilloscope to the sampler assembly output Connect a frequency counter to PORT 1 Then perform these steps a Toset the fractional N VCO to 180 MHz press the following PRESET FACTORY SERVICE MENU SERVICE MODES FRACN TUNE ON Press SRC ADJUST MENU DAC NUM LOWBAND and rotate the front panel knob to change the DAC number to about 4013 Readjust the DAC number as required to measure an output frequency of about 0 91 GHz NOTE The frequency counter may have to be removed from PORT 1 to provide enough of a reflection to see signal on th
340. l Reference Frequencies This assembly provides stable reference frequencies to the rest of the instrument by dividing down the output of a 40 MHz VCXO voltage controlled crystal oscillator One of the divided down signals is the 100 kHz FN REF for phase locking the synthesizer signal in A13 Another is the 1 MHz main phase locked loop reference signal PL REF that goes to the phase comparator A11 The 2nd LO signal and the timing signal for the A10 digital IF assembly are explained in Signal Separation ES Models Only on page 12 19 The EXT REF rear panel input provides the option of using an external reference with a frequency of 1 2 5 or 10 MHz instead of the internal 40 MHz VCXO Source Block The YIG Oscillator Signals The source block includes two YIG oscillators and a 3 8 GHz fixed oscillator The outputs of these oscillators produce the source signal phase locked operation this signal tracks the stable output of the synthesizer Figure 12 4 illustrates the assemblies in the source block 12 16 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Theory of Operation 8719ES 20ES 22ES Source Group Theory RF Network Analyzers Figure 12 4 Simplified Diagram of the Source Block Diagram 8722 5 ONLY AS8 M A D S 8722ET ES 20 40GHz RR ER A53 455 YIG1 8720ET ES 2 4 20GHz MAIN YIG1 FM YIG1 8719ET ES 2 4 13 5GHz sb590e TheYIG osdillator has a main coil and an FM coil These are analog
341. l processor It tests the A2 front panel interface and processors A7 CPU data buffering and address decoding See also tests 23 and 24 on page 10 11 This runs only when selected GPIB Tests the ability of the A7 CPU main processor to write read to the rear panel control elements It tests the GPIB chip on the A7 CPU board and A7 CPU data buffering and address decoding It does not test the GPIB interface for GPIB interface checking seethe your user s guide This runs only when selected or with ALL INTERNAL Post Reg Polls the status register of the A8 post regulator and flags these conditions heat sink too hot inadequate air flow or post regulated supply shutdown Frac N Cont Tests the ability of the A7 CPU main processor to write read to the control element on the A14 fractional N digital assembly The control element must be functioning and the fractional N VCO must be oscillating although not necessarily phase locked to pass Sweep Trig Tests the sweep trigger L SWP line from the A14 fractional N tothe A10 digital IF Thereceiver with the sweep synchronizes L SWP ADC Lin Tests the linearity of the A10 digital IF ADC using the built in ramp generator The test generates a histogram of the ADC linearity where each data point represents the relative width of a particular ADC code I deally all codes havethe same width different widths correspond to non linearizes ADC Ofs This runs only when selected It
342. lays red green and blue pattern for verifying the color purity of the display and alsothe ability to independently control each color 66 Test Pat 5 Displays an all black screen This is used to check for stuck pixels Service Guide 10 13 Service Key Menus and Error Messages 8719ET 20ET 22ET Service Menus Internal Diagnostics 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers 67 Test Pat 6 Displays a 16 step gray scale for verifying that the A19 GSP 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 10 14 board can produce 16 different amplitudes of color in this case white The output comes from the RAM the GSP board it is then split The signal goes through a video DAC and then to an external monitor or through some buffer amplifiers and then totheinternal L CD display If the external display looks good but the internal display is bad then the problem may be with the display or the cable connecting it to the GSP board This pattern is also very useful when using an oscilloscope for troubleshooting T he staircase pattern it produces will quickly show missing or stuck data bits Test Pat 7 Displays the following seven colors Red Yellow Green Cyan Blue Magenta and White Test Pat 8 This pattern is intended for use with an external display The pattern displays a color rainbow pattern for showing the ability of the A19 GSP board to display 15 colors plus white The numbers written below each bar indicate the tint num
343. le Part Listings Rear Panel Assembly Option 1D5 8719ET 20ET 22ET 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Ref Models Option HP Agilent Qty Description Desig Part Number 1 ES 105 1250 1859 1 Adapter coax 2 All ES 1D5 0515 0374 1 Screw M achine M3 0x10 CW PN TX 3 All ES 1D5 3050 1546 1 Washer F lat 505l D NY 4 All ES 1D5 2190 0068 1 Washer L ock 5051 D 5 All ES 1D5 0590 1310 1 Nut Specialty 1 2 28 6 All ES 1D5 0515 0430 1 Screw M achine M3 0x6 CW PN TX 7 All ES 1D5 08753 00078 1 Bracket OSC BD A26 All ES 1D5 08753 60158 1 Bd Assy High Stability Freq Ref W88 All ES 1D5 8120 6458 1 RP Interface 16 3 to High Stability Freq Ref 26 1 13 76 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Replaceable Parts 8719ES 20ES 22ES Replaceable Part Listings RF Network Analyzers A26 sb6129d Service Guide 13 77 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Part Listings Hardware Top 8719ET 20ET 22ET 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Ref Desig Models Option HP Agilent Part Qty Description Number 1 08720 40004 3 Locator Hold Downs 2 All All 08720 00066 1 Can Hold Down 3 All All 0515 2035 1 Screw SMM 3 0 16 PCFLTX 4 All All 08753 20062 1 PC Stabilizer Cap 5 All All 08720 40011 1 PC Board Stabilizer 6 All All 0515 2086 16 Screw SMM 4 0 7 PCFLTX 7 All All 0515 0458 4 Screw SMM 3
344. listed on the power sensor use a value that is between the two nearest points Service Guide 3 49 Adjustments and Correction Constants 8719ET 20ET 22ET Raw Offset Correction Constants 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers 4 The objective is to set the maximum marker reading MMR to 4 dB higher than the power meter reading Perform the following mathematical operation a Calculate the difference A between the power meter reading PMR and the maximum marker reading MMR and then add 4 A PMR 4 can positive negative value 5 If the magnitude of is less than 0 15 dB then the offset for the R channel is correctly set For ES models go to Raw Offset for the A and B Channels ES Models on page 3 51 For ET Models go to Raw Offsets for the and B Channels Models on page 3 54 If the magnitude is greater than 0 15 dB continue to the next step 6 Press the following SERVICE MENU PEEK POKE PEEK POKE ADDRESS PEEK Notethe PEEK value displayed under the PEEK label 7 Calculate the new value by adding the PEEK valueto A multiplied by 4 new value current value A X 4 NOTE Round the new value to the nearest integer 8 Press and enter the new value press x1 9 To get the analyzer to use the new poke value press Preset 10 Press the following INPUT PORTS R CW FREQ and enter the frequency from step 1 SERVICE MENU SERVICE MODES MOR
345. log Bus Correction Constants Test 44 on page 3 8 as a reference for calibrating the analog bus low and high resolution circuitry 10 22 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Service Key Menus and Error Messages 8719ES 20ES 22ES Analog Bus on OFF RF Network Analyzers A11 Phase Lock 5 A11Gnd Ground reference 6 11 Gnd Ground reference 7 A11 Gnd Ground reference 8 Swp Err Phase error voltage This node measures the voltage at the output of the phase comparator on the 11 phase lock assembly This error voltage corresponds to the difference in frequency between the divided IF and the 1 MHz reference frequency from the 12 assembly See Figure 10 4 for a typical display Figure 10 4 Node 8 Swp Err Phase Error Voltage CHI AUX RE 509 mU REF 1 U START 050 GHz STOP 40 050 666 OGA GHz Service Guide 10 23 Service Key Menus and Error Messages 8719ET 20ET 22ET Analog Bus on OFF 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers 9 0 25V GHz Source oscillator tuning voltage This node displays the tuning voltage ramp used to tune the source oscillators You should see a voltage ramp like the one shown in Figure 10 5 If this waveform is correct you can be confident that the 11 phase lock assembly the source assemblies the A13 A14 fractional N assemblies and the A52 pulse generator are working properly and the instrument is phase locked If you see anyt
346. ly 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Removing the Rear Panel Assembly Tools Required T 10 TORX screwdriver T 15 TORX screwdriver ESD electrostatic discharge grounding wrist strap Removal 1 Disconnect the power cord and remove the top item 1 and bottom covers refer to Removing the Covers on page 14 6 2 Remove the 4 rear standoffs item 2 3 If the analyzer has Option 105 remove the BNC jumper from the high stability frequency reference item 3 4 If the analyzer has Option 085 remove the RF cable item 4 and the connectors attaching hardware item 5 Remove the hardware item 6 that attaches the RS 232 connector to the rear panel Remove the 4 screws item 7 that attach theinterface bracket to the rear panel Remove the 6 screws item 8 and item 9 that attach the preregulator to the rear panel Remove the 8 screws item 10 from the frame 4 from the top edge 4 from the bottom edge 9 Remove the screw from the pc board stabilizer and remove the stabilizer 10 Lift the reference board A 12 from its motherboard connector and disconnect the flexible RF cable item 11 11 Pull therear panel away from the frame Disconnect the ribbon cable item 12 from the motherboard connector pressing down and out the connector locks Disconnect the wiring harness item 13 from the motherboard Replacement 1 Reverse the order of the removal procedure 14 14 Se
347. mbers Correction Constants Test 50 on page 3 13 Unprotected Hardware Option Correction Constants on page 3 15 Output Power Adjustments on page 3 17 Power Linearity Adjustment on page 3 24 Blanking Adjustment Test 54 on page 3 30 Initialize EEPROMs Test 53 on page 3 32 EEPROM Backup Disk Procedure on page 3 33 Correction Constants Retrieval Procedure on page 3 35 Loading Firmware on page 3 36 Reference Assembly VCO Tune Adjustment on page 3 39 Frequency Accuracy Adjustment on page 3 41 Spur Avoidance and 100 kHz FM Sideband Adjustment on page 3 44 Raw Offset Correction Constants on page 3 48 Sampler Calibration Correction Constants Test 51 on page 3 58 Service Guide 3 3 Adjustments and Correction Constants 8719ET 20ET 22ET A7 Switch Positions 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers A7 Switch Positions The A7 switch allows you to set up your analyzer to alter correction constants 5 NOTE Before moving the A7 switch perform EEPROM Backup Disk Procedure on page 3 33 to save your correction constants Required Equipment and Tools To move the switch position use a non metallic adjust tool HP Agilent part number 8830 0024 1 Remove the power cord from the analyzer 2 Set the analyzer on its side 3 Remove thetwocorner standoffs from the bottom of the instrument with the 10 TORX screwdriver 4 Loosen the captive screw on the bottom cover s back ed
348. measurement uncertainty limits for the system verification are the sum of the factory measurement uncertainties for the verification devices and the uncertainties associated with the system being verified You can determine your system measurement uncertainty limits by referring to the analyzer reference guide IMPORTANT When a network analyzer system passes these tests it does not guarantee that the analyzer meets all of the performance specifications However it does show that the system being verified measures the same devices with the same results as a factory system which has had all its specifications verified and its total measurement uncertainty minimized Service Guide 2 15 System Verification and Performance Tests 8719ET 20ET 22ET System Verification 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers General Information Verification Kit The kit consists of the following 20dB and 40 dB attenuator 25 Q mismatch airline 502 airline A 3 5 inch disk containing the factory measured verification data and uncertainty limits for each device in the kit Measurement Uncertainty Measurement uncertainty is defined as the sum of the residual systematic repeatable and random non repeatable errors in the measurement system after calibration The systematic errors are directivity source match load match reflection and transmission frequency tracking and isolation crosstalk Random errors include errors due to noise drift conne
349. mirigid cable W74 tothe RF INPUT J 2 of the R channel sampler Connect a 2 4 mm f barrel flexible cable and the power sensor to W74 CAUTION Be careful not to damage the center pins of the semirigid cable Some flexing of the cable will have to be done to attach the power sensor Do not over bend the cable b Removethe front panel and disconnect the junction between the cables W72 and W74 Connect the power sensor to W72 Forthe8719ET and 8720 the power should be at least 18 dBm Forthe8722ET the power should be at least 27 dBm 9 If the power level is correct replace the R sampler assembly A64 If the power level is not correct replace the M A D S A58 7 10 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Source Troubleshooting 8719ES 20ES 22ES Broadband Phase Lock Problems RF Network Analyzers Check Open Loop Power The open loop power procedure is divided into one for 8719E 5 and 8720 5 models and one for 8722E T E S models 8719ET E S and 8720 S Models 1 Set up the ES and ET models as following For ES analyzers Disconnect the front panel R channel jumper Connect the power meter tothe R CHANNEL OUT port NOTE For ES Option 089 analyzers press the following INSTR MODE EXT CHAN For ET analyzers On ET models there are two ways to measure the R channel sampler assembly power a Remove the bottom cover and disconnect the semirigid cable W74 to the RF INPUT J 2 of the R ch
350. n A74 provides internal termination for the measurement port that is inactive A56 Lower Front Panel Assembly LEDs on the lower front panel indicate the status of the transfer switch A60 and A61 DC Bias Tees The dc bias tees provide a means of biasing active devices with an external dc voltage connected to the rear panel DC BIAS CONNECT ports The dc voltage is applied directly to the center conductor of the test port connectors A blocking capacitor ensures that the bias current goes only tothe device under test and not back intothe source Likewise an inductor in the bias path prevents RF from being imposed on the external dc supply A62 and A63 Directional Couplers Thetest signal goes into the through line arm of the couplers and from thereto the test ports and the device under test DUT The coupled arm of the couplers carries the signal reflected from or transmitted through the device under test to the receiver for measurement The coupling coefficient of the directional couplers is nominally 14 dB from 840 MHz to 40 05 GHz and 40 dB at 50 MHz Service Guide 12 21 Theory of Operation 8719ET 20ET 22ET Signal Separation ET Models Only 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Signal Separation ET Models Only Figure 12 7 Signal Separation Simplified Block Diagram 8719 20 22ET 8719 20ET A58 M A DIS 004 ONLY 004 ONLY A69 STEP A23 DC ATTEN BLOCK epe 4 0 55 B 5 FIXED
351. n arrays is provided in Chapter 11 Error Terms ADJ USTMENT TESTS generates and stores the correction constants For more information refer to Chapter 3 Adjustments and Correction Constants Test Options Menu To access this menu press SERVICE MENU TEST OPTIONS TEST OPTIONS accesses softkeys that affect the way tests routines run or supply necessary additional data CONTINUE TEST TESR1 resumes the test from where it was stopped REPEAT on OFF TO2 toggles the repeat function on and off When the function is ON the selected test will run 10 000 times unless you press any key to stop it The analyzer shows the current number of passes and fails RECORD on OFF 1 toggles the record function on and off When thefunction is 10 6 ON certain test results are sent to a printer via GPIB This is especially useful for correction constants The instrument must be in system controller mode or pass control mode to print Refer to the Printing Plotting and Saving M easurement Results chapter in the analyzer s user s guide Service Guide 8719 20 22 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers LIMITSINORM SPCL POWER LOSS POWLLIST LOSS SENSR LISTS Service Key Menus and Error Messages Service Menus Internal Diagnostics selects either normal NORM or Special SPCL tighter limits for the Operator s Check The SPCL limits are useful for a guard band accesses the following E dit L ist
352. n converts the standard three year return to Agilent Technologies service warranty to a five year on site service warranty This option may not be availablein all areas Option W32 This option provides yearly return to Agilent Technologies for a commercial calibration for a period of three years The calibration provided is traceable to national standards Option W52 This option provides yearly return to Agilent Technologies for a commercial calibration for a period of five years The calibration provided is traceable to national standards Option W34 This option provides yearly return to Agilent Technologies for a Standards Compliant Calibration for a period of three years This type of calibration meets the AN SI NCSL Z540 1 1994 standard Service Guide 1 9 Service Equipment and Analyzer Options 8719ET 20ET 22ET Service and Support Options 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Option W54 This option provides yearly return to Agilent Technologies for a Standards Compliant Calibration for a period of five years This type of calibration meets the ANSI NCSL Z540 1 1994 standard NOTE If the previous service and support options were not purchased along with the analyzer there are many other repair and calibration options available from Agilent Technologies support organization These options cover a range of on site services and agreements with varying response times as well as return to Agilent Technologies agreements and per inc
353. n of an external negative going TT L compatible signal that will trigger a measurement sweep Thetrigger can be set to external through softkey functions Service Guide 12 11 Theory of Operation 8719ET 20ET 22ET Digital Control Theory 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers e TEST SEQ This outputs TTL signal that can be programmed in a test sequence to be high or low or pulse 10 u seconds high or low at the end of a sweep for robotic part handler interface LIMIT TEST This outputs a TTL signal of the limit test results as follows Pass TTL high Fail TTL low VGA OUTPUT This provides a video output of the analyzer display that is capable of being viewed on VGA monitor 12 12 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Theory of Operation 8719ES 20ES 22ES Source Group Theory RF Network Analyzers Source Group Theory The source functional group produces a stable output signal by phase locking YI G oscillator to a synthesized voltage controlled oscillator VCO The full frequency range of the source is generated in subsweeps by harmonic mixing The output at the front panel ports is a swept or a CW signal M aximum leveled output powers are listed in Table 12 1 on page 12 4 Figure 12 3 illustrates the operation of the source functional group Figure 12 3 Source Functional Group Simplified Block Diagram YO DRIVE A59 SOURCE INTERFACE A12 SLOPE REFERENCE A11 PHASE LOCK SOURCE OSCILLAT
354. n page 13 83 to find the part number Replacement 1 Replace the fuse holder x FUSE IN USE INSERT SCREWDRIVER PRY OPEN qg652d Service Guide 14 5 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures Removing the Covers Removing the Covers Tools Required T 10 TORX screwdriver T 15 TORX screwdriver T 20 TORX screwdriver Removing the top cover 8719ET 20ET 22ET 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers 1 Remove both upper rear feet item 1 by loosening the attaching screws item 2 2 Loosen the top cover screw item 3 3 Slide cover off Removing the side covers 1 Remove the top cover 2 Remove thelower rear foot item 4 that corresponds to the side cover you want to remove by loosening the attaching screw item 5 3 Remove the handle assembly item 6 by loosening the attaching screws item 7 4 Slide cover off Removing the bottom cover 1 Remove both lower rear feet item 4 by loosening the attaching screws item 5 2 Loosen the bottom cover screw item 8 3 Slide cover off 14 6 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Assembly Replacement and Post R epair Procedures 8719ES 20ES 22ES Removing the Covers RF Network Analyzers sb686d Service Guide 14 7 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures 8719ET 20ET 22ET Removing the Front Panel Assembly 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Removing the Fr
355. nce Test Records Performance Test Record on page 2 46 2 2 Service Guide 8719 20 22 System Verification and Performance Tests 8719ES 20ES 22ES How to Test the Performance of Your Analyzer RF Network Analyzers How to Test the Performance of Your Analyzer There are two different ways to verify the performance of your analyzer One method meets ANSI NCSL Z540 1 1994 standards and the other method does not To determine which type of verification you wish to perform refer to the following descriptions and flow charts ANSI NCSL 2540 1 1994 Verification This type of verification consists of conducting the preliminary checks system verification and the performance tests without stopping to troubleshoot E xceptions will only be made in case of catastrophic failure or cable connector damage order to obtain data of how the analyzer was performing at the time of verification these tests must be done even if you are aware that the analyzer will not pass Obtaining the data system verification printout and performance test record at this point is necessary so that you will understand that your measurements may not have been accurate You must wait until after the ANSI NCSL Z540 1 1994 verification is complete before troubleshooting and repairing any problems After troubleshooting consult Table 14 1 on page 14 35 to find the necessary adjustment procedures Then repeat the system verification and performance tests gen
356. nce Tests RF Network Analyzers Performance Tests The performance tests verify that the analyzer meets its published specifications Data from these tests should be recorded on the Performance Test Record beginning on page 2 46 This section includes the following performance tests Frequency Accuracy Performance Test on page 2 34 Level Accuracy Performance Test on page 2 36 Source Linearity Performance Test on page 2 38 Dynamic Range Performance Test on page 2 42 Service Guide 2 33 System Verification and Performance Tests 8719ET 20ET 22ET Performance Tests 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Frequency Accuracy Performance Test This test checks the frequency accuracy of the analyzer at or near its maximum frequency Table 2 6 Required Equipment Equipment Description 8719ET ES 8722ET ES 8720ET ES Frequency Counter 53150A or 5350B 53151A or 5351B RF Cable Set 85131F 85133F Analyzer warmup time 30 minutes NOTE On the frequency counter set the resolution to 1kH z or less 1 Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2 17 and press the following PRESET FACTORY CW FREQ Figure 2 17 Frequency Range and Accuracy Test Setup NETWORK ANALYZER FREQUENCY COUNTER sb519e 2 Select the analyzer CW frequency Agilent 8719ET ES press Agilent 8720ET ES press Agilent 8722ET ES press 3 Record the frequency counter reading for each frequency point in th
357. nd Regulatory Information epe tbe qd ian 15 2 POU HUN aes Sh tea den er eo oe even A 15 2 Pucca M PCT 15 3 TOF Sal ed Dawes de ded aid ed ded eho ee 15 3 SDS cQ dp mM 15 4 uu see ae 15 5 Lithium Battery Disposal 2264 Spoon PROC Cope shaku EVE ob ob eed as 15 5 Say CONSE GUNS p ee bebe Chad ce eda 35 eke eee kakuq ba 15 6 Se ES GINO xpo a ee Rag on deest dore eae Se edd qus 15 6 Bere App MNO PONET sir HS RE sek xs tie o Paka nee dot eae 15 6 SOMONE fo nace ETT 15 7 PIDE BI 4 eee err bed 15 8 Compliance with German F TZ Emissions Requirements 15 9 Compliance with German Noise Requirements 15 9 Contents xii 1 Service Equipment and Analyzer Options Service Equipment and Analyzer Options 8719ET 20ET 22ET Information in This Chapter 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Information in This Chapter This chapter contains information on the required equipment used to test and repair the network analyzer A list of analyzer options and service support options is included at the end
358. nect the equipment to the rear panel AU X INPUT and before turning the function ON COUNTER OFF switches the internal counter off and removes the counter from the display The counter can be switched on with one of the next three keys Using the counter slows the sweep The counter bandwidth is 16 MHz unless otherwise noted for a specific node NOTE OUTPCNTR is the GPIB command to output the counter s frequency data ANALOG BUS switches the counter to monitor the analog bus Service Guide 10 21 Service Key Menus and Error Messages Analog Bus on OFF FRAC N DIV FRACN Analog Bus Nodes 8719ET 20ET 22ET 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers switches the counter to monitor the A14 fractional N VCO frequency at the node shown on the Overall Block Diagram in Chapter 4 Start Troubleshooting Here switches the counter to monitor the A14 fractional N VCO frequency after it has been divided down to 100 kHz for phase locking the VCO The following paragraphs describe the 23 analog bus nodes They are listed in numerical order and are grouped by assembly For node locations refer to the Overall Block Diagram in Chapter 4 Press SERVICE MENU ANALOG BUS ON ANALOG IN AUX INPUT and then use the front panel keys or knob to select an analog bus node Terminate the entry by pressing x1 A10 Digital IF 1 O 37V 40 37V reference Check for a flat line at approximately 0 37V This is used as the vol
359. nel EXT TRIG connector The digitized data is serially clocked into the A7 CPU assembly to be processed into magnitude and phase data The processed and formatted data is finally routed to the display and to the GPIB for remote operation Refer to Digital Control Theory on page 12 9 and to the Operating Concepts chapter of the user s guide for more information on signal processing An additional input to the A10 assembly is the analog bus ABUS a built in service tool for testing analog circuits within the instrument This is a single multiplexed line that networks analog nodes throughout the instrument or monitors an external input at the rear panel AUX INPUT connector It is controlled by the CPU and used like oscilloscope or frequency counter to make internal voltage and frequency measurements Service Guide 12 25 Theory of Operation 8719ET 20ET 22ET Receiver Theory 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers 12 26 Service Guide 13 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts 8719ET 20ET 22ET Information on This Chapter 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Information on This Chapter This chapter contains information for ordering replacement parts for the 8719 5 8720ET ES and 8722ET ES network analyzers Replaceable parts include the following major assemblies cables hardware 13 2 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Replaceable Parts 8719ES 20ES 22ES Assembly Replacement Sequence RF Netwo
360. nel Output ET and ES Models 1 Connec the equipment as shown in Figure 4 5 Figure 4 7 Setup for the R Channel Receiver Check ES and ET Models NETWORK ANALYZER POWER METER Power Sensor Direct Connection sb520e 2 Zero and calibrate the power meter Set the calibration factor to the 1 GHz value See the power meter manual for instructions on setting the calibration factor 3 Press the following PRESET FACTORY 4 Press the following INPUTPORTS R CWFREQ 5 Calculate the difference between the power meter reading and the marker reading on the analyzer display This power difference is the frequency response of the R channel 6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 at the frequency points where a problem is suspected or check different frequency points across the band set the calibration factor on the power meter for each frequency measured For the characteristic values of the frequency response see Table 4 3 on page 4 21 4 22 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Start Troubleshooting Here 8719ES 20ES 22ES Receiver Check RF Network Analyzers Checking the A Channel Output ES Models 7 Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 4 8 Figure 4 8 Setup for the A Channel Receiver Check ET and ES Models NETWORK ANALYZER POWER METER Power Sensor Direct Connection sb546e 8 Zero and calibrate the power meter 9 Press the following INPUTPORTS A TESTPORT 2 10 Press the following CWFRE
361. nter and network analyzer references are not connected Figure 3 8 Frequency Accuracy Adjustment Setup NETWORK ANALYZER FREQUENCY COUNTER sb519e Service Guide 3 41 Adjustments and Correction Constants 8719ET 20ET 22ET Frequency Accuracy Adjustment 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers NOTE For Option 1D5 Instruments Only Remove the panel to BNC jumper that is connected between the EXT REF and the 10 MHz Precision Reference as shown in Figure 3 10 3 Press Preset FACTORY PRESET CW FREQ and select the frequency For the 8719ET ES press For the 8720E T ES press For the 8722ET ES press 4 No adjustment is required when the frequency counter measurement results are within specification e 135 kHz for 8719ET ES 200 kHz for 8720 5 e 260 kHz for 8722ET ES Otherwise locate the Reference A12 assembly red extractors and adjust the VCXO AD see Figure 3 9 for a frequency measurement within specifications Figure 3 9 Location of the VCXO ADJ Adjustment VCXO Red addition sb540e 3 42 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Adjustments and Correction Constants 8719ES 20ES 22ES Frequency Accuracy Adjustment RF Network Analyzers NOTE To increase the accuracy of this adjustment steps 5 and 6 are recommended 5 Replace the instrument covers and wait 15 minutes to allow the analyzer to reach its precise operating temperature
362. of the chapter Sections in This Chapter Service Test Equipment on page 1 3 e Principles of Microwave Connector on page 1 6 Analyzer Options on page 1 7 Service and Support Options on page 1 9 1 2 Service Guide 8719 20 22 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Service Test Equipment Service Equipment and Analyzer Options Service Test Equipment Type N Verification K it Required Equipment Critical Specifications Recommended Model or Use HP Agilent Part Number Test Instruments Frequency Counter 0 050 to 20 GHz 5350B 53150A Frequency Counter Freq 0 050 to 26 5 GHz 5351B 53151A Spectrum Analyzer Max Freq 1 8 GHz RBW 300 Hz 8591E A T Power M eter Accuracy 0 02 dB 436A 437B 438A 4418 441 E4419A EPM 442A Power Sensor Freq 0 050 to 20 05 GHz 8485A Range 30 to 20 dBm Power Sensor Freq 0 050to 40 GHz 8487A Range 30 to 20 dBm Digital Voltmeter Resolution 10 mV Any Oscilloscope Bandwidth 100 MHz Any T Printer Raster graphics capability Any Calibration and Verification Kits 2 4 mm Calibration Kit No substitute 85056A 2 4 mm Verification Kit No substitute 85057B P 3 5 mm Calibration Kit No substitute 85052B 3 5 mm Verification Kit No substitute 85053B P 7 mm Cali
363. olled by the A7 CPU that provides 0 to 55 dB of attenuation in 5 dB steps It adjusts the power level to the device under test DUT without changing the level of the incident power in the reference path A23 DC Block 8719ET Option 004 and 8720E T Option 004 Only Thedc block prevents a dc voltage from entering the analyzer by way of a device under test DUT A62 Directional Couplers Thetest signal goes into the through line arm of the coupler and from there to the REFLECTION port and the device under test DU T The coupled arm of the coupler carries the signal reflected from the DU T to the receiver for measurement The coupling coefficient of the directional couplers is nominally 14 dB 840 MHz to 40 05 GHz and 40 dB at 50 MHz Service Guide 12 23 Theory of Operation 8719ET 20ET 22ET Receiver Theory 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Receiver Theory The receiver measures and processes the input signals into digital information for display Figure 12 8 is a simplified block diagram of the receiver functional group The A12 reference assembly which is part of the source group is also included in the illustration to show how the 2nd L O signal is derived Figure 12 8 Receiver Functional Group Simplified Block Diagram 15 IF 10 MHz A64 R SAMPLER A5 2nd CONVERTER A10 DIGITAL IF 1st LO AUX IN OR gt ADC ABUS 65 SAMPLER 6 2nd CONVERTER 4 kHz MUX LY gt 66 SAMPLER 4 2 CONVERTER p
364. on OFF LIMITS NORM PWR LOSS on OFF LOSS SENSR LISTS DUMP GRAPH on OFF RETURN Offset Table Menu USE SENSOR A B CAL FACTOR SENSOR A CAL FACTOR SENSOR B RETURN Edit List Menu SEGMENT EDIT DELETE ADD CLEAR LIST Edit List Menu SEGMENT EDIT DELETE ADD CLEAR LIST Edit Sensor Menu FREQUENCY CAL FACTOR Edit Sensor Menu FREQUENCY LOSS 8719 20 22 Service Key Menus and Error Messages 8719ES 20ES 22ES Service Menus Internal Diagnostics RF Network Analyzers Tests Menu To access this menu press SERVICE MENU TESTS TESTS TEST D accesses a menu that allows you to select or execute the service tests The default is set to internal test 1 NOTE Descriptions of tests in each of the categories are given in Test Descriptions on page 10 8 tests are divided by function into the following categories Test Category Range of Tests Internal Tests 0 20 External Tests 21 25 System Verification Tests 26 42 Adjustment Tests 43 54 Display Tests 55 61 Test Patterns 62 76 To access the default test in each category press the test category softkey To access the other tests use the numeric keypad step keys or front panel knob The test number name and status abbreviation will be displayed in the active entry area of the display Table 10 1 shows the test status terms that appear on the
365. on from the front panel or GPIB and performs processing and formatting operations on the raw data in the main RAM It controls the digital signal processor DSP the front panel processor the display processor and the interconnect port interfaces addition when the analyzer is in the system controller mode the main CPU controls peri pheral devices through the peripheral port interfaces The main CPU has a dedicated flash ROM that contains the operating system for instrument control Front panel settings are stored in SRAM with a battery providing at least 5 years of backup storage when external power is off Main RAM The main random access memory RAM is shared memory for the CPU and the digital signal processor It stores the raw data received from the digital signal processor while additional calculations are performed on it by the CPU The CPU reads theresulting formatted data from the main RAM and converts it to GSP commands It writes these commands to the GSP for output to the analyzer display EEPROM Elecrically erasable programmable read only memory EEPROM contains factory set correction constants unique to each instrument These constants correct for hardware variations to maintain the highest measurement accuracy The correction constants can be updated by executing the routines in Chapter 3 Adjustments and Correction Constants Digital Signal Processor DSP The digital signal processor DSP receives the digitized
366. onal N spur avoidance and FM sideband adjustment 3 44 frequency accuracy adjustment 3 41 IF amplifier correction constants adjustment 3 9 service 1 2 ERF and ERR description 11 13 error messages 10 3 ADDITIONAL STANDARDS NEEDED 10 33 ADDRESSED TO TALK WITH NOTHING TO SAY 10 33 ANALOG BUS DISABLEDIN 6KHZIF BW 10 33 ANALOG INPUT OVERLOAD 10 33 BATTERY FAILED STATE MEMORY CLEARED 10 33 BATTERY LOW STORE SAVE REGS TO DISK 10 33 BLOCK INPUT ERROR 10 34 BLOCK INPUT LENGTH ERROR 10 34 CALIBRATION ABORTED 10 34 CALIBRATION REQUIRED 10 34 CANNOT READ WRITE 1FILE SYSTEM 10 34 CAUTION POWER OUT MAY BE UNLEVELED 10 34 CORRECTION CONSTANTS NOT STORED 10 34 CORRECTION TURNED OFF 10 34 CURRENT PARAMETER NOT IN CAL SET 10 35 DEADLOCK 10 35 DEVICE not on not connect wrong addrs 10 35 DISK not on not connected wrong addrs 10 35 DISK HARDWARE PROBLEM 10 35 DISK MESSAGE LENGTH ERROR 10 35 DISK READ WRITE ERROR 10 35 FILE NOT COMPATIBLE WITH INSTRUMENT 10 35 ILLEGAL UNIT OR VOLUME NUMBER 10 35 INITIALIZATION FAILED 10 36 INSUFFICIENT MEMORY PWR CAL OFF 10 36 NO CALIBRATION CURRENTLY IN PROGRESS 10 36 NO FAIL FOUND 10 36 NO FILE S FOUND ON DISK 10 36 NOIF FOUND CHECK RINPUT LEVEL 10 36 NO SPACE FOR NEW CAL CLEAR REGISTERS 10 36 NOT ALLOWED DURING POWER METER CAL 10 36 NOT ENOUGH SPACE ON DISK FOR STORE 10 37 OVERLOAD ON INPUT A POWER REDUCED 10 37 OVERLOAD ON INPUT B POWER REDUCED 10 37 PAR
367. onnectors before first use Making Connections Do Align connectors carefully DoNot Apply bending force to connection Make preliminary connection lightly Over tighten preliminary connection Turn only the connector nut Twist or screw any connection Use a torque wrench for final connect Tighten past torque wrench break point 1 6 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Service Equipment and Analyzer Options 8719ES 20ES 22ES Analyzer Options RF Network Analyzers Analyzer Options Option 1D5 High Stability Frequency Reference Option 105 offers 0 05 ppm temperature stability from 0 to 55 C referenced to 25 C Option 004 Step Attenuator ET Models This option adds a 55 dB step attenuator into the RF output path Option 007 Mechanical Transfer Switch ES Models This option replaces the solid state transfer switch with a mechanical transfer switch providing the analyzer with greater power handling capability Because the mechanical transfer switch has less loss than the solid state transfer switch the output power of an Option 007 analyzer is 5 dB higher Option 010 Time Domain This option allows the analyzer to display the time domain response of a network by computing the inverse Fourier transform of the frequency domain response The analyzer shows the response of a test device as a function of time or distance Displaying the reflection coefficient of a network versus time determines the magnitude
368. ont Panel Assembly Tools Required T 10 TORX screwdriver T 15 TORX screwdriver small slot screwdriver ESD electrostatic discharge grounding wrist strap 5 16 inch open end torque wrench set to 10 in Ib Removal 1 Disconnect the power cord 2 Remove the front bottom feet item 1 3 Remove all the RF cables that are attached to the front panel item 2 NOTE Options may differ from figure and have more than one RF cable on the front panel 4 Remove the Line button item 3 5 Removethetrim strips item 4 from the top edge of the front frame by prying under the strip with a small slot screwdriver 6 Remove the 7 screws item 5 from the top and bottom edges of the frame a Remove all 4 flathead screws from the top and the 3 flathead screws from the bottom NOTE The 3 bottom screws are on both ends and in the middle They look likethe screws from the top Do not remove the other 6 screws from the bottom 7 Slide the front panel over the test port connectors 8 Disconnect the ribbon cables item 6 and item 7 The front panel is now free from the instrument Replacement 1 Reverse the order of the removal procedure NOTE When reconnecting semirigid cables torque the to 10 in Ib 14 8 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures 8719ES 20ES 22ES Removing the Front Panel Assembly RF Network Analyzers 7 places
369. onverter A99 08720 69124 1 Frequency Converter Rebuilt E xchange W15 08720 20058 1 Front Panel B In to A66 W16 08720 20104 1 Front Panel A In to A65 W25 08720 20259 1 A61 to A62 W26 08720 20025 1 A60 to A63 W32 08720 20173 1 A58 to A69 W36 08720 20312 1 A72to A64 W37 08720 20136 1 A71 to A60 W38 08720 20145 1 A70 to A61 W39 08720 20169 1 A74 to A70 W40 08720 20168 1 74 to A71 W41 08720 20316 1 A74 to A73 W52 08720 20098 1 External Links W55 08720 20172 1 A74toFront Panel R Channel OU T W77 08720 20315 1 A73 to A67 13 24 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Replaceable Parts 8719ES 20ES 22ES Replaceable Part Listings RF Network Analyzers 8719 5 and 8720ES Option 400 012 A7 71 A64 A70 A65 w37 W36 w41 52 w39 A67 w55 W16 W41 77 99 38 A61 A60 W26 W25 W32 W40 A51 A17 15 66 w52 3 Places sb562e Service Guide 13 25 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Part Listings 8719ET 20ET 22ET 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Bottom Assemblies and Cables for 8719E S and 8720E S Option 400 089 Ref Desig Options HP Agilent Qty Description Part Number A7 08720 60253 1 CPU Repair Kit 7 08720 69253 1 CPU Repair Kit Rebuilt Exchange A17 08720 60264 1 Mo
370. option number correction constants Tests 49 and 50 respectively a Press the following FACTORY PRESET SERVICE MENU TESTS EXECUTE TEST YES 12 Restore the analyzer s correction constants by referring to the Correction Constants Retrieval Procedure on page 3 35 13 If you don t have the correction constants backed up a disk run all the internal service routines in the following order Unprotected Hardware Option Correction Constants on page 3 15 Analog Bus Correction Constants Test 44 on page 3 8 Source Pretune Correction Constants Test 43 on page 3 6 ADC Offset Correction Constants Test 48 on page 3 10 IF Step Correction Constants Test 47 on page 3 9 Raw Offset Correction Constants on page 3 48 e n o Sampler Calibration Correction Constants Test 51 on page 3 58 3 32 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Adjustments and Correction Constants 8719ES 20ES 22ES EEPROM Backup Disk Procedure RF Network Analyzers EEPROM Backup Disk Procedure correction constants that are unique to your instrument are stored in EEPROM on the CPU A7 assembly By creating an EEPROM backup disk you will have a copy of all the correction constant data for that analyzer should you need to replace the CPU 7 assembly in the future Required Equipment and Tools Equipment Description 8719ET ES 8722ET ES 8720ET ES 3 5 inch Floppy Disk One formatted 1 44 MB disk 1
371. or A15 on page 5 10 e fthered LED is still on the problem is probably 15 or one of the assemblies obtaining power from it Go to Check for a Faulty Assembly on page 5 11 Figure 5 5 Power Supply Cable Locations A15W2 A9 A1l5W1 AB 10 All 12 14 sb592e Service Guide 5 9 Power Supply Troubleshooting If the Red LED of the Preregulator 15 15 Verify the Preregulator A15 Verify that the preregulator A 15 is supplying the correct voltages to the post regulator A8 Use a voltmeter with a small probe to measure the output voltages of A15W1 s plug Refer to Table 5 2 and Figure 5 6 Ifthe voltages not within tolerance replace A15 8719ET 20ET 22ET 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Ifthe voltages are within tolerance A15 is verified Goto Check for a Faulty Assembly on page 5 11 Table 5 2 Output Voltages Pin A15W1P 1 A8J 2 15 Disconnected Connected Preregulator Voltages Voltages Mnemonic 1 N C N C N C 2 100 to 125 100 to 125 not used 3 4 22 4 to 33 6 17 0 to 18 4 18 V 5 6 22 4 to 33 6 17 0 to 18 4 18 V 7 N C 7 4 to 48 0 N C 8 9 4 to 14 7 4 to 8 0 8 9 10 9 4 to 14 6 7 to 7 3 8 V 11 32 to 48 24 6 to 426 6 25 12 24 6 26 6 NOTE The 5 VD supply must loaded by or more
372. or repeatability connect a broadband termination to the end of the cable Press the following DUAL QUAD SETUP DUAL CHANNEL OFF DISPLAY DATA AVERAGING FACTOR AVERAGING ON Wait until the analyzer has averaged the measurement 128 times by observing the counter on the left side of the display Tonormalizethe data trace press the following DATA gt MEMORY DATA MEM Scale Ref REFERENCE VALUE SCALE DIV Disconnec and then reconnect the cableto the test port Tighten the connection tothe specified torque for the connector type Look at the trace for spikes or modes Tore normalize the data trace of the reconnected cable press the following DATA gt MEMORY Service Guide 2 13 System Verification and Performance Tests 8719ET 20ET 22ET Preliminary Tests 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers 7 Repeat steps 4 and 5 at least three times to look for modes M odes appear when a harmonic of the source fundamental frequency is able to propagate through the cable or connector It is helpful to be able to plot the trace each time to compare several connections If any mode appears each time the cable is connected and reconnected measurement integrity will be affected The cable connector or cable should be repaired or replaced For a typical response of cable connector repeatability see Figure 2 6 NOTE The connector repeatability measurement should be done at the test port as well as at the end of the test port cable
373. orrected port performance 11 8 removing high stability freq ref assembly 14 32 LED board 14 30 line fuse 5 8 test port couplers 14 30 the ABT1 battery 14 22 the covers 14 6 the CPU board 14 20 the disk drive assembly A3 14 28 the display lamp and assembly 14 12 the fan assembly 14 34 the front panel 14 8 the front panel interface and keyboard assemblies 14 10 the GSP board 14 26 the preregulator board 14 24 the rear panel assembly 14 14 the rear panel interface board 14 16 the source assembly 14 18 replacing the line fuse 14 5 return loss test port cable check 2 9 typical display of test port cables 2 10 RF adapters recommended Agilent part numbers 1 4 RF components problems with 7 22 RF path isolating fault in 9 5 RF signal of the R channel measuring of on ES models 7 10 measuring of on ET models 7 10 Index s sampler A and B check by substitution 8 8 assembly control bias voltages 7 9 control voltage check 7 9 signal down conversion description 12 14 voltage check 8 9 sampler check 8 7 SAVE FAILED INSUFFICIENT MEMORY 10 39 selector switch check 5 8 self diagnose softkey 10 8 SELF TEST n FAILED 10 39 self test how to initiate 4 5 serial number correction constants adjustment 3 11 service equipment 1 2 service feature menu map 10 16 service key menus 10 2 internal diagnostics 10 3 service features 10 15 service modes menu 10 17 service modes more menu 10 19 service test equipment 1 3
374. ouplers and samplers to prevent overload A network analyzer with this option can be configured to operate as a normal instrument with slightly degraded output power level and accuracy or as an instrument capable of making single connection multiple measurements Bias tees are not part of the signal separation circuitry of the Option 085 Because of high output power Option 085 is only available with a mechanical transfer switch similar to Option 007 Option 085 also includes direct access to the receiver Option 012 Option 089 Frequency Offset Mode ES Models This option adds the ability to offset the source and receiver frequencies for frequency translation measurements This provides the analyzer with mixer measurement capability It also provides a graphical setup that allows easy configuration of your frequency translation measurement Option 400 Four Sampler Test Set ES Models This option reconfigures the analyzer s test set to ratio out the characteristics of the test port transfer switch and to include a second reference channel that allows full accuracy with a TRL measurement calibration NOTE The 8722ES option 400 is optimized to operate with a test port cable length of one meter It may be necessary to set up the 8722ES Option 400 in the step sweep mode if you are operating the analyzer with test port cables or fixturing with an electronic length greater than one meter Option 1CP Rack Mount Flange Kit With Handles O
375. ous to the woofer and the tweeter in a stereo speaker the woofer reproduces low frequencies and the tweeter reproduces high frequencies Similarly in the YIG oscillator the main coil allows large slow changes in frequency but cannot respond to high frequency deviations which are sent tothe faster acting FM coils Thetune current from the A11 phase lock assembly splits into two paths One path is lowpass filtered removing high frequency components and goes to the YIG main coil the other path is highpass filtered removing low frequency components and goes tothe YIG FM coils Thefilters are matched in stop band response such that one picks up where the other leaves off Table 12 3 Frequency Bands for Models Band Frequency Range Low for all models 50 MHz to 2 55 GHz High for 8719ET ES models 2 55 GHz to 13 05 GHz High for 8720ET ES models 2 55 GHz to 20 05 GHz Mid for the 8722ET ES models High for the 8722ET ES models 20 05 GHz to 40 05 GHz In thelow band for all models the 3 85 to 6 35 GHz output of YIG1 andthe fixed 3 8 GHz output of the A57 fixed oscillator are mixed in the A53 mixer amplifier assembly n this band A5 switch A53 into the circuit The high band of the 8719ET ES and 8720ET E S mid band of 8722ET ES uses the full band output of YIG1 Service Guide 12 17 Theory of Operation 8719ET 20ET 22ET Source Group Theory 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers The hig
376. ower meter 2 Set the calibration factor on the power meter to the average value of the power sensor between 50 MHz and 20 GHz 40 GHz for 8722bET E S For example if the power sensor calibration factor is 10096 at 50 MHz and 9296 at 20 GHz 40 GHz for 8722 5 set the calibration factor to 9696 3 Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2 18 Figure 2 18 Power Test Setup NETWORK ANALYZER POWER METER 2 Power Sensor Direct Conne ction sb520e 2 36 Service Guide 8719 20 22 System Verification and Performance Tests 8719ES 20ES 22ES Performance Tests RF Network Analyzers 4 On the analyzer press the following PRESET FACTORY POWER PWRRANGE POWER RANGES RANGE 0 5 Enter the power value listed in Table 2 8 and then press 1 Table 2 8 Power Values for Flatness Test Analyzer Model Type Test Power Setting 8719ES and 8720E S 0 dBm 8719ET and 8720E T 8719ES Option 007 5 dBm 8720 5 Option 007 8722ES 10 dBm 8722E T 8722ES Option 007 5 dBm 6 To set a 300 second sweep press SWEEP TIME Cx 7 Toinitiate a single sweep press TRIGGER MENU SINGLE 8 During the sweep notice the minimum and maximum power level readings and record thesein the Min and Max columns on the L evel Accuracy performance test record The analyzer remains at each frequency point for 1 5 seconds to allow the power meter sufficient time to settle If
377. p 4 MHz INPUT 5 2 w74 BIAS OSCILLATORS INPUTS 127777 91 wa de i I ANALOG AUXIN CAL 77 5 SS E mos 1 8 1 INSTRUMENT i 12 NODES A64R1SAMPLER w88 ALC SAMPLE S11 A47 I F 30 MHz uon RATE IS AQUT o 18 521 EXT OFFSET A 16 kHz IFA 4 kHz 9 1 O J3 ox fs J2 AM SLOPE i ST 4 lt 4 Q he i od i jp W34 F i SZ laour TP20 w48 522 ee me A 1 A54 YIG2 2 LOW BAND ADJ BLANKING ADJ 4 9 l I 7 e i esa yd I IROUT 16 1 11 PHASE LOCK EM YIG2 IFR4kH2 9 1 2 2040 GHz cs REV 0 EMIGI Vv N i PLL OUT TO v 1 42 PHASE LOCK wanes o tA85 vien ASV _ SI 10 Miz PLL FROM iir E 12 IF DET vo EC iss 22 lt lt I i PRECISION r rat 10 D TW z PEFERENCE CONTROL 1st IF 10 MHz x 3 P PRETUNE ll 1 I 5 2 CONVERTER TRE 1A66B SAMPLER E PL REF 1 MHz SWPERR 25520 GHz 1 wei 7 Ca ol 1 f J3 Ay 2 PRETUNE gt SA wl 1 RED LED AMBER LED
378. performance test record for your analyzer 14 Repeat steps 12 and 13 beginning with MARKER 1 placing marker 1 and marker 2 at the start and stop of the remaining frequency ranges that are listed in Table 2 13 2 44 Service Guide 8719 20 22 System Verification and Performance Tests 8719ES 20ES 22ES Performance Tests RF Network Analyzers Ifthe Analyzer Fails This Test First suspect the connections the calibration standards and the cable Visually inspect all of the connectors and repeat the test n case of repeat failure gauge the connectors refer to the Principles of Microwave Connector Care on page 1 6 Recheck the output power of the source Refer tothe Chapter 4 Start Troubleshooting Here for additional help Service Guide 2 45 System Verification and Performance Tests 8719ET 20ET 22ET Performance Test Record 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Performance Test Record The complete system performance verification record includes the printout from the total system uncertainty test these test records and a certificate of calibration Usethe following pages to record the results of the performance tests You may wish to photocopy these pages and keep them as master copies Table 2 14 Performance Test Record for All Models Test Facility Report N umber Date Date of 5 System Calibration Tested by Customer ee Analyzer Calibration Kit Verification Kit Model S
379. port continue with Step Attenuator A69 Check next If you measure at least 8 dBm 3 dBm on Option 007 models at the other port either the directional coupler or the bias tee or the transfer switch A25 is faulty The power loss through each of these components should be negligible Step Attenuator A69 Check 1 Measurethe input and output power of the step attenuator the loss should be negligible if the attenuator is set to 0 dB 2 If the 5 dB attenuation steps seem inconsistent perform the Step 2 Operator s Check on page 4 7 Service Guide 7 27 Source Troubleshooting 8719ET 20ET 22ET Broadband Power Problems 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers 7 28 Service Guide 8 Receiver Troubleshooting Receiver Troubleshooting 8719ET 20ET 22ET Information on This Chapter 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Information on This Chapter Use this procedure only if you have read Chapter 4 Start Troubleshooting Here Follow the procedures in the order given unless instructed otherwise This section can be used to determine which receiver assembly of the instrument is faulty two receiver assemblies that affect all three signal paths are the digital IF A10 and reference assemblies A12 The receiver assemblies that are associated with specific signal paths are listed in Table 8 1 Table 8 1 Receiver Assemblies and Associated Paths Signal Path Port Directional Sampler 2nd Coupler
380. ppears in theleft margin of the display toindicatethat the power trip function has been activated When this occurs reset the power to a lower level then toggle the SOURCE PWR on OFF softkey to switch on the power again PARALLEL PORT NOT AVAILABLE FOR COPY Error Number You have defined the parallel port as general purposel O GPIO for sequencing 167 The definition was made under the key menus To access the parallel port for copy set the selection to PARALLEL COPY PARALLEL PORT NOT AVAILABLE FOR GPIO Error Number You have defined the parallel port as COPY for sequencing in the GPIB menu 165 To access the parallel port for general purpose 1 0 GPIO set the selection to PARALLEL GPIO PHASE LOCK CAL FAILED Error Number internal phase lock calibration routine is automatically executed at 4 power on preset and any time a loss of phase lock is detected This message indicates that phase lock calibration was initiated and the first IF detected but a problem prevented the calibration from completing successfully Perform the Source Pretune Correction Constants Test 43 on page 3 6 This message may appear if you connect a mixer between theRF output and R input beforeturning on frequency offset mode Ignore it it will go away when you turn on frequency offset This message may also appear if you turn on frequency offset mode before you define the offset PHASE LOCK FAILURE Error
381. pply functional group consists of the A15 preregulator and the A8 post regulator These two assemblies comprise a switching power supply that provides regulated dc voltages to power all assemblies in the analyzer The A15 preregulator is enclosed in a casting at the rear of the instrument behind the display It is connected to the A8 post regulator by a wire bus A15W1 Figure 12 2 is a simplified block diagram of the power supply group Figure 12 2 Power Supply Functional Group Simplified Block Diagram A17 MOTHERBOARD 5VDIG 15 A8 POST PREREGULATOR REGULATOR 5V 5VCPU _ 5 SENSE SWITCHING POWER V SUPPLY gs LINE AND 25v POWER REGULATOR I 18V 18V ug J INSTRUMENT POWER REGULATORS MICROCIRCUIT POWER 5VD _18V DISPLAY POWER Yf Y f YT GREEN RED LED LED qq vy a 9 GREEN LEDS SR NL ON DURING OFF DURING NORMAL OPERATION NORMAL OPERATION ON DURING NORMAL OPERATION sb588e A15 Preregulator The 15 preregulator steps down and rectifies the line voltage It provides a fully regulated 5 V digital supply and several preregulated voltages that go to the A8 post regulator assembly for additional regulation The 15 preregulator assembly includes the line power module 60 kHz switching preregulator and overvoltage protection
382. ption 1CP is arack mount kit containing a pair of flanges with handles and the necessary hardware to mount the analyzer in an equipment rack with 482 6 mm 19 inches horizontal spacing Option 1CM Rack Mount Flange Kit Without Handles Option 1CM is arack mount kit containing a pair of flanges without handles and the necessary hardware to mount the analyzer in an equipment rack with 482 6 mm 19 inches horizontal spacing 1 8 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Service Equipment and Analyzer Options 8719ES 20ES 22ES Service and Support Options RF Network Analyzers Service and Support Options analyzer s standard warranty is a three year return to Agilent service warranty The following service and support options are available at the time you purchase an Agilent 8719ET ES Agilent 8720ET ES or an Agilent 8722ET ES network analyzer Option W01 This option converts the standard three year return to Agilent Technologies service warranty to a one year on site service warranty This option may not be available in all areas Option W31 This option converts the standard three year return to Agilent Technologies service warranty to a three year on site service warranty This option may not be available in all areas Option W50 This option adds two years to the standard three year return to Agilent Technologies warranty for a total of a five year return to Agilent Technologies service warranty Option W51 This optio
383. r Care Proper connector care and connection technique are critical for accurate and repeatable measurements Refer to the calibration kit documentation for connector care information Prior to making connections to the network analyzer carefully review the information about inspecting cleaning and gauging connectors Practicing good connector care and connection technique extends the life of these devices In addition you obtain the most accurate measurements For additional connector care instruction contact your nearest Agilent Technologies sales or service office about course numbers HP Agilent 85050A 24A and HP Agilent 85050A 24 Seethe following table for quick reference tips about connector care Table 1 1 Connector Care Quick Reference Handling and Storage Do Keep connectors clean DoNot Touch mating plane surfaces Extend sleeve or connector nut Set connectors contact end down Use plastic end caps during storage Visual Inspection Do Inspect all connectors carefully Do Not Use a damaged connector ever Look for metal particles scratches and dents Connector Cleaning Do Try compressed air first Do Not Use abrasives Use isopropyl alcohol Get liquid into plastic support beads Clean connector threads Gauging Connectors Do Clean and zero the gauge before use Do Not Use out of spec connector Use the correct type Use correct end of calibration block Gauge all c
384. r Kit Rebuilt E xchange 17 08720 60264 1 Motherboard A51 08720 60274 1 Bd Assy Test Set Interface A52 5086 7456 1 Assy Pulse Generator A52 5086 6456 1 Assy Pulse Generator Rebuilt E xchange A60 A61 5086 7484 2 Bias Tee A60 A61 5086 6484 2 Bias Tee Rebuilt E xchange A64 A65 5086 7614 4 Assy Sampler A66 A67 A64 A65 5086 7614 3 Assy Sampler A66 A67 A70 A71 33326 60006 2 Attenuator 0 55 dB A74 5087 7002 1 Switch Splitter A74 5087 6002 1 Switch Splitter Rebuilt E xchange A99 08720 60124 1 Frequency Converter A99 08720 69124 Frequency Converter Rebuilt E xchange W22 08720 20033 1 A63 to A66 W25 08722 20056 1 A61 to 62 W26 08722 20057 1 A60 to A63 W30 08720 20026 1 A62 to A65 W32 08722 20054 1 A58 to A74 W36 08720 20041 1 A72 to A64 W37 08722 20059 1 71 to A60 W38 08722 20061 1 A70to A61 W39 08722 20063 1 A74to A70 W40 08722 20062 1 A74to A71 W41 08722 20936 1 A74 to A76 W52 08722 20024 1 External Link W55 08722 20065 1 A74 to Front Panel R Channel OUT W77 08720 20103 1 A73 to A67 13 48 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Replaceable Parts 8719ES 20ES 22ES Replaceable Part Listings RF Network Analyzers 8722E S Option 400 A7 A17 A51 mmmn A71 A64 A70 A65 W41 w39 A74 w55 A52 38 w30 1 A99 Or
385. r Number 3 ONSTANTS NOT STOR ED A store operation to the EEPROM was not successful You must change the position of the jumper on the A7 CPU assembly Refer to A7 Switch Positions on page 3 4 CORRI Error Number 66 10 34 ECTION TURNI ED OFF Critical parameters in your current instrument state do not match the parameters for the calibration set therefore correction has been turned off The critical instrument state parameters are sweep type start frequency frequency span and number of points Service Guide 8719 20 22 Service Key Menus and Error Messages 8719ES 20ES 22ES Service Related Error Messages in Alphabetical Order RF Network Analyzers CURRENT PARAMETER NOT IN CAL SET Error Number Correction is not valid for your selected measurement parameter Either change 64 the measurement parameters or perform a new calibration DEADLOCK Error Number fatal firmware error occurred before instrument preset completed Call your 111 nearest Agilent Technologies sales or service office DEVICE not on not connect wrong addrs Error Number The device at the selected address cannot be accessed by the analyzer Verify 119 that the device is switched and check the GPIB connection between the analyzer and the device Ensure that the device address recognized by the analyzer matches the GPIB address set on the device itself DISK HARDW
386. r switch A 74 directly to the 2 4 mm RF INPUT J 2 of the suspect sampler U se 3 5 mm to 2 4 mm adapters where necessary This connection bypasses the step attenuator bias tee and the coupler IMPORTANT Todisconnect the semirigid cable of the A74 transfer switch it may be necessary to disconnect additional semirigid cables and loosen the transfer switch Be careful not to damage the center pin when disconnecting the cable For ET Models set up the following 4 For standard ET models connect an RF flexible cable from the cable W76 that connects the MADS A58 tothe directional coupler A62 to the 2 4 mm RF INPUT 2 of the suspect sampler Make the connection at the coupler end of the cable For ET Option 004 models connect an RF flexible cablefrom the cablethat connects the MADS 58 to the step attenuator A69 to the 2 4 mm RF INPUT J 2 of the suspect sampler the connection at the attenuator end of the cable 5 Connect thelF output cable for the R sampler to thelF Output of the suspect sampler Checking the Operation of the Sampler 6 Press PRESET FACTORY and see whether the instrument phase locks Disregard the trace ftheinstrument phase locks and no error message is displayed the sampler under test is normal Goto 2nd Converter Check on page 8 9 ftheinstrument displays the PHASE LOCK CAL FAIL error message either the sampler or its control and bias voltages are faulty Continue with S
387. r to CHANNEL OUT and measure the power out Ifthe power level is at least 35 dBm proceed to Phase Lock Error Message Displayed on page 7 6 f the power level is lower proceed to Power Not within Specifications on page 7 6 Power Not within Specifications Perform these power adjustments from Chapter 3 Adjustments and Correction Constants 1 2 3 Output Power Adjustments on page 3 17 Power Linearity Adjustment on page 3 24 Blanking Adjustment Test 54 on page 3 30 If power holes exist use the block diagram located at the end of Chapter 4 Start Troubleshooti ng H ere and thelocation diagrams in Chapter 13 Replaceable Parts to check the cables and connections in the RF path If power levels are not 2 dB of the setting 8719ET ES and 8720ET ES or 3 dB of setting 8722ET ES in only one or two bands goto Band Related Problems on page 7 22 If power levels are incorrect in all bands go to Broadband Power Problems on page 7 26 Phase Lock Error Message Displayed 1 7 6 To view the 0 25V GHz signal to the YIG oscillator press the following PRESET FACTORY SERVICE MENU ANALOG BUS ON ANALOG IN Aux Input 9 Scale Ref AUTO SCALE Notice that for each band the waveform should start and stop exactly as shown in Figure 7 1 with only one ramp in each band A problem in one band should not affect the appearance of the waveform in other bands Service Guide 8719 2
388. ration factor values along with their corresponding frequencies Service Guide 3 59 Adjustments and Correction Constants 8719ET 20ET 22ET Sampler Calibration Correction Constants Test 51 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers NOTE The analyzer s calibration factor sensor table can hold a maximum of 12 calibration factor data points Thefollowing softkeys are included in the sensor calibration factor entries menu SEGMENT press to select a point where you can use the front panel knob or entry keys to enter a value EDIT press to edit or change a previously entered value DELETE press to delete a point from the sensor calibration factor table ADD press this key to add a point into the sensor calibration factor table CLEARLIST press this key to erase the entire sensor calibration factor table DONE press this key when done entering points to the sensor calibration factor table 9 As an example the following are the keystrokes for entering the first two calibration factor data points for the HP Agilent 8485A power sensor assuming CF 96 99 5 at 50 MHz and CF 98 4 at 20 GHz a From the sensor calibration factor entries menu press ADD b Press FREQUENCY MIL If you make an entry error press and re enter the correct value again Press CAL FACTOR x1 Press DONE toterminatethe first calibration factor data point entry n enter the second calibration factor data point press ADD Press FRE
389. rations with reference designators are provided after the tables with the exception of Front Cables All Models For the cables front refer the block diagrams at the end of Chapter 4 Start Troubleshooting Here Top Assemblies on page 13 8 Bottom Assemblies and Cables on page 13 12 8719ES and 8720ES Standard and Option 007 on page 13 13 8719ES and 8720ES Options 012 0124007 on page 13 15 8719ES and 8720E S Options 089 089 007 on page 13 17 8719 5 8720E S Options 0894012 08940124007 on page 13 19 8719ES and 8720E S Options 085 085 089 on page 13 21 8719ES and 8720ES Option 400 on page 13 23 8719ES and 8720 5 Option 4004012 on page 13 25 8719 5 8720E S Option 400 089 on page 13 27 8719ES and 8720ES Option 40040124089 on page 13 29 8722ES Standard on page 13 31 8722 5 Option 007 on page 13 33 8722 5 Option 012 on page 13 35 8722ES Option 0074012 on page 13 37 8722 5 Option 089 on page 13 39 8722 5 Option 0894007 on page 13 41 8722 5 Option 0894012 on page 13 43 8722 5 Option 08940074012 on page 13 45 8722 5 Option 085 0854 089 on page 13 47 8722 5 Option 400 on page 13 49 8722ES Option 4004012 on page 13 51 8722ES Option 400 0989 on page 13 53 8722 5 Option 40040124089 on page 13 55 13 6 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Replaceable Parts 8719ES 20ES 22ES R
390. rce 8720ES In 74 W59 8722ES 085 SR 08722 20084 1 Rear Panel Source In 74 W82 All All 14W 8120 6876 1 VGA Out To 22 2 W85 All All 3W 8120 6859 1 16 17 W86 All All 2W 8120 6382 1 A7ToA17 W87 50W 8120 6379 1 7 17 1 nWiis abbreviation for Wire Bundle n is the number of wires in the bundle Rear Panel All Models Service Guide w85 W58 W59 Opt 85 sb682d 13 69 Replaceable Parts 8719ET 20ET 22ET Replaceable Part Listings 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Front Cables All Models Ref Agilent Models Options Type HP Part Qty Description Desig Number W18 8719 5 085 089 SR 08720 20105 1 Front Panel 8720E S R Channel In to A24 W18 8722ES 085 089 SR 08722 20058 1 Front Panel R Channel In to A24 W20 8719 5 085 089 SR 08720 20281 1 A24to A64 8720E S 8722ES W23 8719 5 Standard SR 08720 20047 1 A58to Front Panel 007 012 R Channel Out W23 8722ES Standard SR 08722 20071 1 A58toFront Panel R 007 012 Channel Out W30 8719E T All SR 08720 20026 1 A62 to A65 8720E T 8722E T W32 8719E T 004 SR 08720 20021 1 A58 to A69 8720E T W32 8722E T 004 SR 08722 20069 1 A58to A69 W33 8719 5 Standard SR 08720 20311 1 Front Panel R 8720E S 007 012 400 Channel In To A72 W33 8722ES Standard SR 08722 20075 1 Front Panel R 007 012 400 Channel In To A75 W36 8719ES Standard SR 08720 20312 1 A72 To A64 8720E S
391. rder a part listed in the replaceable parts lists quote the Agilent Technologies part number indicate the quantity required and address the order to the nearest Agilent Technologies office The sales or service offices table is located in Chapter 15 Safety and Regulatory Information order a part that is not listed the replaceable parts lists include the instrument model number complete instrument serial number the description and function of the part and the number of parts required Address the order to the nearest Agilent Technologies office 13 4 Service Guide 8719 20 22 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Figure 13 1 Module Exchange Procedure The module exchange program described here is a fast efficient economical method of keeping your instrument in service Locate the defective module using the troubleshooting procedures described in this manual Is a replacement module in stock Order a restored exchange replacement module from Agilent Technologies Refer to the replaceable parts section of this manual for appropriate part numbers of the restored exchange module When the replace ment module is received replace the defective module with the replacement module Return the defective module to Agilent Technologies formt120 Service Guide Replace the defective module with the replacement module Keep the defective module for return to Agilent Technologies Ord
392. re on there is a 95 confidence level that the power supply is verified To confirm the last 5 uncertainty of the power supply continue to the next section Measure the Post Regulator A8 Voltages f any LED on 815 off or flashing refer to If the Green LEDs of the Post Regulator A8 Are Not ON on page 5 13 5 6 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Power Supply Troubleshooting 8719ES 20ES 22ES Start Here RF Network Analyzers Measure the Post Regulator A8 Voltages Measure the DC voltages on the test points of A8 with a voltmeter Refer to Figure 5 3 for test point locations and Table 5 1 for supply voltages and limits Figure 5 3 Post Regulator A8 Test Point Locations 65V 12 6VPP Not Used AGND 5VD SDIS 15V Not Used 15V 5VU 5 2V 22V 6V DISPL PWR W14 PLUG sb544e Table 5 1 Post Regulator A8 Test Point Voltages TP Supply Range 1 65 V Not Used 64 6 to 65 4 2 AGND n a 3 5 VD 44 9 to 45 3 4 SDIS n a 5 15V 14 4 to 15 6 6 12 6 PP Not Used 12 1to 12 8 7 15 V 14 5 to 15 5 8 5 VU 5 05 to 45 35 9 5 2 5 0 to 5 4 10 22V 21 3 to 22 7 11 6 V 5 8 to 46 2 Service Guide 5 7 Power Supply Troubleshooting 8719ET 20ET 22ET If the Green LED of the Preregulator 15 Is Off or Blinking 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers If the Green LED of the Preregulator 15 Is Off or Blinking If
393. rk Analyzers Assembly Replacement Sequence The following steps show the sequence to replace an assembly in the network analyzer Step 1 Identify the faulty group Begin with Chapter 4 Start Troubleshooting Here Follow up with the appropriate troubleshooting chapter that identifies the faulty assembly Step 2 Order a replacement assembly Refer to this chapter Step 3 Replacethe faulty assembly and determine what adjustments are necessary Refer to Chapter 14 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures Step 4 Perform the necessary adjustments Refer to Chapter 3 Adjustments and Correction Constants Step 5 Perform the necessary performance tests Refer to Chapter 2 System Verification and Performance Tests Service Guide 13 3 Replaceable Parts 8719ET 20ET 22ET Rebuilt Exchange Assemblies 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Rebuilt Exchange Assemblies Under the rebuilt exchange assembly program certain factory repaired and tested modules assemblies are available on a trade in basis These assemblies are offered for lower cost than a new assembly but meet all factory specifications required of a new assembly The defective assembly must be returned for credit under the terms of the rebuilt exchange assembly program Any spare assembly stock desired should be ordered using the new assembly part number Figure 13 1 illustrates the module exchange procedure Ordering Information To o
394. roceed beyond a warning note until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met 15 4 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Safety and Regulatory Information 8719ES 20ES 22ES Instrument Markings RF Network Analyzers Instrument Markings Theinstruction documentation symbol The product is marked with A this symbol when it is necessary for the user to refer tothe instructions in the documentation The CE mark is registered trademark of the European Community If accompanied by year it is when the design was proven The CSA mark is a registered trademark of the Canadian Standards D Association ISMI A This is a symbol of an Industrial Scientific and Medical Group 1 Class A product ICES NMB 001 Thisisa marking to indicate product compliance with the Canadian nterference Causing Equipment Standard I CE S 001 C Tick mark is a registered trademark of the Australian N10149 Spectrum Management Agency Lithium Battery Disposal If the battery on the CPU board A7 becomes ready for disposal Dispose of it to your country s requirements If required you may return the battery to the nearest Agilent Technologies sales or service office for disposal For replacement of the battery refer to Removing the A7BT1 Battery on page 14 22 DO NOT THROW BATTERIES AWAY BUT COLLECT AS SMALL CHEMICAL WASTE sk780a Service Guide 15 5 Safety and Regulatory Information 8719ET 20ET 22ET Safe
395. rror term data to system faults Table 9 1 Components Related to Specific Error Terms Component Directivity Source Reflection Isolation Load Transmission Match Tracking Crosstalk Match Tracking Calibration Kit load X X open short X X X Analyzer coupler X X X X X bias tee X X X X transfer switch X X X X X step attenuator X X X X sampler X x X A10 digital IF X test port X X X X X X connectors External cables X X This component is likely to contribute to crosstalk at 4 GHz If you detect problems using error term analysis use the following approach to isolate the fault 1 Check the cable by examining the load match and transmission tracking terms If those terms areincorrect goto Verify the RF Cable on page 9 6 2 Verify the calibration kit devices Loads If the directivity error term looks good the load the test port are good On ES models if directivity looks bad connect the same load on the other test port and measure its directivity If the second port looks bad as if the problem had shifted with the load replacethe load If the second port looks good as if theload had not been the problem troubleshoot the first port 9 4 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Accessories Troubleshooting 8719ES 20ES 22ES Inspect the Error Terms RF Network Analyzers On ET models if directivity looks bad substitute a known good load to the REFLE
396. rt Number Short 3 5 mm f 8719ET ES and 8720ET ES Short 2 4 mm f 85052 60007 part of calibration kit 85052B 85056 60021 part of calibration kit 85056A 8722ET ES Cable 3 5 mm 8719ET and 8720 85131F Cable 2 4 mm f 8722 Service Guide 4 7 Start Troubleshooting Here 8719ET 20ET 22ET Step 2 Operator s Check 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Procedure to Perform Operator s Check Analyzer warmup ti me 30 minutes PORT 1 or REFLECTION port check 1 Connect a short to PORT 1 REFLECTION port on ET models 2 Press the following PRESET FACTORY SERVICE MENU TESTS EXTERNAL TESTS EXECUTE TEST CONTINUE fthe message PRESS CONTINUE appears on the display during the test that particular attenuator setting check has failed Press CONTINUE to check the other attenuator settings Ifthe message FAIL appears on the analyzer display the analyzer has failed the PORT 1 operation check Refer to the flow charts on page 2 4 and page 2 5 Ifthe message DONE appears on the analyzer display the analyzer has passed the PORT 1 operation check PORT 2 Check ES Models 3 Connect the short to PORT 2 4 Press the following PRESET FACTORY SERVICE MENU TESTS EXECUTE TEST CONTINUE fthe message PRESS CONTINUE appears on the display during the test that particular attenuator setting check has failed Press CONTINUE to check the ot
397. rts 10 Hz IF bandwidth averaging factor of 8 alternate mode source power set to the lesser of maxi mum power out or the maximum receiver power 4 Limited by noise floor Service Guide Error Terms 8719ET 20ET 22ET Error Term Descriptions 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Error Term Descriptions The error term descriptions in this section include the following information significance of each error term typical results following a full 2 port error correction guidelines to interpret each error term The same description applies to both the forward and reverse terms The plots shown with each typical of a working system following a full 2 port calibration as performed in Measurement Calibration Procedure on page 11 4 NOTE The illustrations depicting the analyzer display were made using an 8722ES model Other analyzer displays may appear different depending on model and options It may be helpful to define some of the terms used in the error term descriptions that follow R signal path refers to the reference signal path It includes the 58 M A D S A64 R sampler and associated semirigid coax cables input path refers to the port 1 input path and includes the A58 M A D S A69 step attenuator A74 transfer switch A61 bias tee A62 directional coupler A65 A sampler and associated semirigid coax cables B input path refers to the port 2 input path and includes the A58
398. rum analyzer 8 Reconnect the network analyzer s PORT 1 to spectrum analyzer input 9 On the spectrum analyzer set these parameters 8719ET ES and 8720 5 models center frequency 4 45 GHz span 200 MHz 8722ET E S models center frequency 23 4 GHz span 200 MHz You should see a signal near the center frequency fthesignals appeared for both the low band and high band you can assume that all the assemblies are working correctly with the exception of the A11 phase lock assembly Ifthehigh band signal didn t appear there could be a faulty A68 attenuator A25 switch 8722ET ES only A5 source switch A6 source switch or the associated cables e fthelow band signal didn t appear there could a faulty A57 fixed oscillator A53 mixer amp A25 switch 8722ET ES only A5 source switch A6 source switch or the associated cables If neither low band or high band signal appears there could be a faulty A54 YI G oscillator 8722ET ES only A55 YIG oscillator A11 phase lock A58 M A D S or the associated cables Service Guide 7 21 Source Troubleshooting 8719ET 20ET 22ET Band Related Problems 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Band Related Problems Table 7 5 lists assemblies potentially responsible for band related problems Table 7 5 Assemblies Potentially Responsible for Band R elated Problems Low Band Mid Band High Band 8722 5 Only
399. rvice Guide 8719 20 22 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures 8719ES 20ES 22ES Removing the Rear Panel Assembly RF Network Analyzers 3 places E 4 places 3 places 4 places 4 on top 2 places 2 places 4 on bottom TE 56944 Service Guide 14 15 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures 8719 20 22 Removing the Rear Panel Interface Board Assembly 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Removing the Rear Panel Interface Board Assembly Tools Required T 10 TORX screwdriver T 15 TORX screwdriver ESD electrostatic discharge grounding wrist strap Removal 1 Disconnec the power cord and remove the top and bottom covers refer to Removing the Covers on page 14 6 2 If theanalyzer has Option 1D5 remove the high stability frequency reference jumper item 1 3 Remove the hardware that attaches the 9 BNC connectors to the rear panel item 2 4 Remove the hardware that attaches the test set I O interconnect to the rear panel item 3 5 Remove the rear panel from the analyzer refer to Removing the Rear Panel Assembly on page 14 14 6 If theanalyzer has option 1D5 disconnect the cable item 4 from the rear panel interface board 7 Disconnect the ribbon cable item 5 from the rear panel interface board 8 Disconnect the wiring for the 3 BNC connectors and remove the attaching hardware item 6
400. s At Least One Signal Path Looks Normal One normal signal path indicates that at least one sampler one 2nd converter A12 and much of A10 are functional Therefore substitution is a convenient troubleshooting approach If two signal paths are abnormal repeat the steps of this section for each suspect signal path 1 To see the traces of signal path A or R connect a short to PORT 1 on ES models REFLECTION port on E T models Press the following PRESET FACTORY INPUT PORTS R or A SERVICE MENU SERVICE MODES MORE SAMPLR COR OFF 2 To see the traces of signal path B or R2 if the instrument is an ES model Option 400 connect a short to PORT 2 on ES models On ET models connect an RF cabletothe REFLECTION and TRANSMISSION ports Then press the following PRESET FACTORY INPUT PORTS or B TESTPORT 2 on ES models on ET models SERVICE MENU SERVICE MODES MORE SAMPLR COR OFF 3 For examples of the normal signal traces refer to Figure 8 1 on page 8 6 For signal trace nominal power levels refer to Table 8 2 on page 8 5 NOTE The illustrations depicting the analyzer display were made using an 8722 5 model with nominal test port power Other analyzer displays may appear different depending on model and options Even if the R signal path trace is abnormal the R sampler is nonetheless good or there would be a phase lock problem Go directly to 2nd Converter Check on page 8 9 e ftheA or B signal path i
401. s Affected Measurements solation errors affect transmission measurements primarily where the measured signal level is very low An example is a transmission measurement where the insertion loss of the DUT is large Figure 11 4 Typical EXF EXR with 3 kHz Bandwidth CHI MEM 106 18 dB REF 80 dB EXF PRm START 050 000 666 GHz STOP 40 050 666 000 GHz 11 14 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Error Terms 8719ES 20ES 22ES Error Term Descriptions RF Network Analyzers Load Match ELF and ELR Load match is a measure of the impedance match of the test port that terminates the output of a 2 port device The match of test port cables is included L oad match error terms are characterized by measuring the S11 and S22 responses of a thru configuration during the calibration procedure Significant System Components Large variations in the forward or reverse load match error terms may indicate a bad thru cable or a poor connection of the cable to the test port Affected Measurements The measurements most affected by load match errors are all transmission measurements and reflection measurements of a low insertion loss two port device such as an airline Figure 11 5 Typical ELF ELR 18 dB REF 20 dB START 050 666 606 GHz STOP 40 050 000 000 GHz Service Guide 11 15 Error Terms 8719ET 20ET 22ET
402. s service center Analyzer and power meter warmup time 30 minutes IMPORTANT Perform Raw Offset Correction Constants on page 3 48 before performing this test 1 Make surethe A7 Switch is in the alter position ALT 2 Press PRESET FACTORY Preset 3 Connect the equipment as in Figure 3 16 3 58 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Adjustments and Correction Constants 8719ES 20ES 22ES Sampler Calibration Correction Constants Test 51 RF Network Analyzers Figure 3 16 Setup for Sampler Calibration NETWORK ANALYZER POWER METER i Power Sensor Direct Connection Power Meter Setup 4 Zero and calibrate the power meter 5 Toset up the power meter address press SET ADDRESSES ADDRESS P GPIB analyzer NOTE The default power meter GPIB address is 13 Make surethis address is the same as the power meter s GPIB address Otherwise usethe analyzer s front panel keypad to enter the correct GPIB address or change the address in the power meter 6 Press POWER MTR POWER METER TYPE until the correct power meter model number appears in the brackets NOTE If you are using an HP Agilent E4418A or a HP Agilent E4419A select 438A 437 power meter type from the analyzer menu On the power meter softkey menu press 437B on the 4418 438A on the E4419A 7 Press Cal PWRMTR CAL 8 Press LOSS SENSR LISTS CAL FACTOR SENSOR Refer tothe back of the power sensor to locate the different calib
403. s very low and the R signal path is normal goto A and B Sampler Check by Substitution on page 8 8 e ftheA or B signal path appears slightly low the problem is possibly a faulty directional coupler or more probably a lossy sampler To isolatethe fault continue with Directional Coupler Check on page 8 7 8 4 Service Guide 8719 20 22 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Table 8 2 Nominal Power Levels Receiver Troubleshooting At Least One Signal Path Looks Normal Analyzer Model Type Nominal Power Level 8719ES and 8720ES 5 dBm 8719ET and 8720ET 10 dBm 8719ES Option 007 and 8720ES Option 007 8722ES 10 dBm 8722ET and 8722ES Option 007 5 dBm Service Guide Receiver Troubleshooting 8719ET 20ET 22ET At Least One Signal Path Looks Normal 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Figure 8 1 Typical R R2 A and B Traces EHi F Los i dBm REF 18 dBm 2 7 Channel Signal Path START 858 666 GHz STOP 48 858 666 668 GHz sb550e EHi Los 18 dBm REF 18 dBm Typical A B Channel Signal WTA ala Path START 050 000 ama GHz STOP 48 858 aaa aaa GHz sb551e 8 6 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Receiver Troubleshooting 8719ES 20ES 22ES At Least One Signal Path Looks Normal RF Network Analyzers Directional Coupl
404. service how to get analyzer 4 4 setup fractional N spur avoidance and FM sideband adjustment 3 45 frequency accuracy adjustment 3 41 shipment for service 15 3 shorts RF recommended part numbers 1 4 shorts verifying 9 5 shutdown circuitry disable of 5 15 signal separation 12 5 ES model theory 12 19 ES simplified block diagram 12 19 ET Models 12 22 Smith chart traces 9 7 source 12 5 band related problems 7 22 broadband power problems 7 26 check 4 17 group theory 12 13 phaselock troubleshooting 7 9 step attenuator A69 check 7 27 troubleshooting 7 2 troubleshooting flowchart 7 3 what to if power is incorrect at R channel 7 6 where to start troubleshooting 7 5 source linearity performance test 2 38 test record 2 48 source match ESF and ESR description 11 12 uncorrected performance 11 8 SOURCE POWERTURNED OFF RESET UNDER POWER MENU 10 39 source pretune correction constants adjustment 3 6 description 12 14 splitter description ES models 12 19 recommended part numbers 1 4 spur avoidance and FM sideband adjustment 3 44 step attenuator A69 check 7 27 description 12 20 steps to take if R power incorrect 7 6 stuck key table LED patterns 6 14 subsweep frequencies table of all models 12 16 supported system configurations 2 18 swapping IF cables 7 9 SWEEP MODE CHANGED TO CW TIME SWEEP 10 39 SWEEP TIME TOO FAST 10 39 switch positions A7 CPU board 6 4 switch repeatability check 4 25 system operation 12
405. shooting the GSP A19 and the Display A18 Evaluating Your Display There are four criteria against which your display is measured Background Lamp Intensity Green Red or Blue Dots Black Dots Newtons Rings Evaluate the display as follows If either the GSP A19 CPU board A7 or Backlight Inverter A20 assemblies replaced perform a visual inspection of the display If it appears that there is a problem with the display refer to the troubleshooting information for the assembly replaced Red Green or Blue Pixels Specifications Red green or blue stuck on pixels may appear against a black background To test for these dots press the following SERVICE MENU TESTS EXECUTE TEST CONTINUE In a properly working display the following will not occur complete rows or columns of stuck pixels more than 5 stuck pixels not to exceed a maximum of 2 red or blue and 3 green 2 more consecutive stuck pixels stuck pixels less than 6 5 mm apart Service Guide 6 7 Digital Control Troubleshooting 8719ET 20ET 22ET Display Troubleshooting A18 A19 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Dark Pixels Specifications Dark stuck on pixels may appear against a white background To test for these dots press the following SERVICEMENU TESTS EXECUTE TEST CONTINUE In a properly working display the following will not occur morethan 12 stuck pixels not to exceed a maximum of 7 red
406. splayed For details refer to Chapter 11 Error Terms Service Guide 10 11 Service Key Menus and Error Messages 8719ET 20ET 22ET Service Menus Internal Diagnostics 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Adjustment Tests These tests are used in the procedures located in Chapter 3 Adjustments and Correction Constants except as noted 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 10 12 Pretune Adj Generates source pretune values for proper phase locked loop operation Run test 44 first ABUS Cor Measures three fixed voltages on the ABUS and generates new correction constants for ABUS amplitude accuracy in both high resolution and low resolution modes U se this test before running test 43 above NOT USED Disp 2 Ex Not used in Adjustments Writes the secondary test pattern to the display for adjustments Press to exit this routine IF Step Cor Measures the gain of the IF amplifiers A and B only located on the 10 digital IF to determine the correction constants for absolute amplitude accuracy It provides smooth dynamic accuracy and absolute amplitude accuracy in the 30 dBm input power region ADC Ofs Cor Measures the A10 Digital IF ADC linearity characteristics using an internal ramp generator and stores values for the optimal operating region During measurement IF signals are centered in the optimal region to improve low level dynamic accuracy Serial Cor
407. ss CW FREQ and enter the maximum frequency point from step 2 Press Marker Search SEARCH MAX Note the maximum marker reading MMR and writeit down Press Power Note the displayed test port power TPP and writeit down 3 54 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Adjustments and Correction Constants 8719ES 20ES 22ES Raw Offset Correction Constants RF Network Analyzers 4 The objective is to set the maximum marker reading MMR to 4 dB higher than the power meter reading Perform the following mathematical operation Calculate the difference A between the test port power meter reading TPP and the maximum marker reading MMR and then add 4 4 MMR NOTE TheA can be a positive or negative value 5 If the magnitude of A is less than 0 15 dB then the offset for the A channel is correctly set Go to Raw Offset for the B Channel E T Models on page 3 56 If the magnitude is greater than 0 15 dB continue to the next step 6 Press the following SERVICE MENU PEEK POKE PEEK POKE ADDRESS PEEK Notethe PEEK value displayed under the PEEK label 7 Calculate the new value by adding the PEEK valuetoA multiplied by 4 new value current value A X 4 NOTE Round the new value to the nearest integer 8 Press and enter the new value into the poke address press x1 9 To get the analyzer to use the new poke value press Preset 10 Press the following INPUT PORTS A CW FREQ and
408. stem and operating theory of the network analyzer functional groups Operation is explained to the assembly level only component level circuit theory is not provided Simplified block diagrams illustrate the operation of each functional group Overall block diagrams are located at the end of Chapter 4 Start Troubleshooting H ere 12 2 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Theory of Operation 8719ES 20ES 22ES System Operation RF Network Analyzers System Operation The 8719ET ES 8720ET ES and 8722 5 microwave network analyzers integrate a synthesized source signal separation devices a three or four channel receiver for measurement of test device characteristics and large screen display Figure 12 1isa simplified block diagram of the network analyzer system Figure 12 1 Simplified System Block Diagram PHASE LOCK SYNTHES ZED SIGNAL SOURCE 50 MHz SEPARAT ON to 40 GHz DISPLAY DIGITAL CONTROL POWER SUPPLY R 1 RECEIVER Sb587e The built in synthesized source of the analyzer generates a swept or continuous wave CW signal in the following ranges 8719ET ES 8720ET ES 8722ET ES 50 MHz to 13 51 GHz 50 MHz to 20 05 GHz 50 MHz to 40 05 GHz The source output power is leveled by an internal ALC automatic leveling control circuit The output maximum power levels at the front panel are listed in Table 12 1 on page 12 4 A portion of the source signal is rou
409. surement error is evident V Itis often worthwhile to perform the procedure twice using two distinct measurement calibrations to establish the degree of repeatability If the results do not seem repeatable check all connectors and cables Service Guide 11 3 Error Terms 8719ET 20ET 22ET Measurement Calibration Procedure 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Measurement Calibration Procedure 1 Refer to Measurement Calibration on page 2 22 and perform the full 2 port calibration on ES models or the enhanced response cal on E T models with the following modifications 2 Connect testport cable with a female connector to PORT 2 TRANSMISSION port ET models U se the female standards open short load on PORT 1 REFLECTION Port on ET models and the male standards open short load on the cable 3 For the isolation measurement select from the following two options f you will be measuring devices with a dynamic range less than 90 dB press OMIT ISOLATION ISOLATION DONE f you will be measuring devices with a dynamic range greater than 90 dB follow these steps a Leave the cables connected and connect impedance matched loads to the test ports or reference test ports NOTE If you will be measuring highly reflective devices such as filters usethe test device connected to the reference plane and terminated with a load for the isolation standard on PORT 1 REFLECTION port on ET models Connect a lo
410. t 2 Perform a one port calibration on PORT 1 REFLECTION port ET models For detailed calibration procedures refer to the Calibrating for Increased Measurement Accuracy chapter in the analyzer user s guide 3 Connect the test port cable to PORT 1 REFLECTION port on ET models Connect a broadband load to the other end of the cable Tighten to the specified torque for the connector type 4 measure return loss press the following ES models Refl FWD S11 A R ET models Meas REFLECTION 5 Press SEARCH MAX tofind the worst case return loss Refer to the cable manual to see if it meets the return loss specification If not the cable should be either repaired or replaced For an example of a typical return loss measurement see Figure 2 3 Service Guide 2 9 System Verification and Performance Tests 8719ET 20ET 22ET Preliminary Tests 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Figure 2 3 Typical Return Loss Measurement of Test Port Cables 511 LOG 16 dB REF dB 1 21 473 dB 38 450 000 000 GHz Luar rem at START 050 666 666 GHz STOP 40 050 666 OGG GHz 2 10 Service Guide 8719 20 22 System Verification and Performance Tests 8719ES 20ES 22ES Preliminary Tests RF Network Analyzers Cable Insertion Loss 1 Keep the test port cable connectedto PORT 1 REFLECTION port on E T models 2 Connect an RF short to the other end of the cable 3 Press SEARCH MIN tofind
411. t Panel Troubleshooting A1 A2 RF Network Analyzers Table 6 1 Front Panel Key Codes Continued Decimal LED Pattern Key Number Chan1 Chan2 R L T S 23 24 sa 25 26 27 d D 29 30 31 Not Used i 33 34 35 i i 37 38 39 Not used 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 Service Guide 6 15 Digital Control Troubleshooting 8719ET 20ET 22ET Front Panel Troubleshooting A1 A2 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Table 6 1 Front Panel Key Codes Continued Decimal LED Pattern Key Number Chan1 Chan2 R L 48 softkey 1 49 softkey 2 50 softkey 3 31 softkey 4 53 softkey 6 54 softkey 7 55 softkey 8 Inspect Cables Remove the front panel assembly and visually inspect the ribbon cable that connects the front panel to the motherboard Also inspect the interconnecting ribbon cable between the front panel keyboard A1 and the front panel processor A2 Make sure the cables are properly connected Replace any bad cables Test Using a Controller If a controller is available write a simple command to the analyzer If the analyzer successfully executes the command the problem is either
412. t Troubleshooting Here 8719ES 20ES 22ES Source Check RF Network Analyzers The power should be within 2 dBm of the set value for each frequency point Checking the Power for PORT 2 ES Models 4 Press REV S22 B R and connect the power sensor to PORT 2 Repeat steps 1 through for PORT 2 If the power is not within specification at either port go to Chapter 7 Source Troubleshooting Checking the Source Output Power for the 8722ET ES 1 To check power at 1 GHz for the 8722 5 press the following 5 on ET models and the ES Option 007 models CW FREQ The power should be within 3 dBm of the set value 2 To check power at 2 5 10 20 and 40 GHz press lt and set the power meter to the corresponding calibration factor for that frequency Repeat until the 40 0 GHz frequency is completed The power should be within 3 dBm of the set value for each frequency point Checking the Power for PORT 2 ES Models 3 Press Refl REV S22 B R and connect the power sensor to PORT 2 Repeat steps 1 and 2 for PORT 2 If the power is not within specification at either port continue troubleshooting by going to Chapter 7 Source Troubleshooting Service Guide 4 19 Start Troubleshooting Here 8719ET 20ET 22ET Source Check 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers No Oscilloscope or Power Meter Try the ABUS Monitor ABUS node 9 Press the following PRESET FACTORY SERVICE MENU ANALOG BUS ON ANALOG IN A
413. t is an integral part of the source phase locking scheme In the R sampler the 1st LO signal from the pulse generator is mixed with the SOURCE OUT signal from the source The difference is the intermediate frequency IF which is nominally 10 MHz For phase locking part of this IF signal is routed back tothe A11 phase lock assembly Additional information on the sampler assemblies is provided in Receiver Theory on page 12 24 12 14 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Theory of Operation 8719ES 20ES 22ES Source Group Theory RF Network Analyzers A11 Phase Lock Comparing Phase and Frequency The 10 MHz 1st IF signal from the A64 sampler is fed back to the A11 phase lock assembly ThelF signal is amplified limited and filtered to produce 10 MHz square wave by the A11 phase lock assembly The 10 MHz squarewave is then divided down to 1 MHz and applied to a phase frequency detector that compares it to a crystal controlled 1 MHz signal PL REF from the A12 reference assembly see A12 Reference The Crystal Reference Frequencies on page 12 16 Any phase or frequency difference between these two signals produces a proportional dc voltage Tuning the YIG Oscillator The output of the phase frequency detector is filtered to remove any 1 MHz feedthrough andis fed to an integrator The output of the integrator is converted to a tune current This brings the appropriate YIG oscillator closer to the desired frequency which in turn reduc
414. t of the A19 GSP board Test Pat 13 Displays a convergence pattern for measuring the accuracy of the color convergence of the external monitor Test Pat 14 15 Displays crosshatch and inverse crosshatch patterns for testing color convergence linearization alignment This is useful when aligning the L CD display in the bezel Service Guide 8719 20 22 Service Key Menus and Error Messages 8719ES 20ES 22ES Service Menu Service Features RF Network Analyzers Service Menu Service Features The service feature menus are shown in Figure 10 3 on page 10 16 and are described in the Service Modes Menu on page 10 17 The internal diagnostic menus are accessed by pressing SERVICE MENU then one of the following softkeys SERVICE MODES ANALOG BUS on OFF PEEK POKE FIRMWARE REVISION Service Guide 10 15 Service Key Menus and Error Messages Service Menu Service Features Figure 10 3 Service Feature Menu Map System SET CLOCK CONFIGURE MENU LIMIT MENU TRANSFORM MENU INSTRUMENT MODE SERVICE MENU TESTS TEST OPTIONS SELF DIAGNOSE SERVICE MODES ANALOG BUS on OFF PEEK POKE FIRMWARE REVISION RETURN 10 16 Service Modes Menu FRACN TUNE on OFF SRC ADJUST MENU PLL AUTO ON off PLL DIAG on OFF PLL PAUSE CONT MORE RETURN Peek Poke Menu PEEK POKE ADDRESS RESET MEMORY RETURN 8722ET ES Source Adjust Menu
415. t the nearest Agilent Technologies sales or service office Service Guide 3 29 Adjustments and Correction Constants 8719ET 20ET 22ET Blanking Adjustment Test 54 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Blanking Adjustment Test 54 This adjustment sets the output power level during retrace If incorrectly adjusted the first data points in a sweep may not be stable Required Equipment and Tools Equipment Description 8719ET ES 8722ET ES 8720ET ES Power Meter 436A 437B 438A E4418A EPM 441A or E4419A EPM 442A Power Sensor 8485A 8487A Adapter 3 5 mm f to 3 5 mm f part number 85052 60012 N A part of 85052B Adapter 2 4 mm f to 2 4 mm f N A part number 85056 60006 part of 85056A Non Metallic Adjustment Tool part number 8830 0024 Analyzer warmup time 30 minutes Power meter warmup time 30 minutes Preparing the Instrument 1 With the analyzer turned off remove the top two corner standoffs and the top cover 2 Locate the metal source assembly cover that is on the top left front side of the instrument 3 Unplug the flexible SMB cables coming out of the source assembly cover NOTE The8719ET ES and the 8720 5 have 2 SMB cables The 8722ET ES have 4 SMB cables All cables are clearly marked for easy re assembly Remove the 3 screws on source assembly cover and lift it off the frame Reattach the SMB cables to the proper connectors Turn the analyzer on
416. tage reference in the Analog Bus Correction Constants adjustment for calibrating out the analog bus high low resolution gain and offset errors The absolute voltage level is not critical but it should be the same in high and low resolution 2 2 50V 42 50V reference Check for a flat line at approximately 2 5V This voltage is used in the Analog Bus Correction Constants adjustment as a reference for calibrating the analog bus low resolution circuitry 3 Aux Input Rear panel input This selects the rear panel AUX INPUT todrive the analog bus for making voltage and frequency measurements It can be used to look at test points within the instrument on the display using the display as an oscilloscope Connect the test point of interest to the AUX INPUT BNC connector on the rear panel This feature can be useful if an oscilloscope is not available Also it can be used for testing voltage controlled devices by connecting the driving voltage of the DUT to the AU X IN connector You can look at the driving voltage on one display channel while displaying the DUT S parameter response on the other display channel With AUX OUT turned ON you can examine analog bus nodes with external equipment see AUX OUT on OFF in Analog n Menu on page 10 21 See the Overall Block Diagram in Chapter 4 For GPIB considerations refer to GPIB Service Mnemonic Definitions on page 10 31 A10 Gnd Ground reference This is used in Ana
417. ted tothe R sampler receiver and fed back to the source for phase lock Service Guide 12 3 Theory of Operation 8719ET 20ET 22ET System Operation 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Table 12 1 Maximum Leveled Power Model Type Power dBm ES Models 8719ES and 8720E S 5 8719 5 Option 007 and 8720 5 Option 007 10 8722ES 50 MHz to 20 GHz 5 20 0 GHz to 40 05 GHz 10 8722b S Option 007 50 MHz to 20 GHz 0 20 0 GHz to 40 05 GHz 5 Models 8719 8720 10 8722 50 MHz to 20 GHz 0 20 0 GHz to 40 05 GHz 5 The signal separation devices separate the source signal into a reference path and a test path They provide attenuation for the source signal RF path switching to allow forward and reverse measurements and external connections for the device under test DUT The signal transmitted through or reflected from the DUT goes to the receiver for comparison with the reference signal The receiver converts the source signal to a 4 kHz intermediate frequency IF for signal processing retaining both magnitude and phase characteristics ThelF is converted to digital signals which are processed into magnitude and phase information The processed and formatted data is finally routed to the display and to the GPIB for remote operation In addition tothe analyzer the system includes cables for interconnections and calibration standards for accuracy enhancement 1
418. ted with the cable is defective If the voltage is bad at J 18 then check the 15V TP7 and 15 V TP5 at the post regulator A8 If the post regulator voltages are good then replace the motherboard A17 Service Guide 7 9 Source Troubleshooting 8719ET 20ET 22ET Broadband Phase Lock Problems 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers NOTE If 2 4 mm flexible cables and 2 4 mm power sensors are not available for the 8722ET ES use 3 5 mm to 2 4 mm adapters H P Agilent 11901D 2 4 mm f to 3 5 mm m and HP Agilent 119018 2 4 f mm to 3 5 f to interface with your 3 5 mm equipment 7 If the control and bias voltages are good use a power meter and the flexible cable from the tool kit to troubleshoot the RF signal path To prepare to troubleshoot enter the service mode by pressing the following SERVICE MENU SERVICE MODES SRC ADJ UST MENU DAC NUM HIGH BAND NOTE For ES Option 089 analyzers press the following INSTR MODE EXT CHAN 8 To measure RF signal of the R channel do the following For ES analyzers Disconnect the front panel R channel jumper Connect the power sensor to the R CHANNEL OUT port and look for the following power levels Forthe8719ES and 8720ES the power should be at least 18 dBm For the 8722ES the power should be at least 27 dBm For ET analyzers On ET models there are two ways to measure the R channel sampler assembly power a Remove the bottom cover and disconnect the se
419. tel 81 426 56 7832 fax 481 426 56 7840 Singapore td 1800 375 8100 fax 65 836 0252 Malaysia tel 1 800 828 848 fax 1 800 801 664 India td 1600 11 2929 fax 000 800 650 1101 Hong Kong tel 800 930 871 fax 852 2506 9233 Taiwan tel 0800 047 866 fax 886 2 25456723 Philippines td 632 8426802 td PLDT subscriber only 1 800 16510170 fax 632 8426809 fax PLDT subscriber only 1 800 16510288 Thailand td outside Bangkok 088 226 008 td within Bangkok 662 661 3999 fax 66 1 661 3714 People s Republic of China td preferred 800 810 0189 td alternate 10800 650 0021 fax 10800 650 0121 Service Guide 15 3 Safety and Regulatory Information 8719 20 22 Safety Symbols 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Safety Symbols The following safety symbols are used throughout this manual Familiarize yourself with each of the symbols and its meaning before operating this instrument CAUTION Caution denotes a hazard It calls attention to a procedure that if not correctly performed or adhered to would result in damage to or destruction of the instrument Do not proceed beyond a caution note until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met WARNING Warning denotes a hazard It calls attention to a procedure which if not correctly performed or adhered to could result in injury or loss of life Do not p
420. ter The next few paragraphs provide general information about the structure and operation of the analog bus For a description of each individual node see Analog Bus Nodes on page 10 22 To see where the nodes are located in the instrument refer to the Overall Block Diagram in Chapter 4 Start Troubleshooting Here The analog bus consists of a source section and a receiver section The source can be the following any one of the 23 nodes described in Analog Bus Nodes on page 10 22 e the A14 fractional N VCO the 14 fractional N VCO divided down to 100 kHz The receiver portion can be the following e the main ADC or the frequency counter on the fractional N VCO A14 board When analog bus traces are displayed frequency is the x axis For a linear x axis in time switch to CW time mode or sweep a single band The Main ADC The main ADC is located on the A10 digital IF assembly and makes voltage measurements in two ranges See RESOLUTION under Analog Menu on page 10 21 The Frequency Counter The frequency counter is located on the A14 assembly and can count one of three sources selected analog bus node Al4fractional N VCO FRAC N A14fractional N VCO divided down to 100 kHz DIV FRAC N frequency range 15 100 kHzto 16 MHz The counts are triggered by the phase lock cycle at each pretune acquire and track for each bandswitch The counter works in swept modes or
421. tests the ability of the offset DAC on the A10 digital IF to apply a bias offset tothelF signals before the ADC input This runs only when selected ABUS Test Tests analog bus accuracy by measuring several analog bus reference voltages all nodes from the A10 digital IF This runs only when selected FN Count Uses the internal counter to count the A14 fractional N VCO frequency 120 to 240 M Hz and the divided fractional N frequency 100 kHz It requires the 100 kHz signal from A12 and the counter gate signal from A10 to pass Service Guide 8719 20 22 Service Key Menus and Error Messages 8719ES 20ES 22ES Service Menus Internal Diagnostics RF Network Analyzers External Tests These tests require either external equipment and connections or operator interaction of some kind to run Tests 30 and 60 are comprehensive front panel checks more complete than test 12 that checks the front panel keys and knob entry 21 Op Ck Port 1 Part of Step 2 Operator s Check on page 4 7 The procedure requires the external connection of a short to PORT 1 22 Op Ck Port 2 Same as 21 but tests PORT 2 23 Fr Pan Seq Tests the front panel knob entry and all Al front panel keys as well as the front panel microprocessor on the A2 assembly It prompts the user to rotate the front panel knob then press each key in an ordered sequence It continues to the next prompt only if the current prompt is correctly satisfied 24
422. the Analyzer Fails This Test 1 Ensure that the power meter and power sensor are operating to specification 2 Inspect the connectors for damage Poor match at these connections can generate power reflections and cause the analyzer to appear to be out of limits 3 Marginal failures especially at the high or low end may be dueto the power sensor calibration factor approximation method A calibration factor approximation of 4 as in the above example induces an error of about 0 15 dB To eliminate the calibration factor approximation as the cause of failure dothe following a Press CWFREQ and rotatethe knob tothe frequency in question b Set the calibration factor on the power meter to the valueindicated by the power sensor C The corrected power level reading should be between the limits shown in the L evel Accuracy performance test record 4 The sourcerelies on the power adjustments for proper performance refer to Chapter 3 Adjustments and Correction Constants If failures still occur after you have made the power adjustments refer to Chapter 7 Source Troubleshooting Service Guide 2 37 System Verification and Performance Tests 8719ET 20ET 22ET Performance Tests 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Source Linearity Performance Test This test checks the Source Power Linearity Table 2 9 Required Equipment Equipment Description 8719ET ES and 8720ET ES 8722ET ES 500 RF Load P N 00902 60004
423. the front panel processor A2 or the ribbon cable W17 that connects the front panel processor A2 to the motherboard A17 6 16 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Digital Control Troubleshooting 8719ES 20ES 22ES Run the Internal Diagnostic Tests RF Network Analyzers Run the Internal Diagnostic Tests Theanalyzer incorporates 20 internal diagnostic tests M ost tests can be as part of one or both major test sequences all internal test 0 and preset test 1 1 To perform all internal tests press the following SERVICE MENU TESTS INTERNAL 5 5 EXECUTE TEST 2 Then press C to see the results of the preset test If either sequence fails press the lt key to find the first occurrence of a FAIL message for tests 2 through 20 If a test does fail RETURN SELF DIAGNOSE This routine will list the boards that are the most probable cause of failure See Table 6 2 for further troubleshooting information Service Guide 6 17 Digital Control Troubleshooting Run the Internal Diagnostic Tests 8719ET 20ET 22ET 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Table 6 2 Internal Diagnostic Test with Commentary Failed Test Seq Probable Failed Assemblies Comments and Troubleshooting Hints O All Int M See Chapter 4 Start E xecutes tests 3 11 13 16 20 Troubleshooting H ere 1 Preset M See Chapter 4 Start xecutes tests 2 11 1
424. the front panel set A1 A2 See Inspect Cables page 6 16 If you suspect that one or more L E Ds are burned out then replace the keypad assembly A1 NOTE TRANS FWD REFL FWD LEDs and TRANS REV and REFL REV LEDs problems may be caused by the malfunction of the LED board or the transfer switch If at the end of the turn on sequence the channel 1 LED is not on and all GPIB status LEDs are not off continue with Identify the Stuck K ey page 6 14 Service Guide 6 13 Digital Control Troubleshooting Front Panel Troubleshooting A1 A2 Identify the Stuck Key Match the front panel LED pattern with the patterns Table 6 1 The LED pattern identifies the stuck key Free the stuck key or replace the front panel part causing the problem The Chan and Chan 4 LEDs are not used LED is on The footswitch is accessory that can be set up through a rear panel port Table 6 1 Front Panel Key Codes 8719ET 20ET 22ET 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Decimal LED Pattern Key Number Chan 1 Chan2 R L 0 2 C6 k 5 6 7 CD 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 C 15 Co 16 Footswitch 17 5 18 19 20 21 02 6 14 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Digital Control Troubleshooting 8719ES 20ES 22ES Fron
425. the problem ceases replace the A7 If the problem continues replace the A15 preregulator assembly Service Guide 5 19 Power Supply Troubleshooting 8719 20 22 Intermittent Problems 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers This page intentionally left blank 5 20 Service Guide POWER SUPPLY BLOCK DIAGRAM 8719 20 22 5 s E ee a a et ee K w w ase pre 1 kamasaq ham EEE mala mais c k manpas ss IA17 MOTHERBOARD 8 POST 1 1 A15 PRE A15 PREREGULATOR BLOCK DIAGRAM A8 POST REGULATOR BLOCK DIAGRAM Fog REGULATOR REGULATOR 1 I I I I I i gt TP10 I GNDSENSE Bo A8J2 5VDSENSE RECTIFIER weet T i I A15W1 lt 11 12 lt FILTER ono REG 22V gt 2 gt L q GNDDSENSE
426. the worst case insertion loss The displayed response is twice the actual loss Divide the response by two and refer to the cable manual to see if it meets the insertion loss specification If the insertion loss specification is not met the cable should be either repaired or replaced For an example of a typical insertion loss measurement see Figure 2 4 Figure 2 4 Typical Insertion Loss Measurements of Cables 18 dB REF 8 dB 1 4 1618 dB 39 450 000 000 GHz START 050 GHz STOP 40 050 888 OGA GHz Service Guide 2 11 System Verification and Performance Tests 8719ET 20ET 22ET Preliminary Tests 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Cable Magnitude and Phase Stability 1 Connect the cable to PORT 1 REFLECTION port on ET models then connect a short to end of the cable To measure magnitude and phase stability press the following DUAL QUAD SETUP DUAL CHANNEL ON Refl FWD S11 A R LOG MAG AVERAGING FACTOR AVERAGING ON Refl FWD S11 A R PHASE AVERAGING ON 3 Hold the test cable in a straight line to provide a good reference Press MEASURE RESTART and wait for the analyzer to average the measurement 64 times by observing the counter on the left side of the display Press the following DATA gt MEMORY DATA MEM DATA gt MEMORY DATA MEM gradual 90 bend in the middle of the cable and restart the measurement averaging by
427. therboard A23 A24 5086 7589 2 R Channel Switch A23 A24 5086 6589 2 R channel Switches Rebuilt E xchange 51 400 08720 60275 1 Assy Test Set Interface 52 5086 7456 1 Assy Pulse Generator A52 5086 6456 1 Assy Pulse Generator Rebuilt E xchange A60 A61 5086 7458 2 Bias Tee A60 A61 5086 6458 2 Bias Tee Rebuilt Exchange A64 A65 5086 7614 4 Assy Sampler A66 A67 A64 A65 5086 6614 4 Assy Sampler Rebuilt E xchange A66 A67 A70 A71 33326 60006 2 Attenuator 0 55 dB A74 5086 7975 1 Switch Splitter A74 5086 6975 1 Switch Splitter Rebuilt Exchange A99 08720 60124 1 Frequency Converter A99 08720 69124 1 Frequency Converter Rebuilt E xchange W18 08720 20105 1 Front Panel R Channel IN to A24 W22 08720 20033 1 A63 to A66 W25 08720 20259 1 A61to A62 W26 08720 20025 1 A60 to A63 W30 08720 20026 1 A62 to A65 W32 08720 20173 1 A58 to A69 W37 08720 20136 1 A71to A60 W38 08720 20145 1 70 toA61 W39 08720 20169 1 A74 to A70 W40 08720 20168 1 74 to A71 41 08720 20316 1 A74 to A73 W50 08720 20314 1 72 to A23 W52 08720 20098 1 External Links 13 26 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Replaceable Parts 8719ES 20ES 22ES Replaceable Part Listings RF Network Analyzers Ref Desig Options HP Agilent Qty Description Part Number W53 08720 20281 1 A24to A64 w54 08720 20282 1 A23 to Front Panel R Channel Out W56 08720 20317 1 74 to A72 W57 08720 20279 1 A23to A24 W77
428. tion The number and implementation date appear in the active entry area of the display as shown in Figure 10 9 The analyzer s serial number and installed options are also displayed Another way to display the firmware revision information is to cycle the line power Figure 10 9 Location of Firmware Revision Information on Display Hi 511 LOG 18 dB REF B dB ui HP8722ES 07 650 AUG 01 1999 SERIAL NUMBER 007 010 412 089 COPYRIGHT 1988 1999 py HP START 5 Gun 000 GHz STOP 40 050 aca 000 GHz sb584e 10 30 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Service Key Menus and Error Messages 8719ES 20ES 22ES GPIB Service Mnemonic Definitions RF Network Analyzers GPIB Service Mnemonic Definitions All service routine keystrokes can be made through GPIB in one of the following approaches sending equivalent remote GPIB commands Mnemonics have been documented previously with the corresponding keystroke invoking the System Menu MENUSYST and using the analyzer mnemonic SOF Tn where n represents the softkey number Softkeys are numbered 1 to 8 from top to bottom An GPIB overview is provided in the Operating Concepts chapter in the analyzer user s guide GPIB programming information is also provided in the programmer s guide Invoking Tests Remotely Many tests require a response to the displayed prompts Since b
429. to a thru measured with two shorts 10Hz IF bandwidth averaging factor of 8 alternate mode source power set tothe lesser of maxi mum power out or the maximum receiver power 4 Limited by noise floor 11 8 Service Guide 8719 20 22 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Table 11 4 8722ET ES Uncorrected Port Characteristics Error Terms Error Term Inspection Parameter and Option Frequency Range 0 05 to 0 5 GHz 5to2 Ghz 2to8 GHz 8 to 20 GHz 20 to 40 GHz Directivity 23 dB 23 dB 21 dB 16 dB 15 dB ES and ET models 1 Source Match 17 dB 17 dB 12 dB 11 dB 7 dB ES Standard Option 400 Source M atch 17 dB 17 dB 15 dB 11 dB 8 dB ES Option 007 Option 085 Load Match 18 dB 18 dB 15 dB 12 dB 10 dB ES Standard Option 400 Load Match 21 dB 21 dB 17 dB 13 dB 10 dB ES Option 007 Option 085 Reflection Tracking 3 dB 3 dB 3 dB 3 dB 6 dB ES Models 2 Reflection Tracking 3 dB 3 dB 3 dB 3 dB 4 ET models 2 Transmission Tracking 3 dB 3 dB 3 dB 3 dB 6 dB ES Models 2 Transmission Tracking 3 dB 3 dB 3 dB 3 dB 3 dB ET Models Crosstalk ES Models 3 60 dB 4 85 dB 85 dB 82 dB 72 dB 1 Does not include the effect of the cable set on the test ports 2 Excludes roll off below 500 MHz which is typically 18 dB at 100 MHz and 25 dB at 50 MHz 3 Measurement Conditions normalized to a thru measured with two sho
430. ty Considerations 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Safety Considerations NOTE This instrument has been designed and tested in accordance with IEC Publication 1010 Safety Requirements for Electronics Measuring Apparatus and has been supplied in a safe condition This instruction documentation contains information and warnings which must be followed by the user to ensure safe operation and to maintain the instrument in a safe condition Safety Earth Ground WARNING This is a Safety Class product provided with a protective earthing ground incorporated in the power cord The mains plug shall only be inserted in a socket outlet provided with a protective earth contact Any interruption of the protective conductor inside or outside the instrument is likely to make the instrument dangerous Intentional interruption is prohibited WARNING Always use the three prong AC power cord supplied with this product Failure to ensure adequate earth grounding by not using this cord may cause product damage Before Applying Power CAUTION The front panel LINE switch disconnects the mains circuits from the mains supply after the EMC filters and before other parts of the instrument CAUTION Make sure that the analyzer line voltage selector switch is set to the voltage of the power supply and the correct fuse is installed CAUTION If this product is to be energized via an autotransformer make sure the common terminal is connected to the neutral
431. u AEA A i ie ki 12 22 A58 M A D S Modulator Amplifier Detector Splitter 12 22 A69 Step Attenuator ET Option 004 5 12 23 A23 DC Block 8719ET Option 004 and 8720ET Option 004 12 23 BROZ Dire ional CDUDIEES C kia be ee beh wane ais 12 23 Receiver Theol EIC UC 12 24 Samplers and Second 12 24 A10 Digital F kaqpas 12 25 13 Replaceable Parts Lniormagon on This Chabhair usada aya addo oe PRY RENE PERO STKE e bea 13 2 Assembly Replacement 13 3 R ebullE E xchange Assemblies disco quake rA te REG TENE ROSE PERRA 13 4 OQPOer ig MONARO BC eae ews ine 13 4 Replaceable Part EISCUTOS 4 1 ax da obe ew dee Gd whe cda 13 6 Top 5554558 IRERFESEERI HE RUE YE ERE E TRE ER PSI TI A 13 8 bottomXssemblies and CaDIes aisce a any asa eee de RENEE eT DER 13 12 Front RF Assemblies ca AEIR AC xe P ds bee dees ew EG CR Red 13 64 TOL SDS dy I a PER D ae E 13 66 Rear Ca
432. upplies is fused The 18 V supply is regulated on A8 in the fan drive block and remains constant at approximately 14 volts It connects to the A17 motherboard via pin 32 of the A8P 1 connector The 18 V supply is regulated on A8 but changes the voltage to the fan depending on air flow and temperature information Its voltage ranges from approximately 1 0 volts to 14 7 volts and connects to the A17 motherboard via pin 31 of the A8P 1 connector Measure the voltages of these supplies while using an extender board to allow access to the PC board connector A8P 1 Short to Ground If thereis no voltage at A8P1 pins 31 and 32 switch off the analyzer Remove A8 from its motherboard connector or extender board but keep the cable A15W1 connected to A8 see Figure 5 5 Connect a jumper wire between and chassis ground Switch on the analyzer Ifall the green LEDs on the top edge of A8 light except 5VD replace the fan f other green LEDs A8 do not light refer to If the Green LEDs of the Post Regulator A8 Are Not ON on page 5 13 5 18 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Power Supply Troubleshooting 8719ES 20ES 22ES Intermittent Problems RF Network Analyzers Intermittent Problems PRESET states that appear spontaneously without pressing PRESET FACTORY Preset typically signal a power supply or A7 CPU problem Sincethe A7 CPU assembly 15 the easiest to substitute do so If
433. ure the power meter and power sensor are operating correctly Enter the exact power meter calibration factor for the frequencies that are failing Refer to the power meter user s guide Measure the RF power splitter tracking and the cable loss Account for these losses in the frequency response calculations 4 24 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Start Troubleshooting Here 8719ES 20ES 22ES Switch Repeatability Check ES Models RF Network Analyzers Switch Repeatability Check ES Models Calibration does not compensate for the repeatability of the transfer switch in instruments As a result the switch can be a source of error To check the switch use the following procedure 1 Toset the analyzer bandwidth to 100 Hz and to take 16 averages press the following PRESET FACTORY IF BW AVERAGING FACTOR AVERAGING ON 2 access the response calibration menu press CALIBRATE MENU RESPONSE 3 Connect short to PORT 1 and press SHORT 4 Todisplay data memory and scale the trace press DATA MEM DATA MEM Scale Ref xi 5 Press and then repeatedly 6 to 12 times press Refl REV 522 B R FWD 511 A R to switch the transfer switch back and forth Return tothe 511 measurement condition After 16 averages the trace should look similar to Figure 4 10 Figure 4 10 Typical Switch Repeatability Trace EHil 511 LOG 5 dB REF 8 dB 1 00900 dB 1 000 666 000 GHz Med inda
434. ux Input 9 Scale Ref AUTOSCALE The display should resemble the Figure 4 6 If any of the above procedures provide unexpected results or if error messages are present refer to Chapter 7 Source Troubleshooting Figure 4 6 0 25 V GHz Waveform at Abus Node 9 CHI AU 1 UW REF 3 U 8722 ET ES START 250 668 468 GHz STOP 46 656 BBB 666 GHz sb542e 4 20 Service Guide 8719 20 22 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Start Troubleshooting Here Receiver Check Receiver Check Check the frequency response for the R A and B channels of the analyzer If any input shows unexpected results go to Chapter 8 Receiver Troubleshooting Table 4 3 Frequency Response Characteristic Model Type Channel Frequency Band Frequency Response Characteristic ES R 0 05 20 05 GHz 1 5 dB 20 05 32 00 GHz 2 5 dB 32 00 40 05 GHz 32 5 dB 6 0 A and B 0 05 500 GHz 32 5 dB 28 dB 0 5 20 05 GHz 2 5 dB 20 05 32 00 GHz 3 0 dB 32 00 40 05 GHz 3 0 dB 6 0 dB ET R 0 05 20 05 GHz 1 5 dB 20 05 32 00 GHz 2 5 dB 32 00 40 05 GHz 42 5 dB 6 0 B 0 05 20 05 GHz 2 5 dB 20 05 32 00 GHz 3 0 dB 32 00 40 05 GHz 3 0 dB 6 0 dB Service Guide 4 21 Start Troubleshooting Here 8719ET 20ET 22ET Receiver Check 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Checking the R Chan
435. value press 1 7 Wait for the analyzer to complete a full sweep 8 Press Marker Search SEARCH MAX 9 Read the marker value from the analyzer display and add 5 dB Record the calculated value in the P4 Max column of the Source Linearity performance test record 10 Press SEARCH MIN 11 Read the marker value from the analyzer display and add 5 dB Record the calculated value in the P4 Min column of the Source Linearity performance test record Recording Data 12 Repeat steps 5 through 11 except in step 6 enter the power value the P5 row and in step 11 read the marker and add 10 dB toarrive at the calculated value Record the calculated value in the P Max and P gt Min columns of the Source Linearity performance test record Recording Data 13 Repeat steps 5 through 11 except in step 6 enter the power value the row and in step 11 read the marker and subtract 5 dB toarrive at the calculated value Record the calculated value in the Max and Min columns of the Source Linearity performance test record Recording Data 14 Repeat steps 5 through 11 except in step 6 enter the power valuein the P4row and in step 11 read the marker and subtract 10 dB toarrive at the calculated value Record the calculated value in the P4 Max and P4 Min columns of the Source Linearity performance test record Service Guide 2 39 System Verification
436. voltage or under voltage condition Refer to Chapter 5 Power Supply Troubleshooting PRINTER error Error Number Theparallel port printer is malfunctioning The analyzer cannot complete the 175 copy function PRINTER not handshaking Error Number The printer at the parallel port is not responding 177 PRINTER not on not connected wrong addrs Error Number The printer does not respond to control Verify power to the printer and check 24 the GPIB connection between the analyzer and the printer Ensurethat the printer address recognized by the analyzer matches the GPIB address set on the printer itself 10 38 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Service Key Menus and Error Messages 8719ES 20ES 22ES Service Related Error Messages in Alphabetical Order RF Network Analyzers PWR MTR NOT ON CONNECTED OR WRONG ADDR Error Number The power meter cannot be accessed by the analyzer Verify that the power 117 meter address and model number set in the analyzer match the address and model number of the actual power meter SAVE FAILED INSUFFICIENT MEMORY Error Number You cannot store an instrument state in an internal register due to insufficient 151 memory ncrease the available memory by clearing one or more save recall registers and pressing Preset or by storing files to a disk SELF TEST 4n FAILED Service Error nternal test Zn has f
437. w Offset Correction Constants 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers 4 The objective is to set the maximum marker reading MMR to 4 dB higher than the test port power Perform the following mathematical operation a Calculate the difference A between the test port power TPP and the maximum marker reading MM R and then add 4 A TPP 4 MMR NOTE can be a positive or negative value 5 If the magnitude of A is less than 0 15 dB then the offset for the A channel is correctly set Goto Raw Offset for the B Channel ES Models on page 3 53 If the magnitude is greater than 0 15 dB continue to the next step 6 Press the following SERVICE MENU PEEK POKE PEEK POKE ADDRESS PEEK Notethe PEEK value displayed under the PEEK label 7 Calculate the new value by adding the PEEK valueto A multiplied by 4 new value current value A X 4 NOTE Round the new value to the nearest integer 8 Press and enter the new value into the poke address press x1 9 get the analyzer to use the new poke value press Preset 10 Press the following INPUT PORTS A CWFREQ and enter the frequency from step 2 SERVICEMENU SERVICE MODES MORE SAMPLER COR OFF MARKER SEARCH SEARCH MAX The maximum marker reading is MMR 11 Recalculate A by taking the test port power TPP adding 4 and then subtracting the maximum marker reading MMR A 4 MMR If the magnitude of A is less than 0 15
438. w66 TRANSFER SWITCH d INTERFACE PALETTE 48 I PANEL SWITCH COUPLER LOWER PANEL j EEPROM A DISK TER s j 5 BIAS TO BIAS TEE S 22 DRIVE 5 INTEPEACE i I LIGHT I 812 822 1 i MAN Cr 2 i k ee MEMORY I i l esse J D x T i L i 4 5KV AC STARTUP i ROM RAM Oo ES SSS SSS as 680V STEADY STATE C as p INVERTER ASSY MAIN RAM VGA INTERCONNECT gt REG CONTROL REFRESH AL SS ee ee TOA10 8 TO A51 8722 5 OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM FOR STANDARD 007 012 085 089 1 5 TO A12 11 8722 5 OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM FOR OPT 400 012 089 105
439. ware did not load successfully LED patterns on the front panel can help you isolate the problem e Ifthe following LED pattern is present the firmware disk is not for use with your instrument model Check that the firmware disk matches your analyzer model LED Pattern 1 Chan2 Chan3 Chan4 R L T 5 If any of the LED patterns in the table on page 3 37 are present the firmware disk may be defective 3 36 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Adjustments and Correction Constants 8719ES 20ES 22ES Loading Firmware RF Network Analyzers LED Pattern Chan 1 Chan 2 Chan 3 Chan 4 R L s f any other LED pattern is present the CPU board is defective Loading Firmware into a New CPU When the CPU board has been replaced in the analyzer use this procedure to load the firmware 1 Turn off the network analyzer 2 Insert the firmware disk intothe instrument s disk drive 3 Turn the instrument on The firmware will beloaded automatically during power on The front panel LEDs should step through a sequence as firmware is loaded The display will be blank during this time At the end of a successful loading the LEDs for Channel 1 and PORT 1 REFLECTION port on ET models does NOT havean LED will remain on and the display will indicate the vers
440. wer Adjustments Power Linearity Adjustments Frequency Accuracy Performance Test Level Accuracy Performance Test Source Linearity Performance Test A56 LED Board None Observe LEDs when switching from 511 to S22 A57 Fixed Oscillator Output Power Adjustments Power Linearity Adjustments Frequency Accuracy Performance Test Level Accuracy Performance Test Source Linearity Performance Test A58 M A D S Output Power Adjustments Power Linearity Adjustments Level Accuracy Performance Test Source Linearity Performance Test A59 Source nterface Output Power Adjustments Power Linearity Adjustments Level Accuracy Performance Test Source Linearity Performance Test A60 61 DC Bias Tees Output Power Adjustments Power Linearity Adjustments Level Accuracy Performance Source Linearity Performance Test 14 36 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Assembly Replacement and Post R epair Procedures 8719ES 20ES 22ES Post Repair Procedures RF Network Analyzers Replaced Assembly Adjustments Correction Verification Constants CC A62 A63 Directional Couplers Output Power Adjustments Power Linearity Adjustments Level Accuracy Performance Test Source Linearity Performance Test A64 R1 Sampler Raw Offset CC Sampler Cal CC Frequency Accuracy Performance Test Dynamic Range Performance Test A64 R2 Sampler Option 400 Raw Offset CC Sampler Cal CC Frequency Ac
441. wing SERVICE MENU PEEK POKE PEEK POKE ADDRESS PEEK Note the PEEK value displayed under the PEEK label 17 Calculate the new value by adding the PEEK value to A multiplied by 4 new value current value A X 4 NOTE Round the new value to the nearest integer Service Guide 3 53 Adjustments and Correction Constants 8719ET 20ET 22ET Raw Offset Correction Constants 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers 18 Press and enter the new value into the poke address press 1 19 To get the analyzer to use the new poke value press Preset 20 Press the following INPUT PORTS B CW FREQ and enter the frequency from step 12 SERVICE MENU SERVICE MODES MORE SAMPLER COR OFF MARKER SEARCH SEARCH MAX The maximum marker reading is MMR 21 Recalculate A by taking the test port power TPP adding 4 and then subtracting the maximum marker reading MMR TPP 4 MMR If the magnitude of A is less than 0 15 dB then the offset for the B channel is correctly set Goto Sampler Calibration Correction Constants Test 51 on page 3 58 If the magnitude is greater than 0 15 dB repeat steps 12 through 21 until the B channel raw offset correction constant is achieved Raw Offsets for the A and B Channels ET Models 1 Connect an open tothe REFLECTION port 2 Press the following INPUT PORTS A SERVICE MENU SERVICE MODES MORE SAMPLER COR OFF Marker Search SEARCH MAX Note the maximum frequency and write it down 3 Pre
442. wing steps a Perform steps 1 and 2 of Source Pretune Correction Constants Test 43 on page 3 6 Make note of the DAC number that is displayed and then abort the procedure b Press the following SERVICE MENU SERVICE MODES SRC ADJ UST MENU DAC NUM HIGH BAND Enter the DAC number determined from step and press x1 d Zero and calibrate a power meter e For ET analyzers On ET models there are two ways to measure the R channel sampler assembly power 1 Remove the bottom cover and disconnect the semirigid cable W74 tothe RF INPUT J 2 of the R channel sampler Connect a 2 4 mm f barrel flexible cable and the power sensor to W74 CAUTION Be careful not to damage the center pins of the semirigid cable Some flexing of the cable will have to be done to attach the power sensor Do not over bend the cable 2 Removethe front panel and disconnect the junction between the cables W72 and W74 Connect the power sensor to W72 Ifthe power level is at least 35 dBm proceed to Phase Lock Error Message Displayed on page 7 6 f the power level is lower proceed to Power Not within Specifications on page 7 6 Service Guide 7 5 Source Troubleshooting 8719ET 20ET 22ET Start Troubleshooting Here 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers For ES Models Disconnect the front panel R CHANNEL jumper NOTE For ES Option 089 analyzers press the following INSTR MODE EXT CHAN Connect the power mete
443. with PLL PAUSE to halt the process at any step It can also be used with the analog bus counter PLL PAUSE is used only with PLL DIAG mode CONT indicates that it will continuously cyde through all steps of the phase lock sequence PAUSE holds it at any step of interest This mode is useful for troubleshooting phase locked loop problems MORE accesses the Service M odes More menu 10 18 Service Guide 8719 20 22 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Service Key Menus and Error Messages Service Menu Service Features Service Modes More Menu To access this menu press SERVICE MENU SERVICE MODES MORE SAMPLR COR ON off IF GAIN AUTO IF GAIN ON IF GAIN OFF STORE EEPR on OFF Service Guide is used to turn the sampler correction on and off n the off mode the actual frequency response of the receiver is displayed n the on mode the corrections are applied to the frequency response is used for normal operating conditions and works in conjunction with IF GAIN ON and OFF TheA10 assembly indudes a switchable attenuator section and an amplifier that amplifies low level 4 kHz IF signals for A and B inputs only This mode allows the A10 IF section to automatically determine if the attenuator should be switched in or out The switch occurs when the A or B input signal is approximately 30 dBm locks out the A10 IF attenuator sections for checking the A10 IF gain amplifier circuits regardless of the
444. working R signal path 2nd converter and install A4 the suspect A signal path 2nd converter in its place 2 If B isthe bad signal path substitute A6 with A5 3 Press INPUT PORTS R and comparethe traceto the signal path R trace of Figure 8 1 fthetrace appears normal the substitute 2nd converter is good Replace A10 fthetrace appears abnormal the substitute 2nd converter is faulty Replace A4 or A5 Service Guide 8 9 Receiver Troubleshooting 8719ET 20ET 22ET At Least One Signal Path Looks Normal 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers 8 10 Service Guide 9 Accessories Troubleshooting Accessories Troubleshooting 8719ET 20ET 22ET Information on This Chapter 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Information on This Chapter Use this procedure only if you have read Chapter 4 Start Troubleshooting Here Follow the procedures in the order given unless instructed otherwise Measurement failures can be divided into two categories Failures which don t affect the normal functioning of the analyzer but cause incorrect measurement data Failures which impede the normal functioning of the analyzer or prohibit the use of a feature This chapter addresses the first category of failures which are usually caused by the following operator errors faulty calibration devices or connectors bad cables or adapters improper calibration techniques RF cabling problems within the analyzer
445. y provides user interface with the analyzer It includes the keyboard for local user inputs and the front panel L E Ds that indicate instrument status Thefront panel knob is not electrically connected to the front panel but provides user inputs directly to the front panel processor A2 Front Panel Processor The A2 front panel processor detects and decodes user inputs from the front panel and the RPG and transmits them to the CPU It has the capability to interrupt the CPU to provide information updates It controls the front panel LEDs that provide status information A7 CPU A10 Digital IF A7 CPU assembly contains the main central processing unit CPU the digital signal processor memory storage and interconnect port interfaces The main CPU is the master controller for the analyzer including the other dedicated microprocessors The memory indudes EEPROM DRAM flash ROM SRAM and boot ROM Data from the receiver is serially docked into the A7 CPU assembly from the A10 digital IF The data taking sequenceis triggered either from the A14 fractional N assembly externally from the rear panel or by firmware on the A7 CPU assembly Service Guide 12 9 Theory of Operation 8719ET 20ET 22ET Digital Control Theory 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers Main CPU The main CPU is a 32 bit microprocessor that maintains digital control over the entire instrument through the instrument bus The main CPU receives external control informati
446. y that the mean is equal to the P2 value Adjusting the Power Linearity 1 Press and enter the power level that is listed as P3 in Table 3 4 Press 1 CALIBRATE MENU RECEIVER CAL TAKE RCVR CAL SWEEP 2 Press and enter the power level that is listed as P2 in Table 3 4 then press x1 Service Guide 3 25 Adjustments and Correction Constants 8719ET 20ET 22ET Power Linearity Adjustment 8719ES 20ES 22ES RF Network Analyzers 3 Press Scale Ref REFERENCE VALUE and enter the value listed as P2 in Table 3 4 and then press x1 The displayed trace should be centered on the reference 0 5 dB fthetraceis not centered on the reference continue with the next step e fthetraceis centered on the reference goto Entering the Power Levels 4 To switch on the power DAC press the following SERVICE MENU SERVICE MODES SRC ADJUST MENU PWR DAC ON 5 Adjust the front panel knob until the mean value is P2 Record the MAIN POWER DAC number To switch off the power DAC press PWR DAC OFF 6 7 Press SAVE STATE 8 Divide the previously recorded DAC number by 256 9 To store the quotient press the following SERVICE MENU PEEK POKE PEEK POKE ADDRESS POKE Enter the quotient and then press 1 10 To store the remainder press the following PEEK POKE ADDRESS POKE Enter the remainder and then press x1 11 Press Preset 12 Press RECALL STATE and verify the mean value is equal to P2
447. z 119 988 to 120 012 MHz 109 999 MHz 239 975 to 240 024 MHz fthe voltage waveform resembles F igure 7 2 on page 7 14 but the counter values do not match Table 7 1 A14 is the most probable fault 7 14 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Source Troubleshooting 8719ES 20ES 22ES Broadband Phase Lock Problems RF Network Analyzers Ifthe voltage waveform and the counter values are bad continue with Substituting Tuning Voltages to Check the VCO on page 7 16 Iftheinstrument passes both checks the probability is greater than 90 that A13 and A14 are functional go to Pulse Generator A52 Check with Oscilloscope on page 7 19 Pulse Generator A52 Check with Spectrum Analyzer on page 7 20 or Check the VCO A14 Range with Oscilloscope on page 7 16 to confirm Check the Fractional N Analog A13 and Fractional N Digital A14 with a Spectrum Analyzer 1 Press the following PRESET FACTORY SERVICE MENU SERVICE MODES TUNE ON 2 Set the parameters on the spectrum analyzer start frequency 50 MHz stop frequency 250 MHz bandwidth 300 kHz 3 Remove the instrument bottom cover and disconnect the 52 1 cable from the A52 Pulse Generator 4 Connect the spectrum analyzer to the output of A14 via the A52 1 cable 5 Slowly turn the network analyzer front panel knob to tunethe signal across the entire frequency range You should see a signal that is about 0 dBm at 120
448. zer displays Option Cor FAIL check the keyword used in step 4 and make sure it is correct Pay special attention to the letters 1 or O the numbers 1 or 0 Repeat this entire adjustment test ftheanalyzer continues to fail the adjustment routine refer to Chapter 6 Digital Control Troubleshooting or contact the nearest Agilent Technologies sales or service office 3 14 Service Guide 8719 20 22 Adjustments and Correction Constants 8719ES 20ES 22ES Unprotected Hardware Option Correction Constants RF Network Analyzers Unprotected Hardware Option Correction Constants This procedure stores the instrument s unprotected option s information in A7 CPU assembly EEPROMs Analyzer warmup time None 1 Makesurethe 7 Switch is in the alter position ALT 2 Record the installed options that are printed on the rear panel of the analyzer 3 Press System SERVICE MENU PEEK POKE PEEK POKE ADDRESS 4 For the address of each unprotected hardware option refer to Table 3 1 Enter the address for the specific installed hardware option that needs to be enabled or disabled Follow the address entry by pressing x1 Pressing POKE after an address entry enables the option Pressing 0 after an address entry disables the option Table 3 1 PEEK POKE Addresses Unprotected Hardware Options Hardware Option PEEK POKE Address 1D5 1619001529 004 1619001531

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Mode d`emploi  Manual de instalación, funcionamiento y mantenimiento  Manual de instalación  dossier spectacle  English [2014v1]  ARTE - Net Adapter II (Manual  Asahi Pentax PC-330 Instruction Manual  WizOPC Suite WizOPC Suite User Guide  三菱カラープリンター保守サービスのご案内（PDF：267KB） デジタル  complete live underwater video camera system VERSION 3  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file